Download Business and Economics - Pearson Education Asia

Survey
yes no Was this document useful for you?
   Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Transcript
Table of Contents
Accounting ........................................................................... 2
Taxation ............................................................................. 35
CIS ..................................................................................... 38
Decision Science ................................................................. 61
Economics .......................................................................... 76
Finance ............................................................................. 105
General Business .............................................................. 121
Business Communication .................................................. 124
Management..................................................................... 128
Marketing ......................................................................... 175
Hospitality & Tourism ....................................................... 206
Culinary Arts .................................................................... 214
Fashion............................................................................. 225
Interior Design ................................................................. 235
1
Accounting
Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software, 14/e
Alvin A. Arens
Randal J. Elder
Mark S. Beasley
ISBN 10: 0273754947
ISBN 13: 9780273754947
872pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
For the core auditing course for accounting majors.
Comprehensive integration of the fundamental auditing concepts.
Auditing and Assurance Services: An Integrated Approach presents an integrated concepts approach that
shows students the auditing process from start to finish. This text prepares students for real-world audit decision
making by using illustrative examples of key audit decisions, with an emphasis on audit planning, risk assessment
processes and collecting and evaluating evidence in response to risks.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE PROFESSION OF AUDITING
1.
The Assurance Services Market
2.
The Audit Standards Setting Process
3.
Audit Reports
4.
Legal Liability Considerations for Auditors
5.
Ethics and the Audit Profession
PART 2: THE PROCESS OF AUDITING
6.
Audit Responsibilities and Objectives
7.
Nature and Type of Audit Evidence
8.
Audit Planning
9.
Considering Materiality and Audit Risk
10. Considering Internal Control
11. Considering the Risk of Fraud
12. Implications of Information Technology for the Audit Process
13. Developing the Overall Audit Plan and Audit Program
PART 3: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO THE REVENUES AND CASH RECEIPTS CYCLE
14. Audit of the Revenues and Cash Receipts Cycle: Tests of Controls and Substantive Tests of
Transactions
15. Audit Sampling for Tests of Controls and Substantive Tests of Transactions
16. Completing the Tests in the Revenue and Cash Receipts Cycle: Accounts Receivable
17. Audit Sampling for Tests of Details of Balances
PART 4: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO OTHER CYCLES
18. Audit of the Purchases and Cash Disbursement Cycle: Tests of Controls, Substantive Tests of
Transactions, and Accounts Payable
19. Completing the Tests in the Purchases and Cash Disbursements Cycle: Verification of Selected
Accounts
20. Audit of the Inventory and Warehousing Cycle
21. Audit of the Payroll and Personnel Cycle
22. Audit of the Capital Acquisition and Repayment Cycle
23. Audit of Cash Balances
PART 5: COMPLETING THE AUDIT
24. Audit Completion
PART 6: PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND OTHER SERVICES
25. Other Assurance Services
26. Internal and Governmental Financial Auditing and Operational Auditing
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations, 7/e
Neal Arthur
Louise Luff
Peter Keet
ISBN 10: 1442519568
ISBN 13: 9781442519565
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations is the latest update of this well-known and highly
regarded text. This latest version reflects the significant changes to the Australian Accounting Standards and
Corporations Law that have occurred since the last publication.
This seventh edition continues to provide the clearest, most comprehensive and most practical coverage of the
complex areas of consolidations and related accounting topics. The text includes fully updated coverage of the
2
main principles and techniques used in the preparation of consolidated financial reports for a company at the
head of a corporate group.
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations is written for second and third year undergraduate
Advanced Financial Accounting, Company Accounting and Consolidated Financial Reporting courses requiring
comprehensive coverage of accounting combinations and related topics. It is also suitable for students
undertaking professional accounting qualifying examinations (in particular the CPA Australia or CA programs).
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Text objectives and introduction to consolidation
Principles of consolidation
Fair value adjustments and tax effects
Intra-group transactions
Non-controlling interest
Partly-owned subsidiaries: indirect non-controlling interest
Consolidated cash flow statements
Accounting for associates: the equity method
Accounting for joint ventures
Translation and consolidation of foreign currency financial statements
Segment reporting by diversified entities
Management Accounting: Information for Decision-Making and
Strategy Execution, 6/e
Anthony A. Atkinson
Robert S. Kaplan
Ella Mae Matsumura
S. Mark Young
ISBN 10: 0273769987
ISBN 13: 9780273769989
552pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
For upper level undergraduate and MBA Management Accounting courses.
An approach to management accounting from the perspective of a business manager.
Atkinson presents state-of-the-art thinking on all of the major topics in management accounting including
activity-based management, the Balanced Scorecard, target costing, and management control system design.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
How Management Accounting Information Supports Decision Making
The Balanced Scorecard and Strategy Map
Using Costs in Decision Making
Accumulating and Assigning Costs to Products
Activity-Based Cost Systems
Measuring and Managing Customer Relationships
Measuring and Managing Process Performance
Measuring and Managing Life-Cycle Costs
Behavioral and Organizational Issues in Management Accounting and Control Systems
Using Budgets for Planning and Coordination
Financial Control
Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e
Peter Atrill
Eddie McLaney
ISBN 10: 0273763458
ISBN 13: 9780273763451
©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
A comprehensive and accessible introduction to the subject, Financial Accounting for Decision Makers
focuses on the ways in which financial statements and information can be used to improve the quality of decision
making. By introducing topics gradually and explaining technical terminology in a clear, friendly style, the
authors cater both for accounting students, and for those studying entry-level accounting within another field.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Introduction to accounting
Measuring and reporting financial position
Measuring and reporting financial performance
Accounting for limited companies (1)
Accounting for limited companies (2)
Measuring and reporting cash flows
Analysing and interpreting financial statements (1)
Analysing and interpreting financial statements (2)
3
9.
Reporting the financial results of groups of companies
10. Increasing the scope of financial reporting
11. Governing a company
Appendix A Recording financial transactions.
Appendix B Glossary of key terms
Appendix C Solutions to self-assessment questions
Appendix D Solutions to review questions
Appendix E Solutions to selected exercises
Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e
Peter Atrill
Eddie McLaney
ISBN 10: 0273762265
ISBN 13: 9780273762263
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Designed to help you study, Management Accounting for Decision Makers is praised for its clear, accessible
and uncluttered style. It provides a comprehensive introduction to the main principles of management
accounting, with a strong practical emphasis and avoiding excessive technical detail. It has a clear and
unequivocal focus on how accounting information can be used to improve the quality of decision making by
managers, providing the perfect grounding for the decision makers of the future.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to management accounting
2.
Relevant costs for decision making
3.
Cost-volume-profit analysis
4.
Full costing
5.
Costing and pricing in a competitive environment
6.
Budgeting
7.
Accounting for control
8.
Making capital investment decisions
9.
Strategic management accounting
10. Measuring performance
11. Managing working capital
Appendix A: Glossary of key terms
Appendix B: Solutions to self-assessment questions
Appendix C: Solutions to review questions
Appendix D: Solutions to selected exercises
Appendix E: Present value table
Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
Peter Atrill
Eddie McLaney
David Harvey
Maurice Jenner
ISBN 10: 144253480X
ISBN 13: 9781442534803
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Often imitated, never replicated: Your complete learning solution for introductory decision-making
accounting courses.
Accounting: An Introduction is the text of choice for students taking a first accounting course with an
emphasis on ‘real-world’ decision making. It provides clear and approachable coverage of the principles of
financial accounting, management accounting and financial management. In meeting the needs of nonspecialists the emphasis is on the application and interpretation of information for decision-making. Atrill's
primary focus is on the underlying concepts, rather than on the collection of data and the preparation of
statements and reports.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Introduction to accounting and finance
Different accounting entities
Measuring and reporting financial position
Measuring and reporting financial performance
Measuring and reporting cash flows
Analysis and interpretation of financial statements
Cost–volume–profit analysis and marginal analysis
Full costing
Budgeting
Projected financial statements
Capital investment decisions
Security and business valuations
4
13. The management of working capital
14. Financing the business
15. Trends and issues in accounting
Advanced Accounting, 11/e
Floyd A. Beams, (Retired) Virginia Polytechnic Institute
Joseph H. Anthony
Bruce Bettinghaus
Kenneth Smith
ISBN 10: 0132830361
ISBN 13: 9780132830362
840pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in advanced accounting.
An in-depth guide to accounting that reflects the most up-to-date business developments.
This comprehensive textbook addresses practical financial reporting problems while reflecting recent business
developments and changes in accounting standards.
This edition has been rewritten to align with the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards
Codification.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Business Combinations
Stock Investments—Investor Accounting and Reporting
An Introduction to Consolidated Financial Statements
Consolidation Techniques and Procedures
Intercompany Profit Transactions—Inventories
Intercompany Profit Transactions—Plant Assets
Intercompany Profit Transactions—Bonds
Consolidations—Changes in Ownership Interests
Indirect and Mutual Holdings
Subsidiary Preferred Stock, Consolidated Earnings per Share, and Consolidated Income Taxation
Consolidation Theories, Push-Down Accounting, and Corporate Joint Ventures
Derivatives and Foreign Currency: Concepts and Common Transactions
Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging Activities
Foreign Currency Financial Statements
Segment and Interim Financial Reporting
Partnerships—Formation, Operations, and Changes in Ownership Interests
Partnership Liquidation
Corporate Liquidations and Reorganizations
An Introduction to Accounting for State and Local Governmental Units
Accounting for State and Local Governmental Units—Governmental Funds
Accounting for State and Local Governmental Units—Proprietary and Fiduciary Funds
Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organizations
Estates and Trusts
Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e
Mark S. Beasley
Frank A. Buckless
Steven M. Glover
Douglas F. Prawitt
ISBN 10: 0132815591
ISBN 13: 9780132815598
408pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Auditing, Professional Research Case or capstone courses.
Step through real auditing cases one by one in this comprehensive text.
Auditing Cases, through a unique active learning approach, provides a comprehensive case book focusing on
various auditing activities. Students learn to think critically and develop their interpersonal skills, which are
increasingly important in the workplace.
The fifth edition includes several new and updated cases.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Client Acceptance
Understanding the Client’s Business and Assessing Risk
Professional and Ethical Issues
Accounting Fraud and Auditor Legal Liability
Internal Control over Financial Reporting
The Impact of Information Technology
Planning Materiality
Analytical Procedures
Auditing Cash Investments and Revenues
Planning and Performing Audit Procedures in the Revenue and Expenditure Cycles
Developing and Evaluating Audit Documentation
5
12. Completing the Audit, Reporting to Management, and External Reporting
Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e
Peter Best
Greg Shailer
Brenton Fiedler
ISBN 10: 1442541199
ISBN 13: 9781442541191
©2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
This new updated edition now incorporates the content offered in the supplementary 80 page booklet which was
previously provided packaged with the text and will be available for courses commencing semester 2, 2011. This
includes a fully revised Chapter 2, Audit Reports.
Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia: Clarity Update Edition provides updated references to
the Australian Auditing Standards (ASAs) as appropriate throughout the text. The book is a comprehensive
introduction to auditing for students who have not had significant experience in the field. It is also appropriate
for introductory professional development courses for public accounting firms, internal auditors and government
auditors.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE AUDITING PROFESSION
1.
Demand for audit and assurance services
2.
Audit reports
3.
Auditors’ legal environment
4.
Audit quality and ethics
PART II: THE AUDIT PROCESS
5.
Audit responsibilities and objectives
6.
Audit evidence
7.
Audit planning and documentation
8.
Materiality and risk
9.
Internal control and control risk
10. Fraud auditing
11. The impact of information technology on the audit process
12. Overall audit plan and audit program
PART III: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO THE SALES AND COLLECTION CYCLE
13. Audit of the sales and collection cycle: tests of controls and substantive tests of transactions
14. Completing the tests in the sales and collection cycle: accounts receivable
15. Audit sampling
PART IV: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO OTHER CYCLES
16. Audit of transaction cycles and financial balance statements I
17. Audit of transaction cycles and financial balance statements II
PART V: COMPLETING THE AUDIT
18. Completing the audit
PART VI: OTHER ASSURANCE AND NONASSURANCE SERVICES
19. Other assurance engagements and environments
Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e
Alnoor Bhimani
Charles T. Horngren
Srikant M. Datar
Madhav Rajan
ISBN 10: 0273762230
ISBN 13: 9780273762232
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
This popular text offers clear and comprehensive coverage of management and cost accounting for students and
professionals. Rich in examples and real-life applications, it brings technical and theoretical concepts to life. The
international focus is supported by a wealth of case studies featuring companies from around the world.
For the first time, the 5e of this text is supported by MyAccountingLab.
Table of Contents
PART I: MANAGEMENT AND COST ACCOUNTING FUNDAMENTALS
1.
The accountant's role in the organization
2.
An introduction to cost terms and purposes
3.
Job costing systems
4.
Process costing systems
5.
Cost allocation
6.
Cost allocation: Joint cost situation
7.
Income effects of alternative stock costing methods
Part I Case study problems
PART II: ACCOUNTING INFORMATION FOR DECISION MAKING
8.
Cost-volume-profit relationships
9.
Determining how costs behave
6
10. Relevant Information for decision making
11. Activity-based costing
12. Pricing, target costing and customer profitability analysis
13. Capital investment decisions
Part II Case study problems
PART III: PLANNING AND BUDGETARY CONTOL SYSTEMS
14. Motivation, budgets and responsibility accounting
15. Flexible budgets, variances and management control: I
16. Flexible budgets, variances and management control: II
17. Measuring yield, mix and quantity effects
Part III Case study problems
PART IV: MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS AND PERFORMANCE ISSUES
18. Control systems and transfer pricing
19. Control systems and performance measurement
Part IV Case study problems
PART V: QUALITY, TIME AND THE STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT OF COSTS
20. Quality and throughput concerns in management costs
21. Accounting for just-in-time systems
22. Strategic management accounting and emerging issues
Part V Case study problems
Appendix A: Solutions to selected exercises
Appendix B: Notes on compound interest and interest tables
Introduction to Management Accounting
Alnoor Bhimani
Charles T. Horngren
Gary L. Sundem
William O. Stratton
Jeff Schatzberg
Dave Burgstahler
ISBN 10: 0273737554
ISBN 13: 9780273737551
624pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Suited for a second module in management accounting, this well written and readable text provides students with
a real insight into the techniques and theory of management accounting and how they can be applied in the real
world.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Managerial Accounting, the Business Organisation, and Professional Ethics
Introduction to Cost Behaviours and Cost-Volume Relationships
Measurement of Cost Behaviours
Cost Management Systems and an Introduction to Activity-Based Costing
Relevant Information and Decision Making With a Focus on Pricing Decisions
Relevant Information and Decision Making: Operational Decisions
Introduction to Budgets and Preparing the Master Budget
Flexible Budgets and Variance Analysis
Management Control Systems and Responsibility Accounting
Management Control in Decentralised Organisations
Capital Budgeting
Cost Allocation
Accounting for overhead costs
Job-Costing and Process-Costing Systems
Basic Accounting: Concepts, Techniques, and Conventions
Understanding Corporate Annual Reports: Basic Financial Statements
Understanding and Analysing Consolidated Financial Statements
Introduction to Accounting Information Systems
Tony Boczko
ISBN 10: 0273739387
ISBN 13: 9780273739388
472pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Introduction to Accounting Information Systems offers an introductory insight into the nature, role and
context of accounting information systems. Students will gain an understanding of how companies can integrate
technologies into their AIS and how this integration can assist in the management and control of organisational
resources and the maximization of shareholder wealth.
Table of Contents
PART 1: A CONTEXTUAL FRAMEWORK OVERVIEW
7
1.
Information systems in accounting and finance: an overview
2.
Systems thinking
3.
Control - management by design
PART 2: INFORMATION SYSTEMS IN ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE OVERVIEW
4.
Accounting information systems and the information age
5.
Networking: creating connections
6.
Information management and data processing
7.
Accounting information systems: a cyclical perspective
8.
Information technology and the virtual world
PART 3: RISK, SECURITY, SURVEILLANCE AND CONTROL OVERVIEW
9.
Risk exposure: fraud, cyber terrorism and computer crime
10. Internal control and accounting information systems security
11. Accounting information systems audit
12. Accounting information systems development
Accounting Information Systems, 11/e
George H. Bodnar
William S. Hopwood
ISBN 10: 0132871939
ISBN 13: 9780132871938
544pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate courses in Accounting Information Systems.
Core coverage of business processes, transaction cycles, and internal controls.
An understanding of business processes is fundamental to contemporary auditing, and professional and legal
considerations relating to an organization’s internal control processes. Following a Business Process Approach,
Accounting Information Systems stresses information, communication, and networking technology within the
context of business processes, transaction cycles and internal control structure.
The eleventh edition offers streamlined information and a new chapter covering fraud.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS
1.
Accounting Information Systems
2.
Systems Techniques and Documentation
3.
eBusiness and eCommerce
4.
Transaction Processing and the Internal Control Process
5.
Fraud Examination and Fraud Management
PART II: BUSINESS PROCESSES
6.
Information Security
7.
Electronic Data Processing Systems
8.
Revenue Cycle Processes
9.
Procurement and Human Resource Business Process
10. The Production Business Process
PART III: SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT
11. Systems Planning, Analysis, and Design
12. Systems Project Management, Implementation, Operation, Control
PART IV: CONTEMPORARY INFORMATION SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY
13. Data Management Concepts
14. Auditing Information Technology
Managerial Accounting, 3/e
Karen W. Braun
Wendy M. Tietz
ISBN 10: 0132954796
ISBN 13: 9780132954792
864pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory, undergraduate Managerial Accounting courses.
Rock-solid decision-making through strong coverage and effective practice.
Students interact with businesses every day—where they work, where they shop, even where they blog. At the
core of these businesses are rock-solid managerial accounting fundamentals that students don’t always see.
Authors Wendy Tietz and Karen Braun show the connection between accounting concepts and the businesses
students interact with in their new text, Managerial Accounting. By presenting the accounting decisions made in
companies like Target and J. Crew, this text’s precise coverage of the core concepts gets students engaged in the
learning process.
This edition features a new sustainability theme, and most chapters offer improved and new content.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Managerial Accounting
8
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Building Blocks of Managerial Accounting
Job Costing
Activity Based Costing, Lean Operations, and the Costs of Quality
Process Costing
Cost Behavior
Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Relevant Costs for Short-Term Decisions
The Master Budget
Performance Evaluation
Standard Costs and Variances
Capital Investment Decisions and the Time Value of Money
Statement of Cash Flows
Financial Statement Analysis
Sustainability
Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e
Leslie K. Breitner, University of Washington
Robert N. Anthony
ISBN 10: 0132744392
ISBN 13: 9780132744393
208pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Introductory Accounting.
Core Concepts of Accounting captures the full text (but not the programmed approach) of Essentials of
Accounting, while including important accounting concepts and terms.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Basic Concepts
Balance Sheet Changes; Income Measurement
Accounting Records and Systems
Revenues and Monetary Assets
Expense Measurement; The Income Statement
Inventories and Cost of Sales
Noncurrent Assets and Depreciation
Liabilities and Equity
Statement of Cash Flows
Analysis of Financial Statements
Nonprofit Financial Statements
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Essentials of Accounting, 11/e
Leslie K. Breitner, University of Washington
Robert N. Anthony
ISBN 10: 0273771469
ISBN 13: 9780273771463
384pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Introductory Accounting.
Essentials of Accounting is a workbook that provides a self-teaching and self-paced introduction to financial
accounting for active users of business data. This text presents the ideas and terminology essential to
understanding balance sheets, income statements, and statements of cash flows in a unique format that enables
students to study and learn with ease.
Essentials of Accounting is best used when paired with the Core Concepts of Accounting, which captures the
full text (but not the programmed approach) of Essentials of Accounting, while including important accounting
concepts and terms.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Basic Concepts
Balance Sheet Changes; Income Measurement
Accounting Records and Systems
Revenues and Monetary Assets
Expense Measurement; The Income Statement
Inventories and Cost of Sales
Noncurrent Assets and Depreciation
9
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Liabilities and Equity
Statement of Cash Flows
Analysis of Financial Statements
Nonprofit Financial Statements
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical
Approach, 6/e
Terri E. Brunsdon, University of Akron
ISBN 10: 0132751674
ISBN 13: 9780132751674
992pp ©2013 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
For computerized accounting courses that focus on QuickBooks.
“Hands-on” experience in computerized accounting.
Learning QuickBooks® Pro uses a comprehensive approach for teaching accounting concepts in a software
environment. This text includes sample company data files that simulate real-world businesses, giving students
hands-on experience initiating transactions, performing accounting activities, producing financial statements, and
analyzing company performance.
This text has been revised to reflect the latest version of QuickBooks.
Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant 2011: A Practical
Approach and QuickBooks 2011 Software, 5/e
Terri E. Brunsdon, University of Akron
ISBN 10: 0132743256
ISBN 13: 9780132743259
992pp ©2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
For computerized accounting courses that focus on QuickBooks.
“Hands-on” experience in computerized accounting.
Learning QuickBooks® Pro and Premier Accountant 2011: A Practical Approach uses a comprehensive
approach for teaching accounting concepts in a software environment. This text includes sample company data
files that simulate real-world businesses, giving students hands-on experience initiating transactions, performing
accounting activities, producing financial statements, and analyzing company performance.
This text has been revised to reflect the latest version of QuickBooks.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Get Ready for QuickBooks Pro 2011
QuickBooks Basics
General Journal Transactions and Reports
Customer Activities for a Service Based Business
Vendor Activities for a Service Based Business
Payroll Activities for a Service Based Business
Close the Accounting Period for a Service Based Business
Customer Activities for a Merchandising Business
Vendor Activities for a Merchandising Business
Payroll Activities for a Merchandising Business
Close the Accounting Period for a Merchandising Business
Create a New Company
Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to IFRS
Derry Cotter
ISBN 10: 0273732358
ISBN 13: 9780273732358
512pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Advanced Financial Reporting provides a current and comprehensive guide to international accounting
standards. Covering both IFRS and IAS, this book adopts a user-friendly structure. By clearly explaining the
theory behind each standard and then illustrating its application in worked examples, this text makes a technical
subject accessible and easy to understand.
This text has been written primarily for intermediate and advanced students of Financial Reporting studying an
undergraduate or masters level programme. It is also appropriate for students studying for professional exams on
IFRS.
10
Table of Contents
PART 1: A BRIEF HISTORY OF ACCOUNTING
1.
The rise of Accounting
PART 2: A THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK FOR ACCOUNTING
2.
Conceptual framework
3.
Alternative income models
PART 3: FINANCIAL REPORTING REGULATION
4.
The regulatory environment
5.
The Annual Report
6.
Accountability
PART 4: PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
7.
Presentation of financial statements
8.
Statement of cash flows
9.
Accounting policies, accounting estimates and errors
10. Interim financial reporting
PART 5: ACCOUNTING FOR ASSETS
11. Inventories
12. Construction contracts
13. Property, plant and equipment
14. Intangible assets
15. Investment property
16. Impairment of assets
17. Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations
PART 6: LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
18. Share-based payment
19. Income taxes
20. Employee benefits
21. Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets
PART 7: CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
22. Introduction to group accounts
23. Consolidated statement of financial position
24. Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
25. Business combinations
26. Changes in ownership
27. Investments in associates
28. Interests in joint ventures
29. Consolidated statement of cash flows
PART 8: MISCELLANEOUS ACCOUNTING ISSUES
30. Events after the reporting period
31. Leases
32. Revenue
33. Accounting for government grants
34. The effects of changes in foreign exchange rates
35. Borrowing costs
36. Related party disclosures
37. Financial reporting in hyperinflationary economies
PART 9: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
38. Capital instruments, reduction of capital and distributable profits
39. Recognition and measurement of financial instruments
40. Disclosure of financial instruments
PART 10: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
41. Financsp
42. Operating segments
43. Earnings per share
PART 11: SPECIALIST ACTIVITIES
44. Accounting policies
45. Exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources
46. Accounting and reporting by retirement benefit plans
47. Agriculture
PART 12: FIRST TIME ADOPTION of INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
48. Rules for first time adoption of IFRS
PART 13: SMALL AND MEDIUM-SIZED ENTITIES
49. Accounting for small and medium-sized entities
Accounting Handbook 2012
CPA
ISBN 10: 1442558105
ISBN 13: 9781442558106
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The CPA Accounting Handbook is first to market and provides students and educators with all the legally
enforceable Australian Accounting Standards (aligned to IFRS), including the Conceptual Framework, Accounting
Standards and Interpretations updated to 15 November 2011.
11
Also included are new AASBs 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 110, 112, 118, 133, 139, 140, 1023, 1031, 1038 and 1054 and
the IFRS Practice Statement Management Commentary, as well as compiled standards for AASBs 1, 3, 4, 5, 7,
101, 107, 108, 119, 121, 131, 132, 134 and Interpretations 4, 13, 14, 16, 115, 127, 132, 1039, 1042 and 1052,
all with accompanying new technical editor notes.
There have been important changes to the standards over the past twelve months which makes the 2012
Handbook with its Technical Editor Notes a ‘must-have’ edition. There are a number of Amending Standards
issued which will apply to future financial year ends and the Technical Notes will assist in identifying which
Standards and Interpretations will be impacted, the relevant Amending Standard and when it applies.
The Companion website for this title, www.pearson.com.au/highered/handbooks will include twelve amending
standards. Also, it will be updated throughout 2012 with any changes to the accounting standards and is
accompanied by technical editor notes.
Students may also use the Student Self Test quizzes aligned to particular AASBs and with hints & references back
to the Handbook as practice and preparation for exams.
Table of Contents
Conceptual Framework
Australian Accounting Standards
Amending Standards
Interpretations
Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012
CPA
ISBN 10: 1442558091
ISBN 13: 9781442558090
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The 2012 edition of Assurance and Ethics Handbook provides a comprehensive listing of legally enforceable
Australian Auditing, Assurance, Professional and Ethical pronouncements. These include all Australian Auditing
Standards (ASAs) applicable to audits for financial reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2010, as
well as Standards on Review and Assurance Engagements, Auditing and Assurance Guidance Statements, and
Accounting Professional and Ethical Statements including the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants,
updated to 15 November 2011.
The enhanced companion website for this title, www.pearson.com.au/highered/handbooks, will be updated
throughout 2012 with any late breaking changes to the Auditing, Assurance, Professional and Ethical
pronouncements along with technical editor notes. Students may also use the Student Self Test quizzes aligned
to particular ASAs with hints & references back to the Handbook as practice and preparation for exams.
Table of Contents
Institutional Framework – Auditing
Understanding Financial Statement Audits – A Guide for Financial Statement Users
POL 1 The AuASB Consultative Process
Auditing and Assurance Standards
100-199 Introductory Matters
200-299 General Principles and Responsibilities
300-499 Risk Assessment and Response to Assessed Risks
500-599 Audit Evidence
600-699 Using the Work of Others
700-799 Audit Conclusions and Reporting
800-899 Specialised Areas
AUS 904 Engagements to Perform Agreed-upon Procedures*
Auditing and Assurance Guidance Statements (AGSs and GSs)
Explanatory Guides
Standards on Review Engagements (ASREs)
Standards on Assurance Engagements (ASAEs)
Standards on Related Services
100-200 All Members
300 Members in Public Practice
Other Professional Statements (APSs)
Members in Public Practice
All Members
Risk Management Statement (RMS)
Joint Guidance Notes (GNs)
Members in Business
Members in Public Practice
12
Corporate Accounting in Australia
Ron Dagwell
Graeme Wines
Cecilia Lambert
ISBN 10: 1442527161
ISBN 13: 9781442527164
738pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Success in Corporate Accounting starts here.
The first Pearson edition of Corporate Accounting in Australia provides comprehensive coverage of the latest
company accounting principles, practices and issues in a very accessible manner, while delivering enhanced
pedagogy and lecturer support. The aim is to ensure that students don’t feel daunted by the technical detail, but
at the same time develop an understanding of the core principles that underpin contemporary professional
practice. It has been written to help students succeed in what is traditionally a very demanding subject.
“A concern my students raise in relation to the current text we use is that it is highly technical and difficult to
understand. Dagwell et al is easy to understand and it is balanced in the level of technical detail necessary for
this type of course.”
Subhash Abhayawansa, Swinburne University
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
The nature and environment of companies
Company formation, share capital and debt securities
Reserves and profit distribution
Published financial statements
Accounting for company income tax
Property, plant and equipment
Leases
Intangible assets
Business combinations
Impairment of assets
Additional accounting standards and disclosures
Principles of consolidation
Consolidation: Intra-group transactions
Consolidation: Non-controlling interests
Consolidation: Indirect non-controlling interests
Accounting for associates
Accounting for joint ventures
Accounting for foreign currency
Capital reorganisation
External administration, including liquidation
Key issues in Australian corporate governance
Business Accounting and Finance
Tony Davies
Ian Crawford
ISBN 10: 027372312X
ISBN 13: 9780273723127
800pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Business Accounting and Finance is a clear, comprehensive and engaging text that is essential reading for
anyone studying accounting and finance. Carefully structured to reflect the topics covered in most one or two
semester modules, the book comprises two parts: Financial Accounting and Financial Management.
Table of Contents
PART I : FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
1.
The importance of accounting and finance
2.
Classifying and recording financial transactions
3.
Balance sheet
4.
Income statement
5.
Statement of cash flows
6.
Corporate governance
7.
Financial statements analysis
8.
Annual report and accounts
Case Study I
Case Study II
PART II : FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
9.
The nature of costs
10. Managing costs
Case Study III
11. Relevant costs, marginal costs, and decision-making
12. Short-term planning – the operating budget
13
13. The control budget and variance analysis
Case Study IV
14. Financing the business, and the cost of capital
15. Investment appraisal and the capital budget
Case Study V
16. Working capital management
Case Study VI
Appendices
Appendix 1
Present value tables
Appendix 2
IFRSs and IASs
Appendix 3
Solutions to selected exercises
Financial Accounting
Tony Davies
Ian Crawford
ISBN 10: 0273723073
ISBN 13: 9780273723073
464pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
With a clear and comprehensive style, this text leads readers through their studies of Financial Accounting stepby-step, perfectly balancing theory and real-life practice.
It includes topical coverage of corporate governance, international accounting standards, statement of principles
(SOP), e-business, and information technology as they apply to financial accounting.
This lively and up-to-date text is perfect for introductory financial accounting modules delivered as part of a
business degree or MBA programmes and is full of examples, exercises and cases studies to aid students'
understanding of the subject.
Table of Contents
1.
The importance of financial accounting
2.
Classifying and recording financial transactions
3.
Financial statements of limited companies: balance sheet
4.
Financial statements of limited companies: income statement
5.
Financial statements of limited companies: statement of cash flows
Case Study I
6.
Corporate governance
7.
Financial statements analysis
Case Study II
8.
Annual report and accounts
9.
Financing the business Case Study III
Appendix 1 IFRSs and IASs
Appendix 2 Solutions to selected exercises
Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e
Barry Elliott
Jamie Elliott
ISBN 10: 0273760882
ISBN 13: 9780273760887
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Financial Accounting and Reporting is the most up to date text on the market. Now fully updated in its
fifteenth edition, it includes extensive coverage of International Accounting Standards (IAS) and International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
This market-leading text offers students a clear, well-structured and comprehensive treatment of the subject.
Supported by illustrations and exercises, the book provides a strong balance of theoretical and conceptual
coverage and is supported by MyAccountingLab. Students using this book will gain the knowledge and skills to
help them apply current standards, and critically appraise the underlying concepts and financial reporting
methods.
Table of Contents
PART 1: PREPARATION OF FINACIAL STATEMENTS
1.
Accounting and reporting on a cash flow basis
2.
Accounting and reporting on an accrual accounting basis
3.
Preparation of statements of financial statements
4.
Annual Report: additional financial statements
5.
Statements of cash flows
PART 2: INCOME AND ASSET VALUE MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
6.
Income and asset value measurement: an economist’s approach
7.
Accounting for price-level changes
8.
Revenue Recognition
PART 3: REGULATORY FRAMEWORK – AN ATTEMPT TO ACHIEVE UNIFORMITY99
14
9.
Financial reporting – evolution of global standards
10. Concepts – evolution of a global conceptual framework
11. Ethical behaviour and implications for accountants
PART 4: STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION – EQUITY, LIABILITY AND ASSET MEASUREMENT
AND DISCLOSURE
12. Share capital, distributable profits and reduction of capital
13. Liabilities
14. Financial instruments
15. Employee benefits
16. Taxation in company accounts
17. Property, plant and equipment (PPE)
18. Leasing
19. R&D, goodwill, intangible assets and brands
20. Inventories
21. Construction contracts
PART 5: CONSOLIDATED ACCOUNTS
22. Accounting for groups at the date of acquisition
23. Preparation of consolidated statements of financial position after the date of acquisition
24. Preparation of consolidated statements of comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows
25. Accounting for associates and joint ventures
26. Accounting for the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates under IAS21
PART 6: INTERPRETATION
27. Earnings per share
28. Review of financial ratio analysis
29. Analytical analysis – selective use of ratios
30. An introduction to financial reporting on the Internet
PART 7: ACCOUNTABILITY
31. Corporate governance
32. Sustainability – environmental and social reporting
Financial Management for Public, Health, and Notfor-Profit Organizations, 4/e
Steven A. Finkler
Thad Calabrese
Robert Purtell
Daniel L. Smith
ISBN 10: 0132912813
ISBN 13: 9780132912815
672pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in financial and managerial accounting in the areas of government or public policy and
management, not-for-profit management, and health policy and management.
One of the few texts that addresses financial and managerial accounting within the three major areas of the
public sector.
Financial Management for Public, Health, and Not-for-Profit Organizations provides the fundamentals of
financial management for those pursuing careers within the public, health and not-for-profit fields. With a unique
presentation that explains the rules specific to the public sector, this book outlines the framework for students to
access and apply financial information more effectively.
This edition has added the expertise of new coauthors Bob Purtell (financial markets and health care financial
management), Thad Calabrese (not-for-profit and government financial management) and Dan Smith
(government area), and includes a new chapter devoted to case studies.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION: SETTING THE STAGE
1.
Introduction to Financial Management
PART II: PLANNING
2.
Planning for Success: Budgeting
3.
Additional Budgeting Concepts
4.
Understanding Costs
5.
Capital Budgeting
6.
Long-Term Financing
PART III: IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROLLING RESULTS
7.
Managing Short-Term Resources and Obligations
8.
Accountability and Control
PART IV: CASE STUDIES
9.
Managerial Finance Case Studies
PART V: REPORTING RESULTS
10. Taking Stock of Where You Are: The Balance Sheet
11. Reporting the Results of Operations: The Activity and Cash Flow Statements
12. Unique Aspects of Accounting for Not-for-Profit and Health Care Organizations
13. Unique Aspects of Accounting for State and Local Governments–Part I: The Recording Process
14. Unique Aspects of Accounting for State and Local Governments–Part II: Reporting Financial Results
PART VI: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
15. Financial Statement Analysis
16. Financial Condition Analysis
15
Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e
Robert J. Freeman
Craig D. Shoulders
Gregory S. Allison
Terry K. Patton
G. Robert Smith
ISBN 10: 0132751267
ISBN 13: 9780132751261
850pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For accounting students enrolled in a governmental and nonprofit accounting course.
This is a comprehensive textbook that is written through the eyes of the learner to prepare them for professional
government and not-for-profit accounting practice and the CPA exam.
Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to
International Standards on Auditing, 3/e
Rick Hayes
Roger Dassen
Arnold Schilder
Philip Wallage
ISBN 10: 0273768174
ISBN 13: 9780273768173
712pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
This text offers a structured approach to principles of auditing using International Standards on Auditing as its
basis. Written by a team of influential professional auditors with a wealth of teaching experience this book
provides a real world perspective on current auditing practices with coverage of cutting edge developments and
techniques.
Table of Contents
1.
International Auditing Overview
2.
The Audit Market
3.
Ethics for Professional Accountants
4.
An Auditor’s Services
5.
Client Acceptance
6.
Main Audit Concepts and Planning the Audit (ISA 300, 315, 320)
7.
Internal Control and Control Risk (ISA 315)
8.
Analytical Procedures (ISA 520)
9.
Auditor's Response to Assessed Risk (ISA 330)
10. Audit Evidence (ISA 500-580)
11. Completing the Audit (ISA 500-580)
12. Audit Reports and Communication (ISA 700, 800, 260, 265)
13. Overview of a Group Audit
14. Other Assurance Engagements
15. Corporate Governance and the Role of the Auditor
Appendix: Audit Documentation and Working Papers
QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e
Janet Horne, Los Angeles Pierce College
ISBN 10: 0132751755
ISBN 13: 9780132751759
800pp ©2013 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
This text provides training using the QuickBooks® Pro Accounting Program.
Presenting the computerized accounting concepts with hands-on training.
Designed to present accounting concepts and their relationship to QuickBooks® Pro 2012, this text uses a
fictitious company to provide hands-on training while it introduces major accounting concepts.
This text has been revised to reflect the latest version of QuickBooks.
16
Accounting, 7/e
Charles T. Horngren
Peter Best
David Fraser
Roger Willett
ISBN 10: 1442551925
ISBN 13: 9781442551923
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Once again the Horngren team is bringing you the accuracy and reliability you have come to expect in
Accounting. Designed to provide introductory accounting students with a complete learning resource, the new
edition incorporates its traditional approach with contemporary examples. It offers student appeal and
accessibility without foregoing attention to detail or depth of coverage.
Accounting has been updated to include some of the most significant current issues in both the accounting field
and the world today. It incorporates critical business matters, such as Decision Guidelines, Decision Cases and
eCommerce, and also environmental, sustainability and ethical issues. Accounting takes a business approach to
the study of accounting and relates back to the modern environment we live in. Real companies, their websites
and their business information are used extensively throughout the text, to engage student interest and to help
develop their appreciation of the importance of accounting in today’s e-business world. Ethical issues within the
accounting profession are also explored in a full discussion in Chapter 1 and end-of-chapter ‘Ethical Issue’ boxes.
A strong emphasis has also been placed on sustainability, as can be seen from the way this text has been
produced. Printed on FSC paper, Pearson is taking every measure to ensure that the environmental impact of our
books is being reduced. Carbon credits have even been purchased to offset the production
process! ecoAccounting boxes help students to understand how other businesses are implementing sustainable
practices in their own ways.
Financial Accounting, 7/e
Charles T. Horngren
Peter Best
David Fraser
Roger Willett
ISBN 10: 1442551933
ISBN 13: 9781442551930
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Once again the Horngren team is bringing you the accuracy and reliability you have come to expect in Financial
Accounting. Designed to provide introductory accounting students with a complete learning resource, the new
sixth edition incorporates a traditional approach with contemporary examples. It offers student appeal and
accessibility without forgoing attention to detail or depth of coverage.
Financial Accounting has been updated to include some of the most significant current issues in both the
accounting field and the world today. It incorporates critical business matters, such as Decision Guidelines,
Decision Cases and eCommerce, and also environmental, sustainability and ethical issues. Financial
Accounting takes a business approach to the study of accounting and relates back to the modern environment
we live in. Real companies, their websites and their business information are used extensively throughout the
text, to engage student interest and to help develop their appreciation of the importance of accounting in today’s
e-business world. Ethical issues within the accounting profession are also explored in a full discussion in Chapter
1 and end-of-chapter ‘Ethical Issue’ boxes.
A strong emphasis has also been placed on sustainability, as can be seen from the way this text has been
produced. Printed on FSC paper, Pearson is taking every measure to ensure that the environmental impact of our
books is being reduced. Carbon credits have even been purchased to offset the production
process! ecoAccounting boxes help students to understand how other businesses are implementing sustainable
practices in their own ways.
Cost Accounting, 14/e
Charles T. Horngren
Srikant M. Datar
Madhav V. Rajan
ISBN 10: 0273753878
ISBN 13: 9780273753872
896pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA students taking a Cost or Management Accounting course.
Emphasizing the “different costs for different purposes,” this text focuses on strategy and the decision making
process.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
The Accountant’s Role in the Organization
An Introduction to Cost Terms and Purposes
17
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Job Costing
Activity-Based Costing and Activity-Based Management
Master Budget and Responsibility Accounting
Flexible Budgets, Direct-Cost Variances, and Management Control
Flexible Budgets, Overhead Cost Variances, and Management Control
Inventory Costing and Capacity Analysis
Determining How Costs Behave
Decision Making and Relevant Information
Pricing Decisions and Cost Management
Strategy, Balanced Scorecard, and Strategic Profitability Analysis
Cost Allocation, Customer-Profitability Analysis, and Sales-Variance Analysis
Allocation of Support-Department Costs, Common, Costs, and Revenues
Cost Allocation: Join Products and Byproducts
Process Costing
Spoilage, Rework, and Scrap
Balanced Scorecard: Quality, Time, and the Theory of Constraints
Inventory Management, Just-in-Time, and Simplified Costing Methods
Capital Budgeting and Cost Analysis
Management Control Systems, Transfer Pricing, and Multinational Considerations
Performance Measurement, Compensation, and Multinational Considerations
Accounting, 9/e
Charles T. Horngren
Walter T. Harrison
M. Suzanne Oliver
ISBN 10: 0273770268
ISBN 13: 9780273770268
1344pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principle of Accounting Courses (Sole Proprietorship).
The trusted choice for “I Get It!” moments!
With its tried-and-true framework and respected author team, Horngren/Harrison/Oliver’s Accounting–when
combined with MyAccountingLab–is the trusted choice for instructors and students of Principles of Accounting.
The ninth edition preserves the classic, solid foundation of the previous editions, while also including a modern
and fresh teaching approach that helps students understand the complexities of accounting, giving them more "I
Get It!” moments.
Financial & Managerial Accounting, 3/e
Charles T. Horngren, Stanford University
Walter T. Harrison, Baylor University
M. Suzanne Oliver, University of West Florida
ISBN 10: 0132497999
ISBN 13: 9780132497992
1280pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For Principle of Accounting Courses (Corporate).
Financial & Managerial Accounting with MyAccountingLab—the trusted choice for “I Get It!” moments!
With its tried-and-true framework and respected author team, Horngren/Harrison/Oliver’s Financial & Managerial
Accounting with MyAccountingLab is the trusted choice for instructors and students of Principles of Accounting.
The third edition preserves the classic, solid foundation of the previous editions, while also including a modern
and fresh teaching approach that helps students understand the complexities of accounting, giving them more "I
Get It!” moments.
Also Available:
Financial & Managerial Accounting , Ch 1-15 (Financial Chapters), 3/e
ISBN 10: 0132497948
ISBN 13: 9780132497947
896pp ©2012 Paper
Financial & Managerial Accounting Ch 14-24 (Managerial Chapters), 3/e
ISBN 10: 0132497921
ISBN 13: 9780132497923
624pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Accounting and the Business Environment
Recording Business Transactions
The Adjusting Process
Completing the Accounting Cycle
Merchandising Operations
Merchandise Inventory
18
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Internal Control and Cash
Receivables
Plant Assets and Intangibles
Current Liabilities and Payroll
Long-Term Liabilities, Bonds Payable, and Classification of Liabilities on the Balance Sheet
Corporations, Paid-In Capital, and the Balance Sheet
Corporations: Effects on Retained Earnings and the Income Statement
Statement of Cash Flows
Financial Statement Analysis
Introduction to Management Accounting
Job Order and Process Costing
Activity-Based Costing and Other Cost-Management Tools
Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Short-Term Business Decisions
Capital Investment Decisions and the Time Value of Money
The Master Budget and Responsibility Accounting
Flexible Budgets and Standard Costs
Performance Evaluation and the Balanced Scorecard
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e
Charles Horngren
Gary L. Sundem
John A. Elliot
Donna Philbrick
ISBN 10: 0273770179
ISBN 13: 9780273770176
624pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Introductory Financial Accounting courses at the MBA level, and for rigorous undergraduate
courses.
A unique blend of theory, practice, and robust financial statement analysis.
Introduction to Financial Accounting describes the most widely accepted accounting theory and practice with
an emphasis on using and analyzing the information in financial statements. This text also compares U.S. GAAP to
IFRS where relevant.
This Global Edition has been edited to include enhancements making it more relevant to students outside the
United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Accounting: The Language of Business
Measuring Income to Assess Performance
Recording Transactions
Accrual Accounting and Financial Statements
Statement of Cash Flows
Accounting for Sales
Inventories and Cost of Goods Sold
Long-Lived Assets and Depreciation
Liabilities and Interest
Stockholders’ Equity
Intercorporate Investments and Consolidations
Financial Statement Analysis
Management Accounting, Canadian Edition, 6/e
Charles T. Horngren, Stanford University
Gary L. Sundem
William O. Stratton
Phillip Beaulieu, University of Calgary
ISBN 10: 013257084X
ISBN 13: 9780132570848
832pp ©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
For introductory, undergraduate Managerial Accounting courses.
Emphasizing a decision-making approach to prepare students to be managers of accounting information, this new
edition helps students to understand how accountants prepare information that is useful to managers.
Current and accurate, Management Accounting offers a variety of assignment problems and a running theme
of strategic management through the text helping students to relate management accounting decisions to a
company’s success.
Table of Contents
PART I: MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING, FOCUS ON INFORMATION AND COST MEASURING
1.
Management Accounting and Management Decisions
2.
Cost Behavior and Cost-Volume Relationships
3.
Measurement of Cost Behavior
4.
Cost Management Systems
19
PART II: PRODUCT COSTING
5.
Cost Allocation and Activity-Based Costing Systems
6.
Job-Costing Systems
7.
Process-Costing Systems
PART III: FOCUS ON DECISION MAKING
8.
Relevant Information and Decision Making: Marketing Decisions
9.
Relevant Information and Decision Making: Production Decisions
10. Capital Budgeting Decisions
PART IV: MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING FOR PLANNING AND CONTROL
11. The Master Budget
12. Flexible Budgets and Variance Analysis
13. Management Control Systems, the Balanced Scorecard, and Responsibility Accounting
14. Management Control in Decentralized Organizations
Appendix A Recommended Reading
Appendix B Fundamentals of Compound Interest and the Use of Present Value Tables
Cost Accounting, Revised Edition
Charles Horngren
Monte Wynder
William Maguire
Rebecca Tan
Srikant Datar
George Foster
Madhav Rajan
Christopher Ittner
ISBN 10: 1442554770
ISBN 13: 9781442554771
©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Tried. Proven. Refined.
The Australian adaptation of Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis combines the hallmark features of the
leading American text with a contemporary Australian business focus.
The clear and engaging writing style, the focus on human behavioral aspects of management accounting, and the
strong technical focus are now infused with relevant and recognizable examples from the Australian and
international business context, and enhanced by a greater strategic focus, particularly on the links between
sustainability and economic performance.
The text features a revised and simplified Five-Step Decision-Making Framework, interwoven through each
chapter, to help students see how the demand for various types of management accounting information is a
response to the decision-making needs of managers.
The Australian edition was developed in close consultation with local academics who had previously used the
American text and wanted content that provided great local content and context for their students. The authors
have brought Australian business context and organisations into the text while retaining references to companies
that operate globally and which students can recognize easily.
Cost Accounting provides the best of both worlds—the author team comprises world leaders in the development
of contemporary cost accounting and their ideas are illustrated with Australian examples that make the book
come alive for students.
Table of Contents
1.
Management accounting in context
2.
An introduction to cost terms and inventory costing
3.
Cost–volume–profit analysis
4.
Decision making and relevant information
5.
Product and service costing
6.
Determining how costs behave
7.
Activity-based costing and activity-based management
8.
Cost management, capacity costing and capacity management
9.
Allocation of support-department costs, common costs and revenues
10. Pricing decisions and customer-profitability analysis
11. Master budget and responsibility accounting
12. Flexible budgets, direct-cost variances and management control
13. Flexible budgets, overhead cost variances and management control
14. Measuring and reporting sustainability
15. Strategy, balanced scorecard and strategic profitability analysis
16. Balanced scorecard: quality, time and the theory of constraints
17. Inventory management, just-in-time and simplified costing methods
18. Capital budgeting and cost analysis
19. Management control systems, transfer pricing and multinational considerations
20. Performance measurement, compensation and multinational considerations
Glossary
Appendix A: Recommended readings
Appendix B: Notes on compound interest and interest tables
Index
20
Introduction to Governmental and Not-for-Profit
Accounting, 7/e
Martin Ives
Larry A. Johnson
Joseph R. Razek, University of New Orleans
Gordon A. Hosch, University of New Orleans
ISBN 10: 0132776014
ISBN 13: 9780132776011
672pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For use in Governmental Accounting, Not-for-Profit Accounting and Public Administration courses.
Ives, presents a comprehensive, practical, clearly written, and updated approach to governmental and not-forprofit financial accounting.
Accounting Information Systems: The Crossroads of Accounting and
IT
Donna Kay
Ali Ovlia
ISBN 10: 0132132524
ISBN 13: 9780132132527
496pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Accounting Information Systems.
Navigate the crossroads of accounting and IT.
Kay/Ovlia is designed to assist students’ journey as they explore the crossroads of accounting and IT–the very
place where they’ll learn how to gain a competitive edge in the accounting field. To help them on their journey,
this text presents information on how to develop communication, leadership, strategic and critical thinking, a
customer focus, an interpretation of converging information, and technological skills.
Table of Contents
PART 1: ENTERPRISE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS: PEOPLE, PROCESSES, AND TECHNOLOGY
1.
Accounting System Insights
2.
Accounting Databases
3.
Accounting Interface: Database Forms, Queries, and Reports
4.
Accounting Systems and Business Processes
5.
Business Processes: Sales, Purchasing, and Payroll Cycles
6.
Integrated Enterprise Systems
PART 2: ACCOUNTING AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
7.
Accounting and Business Intelligence
8.
Accounting and Sustainability Intelligence
9.
XBRL: Intelligent Business Reporting
PART 3: SECURITY, CONTROLS, AND RISK
10. Fraud and Internal Control
11. Cybersecurity
12. The Risk Intelligent Enterprise: Enterprise Risk Management
PART 4: DESIGNING AND DEVELOPING ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS
13. Accounting System Development
14. Database Design: ERD, REA, and SQL
PART 5: ENTERPRISE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS: CAPSTONE
15. Emerging Trends and Technologies (Online Chapter)
16. Accounting Systems in Action: Live Projects (Online Chapter)
Financial Accounting, 2/e
Robert Kemp, University of Virginia
Jeffrey Waybright, Spokane Community College
ISBN 10: 0132771586
ISBN 13: 9780132771580
816pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in Financial Accounting.
Understanding financial accounting as the language of business.
Once students see that accounting is the language of business, they are on their way to academic and
professional success. Financial Accounting translates the essentials of accounting to students so they understand
why and when financially sound decisions are made in business today.
Table of Contents
1.
Business, Accounting, and You
21
2.
Analyzing and Recording Business Transactions
3.
Adjusting and Closing Entries
4.
Accounting for a Merchandising Business
5.
Inventory
6.
Ethics, Internal Control, and IFRS
7.
Cash and Receivables
8.
Long-Term and Other Assets
9.
Current Liabilities and Long-Term Debt
10. Corporations: Paid-In Capital and Retained Earnings
11. The Statement of Cash Flows
12. Financial Statement Analysis
Appendix A: Columbia Sportswear Company® 2008 Annual Report to Shareholders
Appendix B: Time Value of Money–Future and Present Value Concepts
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 1
Kin Lo
George Fisher
ISBN 10: 0132612119
ISBN 13: 9780132612111
576pp ©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Appropriate for college and university Intermediate Financial Accounting courses
A new, from the ground up, Canadian Intermediate Accounting text written for today’s accounting
environment and today’s students. This new text is the first book to be written entirely to IFRS as opposed to
being adapted from Canadian or U.S. standards. Its fresh approach with an emphasis on professional judgment
and decision-making are in line with the way faculty want to teach this course and in line with how students need
to prepare for professional practice. By introducing and integrating accounting theory, the text helps students
understand the “why” behind accounting practice and standards.
Class tests and an exhaustive technical checking process ensure that the text is both an excellent learning
resource for students and a text that is of the highest quality and accuracy.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Fundamentals of Financial Accounting Theory
Frameworks for Financial Reporting
Accrual Accounting
Revenue and Expense Recognition
Cash and Receivables
Inventories
Financial Assets
Property, Plant, and Equipment
Intangible Assets, Goodwill, Mineral Resources, and Agriculture
Applications of Fair Value: Revaluations, Impairments, and Non-Current Assets Held for Sale
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 2
Kin Lo
George Fisher
ISBN 10: 0132657953
ISBN 13: 9780132657952
576pp ©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Appropriate for college and university Intermediate Financial Accounting courses
A new, from the ground up, Canadian Intermediate Accounting text written for today’s accounting environment
and today’s students. This new text is the first book to be written entirely to IFRS as opposed to being adapted
from Canadian or U.S. standards. Its fresh approach with an emphasis on professional judgment and decisionmaking are in line with the way faculty want to teach this course and in line with how students need to prepare
for professional practice. By introducing and integrating accounting theory, the text helps students understand
the “why” behind accounting practice and standards.
Class tests and an exhaustive technical checking process ensure that the text is both an excellent learning
resource for students and a text that is of the highest quality and accuracy.
Table of Contents
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Current Liabilities and Contingencies
Non-current Financial Liabilities
Equities
Complex Financial Instruments
Earnings Per Share
Accounting for Income Taxes
Pensions and Other Employee Future Benefits
Accounting for Leases
Statement of Cash Flows
22
Effective Writing, 9/e
Claire B. May
Gordon S. May
ISBN 10: 0132842998
ISBN 13: 9780132842990
288pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Accounting, Business Communication, and Technical Writing courses.
A useful guide to all the stages of the writing process.
Effective Writing guides the writer through all the stages of the writing process: planning, critical thinking,
generating and organizing ideas, writing the draft, revising, and designing for presentation. Throughout the text,
Effective Writing stresses coherence, conciseness, and clarity as the most important qualities of the writing
done by accountants.
This edition includes many new and revised assignments that reinforce the concepts covered in the text, as well
as coverage on ethics in communication.
Table of Contents
PART I: COMMUNICATION STRATEGIES
1.
Accountants as Communicators
2.
The Writing Process: An Overview
3.
The Flow of Thought: Organizing for Coherence
4.
A Sense of Style: Writing with Conciseness and Clarity
5.
Standard English: Grammar, Punctuation, and Spelling
6.
Format for Clarity: Document Design
7.
Critical Thinking
8.
Accounting Research
PART II: BUSINESS DOCUMENTS
9.
Letters
10. Memos and Email
11. Reports
PART III: WRITING AND YOUR CAREER
12. Writing Essay Exams: Academic Courses and Professional Certification Exams
13. Writing for Employment: Resumes and Letters
14. Writing for Publication
15. Oral Communication: Listening and Speaking
Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context, 3/e
Ruth McIntosh
ISBN 10: 1442545844
ISBN 13: 9781442562554
384pp ©2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
The practical nature of Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context makes this book suited to anyone
wanting to increase their knowledge of accounting practices, or to fill gaps in their bookkeeping knowledge. The
text has been written specifically for students taking the New Zealand Diploma of Business paper 501 Accounting
Practices. The author’s clear, straightforward writing style and her thorough understanding of the learning
process make this book a key resource for all accounting students.
Table of Contents
PART I: COMMUNICATION STRATEGIES
1.
The general journal
2.
Goods and services tax
3.
The general ledger
4.
Specialised journals
5.
Subsidiary ledgers
6.
Inventory methods
7.
Petty cash and bank reconciliations
8.
Balance-day adjustments
9.
Non-current assets and depreciation
10. Financial statements
11. Computerised accounting packages
12. An introduction to other entities
13. Partnerships
14. Cash budgets
23
International Financial Reporting: A Practical Guide, 3/e
Alan Melville
ISBN 10: 0273758152
ISBN 13: 9780273758150
512pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
International Financial Reporting 3e provides a unique practical introduction to the international standards,
outlining how these standards are used on a daily basis by companies in the preparation of their financial
statements. The author examines the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements of
each IFRS and IAS in a clear and concise way which makes a difficult set of standards comprehensible to even a
novice student.
Features of the book include interpretive guidance, coverage of every key International Financial Reporting
Standard (IFRS) and International Accounting Standard (IAS), together with an unparalleled level of student
interactivity and assessment.
Examples and practice questions are provided throughout the book and in a new Companion Website developed
for this 3rd edition to aid student understanding and to provide a framework for grasping the key aspects of this
complex and fast-moving subject.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL REPORTING
1.
The regulatory framework
2.
The IASB conceptual framework
3.
Presentation of financial statements
4.
Accounting policies, accounting, estimates and errors
PART 2: FINANCIAL REPORTING IN PRACTICE
5.
Property, plant and equipment
6.
Tangible assets
7.
Impairment of assets
8.
Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations
9.
Leases
10. Inventories and construction contacts
11. Financial instruments
12. Provision and events after the reporting period
13. Revenue
14. Employee Benefits
15. Taxation in financial statements
16. Statement of cash flows
17. Financial reporting in hyperinflationary economies
PART 3: CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
18. Groups of companies (1)
19. Groups of companies (2)
20. Associates and joint ventures
21. Related parties and changes in foreign exchange rates
PART 4: ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
22. Ratio analysis
23. Earnings per share
24. Segmental analysis
PART 5: SMALL AND MEDIUM SIZED BUSINESSES
25. The IFRS and SME's
PART 6: ANSWERS
26. Answers to exercises
Taxation: Finance Act 2011, 17/e
Alan Melville
ISBN 10: 0273758284
ISBN 13: 9780273758280
624pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Taxation is the number one textbook on taxation in the UK. Now in its 17th annual edition, this excellent text
has established itself as a reliable and comprehensive guide for students taking a first level course in the
subject. This seventeenth edition brings the book completely up-to-date in accordance with the provisions of the
Finance Act.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INCOME TAX AND NATIONAL INSURANCE
1.
Introduction to the UKtax system
2.
Introduction to income tax
3.
Personal allowances
4.
Payments and gifts eligible for tax relief
5.
Income from property
24
6.
Income from savings and investments
7.
Income from employment (1)
8.
Income from employment (2)
9.
Income from self-employment: Computation of income
10. Income from self-employment: Basis periods
11. Income from self-employment: Capital allowances
12. Income from self-employment: Trading losses
13. Income from self-employment: Partnerships
14. Pension contributions
15. Payment of income tax, interest and penalties
16. National insurance contributions
17. Review questions (Set A)
PART 2: CAPITAL GAINS TAX
18. Introduction to capital gains tax
19. Computation of gains and losses
20. Chattels and wasting assets
21. Shares and securities
22. Principal private residences
23. CGT reliefs
24. Review questions (Set B)
PART 3: CORPORATION TAX
25. Introduction to corporation tax
26. Corporate chargeable gains
27. Computation and payment of the corporation tax liability
28. Corporation tax losses
29. Close companies and companies with investment business
30. Groups of companies and reconstructions
31. Review questions (Set C)
PART 4: MISCELLANEOUS
32. Value added tax (1)
33. Value added tax (2)
34. Inheritance tax
35. Overseas aspects of taxation
36. Review questions (Set D)
PART 5: ANSWERS
37. Answers to exercises
38. Answers to review questions
Management Control Systems: Performance Measurement,
Evaluation and Incentives, 3/e
Kenneth Merchant
Wim Van der Stede
ISBN 10: 0273737619
ISBN 13: 9780273737612
832pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
With its unique range of case studies, real life examples and comprehensive coverage of the latest management
control-related tools and techniques, Management Control Systems is the ideal guide to this complex and
multidimensional subject for upper level undergraduates, postgraduates and practicing professionals.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE CONTROL FUNCTION OF MANAGEMENT
1.
Management and Control
PART II: MANAGEMENT CONTROL ALTERNATIVES AND THEIR EFFECTS
2.
Results Controls
3.
Action, Personnel, and Cultural Controls
4.
Control System Tightness
5.
Control System Costs
6.
Designing and Evaluating Management Control Systems
PART III: FINANCIAL RESULTS CONTROL SYSTEMS
7.
Financial Responsibility Centers
8.
Planning and Budgeting
9.
Incentive Systems
PART IV: PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT ISSUES AND THEIR EFFECTS
10. Finan cial Performance Measures and their Effects
11. Combinations of Measures and Other Remedies to the Myopia Problem
12. Using Financial Results Control in the Presence of Uncontrollable Factors
PART V: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, IMPORTANT CONTROL-RELATED ROLES AND ETHICS
13. Corporate Governance and Boards of Directors
14. Controllers and Auditors
15. Management Control-Related Ethical Issues and Analyses
PART VI: SIGNIFICANT SITUATIONAL INFLUENCES ON MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS
16. The Effects of Environmental Uncertainty, Organizational Strategy, and Multinationality on Management
Control Systems
17. Management Control in Non-Profit Organizations
25
Comparative International Accounting, 12/e
Christopher Nobes
Robert B. Parker
ISBN 10: 0273763792
ISBN 13: 9780273763796
616pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Now in its twelfth edition, Comparative International Accounting is renowned for its depth of discussion and
comparative method of explaining the international dimensions of financial reporting.
This text uncovers the conceptual and contextual foundations of International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRSs) and contrasts them with US generally accepted accounting principles (US GAAP). It also examines
international differences that remain between countries such as China, France, Germany and Japan, and pays
particular attention to the key issues of harmonization, political lobbying and the special accounting problems of
multinational companies.
Table of Contents
PART I: SETTING THE SCENE
1.
Introduction
2.
Causes and examples of international differences
3.
International classification of financial reporting
4.
International harmonization
PART II: FINANCIAL REPORTING BY LISTED GROUPS USING IFRS OR US GAAP
5.
The context of financial reporting by listed groups
6.
The requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards
7.
Different versions of IFRS practice
8.
Financial reporting in the United States
9.
Key financial reporting topics
10. Political lobbying on accounting standards – US, UK, and international experience
PART III: CHINA AND JAPAN
11. Financial reporting in China and Japan
PART IV: FINANCIAL REPORTING BY INDIVIDUAL COMPANIES
12. The context of financial reporting by individual companies
13. Harmonization and transition in Europe
14. Making accounting rules for unlisted business entities in Europe
15. Accounting rules and practices of individual companies in Europe
PART V: GROUP ACCOUNTING ISSUES IN REPORTING BY MNEs
16. Group accounting
17. Foreign currency translation
18. Segment reporting
PART VI: ENFORCEMENT AND ANALYSIS
19. Enforcement of financial reporting requirements
20. International auditing
21. International financial analysis
Understanding Financial Statements, 10/e
Aileen M. Ormiston
Lyn M. Fraser
ISBN 10: 0132655063
ISBN 13: 9780132655064
304pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
A supplementary text for a variety of Business courses, including Financial Statement
Analysis, Investments, Personal Finance, and Financial Planning and Analysis.
Fraser and Ormiston take students behind the financial reports to assess the real financial condition and
performance of U.S. companies.
Understanding Financial Statements retains its reputation for readability, concise coverage, and accessibility.
It gives students the conceptual background and analytical tools necessary to understand and interpret business
financial statements. Its ultimate goal is to improve students' ability to translate financial statement numbers
into a meaningful map for business decisions and enable each student to approach financial statements with
enhanced confidence.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Financial Statements: An Overview
The Balance Sheet
Income Statement and Statement of Stockholders’ Equity
Statement of Cash Flows
The Analysis of Financial Statements
26
Financial Statement Analysis: Valuation - Credit Analysis - Executive
Compensation
Thomas Plenborg
Christian Petersen
ISBN 10: 0273752359
ISBN 13: 9780273752356
496pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This well-structured and thoughtful text is ideal for undergraduate students in accounting and finance, graduate
students and MBA students wishing to gain insight into financial statement analysis.
Focusing on three user-groups—equity, credit and compensation analysts—the authors present a variety of
targeted tools and techniques for analysis and interpretation of financial statements. This text prompts students
and professionals with a range of career goals to think critically when analysing financial data—and to make
different decisions based on user-group objectives.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to financial statement analysis
PART 1: ACCOUNTING DATA
2.
Introduction to financial statements and bookkeeping
3.
Accrual-based versus cash-flow-based performance measures
PART 2: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
4.
The analytical income statement and balance sheet
5.
Profitability analysis
6.
Growth analysis
7.
Liquidity risk analysis
PART 3: DECISION MAKING
8.
Forecasting
9.
Valuation
10. Cost of capital
11. Credit analysis
12. Accounting-based bonus plans for executives
PART 4: ASSESSMENT OF ACCOUNTING DATA
13. Accounting quality
14. Accounting flexibility in the income statement
15. Accounting flexibility in the balance sheet
Managerial Accounting: Decision Making and Performance
Improvement, 4/e
Ray Proctor
ISBN 10: 0273764489
ISBN 13: 9780273764489
576pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Managerial Accounting teaches business students how to use accounting to make better decisions and improve
performance. Engaging case studies and the popular ‘Manager’s Point of View’ boxes illustrate how concepts are
applied in real world business situations. The latter add an extra dimension to your learning, as they are written
by experienced practitioners of both management and accounting. With a minimum of technical language and a
dedication to practical application, this popular text gives a refreshingly clear guide to management accounting.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATIONS
1.
Cost behaviour
2.
The difference between profit and cash
PART 2: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
3.
Ratio analysis and financial management
4.
Working capital management
PART 3: DECISION MAKING
5.
Variable costing and breakeven analysis
6.
Short-term decisions using variable costing
7.
Short-term decisions using relevant costing
8.
Capital investment appraisal for long-term decisions
PART 4: PRODUCT COSTING AND PRICING
9.
Product costs using absorption costing
10. Product costs using activity-based costing
11. Comparison of profits under absorption and variable costing
12. Pricing your products
13. Divisional performance and transfer pricing
PART 5: BUSINESS PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
14. Budgets and their creation
15. Using budgets to control operations
16. Budgets, Behaviour and Beyond Budgeting
17. Balanced Scorecards
27
18. Performance Management Strategies
Accounting Information Systems, 12/e
Marshall B. Romney
Paul J. Steinbart
ISBN 10: 0273754378
ISBN 13: 9780273754374
720pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in AIS.
The market-leading book that delivers the most comprehensive and flexible coverage of the four major
approaches to teaching AIS.
Instructors can easily reorder chapters, and focus on what you want: (a) transaction cycles and controls; (b)
systems life cycle; (c) databases and data modeling; or (d) computer-based controls, fraud, and auditing.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATIONS OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS
1.
Accounting Information Systems: An Overview
2.
Overview of Transaction Processing and Enterprise Resource Planning Systems
3.
Systems Documentation Techniques
4.
Relational Databases
PART II: CONTROL AND AUDIT OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS
5.
Computer Fraud
6.
Computer Fraud and Abuse Techniques
7.
Control and Accounting Information Systems
8.
Information Systems Controls for System Reliability–Part 1: Information Security
9.
Information Systems Controls for System Reliability–Part 2: Confidentiality and Privacy
10. Information Systems Controls for System Reliability–Part 3: Processing Integrity and Availability
11. Auditing Computer-Based Information Systems
PART III: ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS
12. The Revenue Cycle: Sales to Cash Collections
13. The Expenditure Cycle: Purchasing to Cash Disbursements
14. The Production Cycle
15. The Human Resources Management and Payroll Cycle
16. General Ledger and Reporting System
PART IV: THE REA DATA MODEL
17. Database Design Using the REA Data Model
18. Implementing an REA Data Model in a Relational Database
19. Special Topics in REA Modeling
PART V: THE SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT PROCESS
20. Introduction to Systems Development; Systems Analysis
21. AIS Development Strategies
22. Systems Design, Implementation, and Operation
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 1, 12/e
Alan Sangster
Frank Wood
ISBN 10: 0273759280
ISBN 13: 9780273759287
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
The world’s best-selling textbook on book-keeping and accounting, Business Accounting Volume 1 continues
to provide an indispensible introduction for students and professionals across the globe. It is renowned for
clarity, with easy-to-understand language and a plethora of examples to aid your understanding.
The 12th edition is updated to be fully compliant with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Other
updates include new coverage of professional ethics, disaster recovery, and over 70 new examples to test your
understanding.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO DOUBLE ENTRY BOOKKEEPING
1.
The accounting equation and the statement of financial position
2.
The double entry system for assets, liabilities and capital
3.
Inventory
4.
The effect of profit or loss on capital and the double entry system for expenses and revenues
5.
Balancing-off accounts
6.
The trial balance
PART TWO: THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF SOLE TRADERS
7.
Income statements: an introduction
28
8.
Statements of financial position
9.
Income statements and statements of financial position: further considerations
10. Accounting concepts and assumptions
PART THREE: BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY
11. Books of original entry and ledgers
12. The banking system in the UK
13. Cash books
14. Sales day book and sales ledger
15. Purchases day book and purchases ledger
16. Returns day books
17. The journal
18. The analytical petty cash book and the imprest system
19. Value added tax
20. Columnar day books
21. Employees' pay
22. Computers and accounting
23. Computerized accounting systems
PART FOUR: ADJUSTMENTS FOR FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
24. Capital expenditure and revenue expenditure
25. Bad debts, allowances for doubtful debts, and provisions for discounts
26. Depreciation of non-current assets: nature and calculations
27. Double entry records for depreciation
28. Accruals and prepayments and other adjustments for financial statements
29. The valuation of inventory
30. Bank reconciliation statements
31. Control accounts
32. Errors not affecting the balancing of the trial balance
33. Suspense accounts and errors
Scenario questions
PART FIVE: SPECIAL ACCOUNTING PROCEDURES
34. Introduction to accounting ratios
35. Single entry and incomplete records
36. Receipts and payments accounts and income and expenditure accounts
37. Manufacturing accounts
38. Departmental accounts
39. Statements of cash flows
40. Joint venture accounts
PART SIX: PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS AND COMPANY ACCOUNTS
41. Partnership accounts: an introduction
42. Goodwill for sole traders and partnerships
43. Revaluation of partnership assets
44. Partnership dissolution
45. An introduction to the financial statements of limited liability companies
46. Purchase of existing partnership and sole traders' businesses
PART SEVEN: AN INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
47. An introduction to the analysis and interpretation of accounting statements
PART EIGHT: AN INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
48. An introduction to management accounting
APPENDICES
1. Answers to review questions
2. Answers to multiple-choice questions
3. Glossary
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 2, 12/e
Alan Sangster
Frank Wood
ISBN 10: 0273767925
ISBN 13: 9780273767923
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Business Accounting is the world’s best-selling textbook on bookkeeping and accounting. Now in its twelfth
edition, it has become the standard introductory text for accounting students and professionals alike.
The book is used on a wide variety of courses in accounting and business, both at secondary and tertiary level
and for those studying for professional qualifications. It builds on Business Accounting Volume 1 to cover
advanced aspects of financial accounting.
The twelfth edition includes greater emphasis on management accounting, company and group accounts and also
examines key accounting concepts such as corporate governance.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: SPECIAL ACCOUNTS
1.
Accounting for branches
2.
Hire purchase accounts
3.
Contract accounts
PART TWO: COMPANIES
4.
Limited companies: general background
29
5.
The issue of shares and loan notes
6.
Companies purchasing and redeeming their own shares and loan notes
7.
Limited companies taking over other businesses
8.
Taxation in company financial statements
9.
Provisions, reserves and liabilities
10. The increase and reduction of the share capital of limited companies
11. Accounting standards and related documents
12. The financial statements of limited companies: income statements, related statements and notes
13. The financial statements of limited companies: balance sheets
14. Published financial statements of limited companies: accompanying notes
15. Statements of cash flows
PART THREE: GROUPS
16. Group financial statements: an introduction
17. Consolidation of balance sheets: basic mechanics (I)
18. Consolidation of balance sheets: basic mechanics (II)
19. Intercompany dealings: indebtedness and unrealized profit in stocks
20. Consolidated financial statements: acquisition of shares in subsidiaries at different dates
21. Intra-group dividends
22. Consolidated balance sheets: sundry matters
23. Consolidation of the financial statements of a vertical group of companies
24. Consolidated income statements and comprehensive income statements
25. Business combinations - purchase method accounting
26. Standards covering subsidiary and associates and joint venture
PART FOUR: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
27. Accounting ratios
28. Interpretation of financial statements
PART FIVE: ISSUES IN FINANCIAL REPORTING
29. Accounting theory
30. Current cost accounting
31. Social accounting
32. Corporate governance
33. Public sector accounting
34. Accounting for management control
PART SIX: COSTING
35. Elements of costing
36. Absorption and marginal costing
37. Job, batch and process costing
PART SEVEN: BUDGETS
38. Budgeting and budgetary control
39. Cash budgets
40. Co-ordination of budgets
PART EIGHT: STANDARD COSTING AND VARIANCE ANALYSIS
41. Standard costing
42. Materials and labour variances
43. Overhead and sales variances
PART NINE: PLANNING, CONTROL AND DECISION MAKING
44. Break-even analysis
45. Interest, annuities and leasing
46. Capital expenditure appraisal
47. The balanced scorecard
PART TEN: THE EMERGING BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT OF ACCOUNTING
48. The supply chain and enterprise resource planning systems
49. E-commerce and accounting
Appendices
1. Interest tables
2. Answers to Review Questions
3. Glossary
Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 6/e
Karen P. Schoenebeck
Mark P. BradyGames
ISBN 10: 0132746247
ISBN 13: 9780132746243
352pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For use as a supplement in any accounting course where analyzing financial statements and understanding
financial ratios is important.
This activity workbook helps students analyze real company financial statement information. Each activity
concentrates on only one aspect of the analysis and uses data from well-known corporations to pique students'
interest and add relevancy.
30
Financial Accounting Theory, 6/e
William R. Scott, University of Waterloo
ISBN 10: 0135119154
ISBN 13: 9780135119150
592pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Appropriate for Financial Accounting Theory courses at both the senior undergraduate and
professional master's levels.
Written in a friendly style with clear explanations, Financial Accounting Theory provides a thorough
presentation of financial accounting theories. This new edition continues to include coverage of accounting
standards oriented to IASB standards as well as major U.S. accounting standards.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction
Accounting Under Ideal Conditions
The Decision Usefulness Approach to Financial Reporting
Efficient Securities Markets
The Information Approach to Decision Usefulness
The Measurement Approach to Decision Usefulness
Measurement Applications
Economic Consequences and Positive Accounting Theory
An Analysis of Conflict
Executive Compensation
Earnings Management
Standard Setting: Economic Issues
Standard Setting: Political Issues
Shapland & Turner Cases in Financial Accounting
Julie Shapland
Cynthia Turner
ISBN 10: 0132752816
ISBN 13: 9780132752817
240pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate financial accounting courses.
A rich, relatable, and student-friendly set of cases, grounded in accounting fundamentals.
The cases found in this text involve realistic, small business settings that students will be familiar with–all of
which will guide students through the entire accounting processing cycle.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
Project
Project
Project
Project
DJ
Wedding Planner
Orthodontist
Movie Theater
College Accounting, 12/e
Jeffrey L. Slater, North Shore Community College
ISBN 10: 013277206X
ISBN 13: 9780132772068
936pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For college Accounting and Bookkeeping courses.
Back to basics.
College Accounting: A Practical Approach focuses on getting back to the basics of accounting by providing
students with plenty of detailed instruction, opportunities to apply what they learn, and a basic overview of
accounting in today’s technology-driven world.
This text is available in two different volumes: Chapters 1-25 which cover a two semester course and Chapters 112 which cover the material for one semester.
31
Also Available:
College Accounting Chapters 1-12 with Study Guide and Working Papers, 12/e
ISBN 10: 0132772175
ISBN 13: 9780132772174
984pp ©2013 Paper
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Accounting Concepts and Procedures
Debits and Credits: Analyzing and Recording Business Transactions
Beginning the Accounting Cycle
The Accounting Cycle Continued
The Accounting Cycle Completed
Banking Procedure and Control of Cash
Calculating Pay and Payroll Taxes: The Beginning of the Payroll Process
Paying, Recording, and Reporting Payroll and Payroll Taxes: The Conclusion of the Payroll Process
Sales and Cash Receipts
Purchases and Cash Payments
Preparing a Worksheet for a Merchandise Company
Completion of the Accounting Cycle for a Merchandise Company
Accounting for Bad Debts
Notes Receivable and Notes Payable
Accounting for Merchandise Inventory
Accounting for Property, Plant, Equipment, and Intangible Assets
Partnership
Corporations: Organizations and Stock
Corporations: Stock Values, Dividends, Treasury Stocks, and Retained Earnings
Corporations and Bonds Payable
Statement of Cash Flows
Lakeside Company: Case Studies in Auditing, 12/e
John M. Trussel
J. Douglas Frazer
ISBN 10: 0132567253
ISBN 13: 9780132567251
168pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate/graduate courses in auditing.
The cases in The Lakeside Company create a realistic view of auditing by putting the abstract concepts into
practice.
MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19: A Hands On Approach, 5/e
Mark Vallely
ISBN 10: 1442545860
ISBN 13: 9781442545861
252pp ©2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
The aim of MYOB A Hands on Approach is for students to acquire an introductory understanding of the MYOB
programme and an appreciation of the power of integrated accounting information systems to produce the
information that managers and owners of small to medium sized businesses need to make sound business
decisions. This very comprehensive and practical book steps students through the entire process of setting up
and using MYOB AccountRight Enterprise Version 19.
Designed for students of introductory accounting or accounting information systems, this material has been
successfully class tested with the author’s own students over a number of semesters.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Getting Started. Installing MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19
File Creation, Security and Maintenance
Tax Codes and the Accounts List
The Expenditure Cycle: Cash Disbursements and Purchasing
The Expenditure Cycle: The Set Up of Inventory and Other Items
The Expenditure Cycle: Purchasing and Supplier Payments
The Revenue Cycle: Sales and Cash Collections
Bank reconciliations and adjusting entries
The Human Resource and Payroll Cycle
Integrated MYOB and End of Month Process
32
Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand, 6/e
Karen Van Peursem
Michael Pratt
Carolyn Cordery
ISBN 10: 1442543671
ISBN 13: 9781442543676
440pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Now in its 6th edition, Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand continues to provide tertiary students
of auditing with a comprehensive introduction to the conceptual issues and application of audit theory to practice.
This new edition has been substantially revised, condensed and fully updated. There is a greater focus on
subsystems and an increased number of review exercises, diagrams and updates to the standards, law and case
studies. Structured learning outcomes, exercises and review questions promote and encourage student
engagement with the topic.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Introduction to audit and assurance services
Theories of auditing
Audit concepts and standards
The role of auditors through history
Statutory law and public sector audit
The profession and ethics
The courts and the auditor’s role: the legal liability of auditors
Audit risk
Judgment and materiality
Audit evidence and audit testing
The audit process: an overview
Practical aspects of audit planning
Principles of internal control
Internal control and the auditor
Assurance services and internal audit
Specific analytical procedures
Audit sampling
Auditing computerised accounting systems
Audit firms: quality control, working papers and computer tools
Risk-based auditing of the sales subsystem
Risk-based auditing of the expenditure subsystems
Risk-based auditing of the warehousing subsystem
Risk-based auditing of financing and fixed asset cycles
Completion and review
Communication: Audit report and opinion
Financial Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
Pauline Weetman
ISBN 10: 0273761811
ISBN 13: 9780273761815
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
The fifth edition of this revised and fully updated text continues to provide students with a clear and wellstructured introduction to financial accounting within a sound conceptual framework.
The book retains all of the classic features that have contributed to the book’s success: clarity of expression, the
focus on the accounting equation, student activities and real-life commentaries running through each chapter,
and the inclusion of the Safe and Sure Annual Report as an example of a listed company. There is a strong
emphasis on the Conceptual Framework of the International Accounting Standards Board and on the 'why' rather
than simply the 'what' of the subject. The underpinning conceptual framework focuses on the needs of users of
financial information.
Table of Contents
PART 1: A CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK: SETTING THE SCENE
1.
Who needs accounting?
2.
A system approach to financial reporting: the accounting equation
3.
Financial statements from the accounting equation
4.
Ensuring the quality of financial statements
PART 2: REPORTING THE TRANSACTIONS OF A BUSINESS
5.
Accounting information for service businesses
6.
Accounting information for trading businesses
PART 3: RECOGNITION IN FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
7.
Published financial statements
8.
Non-current (fixed) assets
9.
Current assets
10. Current Liabilities
33
11. Provisions and non-current (long-term) liabilities
12. Ownership interest
PART 4: ANALYSIS AND ISSUES IN REPORTING
13. Ratio Analysis
14. Reporting corporate performance
15. Reporting cash flows
Glossary of financial accounting terms
Appendices
1: Information extracted from annual report of Safe and Sure plc, used throughout Financial Accounting
2: Solutions to numerical and technical questions in Financial Accounting
Financial & Management Accounting, 5/e
Pauline Weetman
ISBN 10: 027376196X
ISBN 13: 9780273761969
©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
This revised and fully updated edition continues to provide students with a clear and well-structured introduction
to financial and management accounting.
The fifth edition of Weetman's Financial & Management Accounting retains all of the classic features that
have contributed to the book’s success such as, clarity of expression, the focus on the accounting equation,
student activities, real-life commentaries running through each chapter, and the inclusion of the Safe and Sure
Annual Report as a real world example of a listed company.
Table of Contents
PART 1: A CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK: SETTING THE SCENE
1.
Who needs accounting?
2.
A systematic approach to financial reporting: the accounting equation
3.
Financial statements from the accounting equation
4.
Ensuring the quality of financial statements
PART 2: REPORTING THE TRANSACTIONS OF A BUSINESS
5.
Accounting information for service businesses
6.
Accounting information for trading businesses
PART 3: RECOGNITION IN FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
7.
Published financial statements
8.
Non-current (fixed) assets
9.
Current assets
10. Current liabilities
11. Provisions and non-current (long-term) liabilities
12. Ownership interest
PART 4: ANALYSIS AND ISSUES IN REPORTING
13. Ratio analysis
14. Reporting corporate performance
15. Reporting cash flows
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
PART 5: SETTING THE SCENE AND DEFINING THE BASIC TOOLS OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
16. Functions of management accounting
17. Classification of costs
18. Product costs: materials, labour and overheads
PART 6: JOB COSTS AND STOCK VALUATION
19. Job costing
PART 7: DECISION MAKING
20. Breakeven analysis and short-term decision making
21. Preparing a budget
22. Standard costs
23. Performance evaluation and feedback reporting
PART 9: CAPITAL INVESTMENT APPRAISAL AND BUSINESS STRATEGY
24. Capital investment appraisal
25. Business strategy and management accounting
Appendices
I Information extracted from annual report of Safe and Sure Group plc, used throughout Financial
Accounting
II Solutions to numerical and technical questions in Financial Accounting
III Solutions to numerical and technical questions in Management Accounting Index
34
Taxation
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Corporations,
Partnerships, Estates and Trusts, 26/e
Kenneth E. Anderson
Thomas R. Pope
John L. Kramer
ISBN 10: 0132891549
ISBN 13: 9780132891547
984pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For any first course in Federal Taxation at the undergraduate or MBA level.
The most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
The Pope/Anderson/Kramer series is unsurpassed in blending the technical content of the most recent federal
taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
Table of Contents
1.
Tax Research
2.
Corporate Formations and Capital Structure
3.
The Corporate Income Tax
4.
Corporate Nonliquidating Distributions
5.
Other Corporate Tax Levies
6.
Corporate Liquidating Distributions
7.
Corporate Acquisitions and Reorganizations
8.
Consolidated Tax Returns
9.
Partnership Formation and Operation
10. Special Partnership Issues
11. S Corporations
12. The Gift Tax
13. The Estate Tax
14. Income Taxation of Trusts and Estates
15. Administrative Procedures
16. U.S. Taxation of Foreign-Related Transactions
Appendix A: Tax Research Working Paper File
Appendix B: Completed Tax Forms
Appendix C: MACRS Tables
Appendix D: Glossary
Appendix E: AICPA Statements on Standards for Tax Services No. 1-7 (November 2009)
Appendix F: Comparison of Tax Attributes for C Corporations, Partnerships, and S Corporations
Appendix G: Reserved
Appendix H: Actuarial Tables
Appendix I: Index of Code Sections
Appendix J: Index of Treasury Regulations
Appendix K: Index of Government Promulgations
Appendix L: Index of Court Cases
Appendix M: Subject Index
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Comprehensive,
26/e
Thomas R. Pope
Kenneth E. Anderson
John L. Kramer
ISBN 10: 0132891646
ISBN 13: 9780132891646
1600pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For any first course in Federal Taxation at the undergraduate or MBA level.
The most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
The Pope/Anderson/Kramer series is unsurpassed in blending the technical content of the most recent federal
taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
Table of Contents
INDIVIDUALS
1.
An Introduction to Taxation
2.
Determination of Tax
3.
Gross Income: Inclusions
4.
Gross Income: Exclusions
5.
Property Transactions: Capital Gains and Losses
6.
Deductions and Losses
7.
Itemized Deductions
8.
Losses and Bad Debts
9.
Employee Expenses and Deferred Compensation
35
10. Depreciation, Cost Recovery, Amortization, and Depletion
11. Accounting Periods and Methods
12. Property Transactions: Nontaxable Exchanges
13. Property Transactions: Section 1231 and Recapture
14. Special Tax Computation Methods, Tax Credits, and Payment of Tax
CORPORATIONS
1.
Tax Research
2.
Corporate Formations and Capital Structure
3.
The Corporate Income Tax
4.
Corporate Nonliquidating Distributions
5.
Other Corporate Tax Levies
6.
Corporate Liquidating Distributions
7.
Corporate Acquisitions and Reorganizations
8.
Consolidated Tax Returns
9.
Partnership Formation and Operation
10. Special Partnership Issues
11. S Corporations
12. The Gift Tax
13. The Estate Tax
14. Income Taxation of Trusts and Estates
15. Administrative Procedures
Tables: 2011 Tax Tables and Rate Schedules
Appendix A: Tax Research Working Paper File
Appendix B: Completed Tax Forms
Appendix C: MACRS Tables
Appendix D: Glossary
Appendix E: AICPA Statements on Standards for Tax Services No. 1-7 (November 2009)
Appendix F: Comparison of Tax Attributes for C Corporations, Partnerships, and S Corporations
Appendix G: Reserved
Appendix H: Actuarial Tables
Appendix I: Index of Code Sections
Appendix J: Index of Treasury Regulations
Appendix K: Index of Government Promulgations
Appendix L: Index of Court Cases
Appendix M: Subject Index
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Individuals, 26/e
Thomas R. Pope
Kenneth E. Anderson
John L. Kramer
ISBN 10: 0132891379
ISBN 13: 9780132891370
904pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For any first course in Federal Taxation at the undergraduate or MBA level.
The most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
The Pope/Anderson/Kramer series is unsurpassed in blending the technical content of the most recent federal
taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
Table of Contents
1.
An Introduction to Taxation
2.
Determination of Tax
3.
Gross Income: Inclusions
4.
Gross Income: Exclusions
5.
Property Transactions: Capital Gains and Losses
6.
Deductions and Losses
7.
Itemized Deductions
8.
Losses and Bad Debts
9.
Employee Expenses and Deferred Compensation
10. Depreciation, Cost Recovery, Amortization, and Depletion
11. Accounting Periods and Methods
12. Property Transactions: Nontaxable Exchanges
13. Property Transactions: Section 1231 and Recapture
14. Special Tax Computation Methods, Tax Credits, and Payment of Tax
15. Tax Research
16. Corporations
17. Partnerships and S Corporations
18. Taxes and Investment Planning
Tables: 2011 Tax Tables and Rate Schedules
Appendix A: Tax Research Working Paper File
Appendix B: 2011 Tax Forms
Appendix C: MACRS Tables
Appendix D: Glossary
Appendix E: AICPA Statements on Standards for Tax Services
36
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
F: Index of Code Sections
G: Index of Treasury Regulations
H: Index of Government Promulgations
I: Index of Court Cases
J: Subject Index
37
CIS
Jump Right In: Essential Computer Skills Using
Microsoft Office 2010
Jean Andrews
ISBN 10: 013297570X
ISBN 13: 9780132975704
800pp ©2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
A computer literacy approach completely reinvented for the needs of today's 21st century student
Best-selling author and expert teacher Jean Andrews¿ reinvented the basic approach to teaching computer
literacy for today's students. Andrews focuses on how computers are really used in personal life, academics, and
technical careers. She teaches the #1 competency students need most: the ability to keep learning new skills on
their own.
Every feature in this book is designed to make learning quick and easy. The book covers core computer skills
using real-world projects that help students learn how to use these tools to perform the most common personal
and business tasks:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using and managing Windows 7 computers
•
•
•
Using Excel 2010 to organize data, solve problems, make decisions, and transform data into knowledge
Using the Internet to access and share information, and to do business
Using the Web for academic research
Capturing and organizing information with OneNote 2010
Using Word 2010 to communicate information and apply for a job
Using PowerPoint 2010 to persuade an audience, present a compelling story, or deliver important
information
Making informed computer buying decisions
Keeping computers reliable, fast, and safe
Table of Contents
PART I: GETTING STARTED
1.
Using Windows 7 to Manage Applications and Data
2.
Finding and Using Information on the Web
3.
Creating Documents with Microsoft Word
PART II: FUNDAMENTAL COMPUTER COMPETENCY
4.
Using the Web for Research
5.
Writing Papers Using Microsoft Word Templates and Tools
6.
Communicating with Others Using the Internet
PART III: ENHANCING YOUR PRODUCTIVITY
7.
Finding a Job Using the Web, a Résumé, and a Business Letter
8.
Persuading an Audience using a PowerPoint Presentation
9.
Adding Action and Sound to a Presentation using PowerPoint
10. Managing Numbers and Text using Excel
11. Organizing and Making Sense of Data using Excel
PART IV: BUYING AND CARING FOR YOUR OWN COMPUTER
12. Connecting to the Internet and Securing a Computer
13. Maintaining a Computer and Fixing Computer Problems
14. Buying Your Own Personal Computer
SOLUTIONS APPENDIX (STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS FOR MASTERING PROJECTS)
1.
Using Windows 7 to Manage Applications and Data
2.
Finding and Using Information on the Web
3.
Creating Documents with Microsoft Word
4.
Using the Web for Research
5.
Writing Papers Using Microsoft Word Templates and Tools
6.
Communicating with Others Using the Internet
7.
Finding a Job Using the Web, a Résumé, and a Business Letter
8.
Persuading an Audience using a PowerPoint Presentation
9.
Adding Action and Sound to a Presentation using PowerPoint
10. Managing Numbers and Text using Excel
11. Organizing and Making Sense of Data using Excel
12. Connecting to the Internet and Securing a Computer
13. Maintaining a Computer and Fixing Computer Problems
14. Buying Your Own Personal Computer
38
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Complete, 10/e
George Beekman, Oregon State University
Ben Beekman
ISBN 10: 0132737515
ISBN 13: 9780132737517
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer concepts often include instruction in Microsoft Office.
Explores the promises and challenges of information technology, along with its effect on businesses, people,
society, and the future.
Digital Planet: Tomorrow’s Technology and You explores information technology on three levels:
· Explanations: Clearly explains what a computer is and what it can (and can’t) do; it clearly explains the
basics of information technology, from multimedia PCs to the Internet and beyond.
· Applications: Illustrates how computers and networks are–and will be–used as practical tools to solve a wide
variety of problems.
· Implications: Puts technology in a human context, illustrating how digital devices and networks affect our
lives, our world, and our future.
Also Available:
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Introductory, 10/e
ISBN 10: 0132737523
ISBN 13: 9780132737524
480pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1.
Exploring Our Digital Planet
2.
Hardware Basics: Inside the Box
3.
Hardware Basics: Peripherals
4.
Software Basics: The Ghost in the Machine
5.
Productivity Applications
6.
Graphics, Digital Media, and Multimedia
7.
Database Applications and Privacy Implications
8.
Networking and Digital Communication
9.
The Evolving Internet
10. Computer Security and Risks
11. Computers at Work, School, and Home
12. Information Systems in Business
13. E-Commerce and E-Business The Evolving Internet Economy
14. Systems Design and Development
15. Is Artificial Intelligence Real?
Appendix A Basics
Technology In Action Complete, 9/e
Alan R. Evans
Kendall Martin
Mary Anne S. Poatsy, Montgomery County Community College
ISBN 10: 0132928388
ISBN 13: 9780132928380
736pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer concepts or computer literacy, often including instruction in
Microsoft Office.
A Computer Concepts Text Focused on Today’s Student!
Technology in Action engages students by covering topics in a progressive approach and providing rich
companion media.
Also Available:
Technology In Action Introductory, 9/e
ISBN 10: 0132924528
ISBN 13: 9780132924528
550pp ©2013 Paper
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
How Will You Save the World?
Looking at Computers: Understanding the Parts
Using the Internet: Making the Most of the Web’s Resources
Application Software: Programs That Let You Work and Play
Using System Software: The Operating System, Utility Programs, and File Management
Understanding and Assessing Hardware: Evaluating Your System
Networking: Connecting Computing Devices
Digital Lifestyle: Managing Digital Data and Devices
39
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Securing Your System: Protecting Your Digital Data and Devices
Behind the Scenes: Software Programming
Behind the Scenes: Databases and Information Systems
Behind the Scenes: Networking and Security in the Business World
Behind the Scenes: How the Internet Works
Computer Literacy for IC3 Unit 2: Using Productivity Software
Robert L. Ferrett, Eastern Michigan University
John Preston
Sally Preston
ISBN 10: 0132861070
ISBN 13: 9780132861076
640pp ©2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer literacy.
Written to provide all students with an opportunity to learn and demonstrate computer and Internet literacy.
Computer Literary for IC3 was written to align with a certification called “Internet and Computing Core
Certification (IC3)”. This certification is for users who want to demonstrate critical computer and Internet skills
valued in today’s academic and professional environments. The Computer Literacy for IC3 text is written to meet
the certification standards and provide students with a broad understanding of the key components of computer
literacy in order to prepare for the exam.
This certification has 3 units:
• Unit 1: Computing Fundamentals (computer concepts)
• Unit 2: Using Productivity Software
• Unit 3: Living Online (the Internet)
Each of these units is available as a separate Computer Literacy for IC3 text. This text contains: Unit 2: Using
Productivity Software — Microsoft Office 2010 and covers productivity software based on Microsoft Office
2010 including common program functions, word processing functions, spreadsheet functions, and presentation
software functions.
The third edition of Computer Literacy for IC3 has been revised to keep up with the IC3 program’s evolution,
which reflects the recent changes in computers and technology. Instead of publishing one large, comprehensive
text, the three units are now available as separate, smaller texts.
Table of Contents
IC3-2009 UNIT 2—USING PRODUCTIVITY SOFTWARE OUTLINE
1.
Starting with Office Applications
2.
Creating a New Word Document and Inserting Graphics and Tables
3.
Format and Organize Paragraphs and Documents
4.
Formatting Informational Documents
5.
Work with Collaborative Tools
6.
Creating a Formatting a Worksheet
7.
Managing Money Using Formulas and Functions
8.
Giving Meaning to Data Using Charts
9.
Creating a Presentation
10. Enhancing a Presentation
11. Creating a Customized Database
12. Retrieving Information from Your Database
Computer Literacy for IC3 Update for Windows 7
Robert L. Ferrett, Eastern Michigan University
John Preston
Sally Preston
ISBN 10: 0132873974
ISBN 13: 9780132873970
100pp ©2012 Spiral Bound
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer literacy.
Written to provide all students with an opportunity to learn and demonstrate computer and Internet literacy.
Computer Literary for IC3 was written to align with a certification called “Internet and Computing Core
Certification (IC3)”. This certification is for users who want to demonstrate critical computer and Internet skills
valued in today’s academic and professional environments. The Computer Literacy for IC3 text is written to meet
the certification standards and provide students with a broad understanding of the key components of computer
literacy in order to prepare for the exam.
** This is a one-chapter supplement. **
Table of Contents
Learning Outcomes
Identify the taskbar and its uses
Identify desktop icons and their uses
Identify windows and their uses
Identify dialog and warning boxes and their uses
40
Add a gadget to the Windows desktop
Identify how to use a mouse or trackball
Identify how to minimize, maximize, and restore down windows
Identify how to resize, move, and scroll windows
Identify how to shut down and restart the computer
Identify how to log off and switch users
Identify how to put the computer in sleep mode
Identify how to put the computer in lock mode
Identify how to shut down nonresponsive programs
Identify how to use the Start menu
Identify how to use online help
Pin a shortcut to the Start menu
Move between programs
Understand folders
Use folders on the desktop
Display properties
Rename and delete desktop shortcut icons
Identify file types
Create folders and change views
Sort files
Create, copy, move, and delete folders
Select, copy, move, and delete files
Search for files and folders
Restore files from the recycle bin
Name folders and files with standard conventions
Manage files and folders
Open problem files
Visualizing Technology, Complete
Debra Geoghan
ISBN 10: 0137056346
ISBN 13: 9780137056347
560pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in Computer Concepts or computer literacy often including instruction in
Microsoft Office.
Visualizing Technology is the new Computer Concepts book that enables instructors to see Computer Concepts
through their students' eyes! This book covers all of the traditional topics taught in a Computer Concepts
course but in a non-traditional way that is more appealing to visual and kinesthetic learners.
Also Available:
Visualizing Technology, Introductory
ISBN 10: 013137625X
ISBN 13: 9780131376250
432pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1.
What Is a Computer?
2.
Hardware
3.
File Management
4.
Digital Devices and Multimedia
5.
Application Software
6.
System Software
7.
The Internet and World Wide Web
8.
Communicating and Sharing: The Social Web
9.
Networks and Communication
10. Security and Privacy
11. Databases
12. Software and Application Development
Appendix 1: Blogger
Appendix 2: Mindmaps
Appendix 3: Google Docs
Practical Computing, 3/e
Lynn Hogan, University of Northern Alabama
Amy Rutledge
ISBN 10: 0132839962
ISBN 13: 9780132839969
400pp ©2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
41
Basic Approach
For all beginning-level courses in computing.
Practical Computing addresses the unique challenges novices face in mastering PCs. It combines user-friendly
design, creative multimedia tools, and a focus on useful skills students can apply immediately, either at home or
in the workplace.
Table of Contents
1.
Understanding Computer Applications
2.
Understanding the Operating System and File Management
3.
Navigating the Internet
4.
Working with PowerPoint
5.
Working with Word
6.
Working with Excel
7.
Understanding Networking and Computer Security
8.
Exploring Online Communication and Cloud Computing
9.
Exploring Digital Entertainment and Multimedia Applications
Appendix
Computers Are Your Future Complete, 12/e
Cathy LaBerta
ISBN 10: 0132818310
ISBN 13: 9780132818315
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer concepts or computer literacy often including instruction in
Microsoft Office.
Engages students with a refreshing and easy to learn from style, while maintaining an encyclopedic approach and
popular magazine-style format.
Today’s students want a practical “what it is” and “how it works” approach to computers and computing, with less
explanation of “when and why.” Computers Are Your Future serves as a valuable computer technology
reference tool without being overwhelming or intimidating.
Also Available:
Computers Are Your Future, Introductory, 12/e
ISBN 10: 0132545187
ISBN 13: 9780132545181
504PP ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Computers and You
Inside the System Unit
Input/Output and Storage
System Software
Application Software: Tools for Productivity
The Internet & the World Wide Web
Networks: Communicating and Sharing Resources
Wired and Wireless Communication
Privacy, Crime, and Security
Careers and Certification
Programming Languages and Program Development
Databases and Information Systems
Systems Analysis and Design
Enterprise Computing
Next Series: Web 2.0, 2/e
Diane Coyle
ISBN 10: 0132840154
ISBN 13: 9780132840156
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses on Computer Concepts or Microsoft Office Applications.
The NEXT Series making it easy to teach what’s next!
New software applications with the potential to transform our everyday lives are constantly emerging onto the
market. With this in mind, Introduction to Web 2.0 provides innovative instructors an opportunity to incorporate
more than just the basic Office applications into their course. As part of an academic series written on alternative
technology, this text presents key information on Web 2.0 and encourages hands-on learning throughout the
material.
42
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Introduction to Web 2.0
Social Networks
Blogs
Podcasts
Wikis
Additional Collaboration Tools
Next Series: Best Practices in using Office 2010
Michael Miller
ISBN 10: 0132540312
ISBN 13: 9780132540315
300pp ©2013 Paper
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Personal Apps
Michael Miller
ISBN 10: 0132552124
ISBN 13: 9780132552127
384pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Revolutionary new software applications are constantly emerging onto the market. As part of an academic series
written on alternative technology, this text presents key information on Google Applications Comprehensive and
encourages hands-on learning throughout the material.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Creating and Managing a Google Account
Using Google Search
Using Other Google Search Tools
Using iGoogle
Using Google Books
Using Google Maps and Google Earth
Using Google Translate
Using Gmail
Using Google Buzz
Using Google Calendar
Using Google Groups
Using Google Reader
Using Blogger
Using Google Talk
Using Picasa
Using YouTube
Using the Google Chrome Browser
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Productivity Apps
Michael Miller
ISBN 10: 0132725185
ISBN 13: 9780132725187
320pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Revolutionary new software applications are constantly emerging onto the market. As part of an academic series
written on alternative technology, this text presents key information on Google Applications Productivity Apps and
encourages hands-on learning throughout the material.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Creating and Managing a Google Account
Using Google Docs
Using Google Docs for Advanced Operations
Using Google Spreadsheets
Using Google Spreadsheets Advanced Operations
Using Google Presentations
Using Google Presentations Advanced Operations
Using Gmail
43
9.
10.
11.
12.
Using
Using
Using
Using
Google Talk
Google Calendar
Google Sites
the Google Chrome Browser
Learning Microsoft Office 2010
Suzanne Weixel
Faithe Wempen
Basic Approach
Prepare students for Microsoft® Office 2010!
Learning Microsoft® office 2010 series features a student-friendly, step-by-step format with clear, full-screen
shots to engage students and help them work independently.
In the Series:
Learning Microsoft Office Word 2010, Student Edition
ISBN 10: 0135112265
ISBN 13: 9780135112267
608pp ©2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Learning Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Student Edition
ISBN 10: 0135112109
ISBN 13: 9780135112106
608pp ©2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Learning Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2010, Student Edition
ISBN 10: 0135112095
ISBN 13: 9780135112090
392pp ©2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Learning Microsoft Office Publisher 2010, Student Edition
ISBN 10: 0135108993
ISBN 13: 9780135108994
384pp ©2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Exploring
Robert T. Grauer, University of Miamo
Basic Approach
The goal of the Exploring series has been to move students beyond the point and click, helping them
understand the why and how behind each skill. The Exploring series for Office 2010 also enables students to
extend the learning beyond the classroom.
Students go to college now with a different set of skills than they did five years ago. With this in mind, the
Exploring series seeks to move students beyond the basics of the software at a faster pace, without sacrificing
coverage of the fundamental skills that everybody needs to know. A lot of learning takes place outside of the
classroom, and the Exploring series provides learning tools that students can access anytime, anywhere.
In the Series:
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1
ISBN 10: 0132873605
ISBN 13: 9780132873604
1176pp ©2013 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with VBA
ISBN 10: 0132140136
ISBN 13: 9780132140133
2166pp ©2012 Paper
44
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with Web Apps
ISBN 10: 0132140136
ISBN 13: 9780132149624
192pp ©2012 Paper
Exploring Getting Started with Internet Explorer 9
ISBN 10: 0132886219
ISBN 13: 9780132886215
©2013 Sprialbound
Exploring Getting Started with Programming
ISBN 10: 0132896540
ISBN 13: 9780132896542
96pp ©2013 Sprialbound
Exploring Microsoft SharePoint 2010
ISBN 10: 0138007373
ISBN 13: 9780138007379
456pp ©2012 Sprialbound
Exploring Getting Started with SharePoint 2010
ISBN 10: 0132882086
ISBN 13: 9780132882088
96pp ©2012 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #1
ISBN 10: 0132766884
ISBN 13: 9780132766883
©2013 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #2
ISBN 10: 0132766949
ISBN 13: 9780132766944
©2013 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #3
ISBN 10: 0132766930
ISBN 13: 9780132766937
©2014 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #4
ISBN 10: 0132766914
ISBN 13: 9780132766913
©2013 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #5
ISBN 10: 0132766892
ISBN 13: 9780132766890
©2013 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #6
ISBN 10: 0132766957
ISBN 13: 9780132766951
©2013 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #7
ISBN 10: 0132766906
ISBN 13: 9780132766906
©2013 Sprialbound
45
GO!
Shelley Gaskin, Pasadena City College
Basic Approach
Teach the course YOU want in LESS TIME!
The primary goal of the GO! Series, aside from teaching computer applications, is ease of implementation, with
an approach that is based on clearly-defined projects for students and a one of a kind supplements package.
In the Series:
GO! with Office 2010 Volume 1
ISBN 10: 0132840162
ISBN 13: 9780132840163
928pp ©2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Microsoft Excel 2010 Introductory
ISBN 10: 0132743787
ISBN 13: 9780132743785
608pp ©2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Office 2010 Integrated Projects
ISBN 10: 0132843307
ISBN 13: 9780132843300
344pp ©2012 Paper
GO! with Microsoft Office Web Apps Getting Started
ISBN 10: 0132544849
ISBN 13: 9780132544849
72pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Go! All in One: Computer Concepts and Applications
ISBN 10: 0132844125
ISBN 13: 9780132844123
864pp ©2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started
ISBN 10: 013293454X
ISBN 13: 9780132934541
80pp ©2012 Paper
GO! with Microsoft OneNote 2010 Getting Started
ISBN 10: 0132542994
ISBN 13: 9780132542999
72pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Comprehensive
ISBN 10: 0132791285
ISBN 13: 9780132791281
352pp ©2012 SpiralBound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Getting Started
ISBN 10: 0132702536X
ISBN 13: 9780137025367
88pp ©2012 Paper
GO! with Microsoft Publisher 2010 Comprehensive
ISBN 10: 0132791722
ISBN 13: 9780132791724
368pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Getting Started
ISBN 10: 0132543028
ISBN 13: 9780132543026
64pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
46
GO! with Microsoft Windows 7 Comprehensive
ISBN 10: 013237575
ISBN 13: 9780132375757
720pp ©2012 SpiralBound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Microsoft Windows Live and Windows Live Essentials Getting Started
ISBN 10: 013254329X
ISBN 13: 9780132543293
72pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Office 365 Getting Started
ISBN 10: 013295574
ISBN 13: 9780132955744
100pp ©2013 Paper
Skills for Success
Kris Townsend, Spokane Falls Community College
Basic Approach
Skills for Success is written with today’s students in mind. The book provides step-by-step guidance in an
easy-to-use format. Each skill is presented on a two-page spread with clearly numbered steps and clear
instruction. Key skills required to get started with Microsoft Office are covered, giving students a complete
introduction to the core tools.
In the Series:
Skills for Success with Office 2010, Volume 1
ISBN 10: 0132840324
ISBN 13: 9780132840323
656pp ©2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Skills for Success with Office 2010 Web Applications Getting Started
ISBN 10: 0132550040
ISBN 13: 9780132550048
80pp ©2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Skills for Success with Concepts Getting Started
ISBN 10: 013508834
ISBN 13: 9780135088340
104pp ©2012 Paper
Skills for Success with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started
ISBN 10: 0132934558
ISBN 13: 9780132934558
48pp ©2012 Paper
Skills for Success with Windows 7 Comprehensive
ISBN 10: 0132375761
ISBN 13: 9780132375764
352pp ©2012 SprialBound w/CD-ROM
Your Office
Amy S. Kinser, Indiana University
Basic Approach
Your Office series is the Office Applications textbook written for instructors who want more than a ‘skill & drill’
book that enables students to learn discreet tasks but fails to illustrate the big picture of how these skills work
together. Your Office series bridges the gap between skill and application, and empowers students to master
Office as a tool to solve problems and make decisions.
Our cases progress students from learning the skills in each Office series to using the applications as tools to
47
make business decisions.
Our unique modular structure provides a strong foundation for students through practice in each workshop
and then synthesizes the objectives covered over two workshops, challenging students to really retain what they
learned as opposed to learning and then forgetting soon after.
Our series scenario introduces a large global business (the resort and spa) made up of smaller businesses (golf
pro shop, spa, restaurants, event planning, etc) featured in the cases that run throughout all four
applications. This approach gives students a solid understanding of how an organization works by exposing them
to how individuals in all facets of a business interact with tools like Microsoft Office and use information to make
decisions.
In the Series:
Your Office: Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1
ISBN 10: 0132604299
ISBN 13: 9780132604291
1088pp ©2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Microsoft Excel 2010 Comprehensive
ISBN 10: 0132610442
ISBN 13: 9780132610445
736pp ©2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Microsoft Access 2010 Comprehensive
ISBN 10: 0132560887
ISBN 13: 9780132560887
736pp ©2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Advanced Cases for Microsoft Office 2010
ISBN 10: 0132675498
ISBN 13: 9780132675499
100pp ©2013 Paper
Your Office: Getting Started with Business Communication
ISBN 10: 013267548X
ISBN 13: 9780132675482
100pp ©2013 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Computing Concepts
ISBN 10: 0132625350
ISBN 13: 9780132625357
100pp ©2013 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Outlook 2010
ISBN 10: 0132675463
ISBN 13: 9780132675468
96pp ©2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Web 2.0
ISBN 10: 0132675455
ISBN 13: 9780132675451
100pp ©2013 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Windows 7
ISBN 10: 0132675471
ISBN 13: 9780132675475
100pp ©2012 Spiral Bound
48
Business Information Systems: Technology, Development and
Management, 5/e
Paul Bocij
Andrew Greasley
Simon Hickie
ISBN 10: 0273736450
ISBN 13: 9780273736455
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive introduction to the technology, development and management of business information systems.
The book assumes no prior knowledge of IS or IT, so that new concepts and terms are defined as clearly as
possible, with explanations in the text, and definitions at the margin. In this fast-moving area, the book covers
both the crucial underpinnings of the subject as well as the most recent business and technology applications.
It is written for students on any IS, BIS or MIS course from undergraduate to postgraduate and MBA level within
a Business or Computer Science Department.
Corporate Computer Security, 3/e
Randy J. Boyle
Raymond R. Panko
ISBN 10: 0132599023
ISBN 13: 9780132599023
688pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in IT Security.
A strong business focus through a solid technical presentation of security tools.
Boyle/Panko provides a strong business focus along with a solid technical understanding of security tools. This
text gives students the IT security skills they need for the workplace.
This edition is more business focused and contains additional hands-on projects, coverage of wireless and data
security, and case studies.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
The Threat Environment
Planning and Policy
Cryptography
Secure Networks
Access Control
Firewalls
Host Hardening
Application Security
Data Protection
Incident and Disaster Response
Managing Information Technology, 7/e
Carol V. Brown
Daniel W. DeHayes
Jeffrey A. Hoffer
Wainright E. Martin
William C. Perkins
ISBN 10: 0132737531
ISBN 13: 9780132737531
744pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For graduate and executive level MIS students, and practicing IS managers.
A thorough and practical guide to IT management practices and issues.
Managing Information Technology provides comprehensive coverage of IS management practices and
technology trends for advanced students and managers. Through an approach that offers up-to-date chapter
content and full-length case studies, this text presents a unique set of materials that educators can customize to
their students’ needs.
The sixth edition has been thoroughly updated and streamlined to reflect current IS practices.
Table of Contents
PART I: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
1.
Managing IT in a Digital World
2.
Computer Systems
3.
Telecommunications and Networking
4.
The Data Resource
PART II: APPLYING INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
5.
Enterprise Systems
49
6.
Managerial Support Systems
7.
E-Business Systems
PART III: ACQUIRING INFORMATION SYSTEMS
8.
Basic Systems Concepts and Tools
9.
Methodologies for Custom Software Development
10. Methodologies for Purchased Software Packages
11. IT Project Management
PART IV: THE INFORMATION MANGEMENT SYSTEM
12. Planning Information Systems Resources
13. Leading the Information Systems Function
14. Information Security
15. Legal, Ethical, and Social Issues
E-Business and E-Commerce Management: Strategy,
Implementation and Practice, 5/e
Dave Chaffey
ISBN 10: 0273752014
ISBN 13: 9780273752011
768pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
This bestselling textbook offers a comprehensive introduction to the theory and practice of e-business and ecommerce management. The author, Dave Chaffey, brings his trademarks of authority, clarity of expression and
teaching expertise to bear on a subject in which he actively lectures and consults.
Popular for its cutting-edge and contemporary coverage, this text offers an international approach and a good
balance between the technical and managerial topics of central importance to developing an understanding of this
subject. It is an engaging read, packed with real-life examples and case studies.
Developed for students studying e-business or e-commerce at undergraduate or postgraduate level, and also
used by many business managers, this is the essential text to keep pace with technology, strategy and
implementation.
Table of Contents
I: INTRODUCTION
1.
Introduction to e-business and e-commerce
2.
E-commerce fundamentals
3.
E-business infrastructure
4.
E-environment
II: STRATEGY AND APPLICATIONS
5.
E-business strategy
6.
Supply chain management
7.
E-procurement
8.
E-marketing
9.
Customer relationship management
III: IMPLEMENTATION
10. Change management
11. Analysis and design
12. Implementation and maintenance
SharePoint for Students
Carey Cole
Steve Fox
David M. Kroenke
ISBN 10: 0130000094
ISBN 13: 9780130000095
192pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For any course that teaches the basics of Microsoft® SharePoint along with how businesses might use
it to be more successful.
The SharePoint skills needed for workplace success.
In today’s online working environment, many businesses use SharePoint—the industry’s leading collaboration
tool. To help students gain the SharePoint skills that these businesses are looking for from future employees,
SharePoint for Students teaches the fundamental concepts and skills needed to successfully collaborate and solve
business problems.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Why Use SharePoint
SharePoint Sites
SharePoint Libraries
SharePoint Lists
Sharing Team Knowledge: Survey, Wikis, and Blogs
Customizing a SharePoint Site
50
7.
8.
9.
Creating and Using Workflow in SharePoint
Business Intelligence and SharePoint
SharePoint in the Business World
Hands-On Database
Steve Conger
ISBN 10: 013610827X
ISBN 13: 9780136108276
216pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Introductory Database courses that focus on hands-on experience.
Define and develop a database through a scenario approach.
Hands-On Database uses a scenario-based approach that shows students how to build a database by providing
them with the context of a running case throughout each step of the process.
Table of Contents
1.
Who Needs a Database?
2.
Gathering Information
3.
Requirements and Business Rules
4.
Database Design
5.
Normalization and Design Review
6.
Physical Design
7.
SQL
8.
Is it Secure?
Appendix 1: Using Microsoft Access with the Book
Appendix 2: SQL Server Express
Appendix 3: Visio
Appendix 4: Common Relational Patterns
Business Driven Data Communications
Michael Gendron
ISBN 10: 0131564978
ISBN 13: 9780131564978
432pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in data communications, telecommunications, and
networking.
A business-driven approach to understanding data communications.
Explaining the why and how of data communications, Michael Gendron’s new textbook, Business Driven Data
Communications, takes a business-driven infrastructure design approach—rather than solely focusing on a
technical networking approach. Overall, this text presents technical material within the focus of business process
support and infrastructure design.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1: ICT INFRASTRUCTURE COMPONENTS; A TECHNICAL OVERVIEW
1.
ICT Infrastructure Introductory Concepts
2.
Building the Local Area Network Using Ethernet
3.
Extending the LAN through WAN Connections
4.
Wrapping up Service, User and Enterprise User Components
UNIT 2: ADDITIONAL ICT CONCEPTS
5.
Obtaining Services Through Cloud Computing
6.
Security
UNIT 3: UNDERSTANDING THE BUSINESS OF INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN
7.
Infrastructure and the Enterprise
8.
Business Processes
9.
Assessing the Business Value of ICT Resource Investments
UNIT 4: STEPS TO THE STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT OF IT
10. Analyzing the Organization and its Environment
11. Designing ICT: Documenting Process and Technology Recommendations
12. Summarizing the Business Driven Infrastructure Design Cycle: Analysis, Design, Implementation and
Post-Implementation
51
Modern Database Management, 11/e
Jeffrey A. Hoffer
Ramesh Venkataraman
Heikki Topi
ISBN 10: 0132662256
ISBN 13: 9780132662253
624pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate database management courses.
Provide the latest information in database development.
Focusing on what leading database practitioners say are the most important aspects to database development,
Modern Database Management presents sound pedagogy and includes topics that are critical for the practical
success of database professionals. This text also continues to guide students into the future by presenting
research that could reveal the “next big thing” in database management.
This edition reflects the major trends in information systems and helps students acquire the skills the need to be
successful in today’s database management field.
Strategies for E-Business: Concepts and Cases
Tawfik Jelassi
Albrecht Enders
ISBN 10: 0273757873
ISBN 13: 9780273757870
©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Ideal for MBA students and upper level undergraduates, this book utilises extensive research, strategic
frameworks, a methodological toolset and original real-world case studies to link e-business to overall corporate
strategy. It builds awareness and sharpens students' analytical understanding of how companies have developed
and implemented electronic and mobile commerce strategies in the real world and the issues and challenges that
e-commerce strategies and applications present.
Experiencing MIS, 3/e
David M. Kroenke
ISBN 10: 0132570173
ISBN 13: 9780132570176
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Introduction to Management Information Systems courses.
Flexible modules for instructors, real-world lessons for students.
Help your students see why MIS is the most important course in the business school with Experiencing MIS.
This modular text shows students how businesses use—and need—information systems to accomplish their goals,
objectives, and competitive strategy.
The third edition focuses on the latest innovation in MIS and addresses today’s changing student experience.
Table of Contents
PART 1: MIS AND YOU
1.
The Importance of MIS
2.
Business Processes, Information, and Information Systems
3.
Organizational Strategy, Information Systems, and Competitive Advantage
PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
4.
Hardware and Software
5.
Database Processing
6.
Data Communication
PART 3: USING IS FOR COMPETITIVE STRATEGY
7.
Enterprise Systems
8.
E-Commerce, Web 2.0, and Social Networking
9.
Business Intelligence and Information Systems for Decision Making
PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
10. Information Systems Development
11. Information Systems Management
12. Information Security Management
52
MIS Essentials, 2/e
David M. Kroenke
ISBN 10: 013266500X
ISBN 13: 9780132665001
384pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Introduction to Management Information Systems courses.
A brief text that covers the basics of using IS to solve business problems.
Help your students see why MIS is the most important course in the business school with MIS Essentials. This
brief text shows students how businesses use—and need—information systems to accomplish their goals,
objectives, and competitive strategy.
The second edition focuses on the latest innovation in MIS and addresses today’s changing student experience.
Table of Contents
PART 1: MIS AND YOU
1.
The Importance of MIS
2.
Business Processes, Information, and Information Systems
3.
Organizational Strategy, Information Systems, and Competitive Advantage
PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
4.
Hardware and Software
5.
Database Processing
6.
Data Communication
PART 3: USING IS FOR COMPETITIVE STRATEGY
7.
Enterprise Systems
8.
E-Commerce, Web 2.0, and Social Networking
9.
Business Intelligence and Information Systems for Decision Making
PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
10. Information Systems Development
11. Information Systems Management
12. Information Security Management
Using MIS, 5/e
David Kroenke
ISBN 10: 0273766481
ISBN 13: 9780273766483
528pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Introductory Management Information Systems courses.
An engaging introduction to how people use IS to solve business problems.
Using MIS explains why MIS is the most important course in the business school by showing students how
businesses use information systems and technology to accomplish their goals, objectives, and competitive
strategy.
Table of Contents
PART 1: WHY MIS?
1.
The Importance of MIS
2.
Collaboration Information Systems
3.
Strategy and Information Systems
PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
4.
Hardware and Software
5.
Database Processing
6.
Data Communication and the Cloud
PART 3: USING IS FOR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE
7.
Structured Processes and Information Systems
8.
Social Media Information Systems
9.
Business Intelligence Systems
PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
10. Business Process and Information Systems Development
11. Information Systems Management
12. Information Security Management
53
Database Concepts, 6/e
David M. Kroenke
David Auer
ISBN 10: 0132742926
ISBN 13: 9780132742924
480pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate database management students or business professionals.
Understand, create, and manage small databases.
Written by two of the world's leading database authorities, Database Concepts introduces the essential concepts
students need to create and use small databases.
The fifth edition has been thoroughly revised to reflect the changes in Microsoft® Access 2010, as well as other
database management software.
Database Processing, 12/e
David M. Kroenke
David Auer
ISBN 10: 0132570114
ISBN 13: 9780132570114
640pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate database management courses.
Get students straight to the point of database processing.
Database Processing reflects a new teaching method that gets students straight to the point with its thorough
and modern presentation of database processing fundamentals.
The twelfth edition has been thoroughly updated to reflect the latest software.
Table of Contents
PART 1: GETTING STARTED
1.
Introduction
2.
Introduction to Structured Query Language
PART 2: DATABASE DESIGN
3.
The Relational Model and Normalization
4.
Database Design Using Normalization
5.
Data Modeling and the Entity-Relationship Model
6.
Transforming Data Models in Database Designs
PART 3: DATABASE IMPLEMENTATION
7.
SQL for Database Construction and Application Processing
8.
Database Redesign
PART 4: MULTIUSER DATABASE PROCESSING
9.
Managing Multiuser Databases
10. Managing Databases with SQL Server 2008 R2
ONLINE CHAPTERS:
10A: Managing Databases with Oracle 11g
10B: Managing Databases with MySQL 5.1
PART 5: DATABASE ACCESS STANDARDS
11. The Web Server Environment
12. Database Processing with XML
13. Database Processing for Business Intelligence Systems
Experiencing MIS, 2/e
David Kroenke
Deborah Bunker
David Wilson
ISBN 10: 1442533145
ISBN 13: 9781442533141
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Real World Lessons – Excellent Support
Whatever students do in business, they will experience MIS.
What kind of experience will your students have with MIS? Will they be helpless users who say, ‘I just don’t know
anything about computers, and I don’t want to’? Or will they be managers who say ‘I know there’s a way to use
information systems to get a competitive edge for my business’? Will they find innovative applications of
information technology in the marketplace to raise their own profile or that of their company? Or will they be
business professionals who ‘just don’t get it’?
By presenting a running case narrative throughout, this book will show your students how businesses use - and
54
need - information systems to accomplish their goals and objectives and develop their competitive strategy.
Experiencing MIS 2e is designed to help your students experience MIS right now, at university, where they can
exercise their enquiring minds and build their skills in unlocking the potential of information systems for business.
The text has been designed to be approachable, easy-to-use, sometimes humorous, with an upbeat and in-yourface attitude, but always with the goal of underlining the importance of MIS to all business people in the 21st
Century.
Experiencing MIS offers basic topic coverage of MIS in its 12 chapters and more in-depth, expanded coverage
in its 13 chapter extensions. This modular organisation allows you to pick and choose among those topics to
tailor-fit your course. The Australian adaptation brings your student’s experience of MIS closer to home with new
local examples, case studies and trends.
Table of Contents
1.
IS in the life of business professionals
2.
Business processes, information and information systems
3.
Organisational strategy, information systems, and competitive advantage
4.
Hardware and software
5.
Database processing
6.
Data communications
7.
Business Process Management
8.
E-Commerce and Web 2.0
9.
Business intelligence and information systems for decision making
10. Information systems development
11. Information systems management
12. Information security management
Chapter Extension 1 Improving Your Collaboration Skills
Chapter Extension 2 Using Collaboration Information Systems
Chapter Extension 3 Information Systems and Decision Making
Chapter Extension 4 Knowledge Management and Expert Systems
Chapter Extension 5 Introduction to Microsoft Excel
Chapter Extension 6 Preparing a Computer Budget using Excel
Chapter Extension 7 Using Microsoft Access 2010
Chapter Extension 8 Using Excel and Access Together
Chapter Extension 9 How the Internet Works
Chapter Extension 10 Systems Development for Small Business
Chapter Extension 11 Systems Development Project Management
Chapter Extension 12 Outsourcing
Chapter Extension 13 Financing and Accounting for IT Projects
Processes, Systems, and Information: An
Introduction to MIS
David M. Kroenke
Earl McKinney
ISBN 10: 0132783479
ISBN 13: 9780132783477
480pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
A business process approach to the introductory class.
David M. Kroenke and Earl McKinney’s new textbook Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction
to MIS is the first introductory MIS textbook to emphasize business processes while also presenting the key
topics usually associated with an intro course.
Table of Contents
PART 1: MIS AND YOU
1.
Introduction to MIS
2.
Business Processes, Information Systems, and Information
PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
3.
Hardware, Software, and Networks
4.
Database Processing
PART 3: OPERATIONAL PROCESSES
5.
Using IS to Improve Processes
6.
Supporting Processes with ERP Systems
7.
Supporting the Procurement Process with SAP
Chapter 7 Appendix: SAP Procurement Tutorial
8.
Chapter 8: Supporting The Sales Process with SAP
Chapter 8 Appendix: SAP Sales Tutorial
PART 4: DYNAMIC PROCESSES AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS
9.
Collaboration Processes and Information Systems
10. The Impact of Web 2.0 and Social Media on Business Processes
11. Business Intelligence
PART 5: MIS MANAGEMENT PROCESSES
12. MIS Management Processes: Process Management, Systems Development, and Security
55
Essentials of MIS, 10/e
Kenneth Laudon
Jane Laudon
ISBN 10: 0273765426
ISBN 13: 9780273765424
504pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate MIS courses.
An in-depth look at how today's businesses use information technologies.
Many businesses look for candidates who know how to use information systems, making a general understanding
of information systems an asset to any business student. Laudon and Laudon continue to define the MIS course
for all business majors by emphasizing how business objectives shape the application of new information systems
and technologies.
Management Information Systems, 12/e
Kenneth Laudon
Jane Laudon
ISBN 10: 027375453X
ISBN 13: 9780273754534
640pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Management Information Systems courses.
Laudon and Laudon continue to define the MIS course with their latest comprehensive text.
Management Information Systems provides comprehensive and integrative coverage of essential new
technologies, information system applications, and their impact on business models and managerial decision
making in an exciting and interactive manner.
The twelfth edition focuses on the major changes that have been made in information technology over the past
two years, and includes new opening, closing, and Interactive Session cases.
Table of Contents
PART 1: ORGANIZATIONS, MANAGEMENT, AND THE NETWORKED ENTERPRISE
1.
Information Systems in Global Business Today
2.
Global E-Business and Collaboration
3.
Information Systems, Organizations, and Strategy
4.
Ethical and Social Issues in Information Systems
PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE
5.
IT Infrastructure and Emerging Technologies
6.
Foundations of Business Intelligence: Databases and Information Management
7.
Telecommunications, the Internet, and Wireless Technology
8.
Securing Information Systems
PART 3: KEY SYSTEM APPLICATIONS FOR THE DIGITAL AGE
9.
Achieving Operational Excellence and Customer Intimacy: Enterprise Applications
10. E-Commerce: Digital Markets, Digital Goods
11. Managing Knowledge
12. Enhancing Decision Making
PART 4: BUILDING AND MANAGING SYSTEMS
13. Building Information Systems
14. Managing Projects
15. Managing Global Systems
E-Commerce 2012, 8/e
Kenneth Laudon
Carol Guercio Traver
ISBN 10: 0273761293
ISBN 13: 9780273761297
912pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For the undergraduate and graduate e-commerce course in any business discipline.
The market-leading text for E-commerce.
This comprehensive, market-leading text emphasizes the three major driving forces behind E-commerce–
technology change, business development, and social issues–to provide a coherent conceptual framework for
understanding the field.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE
1.
The Revolution is Just Beginning
56
2.
E-Commerce Business Models and Concepts
PART 2: TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE FOR E-COMMERCE
3.
E-Commerce Infrastructure: The Internet, Web, and Mobile Platform
4.
Building an E-Commerce Presence: Web Sites, Mobile Sites, and Apps
5.
E-Commerce Security and Payment Systems
PART 3: BUSINESS CONCEPTS AND SOCIAL ISSUES
6.
E-Commerce Marketing Concepts: Social, Mobile, and Local
7.
E-Commerce Marketing Communications
8.
Ethical, Social, and Political Issues in E-Commerce
PART 4: E-COMMERCE IN ACTION
9.
Online Retail and Services
10. Online Content and Media
11. Social Networks, Auctions, and Portals
12. B2B E-commerce: Supply Chain Management and Collaborative Commerce
IT Strategy: Issues and Practices, 2/e
James D. McKeen
Heather Smith
ISBN 10: 0132843013
ISBN 13: 9780132843010
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate courses in IT Strategy or Management.
Using IT to deliver business value.
IT Strategy: Issues and Practices provide a critical issues perspective that shows students how to use and
manage IT to deliver business value.
This edition has been overhauled in order to reflect the most important issues facing IT managers today.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: DELIVERING VALUE WITH IT
1.
Developing and Delivering on the IT Value Proposition
2.
Developing IT Strategy for Business Values
3.
Communicating with Business Managers
4.
Building a Strong Relationship with the Business
5.
Developing IT Professionalism
Section I Mini-Cases
Delivering Business Value with IT at Hefty Hardware
Investing in TUFS
IT Planning at ModMeters
SECTION II: IT GOVERNANCE
6.
Information Management: The Nexus of Business and IT
7.
The IT Budgeting Process
8.
Creating and Evolving a Technology Roadmap
9.
Delivering IT Functions: A Decision Framework
10. IT Sourcing
11. Application Portfolio Management
Section II Mini-Cases
Building Shared Services at RR Communications
Creating a Process-Driven Organization at AgCredit
IT Investment at North American Financial
SECTION III: INFORMATION-ENABLED INNOVATION
12. Strategic Experimentation with IT
13. Enabling Collaboration with IT
14. Social Computing: How Should it be Managed?
15. Information Delivery: IT’s Evolving Role
16. Master Data Management
Section III Mini-Cases
Information Management at Homestyle Hotels
Innovation at International Foods
CRM at Minitrex
Customer Service at Datatronics
SECTION IV: IT CAPABILITY MANAGEMENT
17. Developing IT Capabilities
18. Building Better IT Leaders from the Bottom Up
19. Managing IT-based Risk
20. The Identity Management Challenge
21. Linking IT to Business Metrics
Section IV Mini-Cases
Leveraging IT Vendors at SleepSmart
Project Management at MM
Managing Technology at Genex Fuels
57
Enterprise Systems for Management, 2/e
Luvai Motiwalla
Jeffrey Thompson
ISBN 10: 0132570165
ISBN 13: 9780132570169
384pp©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA-level Enterprise Systems courses.
An approach to understanding and implementing ERP systems for success in today’s organizations.
Motiwalla teaches students the components of an ERP system, and the process of implementing ERP systems
within a corporation to increase the overall success of the organization. This text also places major importance
on the strategic role of ERP systems in providing a platform for improved business operations and productivity.
The second edition reflects the nature of today’s enterprise systems.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Introduction to Enterprise Systems for Management
Systems Integration
Enterprise Systems Architecture
Development Life Cycle
Implementation Strategies
Software and Vendor Selection
Operations and Post-implementation
Program and Project Management
Organizational Change and Business Process Reengineering
Global, Ethics, and Security Management
Supply Chain Management
Customer Relationship Management
Business Data Networks and Security, 9/e
Raymond Panko
Julia Panko
ISBN 10: 0132742934
ISBN 13: 9780132742931
528pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate business data communications and networking courses.
Understand the exciting and complex field of networking.
Business Data Networks and Telecommunications guides students through the details of networking with its
clear writing style, job-ready detail, and focus on the technologies that are used in today’s marketplace.
This edition provides students with the methods of preparation for dealing with specific network standards.
Electronic Commerce 2012: A Managerial and Social Networks
Perspectives, 7/e
Efraim Turban
David King
ISBN 10: 027376134X
ISBN 13: 9780273761341
792pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate electronic commerce courses.
Explore the many aspects of electronic commerce through a managerial perspective.
Electronic Commerce provides a thorough explanation of what EC is, how it’s being conducted and managed,
and how to assess its opportunities, limitations, issues, and risks—all from a managerial perspective. By
presenting EC through a managerial approach, this text makes the subject matter practical, relevant, and
beneficial to majors and non-majors alike.
To keep pace with today’s ever-changing technology, the seventh edition has been streamlined—removing
material that’s no longer relevant, while still providing students with information on the hottest topics in the field.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Overview of Electronic Commerce
E-Commerce: Mechanisms, Infrastructure, and Tools
Retailing in Electronic Commerce: Products and Services
B2B E-Commerce
Innovative EC Systems: From E-Government to E-Learning, Collaborative Commerce, and C2C
Commerce
Mobile Commerce and Ubiquitous Computing
58
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Social Commerce
Marketing and Advertising in E-Commerce
E-Commerce Security and Fraud Protection
Electronic Commerce Payment Systems
Order Fulfillment along the Supply Chain
EC Strategy, Globalization, and SMEs
Implementing EC Systems: From Justification to Successful Performance
E-commerce: Regulatory, Ethical, and Social Environments
Launching a Successful Online Business and EC Projects
Introduction to Electronic Commerce, 4/e
Efraim Turban
David King
Judy Lang
ISBN 10: 0132742918
ISBN 13: 9780132742917
580pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate-level courses in Electronic Commerce.
Explore the essential concepts of electronic commerce.
Written by experienced authors who share academic as well as real-world practices, this text features
exceptionally comprehensive yet manageable coverage of a broad spectrum of EC essentials from a global point
of view.
This edition pays special attention to the most recent developments in online behavior in our business, academic,
and personal lives.
IT Project Management
Ganesh Vaidyanathan
ISBN 10: 0132807181
ISBN 13: 9780132807180
600pp ©2013 Paper
Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design, 5/e
Joseph Valacich
Joey George
Jeff A. Hoffer
ISBN 10: 0132599015
ISBN 13: 9780132599016
456pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in systems analysis and design.
A clear presentation, organized around the systems development life cycle model.
Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design is a briefer version of the authors’ successful Modern System
Analysis and Design, designed for courses seeking a streamlined approach to the material due to course duration,
lab assignments, or special projects. This text also features the systems development life cycle model, which is
used to organize the information throughout the text.
The fifth edition emphasizes current changes in systems analysis and design.
Table of Contents
PART I: FOUNDATIONS FOR SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT
1.
The Systems Development Environment
2.
The Sources of Software
3.
Managing the Information Systems Project
PART II: SYSTEMS PLANNING AND SELECTION
4.
Systems Planning and Selection
PART III: SYSTEMS ANALYSIS
5.
Determining System Requirements
6.
Structuring System Requirements: Process Modeling
7.
Structuring System Requirements: Conceptual Data Modeling
PART IV: SYSTEMS DESIGN
8.
Designing the Human Interface
9.
Designing Databases
PART V: SYSTEMS IMPLEMENTATION AND OPERATION
10. Systems Implementation and Operation
59
Information Systems Today, 5/e
Joe Valacich
Christoph Schneider
ISBN 10: 0273756818
ISBN 13: 9780273756811
576pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Introduction to Management Information Systems courses.
Bring current, real-world IS concepts into your classroom.
One of the greatest challenges in teaching IS courses is keeping pace with what’s happening in the real-world.
Information Systems Today shows students how information technology and systems are continuing to expand
within all aspects of today’s organizations and society.
The fifth edition focuses on how information systems are fueling globalization—making the world smaller and
more competitive—in virtually every industry and at an ever-increasing pace.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Managing in the Digital World
Gaining Competitive Advantage through Information Systems
Managing the Information Systems Infrastructure and Services
Enabling Commerce Using the Internet
Enhancing Collaboration Using Web 2.0
Enhancing Business Intelligence Using Information Systems
Enhancing Business Processes Using Enterprise Information Systems
Improving Supply Chains and Strengthening Customer Relationships Using Enterprise Information
Systems
9.
Developing and Acquiring Information Systems
10. Securing Information Systems Technology Briefing: Foundations of Information Systems Infrastructure
Information Systems in Organizations
Patricia Wallace
ISBN 10: 0136115624
ISBN 13: 9780136115625
480pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The freshest, most contemporary overview of information systems.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Information Systems and People
Information Systems and Strategy
Information and Communications Technologies: The Enterprise Architecture
Managing Information Resources with Databases
Information Systems for the Enterprise
The Web and E-Commerce
Business Intelligence and Decision Support
Collaborating with Technology
Knowledge Management and E-Learning
Ethics, Privacy and Security
Systems Development and Procurement
Project Management and Strategic Planning
60
Decision Science
Global Franchising Operations Management: Cases in International
and Emerging Markets Operations, 1/e
Ilon Alon
ISBN10: 0132884143
ISBN13: 9780132884143
224pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Franchising represents more than 10% of the US economy and 50% of US retail sales, and this winning business
model is now showing exceptional promise outside the US as well. Both franchisors and franchisees are
beginning to discover immense opportunities to extend operations or build new franchises in emerging markets.
Of course, success will depend on their ability to execute – and extending successful franchising operations
outside their home markets requires significant new skills, knowledge, and expertise. In this book, the field's
leading expert and author brings together an unprecedented collection of in-depth cases that illuminate the field's
unexplored opportunities, key pitfalls, and proven best practices. Ilan Alon thoroughly covers the key challenges
of global franchise operations from both the franchisor and franchisee perspective, illuminating the experiences of
pioneers such as Marks and Spencer, Ruth's Chris Steakhouse, Athlete's Foot, Kodak, and Sari Organic. Alon
addresses these and other pivotal issues:
•
•
•
•
Should a franchisor or franchisee move into global markets?
What marketing challenges accompany extending a franchise beyond its borders?
How do Master Franchisee and Micro-Franchising strategies work, and how can their risks be managed?
What are the best ways to manage logistics, supply chains, operations, and demand management in
new markets?
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction
PART I: TO FRANCHISE OR NOT TO FRANCHISE
2.
San Francisco Coffee House: An American Style Franchise in Croatia
3.
Trying To Create a Stir: Opening a Coffee Shop in Korea
4.
International Marketing and Franchising at Marks & Spencer
PART II: IN SEARCH OF GLOBAL OPPORTUNITIES
5.
Estimating Demand in Emerging Markets for Kodak Express
6.
Ruth’s Chris Steak House: The High Stakes of International Expansion
PART III: FRANCHISING IN EMERGING MARKETS AND DEVELOPING COUNTRIES
7.
Master International Franchising in China: The Athlete's Foot, Inc. (A)
8.
Master International Franchising in China: The Athlete's Foot, Inc. (B)
9.
Social Entrepreneurship and Sustainable Farming in Indonesia
10. Final Reflections and Epilogues
Managing Business Process Flows, 3/e
Ravi Anupindi
Sunil Chopra, Northwestern University
Sudhakar D. Deshmukh
Jan A. Van Mieghem
Eitan Zemel
ISBN 10: 0132811367
ISBN 13: 9780132811361
360pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For graduate level courses in Operations Management or Business Processes.
A structured, data-driven approach to understanding core operations management concepts.
Anupindi shows how managers can design and manage process structure and process drivers to improve the
performance of any business process.
The third edition retains the general process view paradigm while providing a sharper, more streamlined
presentation of the development of ideas in each chapter–all of which are illustrated with contemporary examples
from practice.
Table of Contents
PART I: PROCESS MANAGEMENT AND STRATEGY
1.
Products, Processes, and Performance
2.
Operations Strategy and Management
PART II: PROCESS FLOW METRICS
3.
Process Flow Measures
4.
Flow-Time Analysis
5.
Flow Rate and Capacity Analysis
6.
Inventory Analysis
PART III: PROCESS FLOW VARIABILITY
7.
Managing Flow Variability: Safety Inventory
61
8.
Managing Flow Variability: Safety Capacity
9.
Managing Flow Variability: Process Control and Capability
PART IV: PROCESS INTEGRATION
10. Lean Operations: Process Synchronization and Improvement
Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3/e
Nagraj Balakrishnan
Barry Render, Graduate School of Business, Rollins College
Ralph M. Stair
ISBN 10: 0132969440
ISBN 13: 9780132969444
608pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses on decision modeling through the use of spreadsheets.
The perfect balance between decision modeling and spreadsheet use.
It’s important that textbooks support decision modeling courses by combining student’s ability to logically model
and analyze diverse decision-making scenarios with software-based solution procedures. Balakrishnan offers the
perfect balance of the decision modeling process and the use of spreadsheets to set up and solve decision
models.
The third edition has been updated to reflect the latest version of Excel.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Managerial Decision Modeling
2.
Linear Programming Models: Graphical and Computer Methods
3.
Linear Programming Modeling Applications with Computer Analyses in Excel
4.
Linear Programming Sensitivity Analysis
5.
Transportation, Assignment, and Network Models
6.
Integer, Goal, and Nonlinear Programming Models
7.
Project Management
8.
Decision Analysis
9.
Queuing Models
10. Simulation Modeling
11. Forecasting Models
12. ONLINE Chapter Inventory Control Models
APPENDIX A Probability Concepts and Applications
APPENDIX B Useful Excel 2010 Commands and Procedures for Installing ExcelModules
APPENDIX C Areas Under the Standard Normal Curve
APPENDIX D Brief Solutions to All Odd-Numbered End-of-Chapter Problems
Basic Business Statistics, 12/e
Mark L. Berenson
David M. Levine
Timothy C. Krehbiel
David F. Stephan
ISBN 10: 0273753185
ISBN 13: 9780273753186
912pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Business Statistics.
Berenson shows students how statistics is used in each functional area of business.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction
Organizing and Visualizing Data
Numerical Descriptive Measures
Basic Probability
Discrete Probability Distributions
The Normal Distribution and Other Continuous Distributions
Sampling and Sampling Distributions
Confidence Interval Estimation
Fundamentals of Hypothesis Testing: One-Sample Tests
Two-Sample Tests
Analysis of Variance
Chi-Square Tests and Nonparametric Tests
Simple Linear Regression
Introduction to Multiple Regression
Multiple Regression Model Building
Time-Series Forecasting
62
17. Statistical Applications in Quality Management
18. A Road Map for Analyzing Data
Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management, 3/e
Cecil Bozarth
Robert B. Handfield
ISBN 10: 027377008X
ISBN 13: 9780273770084
512pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For the core course in Operations Management with coverage of supply chain management.
Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management provides an integrated and comprehensive
treatment of both operations and supply chain management.
Table of Contents
PART I: CREATING VALUE THROUGH OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAINS
1.
Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management
2.
Operations and Supply Chain Strategies
PART II: ESTABLISHING THE OPERATIONS ENVIRONMENT
3.
Process Choice and Layout Decisions in Manufacturing and Services
4.
Business Processes
5.
Managing Quality
6.
Managing Capacity
PART III: ESTABLISHING SUPPLY CHAIN LINKAGES
7.
Supply Management
8.
Logistics
PART IV: PLANNING AND CONTROLLING OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAINS
9.
Forecasting
10. Sales and Operations Planning (Aggregate Planning)
11. Managing Inventory throughout the Supply Chain
12. Managing Production across the Supply Chain
13. JIT/Lean Production
PART V: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND PRODUCT/SERVICE DEVELOPMENT
14. Managing Projects
15. Developing Products and Services
Quantitative Methods for Business and Management
John Buglear
ISBN 10: 0273736280
ISBN 13: 9780273736288
480pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Quantitative Methods for Business and Management Students takes you on a journey though the
techniques required to succeed in business and management. With a user-friendly and accessible writing style,
John Buglear presents these techniques simply and provides numerous examples to enable you to relate the
theory to real-life applications.
Table of Contents
1.
Rules of the road: The basic techniques
2.
Straight ahead - linear models
3.
Around the bend - dealing with the curves
4.
Filling up - fuelling quantitative analysis
5.
Good visibility - pictorial presentation of data
6.
General directions - summarising data
7.
Two-way traffic - investigating relationships between two variables using correlation and regression
8.
Counting the cost - summarising money variables over time
9.
Long distance - analysing time series data
10. Is it worth the risk - introducing probability
11. Finding the right way - analysing decisions
12. Accidents and incidence - discrete probability distributions and simulation
13. Smooth running - continuous probability distributions and basic queuing theory
14. Getting from A to B - project planning using networks
15. Taking short cuts - sampling methods
16. Test driving - sampling theory, estimation and hypothesis testing
17. High performance - statistical inference for comparing population means and bivariate data
18. Going off-road - managing quantitative research for projects and dissertations#
Appendix 1 Statistical and Accounting tables
Appendix 2 Answers to review questions
63
Supply Chain Management, 5/e
Sunil Chopra
ISBN 10: 0273765221
ISBN 13: 9780273765226
528pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate supply chain management courses.
Illustrating the key drivers in effective supply chain management.
Supply Chain Management illustrates the key drivers of good supply chain management in order to help
students understand what creates a competitive advantage. This text also provides strong coverage of analytic
skills so students can gauge the effectiveness of the techniques described in the text.
Table of Contents
PART I: BUILDING A STRATEGIC FRAMEWORK TO ANALYZE SUPPLY CHAINS
1.
Understanding the Supply Chain
2.
Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope
3.
Supply Chain Drivers and Metrics
PART II: DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK
4.
Designing Distribution Networks and Applications to e-Business
5.
Network Design in the Supply Chain
6.
Designing Global Supply Chain Networks
PART III: PLANNING AND COORDINATING DEMAND AND SUPPLY IN A SUPPLY CHAIN
7.
Demand Forecasting in a Supply Chain
8.
Aggregate Planning in a Supply Chain
9.
Sales and Operations Planning: Planning Supply and Demand in a Supply Chain
10. Coordination in a Supply Chain
PART IV: PLANNING AND MANAGING INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN
11. Managing Economies of Scale in a Supply Chain: Cycle Inventory
12. Managing Uncertainty in a Supply Chain: Safety Inventory
13. Determining the Optimal Level of Product Availability
PART V: DESIGNING AND PLANNING TRANSPORTATION NETWORKS
14. Transportation in a Supply Chain
PART VI: MANAGING CROSS-FUNCTIONAL DRIVERS IN A SUPPLY CHAIN
15. Sourcing Decisions in a Supply Chain
16. Pricing and Revenue Management in a Supply Chain
17. Information Technology in a Supply Chain
18. Sustainability and the Supply Chain
Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories
and Practice, 2/e
Paul Cousins
Richard Lamming
Benn Lawson
Brian Squire
ISBN 10: 0273761900
ISBN 13: 9780273761907
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Drawing on international research this text blends established theory and current practice to provide
acomprehensive strategic coverage of this wide and constantly developing area.
Inbound Logistics Management: Storage and Supply of Materials for
the Modern Supply Chain, 7/e
Barry Crocker
David Jessop
Alex Morrison
ISBN 10: 0273720481
ISBN 13: 9780273720485
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This well-established text provides an authoritative and comprehensive overview of the practice and supporting
systems relating to the storage and supply of materials, from elementary principles and simplest methods to the
most advanced automated operations. It is an invaluable guide to inbound logistics for both students and
practitioners.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
The supply function
Identification of materials
64
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Receipt and inspection
Issue and dispatch
Records and systems
Materials accounting
Approaches to the provision of materials
Stock control techniques
Stock checking and stocktaking
Storehouses and stockyards
Stores operations
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)
Storage equipment
Materials handling
Procedures manuals
Business Statistics
Robert A. Donnelly
ISBN 10: 0132145391
ISBN 13: 9780132145398
984pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For one or two semester courses in business statistics.
The text that speaks to students.
Robert A. Donnelly’s new textbook Business Statistics removes the intimidation factor from learning business
statistics by presenting a writing style that students feel comfortable with. Through this straightforward,
conversational approach, Donnelly effectively explains the key concepts students need to know, and why they
need to know them.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction to Business Statistics
Displaying Descriptive Statistics
Calculating Descriptive Statistics
Introduction to Probabilities
Discrete Probability Distributions
Continuous Probability Distributions
Sampling and Sampling Distributions
Confidence Intervals
Hypothesis Testing with One Population
Hypothesis Testing with Two Population
Analysis of Variance
Chi-Square Tests
One and Two Population Variance Tests
Correlation and Simple Regression
Multiple Regression
Forecasting
Business Analytics
James R. Evans
ISBN 10: 0133051714
ISBN 13: 9780133051711
600pp ©2013 Paper
Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling, 5/e
James R. Evans
ISBN 10: 0273768220
ISBN 13: 9780273768227
576pp ©2012 Paper Bound with PIN
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate level courses that combines introductory statistics with data analysis
or decision modeling.
A pragmatic approach to statistics, data analysis and decision modeling.
65
Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling focuses on the practical understanding of its topics, allowing
readers to develop conceptual insight on fundamental techniques and theories. Evans’ dedication to present
material in a simple and straightforward fashion is ideal for student comprehension.
Table of Contents
PART I: STATISTICS AND DATA ANALYSIS
1.
Data and Business Decisions
2.
Displaying and Summarizing Data
3.
Probability Distributions and Applications
4.
Sampling and Estimation
5.
Hypothesis Testing and Statistical Inference
6.
Regression Analysis
7.
Forecasting
8.
Statistical Quality Control
PART II: DECISION MODELING AND ANALYSIS
9.
Building and Using Decision Models
10. Risk Analysis and Monte Carlo Simulation
11. Decisions, Uncertainty, and Risk
12. Queues and Process Simulation Modeling
13. Linear Optimization
14. Integer and Nonlinear Optimization
Appendix
Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, 8/e
Brian Farrington
Kenneth Lysons
ISBN 10: 0273723685
ISBN 13: 9780273723684
712pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The publication of Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, Eighth Edition marks the 28th anniversary
since the first edition was published, and it continues its claim to be the most comprehensive textbook on
purchasing and supply chain management currently available. It is also of value to professionals and those
specialists in other fields who need an understanding of the role and influence of this vital area of business
performance.
The authors have used extensive knowledge of real life events to bring the subject matter to life and to provide a
truly international focus on purchasing and supply chain. The economic climate is a massive influence on the
need for effective purchasing and supply chain management. Similarly, natural events such as the Japanese
earthquakes present the profession with unique challenges. The content of the book will help focus attention in
the appropriate risk areas of business. This new edition has been fully revised, covering new developments in the
purchasing and supply chain field. There is an increased emphasis on key decisions, supplier relationships,
pricing control and negotiation.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION AND STRATEGY
1.
What is purchasing?
2.
Strategy and strategic procurement
3.
Logistics and supply chains
4.
Structure and supply chains
5.
Purchasing structure and design
6.
Purchasing procedures
PART 2: STRATEGY, TACTICS AND OPERATIONS (1): KEY FACETS
7.
Supplier relationships
8.
Purchasing: product innovation, supplier involvement and development
9.
Specifying and managing product quality
10. Matching supply with demand
11. Sourcing and the management of suppliers (including contractual risk management)
12. Buying at the right price
PART 3: STRATEGY, TACTICS AND OPERATIONS (2): SITUATIONS
13. Contrasting approaches to supply
14. Buying for the public sector (new)
PART 4: STRATEGY, TACTICS AND OPERATIONS (3): NEGOTIATION, SUPPORT TOOLS AND
PERFORMANCE
15. Negotiation
16. Support tools
17. Purchasing research, performance and ethics
Appendix 1: Personal ethical code of the Chartered Institute of Purchasing and Supply (CIPS)
Appendix 2: Principles and standards of purchasing practice (ISM)
66
Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain, 5/e
S. Thomas W. Foster
ISBN 10: 0273768255
ISBN 13: 9780273768258
544pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Quality Management courses.
Understanding quality management through a unifying framework.
Managing Quality is a comprehensive introduction to the field of quality management that presents a supply
chain theme as the unifying framework for quality improvement.
High Performance Operations: Leverage Compliance to Lower Costs,
Increase Profits, and Gain Competitive Advantage, 1/e
Hillel Glazer
ISBN10: 0132779889
ISBN13: 9780132779883
272pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Companies in highly regulated industries face unique challenges in optimizing business performance and
profitability while maintaining strong governance and regulatory adherence. In this start-to-finish guidebook,
leading business performance consultant Hillel Glazer shows how to achieve these goals through the successful
integration of lean and systems thinking. Written for operations managers, process professionals, and lean
systems managers, Glazer shows how to systematically incorporate compliance into planning for overall
performance, value, and profitability, rather than viewing compliance as an end in itself. High Performance
Operations will help operations professionals and managers:
ƒ
Clarify the competing interests that challenge them, and implement pre-conditions for success.
ƒ
Learn how a systems-thinking approach can promote achieve operational excellence.
ƒ
Uncover the "secret sauce" that enables great organizations to scale their successes, eliminate single
points of failure, and get more of "what went right".
ƒ
Define what value and operational excellence look like in their organizations, and all the costs of
achieving them.
ƒ
Create solutions, establish proof-of-performance, justify investments, measure performance, and
implement continuous improvement.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Flying a Business
The Approach: An Overview
The Bureaucracy of Compliance
High Performance of Excellence
Regulation and Compliance
The Man Versus The Money
Focusing on the Wrong Target
Secret Sauce
Value, Customer Satisfaction, Profit
The Solution: Defining and Sustaining Value
Operational Excellence
Services
The Price
Systems Thinking and Process Engineering
Operational Excellence, Take 2
Sanity Checks and Fringe Concepts
Finishing Touches
Back to the Future: A Retrospective
Logistics Management
David Grant
ISBN 10: 0273731351
ISBN 13: 9780273731351
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This new book, Logistics Management, blends traditional logistics activities with the current developments in
business that has made logistics a critical element for business success. It adopts a customer or marketing focus
67
to the subject of logistics, and the wider concept of supply chain management, by recognizing that customer
satisfaction is the primary output of logistics activities. The theme of global logistics integrated throughout the
current edition will also continue and will be enhanced by discussion of the dichotomy that the European market
represents both a common and global environment.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Logistics and supply chain management
Customer Service
Purchasing and Procurement
Transportation
Warehousing and materials handling
Inventory management
Production and operations management
Logistics information systems and technology
Logistics financial performance and metrics
Logistics human resources
International and global logistics
Reverse and sustainable logistics
Logistics strategy
Encyclopedia of Operations Management, The: A Field Manual and
Glossary of Operations Management Terms and Concepts, 1/e
Arthur V. Hill
ISBN10: 0132883708
ISBN13: 9780132883702
408pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This is the perfect "field manual" for every supply chain or operations management practitioner and student. The
field's only single-volume reference, it's uniquely convenient and uniquely affordable. With nearly 1,500 wellorganized definitions, it can help students quickly map all areas of operations and supply chain management, and
prepare for case discussions, exams, and job interviews. For instructors, it serves as an invaluable desk
reference and teaching aid that goes far beyond typical dictionaries. For working managers, it offers a shared
language, with insights for improving any process and supporting any training program.
It thoroughly covers: accounting, customer service, distribution, e-business, economics, finance, forecasting,
human resources, industrial engineering, industrial relations, inventory management, healthcare management,
Lean Sigma/Six Sigma, lean thinking, logistics, maintenance engineering, management information systems,
marketing/sales, new product development, operations research, organizational behavior/management, personal
time management, production planning and control, purchasing, reliability engineering, quality management,
service management, simulation, statistics, strategic management, systems engineering, supply and supply chain
management, theory of constraints, transportation, and warehousing. Multiple figures, graphs, equations, Excel
formulas, VBA scripts, and references support both learning and application.
Hospital Operations: Applying the Principles of
Operations Management to Improve Health Care
Systems, 1/e
Wallace Hopp
William Lovejoy
ISBN10: 0132908662
ISBN13: 9780132908665
380pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
By one estimate, the U.S. wastes $480 billion annually on healthcare expenditures that don't improve care.
Worse, because of faulty systems -- not personnel -- up to 98,000 people die every year due to preventable
medical errors -- and that doesn't count non-terminal events such as hospital-acquired infections. In Hospital
Operations, two leading operations management experts and four senior physicians demonstrate how to apply
new OM advances and metrics to substantially improve any hospital's operational, clinical, and financial
performance. Replete with examples, Hospital Operations shows how to diagram and optimize hospital flows
and trace interconnections, and offers specific guidance on improving emergency departments, operating rooms,
hospital floors, and diagnostic units; and successfully applying metrics. Coverage includes:
ƒ
Reducing ER overcrowding and enhancing patient safety
ƒ
Improving OR scheduling, enhancing organizational learning, and responding to stakeholders'
perspectives
ƒ
Improving bed availability, optimizing nurse schedules, and creating seamless patient handoffs
ƒ
Reducing lab turnaround time, improving imaging responsiveness, and decreasing lab errors
The authors conclude by previewing the "Hospital of the Future," addressing issues ranging from prevention and
self-care to the evolution of technology and evidence-based medicine.
68
Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery, 4/e
Robert Johnston
Graham Clark
Michael Shulver
ISBN 10: 0273740482
ISBN 13: 9780273740483
504pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This international market-leading book, aimed at both students and practising managers, provides a
comprehensive and balanced introduction to service operations management. Building on the basic principles of
operations management, the authors examine the operations decisions that managers face in controlling their
resources and delivering services to their customers.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Introducing Service Operations Management
2.
Understanding the Challenges for Operations Managers
PART 2: FRAME
3.
Developing and Using the Service Concept
PART 3: CONNECT
4.
Understanding Customers and Relationships
5.
Managing Customer Expectations and Perceptions
6.
Managing Supply Networks and Supplier Relationships
PART 4: DELIVER
7.
Designing the Customer Experience
8.
Designing the Service Process
9.
Measuring, Controlling and Managing
10. Managing People
11. Managing Service Resources
PART 5: IMPROVE
12. Driving Continuous Improvement
13. Learning from Problems
14. Learning from Other Operations
PART 6: IMPLEMENT
15. Creating and Implementing the Strategy
16. Understanding and Influencing Culture
17. Building a World-class Service Organisation
Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains,
10/e
Lee J. Krajewski
Larry P. Ritzman
Manoj K Malhotra
ISBN 10: 027376683X
ISBN 13: 9780273766834
672pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Operations Management courses
Creating value through Operations Management.
Operations Management provides students with a comprehensive framework for addressing operational process
and supply chain issues. This text uses a systemized approach while focusing on issues of current interest.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: CREATING VALUE THROUGH OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
1.
Using Operations To Compete
Supplement A: Decision Making
2.
Project Management
PART 2: MANAGING PROCESSES
3.
Process Strategy
4.
Process Analysis
5.
Quality And Performance
6.
Capacity Planning
Supplement B: Waiting Lines
7.
Constraint Management
8.
Lean Systems
PART 3: MANAGING SUPPLY CHAINS
9.
Supply Chain Inventory Management
Supplement C: Special Inventory Models
10. Supply Chain Design
11. Supply Chain Location Decisions
12. Supply Chain Integration
69
13. Supply Chain Sustainability And Humanitarian Logistics
14. Forecasting
15. Operations Planning And Scheduling
16. Resource Planning
Supplement D: Linear Programming
Appendix 1 Normal Distribution
Appendix 2 Table Of Random Numbers
Business Statistics: A First Course, 6/e
David M. Levine
Timothy C. Krehbiel, Miami University, Ohio
Mark L Berenson
David F Stephan
ISBN 10: 0273770926
ISBN 13: 9780273770923
624pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one semester courses in business statistics.
A student-friendly approach that shows how statistics work in each area of business.
Students need a frame of reference when learning statistics, especially when it’s not their major. Business
Statistics: A First Course teaches students how statistics are used in each functional area of business in a
briefer, one-semester format.
The sixth edition has been updated to reflect the latest data and information, and now includes a new problemsolving framework to help guide students through the material.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction
Organizing and Visualizing Data
Numerical Descriptive Measures
Basic Probability
Discrete Probability Distributions
The Normal Distribution
Sampling and Sampling Distributions
Confidence Interval Estimation
Fundamentals of Hypothesis Testing: One-Sample Tests
Two-Sample Tests and One-Way ANOVA
Chi-Square Tests
Simple Linear Regression
Multiple Regression
Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies, 8/e
Clare Morris
ISBN 10: 0273738720
ISBN 13: 9780273738725
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies provides a clear and accessible introduction to these methods,
ideal for students of business and management on undergraduate, Masters and professional courses. This 8th
edition is supported by MyMathLabGlobal, an unrivalled online tutorial and assessment system. This resource
generates a personalised study plan and provides extensive practice questions exactly where you need them.
Table of Contents
Introduction: Why quantitative methods?
PART 1: NUMBERS – HOW WE HANDLE THEM
1.
Tools of the trade: basic numeracy skills
PART 2: NUMBERS – A MEANS OF COMMUNICATION
2.
Obtaining the figures: data and data collection
3.
Presenting the figures: tables and diagrams
4.
Summarising the figures: measures of location and spread
5.
Measuring changes: index numbers
PART 3: NUMBERS – A BASIS FOR DEDUCTION
6.
A firm foundation: elementary probability
7.
Patterns of probability: some distributions
8.
Estimating from samples: inference
9.
Checking a theory: hypothesis testing
10. Making it better: statistics and quality improvement
11. Looking for connections: correlation
12. Spotting the relationship: line fitting
13. Multiple regression
PART 4: NUMBERS – A TOOL OF PLANNING
70
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Planning an inventory policy: stock control and simulation
Forecasting: time-series, semi-log graphs and exponential smoothing
Allowing for interest: financial mathematics
Planning production levels: linear programming
Planning a project: network analysis
Quantitative methods in the student research project
Statistics for Business and Economics, 8/e
Paul Newbold
William Carlson
Betty Thorne
ISBN 10: 0273767062
ISBN 13: 9780273767060
792pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Business Statistics.
A classic text for accuracy and statistical precision.
Statistics for Business and Economics enables students to conduct serious analysis of applied problems rather
than running simple “canned” applications. This text is also at a mathematically higher level than most business
statistics texts and provides students with the knowledge they need to become stronger analysts for future
managerial positions.
The eighth edition of this book has been revised and updated to provide students with improved problem contexts
for learning how statistical methods can improve their analysis and understanding of business and economics.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Describing Data: Graphical
Describing Data: Numerical
Probability
Discrete Random Variables and Probability Distributions
Continuous Random Variables and Probability Distributions
Sampling and Sampling Distributions
Estimation: Single Population
Estimation: Additional Topics
Hypothesis Testing: Single Population
Hypothesis Testing: Additional Topics
Simple Regression
Multiple Regression
Additional Topics in Regression Analysis
Analysis of Categorical Data
Analysis of Variance
Time-Series Analysis and Forecasting
Additional Topics in Sampling
Project Management: Achieving Competive Advantage,
3/e
Jeffrey K. Pinto
ISBN 10: 0273767429
ISBN 13: 9780273767428
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in project management.
The fundamentals of project management with a wide assortment of business applications.
Project Management takes a decision-making, business-oriented approach to the management of projects,
which is reinforced throughout the text with current examples of project management in action. And because
understanding project management is central to operations in various industries, this text also addresses project
management within the context of a variety of successful organizations, whether publicly held, private, or not-forprofit.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
71
Quantitative Analysis for Management, 11/e
Barry Render
Ralph M. Stair
Michael E. Hanna
ISBN 10: 0273752863
ISBN 13: 9780273752868
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Management Science or Decision Modeling.
A solid foundation in quantitative methods and management science.
Render/Stair/Hanna puts an emphasis on model building and computer applications to show students how the
techniques presented in the text are used in business. This text’s use of software also allows instructors to focus
on the managerial problem, while spending less time on the mathematical details of the algorithms.
In the eleventh edition, Excel 2010 has been incorporated throughout the text and an even greater emphasis on
modeling is provided.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction to Quantitative Analysis
Probability Concepts and Applications
Decision Analysis
Regression Models
Forecasting
Inventory Control Models
Linear Programming Models: Graphical and Computer Methods
Linear Programming Applications
Transportation and Assignment Models
Integer Programming, Goal Programming, and Nonlinear Programming
Network Models
Project Management
Waiting Lines and Queuing Theory Models
Simulation Modelling
Markov Analysis
Statistical Quality Control
Operations and Process Management: Principles and Practice for
Strategic Impact, 3/e
Nigel Slack
Alistair Brandon-Jones
Robert Johnston
Alan Betts
ISBN 10: 0273768808
ISBN 13: 9780273768807
©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Written by best-selling authors in their field, Operations and Process Management 3e inspires a critical and
applied mastery of the core principles and processes fundamental to managing business operations.
Approaching the subject from a truly managerial perspective, this brand new text provides clear and concise
coverage. The book is supported by a fully interactive e-Text, which provides an opportunity to practice and
further explore the concepts and techniques introduced.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Operations and processes
Operations strategy
Supply network design
Process design 1 - Positioning
Process design 2 - Analysis
Product and service design processes
Supply chain management
Capacity management
Inventory management
Resource planning and control
Lean synchronization
Quality management
Improvement
Risk and resilience
Project management
72
Essentials of Operations Management
Nigel Slack
Robert Johnston
Alistair Brandon-Jones
ISBN 10: 0273756192
ISBN 13: 9780273756194
©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Essentials of Operations Management is a brand new concise version of the market-leading text Operations
Management. It has been developed for students on short courses in operations management – for example,
doing an initial course at undergraduate, postgraduate or post-experience level. In these books the author team
has set the standards in Operations Management which other textbooks seek to emulate: Expert authorship, an
engaging writing style, and an interesting collection of cases combine to communicate the importance of
managing operations and processes within a successful organisation.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Operations management
Operations strategy
Social, environment and economic performance
The design of products and services
Process design
Location, layout and flow
Supply network management
Capacity management
Inventory planning and control
Planning and control
Lean synchronization
Quality management
Operations improvement
Creating a Sustainable Organization: Approaches for Enhancing
Corporate Value Through Sustainability, 1/e
Peter A. Soyka
ISBN10: 0132874407
ISBN13: 9780132874403
432pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Organizations that prioritize environmental, health, and safety (EHS) issues are well placed to attract better
customers, better talent, and today's growing number of socially responsible investors. But, to gain these
benefits, companies must choose the right sustainability strategies, and then manage and measure them well.
Now, leading business sustainability consultant Peter Soyka offers a complete and actionable guide to driving
greater value through sustainability. Soyka bridges the disparate worlds of the EHS/sustainability professional
and the investor/analyst, covering all this and more:
ƒ
What the evidence says about linkages between sustainability and value
ƒ
Key stakeholder relationships influencing corporate behavior related to EHS and social equity
ƒ
Best practices for managing sustainability throughout the business
ƒ
How sustainability posture and performance can be evaluated by investors, markets, and managers
ƒ
How to maximize the influence of organizational actors focused on sustainability
This book will be invaluable for all environmental, health, and safety decision-makers and professionals concerned
with improving sustainability and value; for executives and strategists seeking competitive advantage; for
analysts evaluating investments; and for researchers and MBA candidates currently studying the techniques and
potential of corporate sustainability.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Introduction
Background and Context
Environmental, Social, and Governance (ES&G) Issues and How they Affect the Business Enterprise
Stakeholder Interests and Influences and the Social License to Operate
Managing ES&G Issues Within the Organization
Investors and the Power of Markets
Financial Impacts of Effective (or Ineffective) ES&G/Sustainability Management
Defining, Measuring, and Reporting ES&G Performance
Making It Happen in Your Organization
73
Introduction to Management Science, 11/e
Bernard W. Taylor
ISBN 10: 0273766406
ISBN 13: 9780273766407
840pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Management Science.
A simple, straightforward approach to modeling and solution techniques.
Introduction to Management Science shows students how to approach decision-making problems in a
straightforward, logical way. Through the use of clear explanations and examples, this text helps students learn
how to solve problems and make decisions based on the results.
The eleventh edition reflects the latest version of Excel, and provides many new problems for instructors to
assign.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Management Science
Linear Programming: Model Formulation and Graphical Solution
Linear Programming: Computer Solution and Sensitivity Analysis
Linear Programming: Modeling Examples
Integer Programming
Transportation, Transshipment, and Assignment Problems
Network Flow Models
Project Management
Multicriteria Decision Making
Nonlinear Programming
Probability and Statistics
Services Management: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
Bart Van Looy
Paul Gemmel
Roland Van Dierdonck
ISBN 10: 027373203X
ISBN 13: 9780273732037
560pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Over 75% of graduates currently find work in the service industries, but there are very few books that deal
specifically with the subject of service management.
This third edition of Services Management provides a comprehensive insight into the industry and its
importance in today's economies. The book is based on three central strands of services management:
customers, employees and operations. The final part of the book addresses the issue of performance
management and service strategy.
Based on a series of research workshops with academics and practitioners at the Service Management Centre, De
Vlerick School of Management, University of Ghent, the authors have produced in-depth case studies and survey
research to help students to develop a thorough understanding of the specific challenges and issues of service
management today.
Services Management third edition is ideal for Service Management students within a Business or Tourism
degree, but also of great interest to operations, management, marketing and general business students
Table of Contents
PART 1: DEFINING SERVICES MANAGEMENT
1.
Nature of services
2.
Nature of services management
3.
The service concept
PART 2: DESIGNING SERVICES MANAGEMENT
4.
Services as processes
5.
The role of people: structure and competences
6.
The role of technology: e-services and technology-based services
7.
The role of physical evidence: the Servicescape
8.
Service guarantees and service-level agreements
9.
Pricing
PART 3: DELIVERING SERVICES MANAGEMENT
10. Process-oriented services
11. Employee-based services
12. Customer-oriented services
13. Integrated performance management and communication
PART 4: DEVELOPING SERVICES MANAGEMENT
14. Service innovation
15. Growth strategies for service firms
74
16. Servitisation: a growth path for manufacturing firms
17. Service internationalisation
Quantitative Methods for Business, 5/e
Donald Waters
ISBN 10: 0273739476
ISBN 13: 9780273739470
624pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Quantitative Methods for Business has been thoroughly revised and updated for this 5th edition, and
continues to provide a simple and practical introduction to an area that students can find difficult. The book takes
a non-threatening approach to the subject, avoiding excessive mathematics and abstract theory. It shows how to
apply quantitative ideas to the real problems faced by managers.
The book includes numerous exercises and examples that help students understand the relevance of quantitative
ideas to business. Assuming no previous knowledge, the text provides complete coverage for a first course in
quantitative methods.
Table of Contents
PART ONE – BACKGROUND
1.
Managers and numbers
2.
Calculations and equations
3.
Drawing graphs
PART TWO – COLLECTING AND SUMMARISING DATA
4.
Collecting data
5.
Diagrams for presenting data
6.
Using numbers to describe data
7.
Describing changes with index numbers
PART THREE – SOLVING MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS
8.
Finance and performance
9.
Regression and curve fitting
10. Forecasting
11. Linear programming
PART FOUR – INTRODUCING STATISTICS
12. Uncertainty and probabilities
13. Probability distributions
14. Using samples
15. Testing hypotheses
PART FIVE – MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS WITH UNCERTAINTY
16. Making decisions
17. Quality management
18. Inventory management
19. Project networks
20. Queues and simulation
75
Economics
Essential Foundations of Economics, 6/e
Robin Bade
Michael Parkin
ISBN 10: 0132833115
ISBN 13: 9780132833110
624pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
A practice-oriented learning system that breaks the traditional textbook mold.
To help the student focus on the most important concepts–and effectively practice application of those concepts–
Essential Foundations of Economics is structured around a Checklist/Checkpoint system. The result is a
patient, confidence-building textbook that prepares the student to use economics in their everyday life,
regardless of what their future career will be.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Getting Started
The U.S. and Global Economies
The Economic Problem
Demand and Supply
Elasticities of Demand and Supply
Efficiency and Fairness of Markets
Government Influences on Markets
Global Markets in Action
Externalities: Pollution, Education, and Health
Production and Cost
Perfect Competition
Monopoly
Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly
GDP: A Measure of Total Production and Income
Jobs and Unemployment
The CPI and the Cost of Living
Potential GDP and Economic Growth
Money and the Monetary System
Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand
Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy
Foundations of Economics, 6/e
Robin Bade
Michael Parkin
ISBN 10: 0132984873
ISBN 13: 9780132984874
984pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
A practice-oriented learning system that breaks the traditional textbook mold.
To help the student focus on the most important concepts–and effectively practice application of those concepts–
Foundations of Microeconomics is structured around a Checklist/Checkpoint system. The result is a patient,
confidence-building textbook that prepares the student to use economics in their everyday life, regardless of what
their future career will be.
Also Available:
Foundations of Macroeconomics, 6/e
ISBN 10: 0133029522
ISBN 13: 9780133029529
576pp ©2013 Paper
Foundations of Microeconomics, 6/e
ISBN 10: 0132830884
ISBN 13: 9780132830881
600pp ©2013 Cloth
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Getting Started
2.
The U.S. and Global Economies
76
3.
The Economic Problem
4.
Demand and Supply
PART 2: A CLOSER LOOK AT MARKETS
5.
Elasticities of Demand and Supply
6.
Efficiency and Fairness of Markets
PART 3: HOW GOVERNMENTS INFLUENCE THE ECONOMY
7.
Government Actions in Markets
8.
Taxes
9.
Global Markets in Action
PART 4: MARKET FAILURE AND ITS SOLUTIONS
10. Externalities
11. Public Goods and Common Resources
12. Markets with Private Information
PART 5: A CLOSER LOOK AT DECISION MAKERS
13. Consumer Choice and Demand
14. Production and Cost
PART 6: PRICES, PROFITS, AND INDUSTRY PERFORMANCE
15. Perfect Competition
16. Monopoly
17. Monopolistic Competition
18. Oligopoly
PART 7: INCOMES AND INEQUALITY
19. Markets for Factors of Production
20. Economic Inequality
PART 8: MONITORING THE MACROECONOMY
21. GDP: A Measure of Total Production and Income
22. Jobs and Unemployment
23. The CPI and the Cost of Living
PART 9: THE REAL ECONOMY
24. Potential GDP and the Natural Unemployment Rate
25. Economic Growth
26. Finance, Saving, and Investment
PART 10: THE MONEY ECONOMY
27. The Monetary System
28. Money, Interest, and Inflation
PART 11: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS
29. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand
30. Aggregate Expenditure Multiplier
31. The Short-Run Policy Tradeoff
PART 12: MACROECONOMIC POLICY
32. Fiscal Policy
33. Monetary Policy
34. International Finance
Macroeconomics: A European Perspective
Olivier Blanchard
Francesco Giavazzi
Alessia Amighini
Olivier Blanchard
ISBN 10: 0273763113
ISBN 13: 9780273763116
©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Macroeconomics: A European Perspective will give students a fuller understanding of the subject and has
been fully updated to provide broad coverage of the financial crisis. In particular, this new edition provides:
ƒ
NEW chapters and updated text across all chapters
ƒ
NEW data on Europe and the financial crisis
ƒ
And what has always been the strength of the book: A unified view of macroeconomics, enabling
students to make the connections between the short, medium, and long run.
"This is a truly outstanding textbook that beautifully marries theory, empirics and policy. It is surely destined to
become the gold standard against which all other texts must be measured."
Charles Bean
Deputy Governor, Bank of England
“Refreshingly original for an undergraduate text. Relevant applications to European economies and elsewhere are
plentiful, and the breadth of topics covered is truly impressive. Unlike many texts at this level, the authors do
not avoid potentially tricky, yet important topics; they do their utmost to relate textbook theory to real-world
economics. Relative to competing texts, I think students would find this more engaging.”
Paul Scanlon
Trinity College Dublin
“Up-to-date material on the Euro, especially in light of the current crisis; strong open economy emphasis; and
lots of examples from European countries. There is so much new material on the monetary union that there is
much less need for supplementary reading.”
Pekka Ilmakunnas
Aalto University School of Economics
77
Table of Contents
1.
A Tour of the World
2.
A Tour of the Book
3.
The Goods Market
4.
Financial Markets
5.
Goods and Financial Markets: The IS–LM Model
6.
The IS-LM model in an Open Economy
7.
The Labour Market
8.
Putting All Markets Together: The AS–AD Model
9.
The Natural Rate of Unemployment and the Phillips Curve
10. Inflation, Activity, and Nominal Money Growth
11. The Facts of Growth
12. Saving, Capital Accumulation, and Output
13. Technological Progress and Growth
14. Expectations: the Basic Tools
15. Financial Markets and Expectations
16. Expectations, Consumption, and Investment
17. Expectations, Output, and Policy
18. Output, the interest rate and the exchange rate
19. Exchange Rate Regimes
20. The crisis of 2007-2010
21. High Debt
22. High Inflation
23. Policy and Policymakers: What Do We Know?
24. Monetary and Fiscal Policy Rules
25. European Economic and Monetary Integration
26. The Euro: The Ins and the Outs
Appendix 1: A maths refresher
Appendix 2: An introduction to econometrics
Principles of Economics, 10/e
Karl E. Case
Ray C. Fair
Sharon M. Oster
ISBN 10: 027375372X
ISBN 13: 9780273753728
816pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For the 2-semester principles of economics course.
Reviewers tell us that Case/Fair/Oster is one of the all-time bestselling POE texts because they trust it to be clear,
thorough and complete. Case/Fair/Oster readers also come away with a basic understanding of how market
economies function, an appreciation for the things they do well, and a sense of things they do poorly. Readers
begin to learn the art and science of economic thinking and begin to look at some policy and even personal
decisions in a different way.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Also Available:
Principles of Macroeconomics, 10/e
ISBN 10: 0273754823
ISBN 13: 9780273754824
480pp ©2012 Paper
Principles of Microeconomics, 10/e
ISBN 10: 0273754696
ISBN 13: 9780273754695
504pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS
1.
The Scope and Method of Economics
2.
The Economic Problem: Scarcity and Choice
3.
Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium
4.
Demand and Supply Applications
5.
Elasticity
PART II: THE MARKET SYSTEM: CHOICES MADE BY HOUSEHOLDS AND FIRMS
6.
Household Behavior and Consumer Choice
7.
The Production Process: The Behavior of Profit-Maximizing Firms
8.
Short-Run Costs and Output Decisions
9.
Long-Run Costs and Output Decisions
10. Input Demand: The Labor and Land Markets
11. Input Demand: The Capital Market and the Investment Decision
12. General Equilibrium and the Efficiency of Perfect Competition
PART III: MARKET IMPERFECTIONS AND THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT
13. Monopoly and Antitrust Policy
14. Oligopoly
78
15. Monopolistic Competition
16. Externalities, Public Goods, and Social Choice
17. Uncertainty and Asymmetric Information
18. Income Distribution and Poverty
19. Public Finance: The Economics of Taxation
PART IV: CONCEPTS AND PROBLEMS IN MACROECONOMICS
20. Introduction to Macroeconomics
21. Measuring National Output and National Income
22. Unemployment, Inflation, and Long-Run Growth
PART V: THE CORE OF MACROECONOMIC THEORY
23. Aggregate Expenditure and Equilibrium Output
24. The Government and Fiscal Policy
25. The Money Supply and the Federal Reserve System
26. Money Demand and the Equilibrium Interest Rate
27. Aggregate Demand in the Goods and Money Markets
28. Aggregate Supply and the Equilibrium Price Level
29. The Labor Market In the Macroeconomy
PART VI: FURTHER MACROECONOMICS ISSUES
30. Financial Crises, Stabilization, and Deficits
31. Household and Firm Behavior in the Macroeconomy: A Further Look
32. Long-Run Growth Alternative Views in Macroeconomics
33. Alternative Views in Macroeconomics
PART VII: THE WORLD ECONOMY
34. International Trade, Comparative Advantage, and Protectionism
35. Open-Economy Macroeconomics: The Balance of Payments and Exchange Rates
36. Economic Growth in Developing and Transitional Economies
Law and Economics, 6/e
Robert D. Cooter, University of California at Berkeley
Thomas Ulen, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign
ISBN 10: 0132846152
ISBN 13: 9780132846158
576pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Law and Economics has become a central course in U.S. legal education and for students majoring in topics like
economics, political science, and philosophy. Cooter and Ulen provide a clear introduction to economic analysis
and its application to legal rules and institutions that is accessible to any student who has taken principles of
microeconomics.
The book’s structure is flexible, beginning with an introductory overview of economic tools followed by paired
chapters in five core areas of law: property, contracts, torts, legal process, and crime. Students leave the course
understanding how microeconomic theory can be used to critically evaluate law and public policy.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
An Introduction to Law and Economics
A Brief Review of Microeconomic Theory
A Brief Introduction to Law and Legal Institutions
An Economic Theory of Property
Topics in the Economics of Property Law
An Economic Theory of Tort Law
Topics in the Economics of Tort Liability
An Economic Theory of Contract Law
Topics in the Economics of Contract Law
An Economic Theory of the Legal Process
Topics in the Economics of the Legal Process
An Economic Theory of Crime and Punishment
Topics in the Economics of Crime and Punishment
Modern Labor Economics: Theory and Public Policy, 11/e
Ronald G. Ehrenberg
Robert S. Smith
ISBN 10: 013272765X
ISBN 13: 9780132727655
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one semester courses in labor economics at the undergraduate and graduate levels.
A clear, comprehensive introduction to labor market behavior.
In addition to presenting core theory, Ehrenberg/Smith summarizes empirical evidence for or against each
hypothesis, and illustrates the usefulness of theory for public policy analysis.
The authors continue to make this text a comprehensive resource in the eleventh edition, through a focus on
79
factual information about the labor market and professional literature in labor economics.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction
Overview of the Labor Market
The Demand for Labor
Labor Demand Elasticities
Frictions in the Labor Market
Supply of Labor to the Economy: the Decision to Work
Labor Supply: Household Production, the Family, and the Life Cycle
Compensating Wage Differentials and Labor Markets
Investments in Human Capital: Education and Training
Worker Mobility: Migration, Immigration, and Turnover
Pay and Productivity: Wage Determination within the Firm
Gender, Race, and Ethnicity in the Labor Market
Unions and the Labor Market
Unemployment
Inequality in Earnings
The Labor Market Effects of International Trade and Production Sharing
Microeconomics, 6/e
Saul Estrin
Michael Dietrich
David Laidler
ISBN 10: 0273734873
ISBN 13: 9780273734871
600pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This new edition builds a comprehensive picture of the microeconomic tools required to solve a wide range of
problems by using an innovative combination of written, illustrative and mathematical analysis. It helps the
reader to think like an economist - in particular demonstrating how individuals, firms and policy-makers decide
their best course of action.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction
PART 1: THE THEORY OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
2. The basic theory of consumer choice
3. Money income and real income
4. Utility
PART II: CONSUMER THEORY: FURTHER TOPICS
5. Intertemporal choice
6. Choice in the face of risk
7. Decision Making: further analysis
PART III: PRODUCTION AND COSTS
8. Production
9. Costs
10. Production functions, cost functions, and the demand for factors of production
PART IV: BASIC THEORY OF THE FIRM
11. Perfect competition
12. Monopoly
13. Product differentiation and monopolistic competition
PART V: OLIGOPOLY AND STRATEGIC INTERACTION
14. Imperfect Competition – an introduction
15. Oligopoly and strategic interaction
16. Game theory
17. Game Theory II
PART VI: FACTOR MARKETS
18. Factor demand
19. Factor supply
20. Labour markets – trade unions and bargaining
PART VII: GENERAL EQUILIBRIUM AND WELFARE
21. The exchange economy
22. General equilibrium with production
23. Welfare economics
PART VIII: MISSING MARKETS
24. Externalities, public goods and Taxes
25. Economics of information
26. Public choice
80
Economics of Health and Health Care, The, 7/e
Sherman Folland, Oakland University
Allen C. Goodman, Wayne State University
Miron Stano, Oakland University
ISBN 10: 013295480X
ISBN 13: 9780132954808
624pp©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Health Economics, U.S. Health Policy/Systems, or Public Health, taken by health
services students or practitioners.
The text that makes economics concepts the backbone of the health care coverage.
Folland is the bestselling Health Care Economics text that teaches through core economic themes, rather than
concepts unique to the health care economy.
Table of Contents
PART I: BASIC ECONOMICS TOOLS
1.
Introduction
2.
Microeconomic Tools for Health Economics
3.
Statistical Tools for Health Economics
4.
Economic Efficiency and Cost-Benefit Analysis
PART II: SUPPLY AND DEMAND
5.
Production of Health
6.
The Production, Cost, and Technology of Health Care
7.
Demand for Health Capital
8.
Demand and Supply of Health Insurance
9.
Consumer Choice and Demand
PART III: INFORMATION AND INSURANCE MARKETS
10. Asymmetric Information and Agency
11. The Organization of Health Insurance Markets
12. Managed Care
13. Nonprofit Firms
PART IV: KEY PLAYERS IN THE HEALTH CARE SECTOR
14. Hospitals and Long-Term Care
15. The Physician’s Practice
16. Health Care Labor Markets and Professional Training
17. The Pharmaceutical Industry
PART V: SOCIAL INSURANCE
18. Equity, Efficiency, and Need
19. Government Intervention in Health Care Markets
20. Government Regulation: Principal Regulatory Mechanisms
21. Social Insurance
22. Comparative Health Care Systems
23. Health System Reform
PART VI: SPECIAL TOPICS
24. The Health Economics of Bads
25. Epidemiology and Economics: HIV/AIDS in Africa
Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies, 10/e
Richard T. Froyen
ISBN 10: 0273765981
ISBN 13: 9780273765981
©2013
Basic Approach
For courses in Intermediate Macroeconomics.
Macroeconomics traces the history, evolution, and challenges of Keynesian economics, presenting a
comprehensive, detailed, and unbiased view of modern macroeconomic theory.
Forecasting for Economics and Business
Gloria Gonzalez-Rivera
ISBN 10: 0131474936
ISBN 13: 9780131474932
512pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For junior/senior undergraduates in a variety of fields such as economics, business administration,
applied mathematics and statistics, and for graduate students in quantitative masters programs such
81
as MBA and MA/MS in economics.
A student-friendly approach to understanding forecasting.
Knowledge of forecasting methods is among the most demanded qualifications for professional economists, and
business people working in either the private or public sectors of the economy. The general aim of this textbook
is to carefully develop sophisticated professionals, who are able to critically analyze time series data and
forecasting reports because they have experienced the merits and shortcomings of forecasting practice.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction and Context
A Review of Basic Statistics Concepts and the Linear Regression Model
Statistics and Time Series
Tools of the Forecaster
Understanding Linear Dependence: A Link to Economic Models
Forecasting with Moving Average (MA) Processes
Forecasting with AutoRegressive (AR) Processes
Forecasting Practice: Modeling San Diego House Price Index
Assessment of Forecasts and Combination of Forecasts
Forecasting the Long Run: Deterministic and Stochastic Trends
Forecasting with a System of Equations: Vector AutoRegression
Forecasting the Long Run and the Short Run Jointly: Cointegration and Error Correction Models
Forecasting Volatility I
Forecasting Volatility II
Financial Applications of Time-varying Volatility
Forecasting with Nonlinear Models
Macroeconomics, 12/e
Robert J. Gordon
ISBN 10: 0132727676
ISBN 13: 9780132727679
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Macroeconomics is widely praised for its ability to present theory as a way of evaluating key macro questions,
such as why some countries are rich and others are poor.
Students have a natural interest in what is happening today and what will happen in the near future.
Macroeconomics capitalizes on their interest by beginning with business cycles and monetary-fiscal policy in
both closed and open economy. After that, Gordon presents a unique dynamic analysis of demand and supply
shocks as causes of inflation and unemployment, followed by a dual approach to economic growth in which theory
and real-world examples are used to compare rich and poor countries.
Table of Contents
1.
What Is Macroeconomics?
2.
The Measurement of Income, Prices, and Unemployment
3.
Income and Interest Rates: The Keynesian Cross Model and the IS Curve
4.
Strong and Weak Policy Effects in the IS-LM Model
5.
Financial Markets, Financial Regulation, and Economic Instability
6.
The Government Budget, the Government Debt, and Limitations of Fiscal Policy
7.
International Trade, Exchanges Rates, and Macroeconomic Policy
8.
Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and the Great Depression
9.
Inflation: Its Causes and Cures
10. The Goals of Stabilization Policy: Low Inflation and Low Unemployment
11. The Theory of Economic Growth
12. The Big Questions of Economic Growth
13. Money, Banks, and the Federal Reserve
14. The Goals, Tools, and Rules of Monetary Policy
15. The Economics of Consumption Behavior
16. The Economics of Investment Behavior
17. New Classical Macro and New Keynesian Macro
18. Conclusion: Where We Stand
APPENDIXES
A Time Series Data for the U.S. Economy: 1875—2010
B International Annual Time Series Data for Selected Countries: 1960—2010
C Data Sources and Methods
Microeconomics, 4/e
Hugh Gravelle
Ray Rees
ISBN 10: 0273710400
ISBN 13: 9780273710400
752pp ©2013 Paper
82
Basic Approach
This is a standard text for upper level undergraduate/postgraduate microeconomics. The book begins at the
intermediate level and ends at a level appropriate for the graduate student.
This well informed book provides a comprehensive exposition of modern microeconomic theory, covering many of
the issues currently being researched and debated. The book offers very rigorous, mathematical treatment of the
topics discussed making it appropriate for graduate as well as able intermediate level students. The writing style
is clear and concise and the book is particularly liked for the thoroughness with which the concepts are dealt.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
The economic and social framework
The theory of the consumer
Consumer theory : duality
Production
Cost
Supply and firm objectives
The theory of a competitive market
Monopoly
Input markets
Capital markets
General equilibrium
Welfare economics
Market failure and government failure
Game theory
Oligopoly
Choice under uncertainty
Production under uncertainty
Insurance, risk spreading and risk pooling
Agency and contract theory
General equilibrium under uncertainty and incomplete markets
Econometric Analysis, 7/e
William H. Greene
ISBN 10: 0273753568
ISBN 13: 9780273753568
1232pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For first-year graduate courses in Econometrics for Social Scientists.
This text serves as a bridge between an introduction to the field of econometrics and the professional literature
for graduate students in the social sciences, focusing on applied econometrics and theoretical concepts.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE LINEAR REGRESSION MODEL
1.
Econometrics
2.
The Linear Regression Model
3.
Least Squares
4.
The Least Squares Estimator
5.
Hypothesis Tests and Model Selection
6.
Functional Form and Structural Change
7.
Nonlinear, Semiparametric, and Nonparametric Regression Models
8.
Endogeneity and Instrumental Variable Estimation
PART II: GENERALIZED REGRESSION MODEL AND EQUATION SYSTEMS
9.
The Generalized Regression Model and Heteroscedasticity
10. Systems of Equations
11. Models for Panel Data
PART III: ESTIMATION METHODOLOGY
12. Estimation Frameworks in Econometrics
13. Minimum Distance Estimation and the Generalized Method of Moments
14. Maximum Likelihood Estimation
15. Simulation-Based Estimation and Inference
16. Bayesian Estimation and Inference
PART IV: CROSS SECTIONS, PANEL DATA, AND MICROECONOMETRICS
17. Discrete Choice
18. Discrete Choices and Event Counts
19. Limited Dependent Variables—Truncation, Censoring, and Sample Selection
PART V: TIME SERIES AND MACROECONOMETRICS
20. Serial Correlation
21. Models with Lagged Variables
22. Time-Series Models
23. Nonstationary Data
PART VI: APPENDICES
Appendix A: Matrix Algebra
83
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
B: Probability and Distribution Theory
C: Estimation and Inference
D: Large-Sample Distribution Theory
E: Computation and Optimization
F: Data Sets Used in Applications
G: Statistical Tables
Applied Economics, 12/e
Alan Griffiths
Stuart Wall
ISBN 10: 0273736906
ISBN 13: 9780273736905
728pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Applied Economics equips you with the skills and knowledge to apply economic analysis to the current
economic problems happening in the world today.
Highly praised for its clear presentation, broad coverage of topics, and unique blend of theory and application,
Applied Economics brings the subject to life, helping you to understand the relevance of economics in the ‘real
world’.
Table of Contents
1.
Changes in the economic structure
PART I: THEORY OF THE FIRM
2.
Financial reports as a source of corporate information
3.
Firm objectives and firm behaviour
4.
Entrepreneurship and small/medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)
5.
Mergers and acquisitions in the growth of the firm
6.
Oligopoly
7.
The multinational corporation
8.
Privatization and deregulation
9.
Beyond markets: critical approaches to microeconomics
PART II: ENVIRONMENTAL, REGIONAL AND SOCIAL ECONOMICS
10. The economics of the environment
11. Transport
12. Health economics
13. Distribution of income and wealth
14. Trade unions, wages and collective bargaining
15. Corporate social and ethical responsibility
PART III: MACROECONOMICS
16. Consumption and saving
17. Investment
18. Public expenditure
19. Taxation
20. Money and monetary policy
21. Financial institutions and markets
22. Inflation
23. Unemployment
PART IV: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS
24. Globalization
25. Exchange rates and trade performance
26. Free trade, regional trading blocs and protectionism
27. The European Union
28. The BRIC economies: Brazil, Russia, India and China
29. Growth and development
30. Managing the global economy: post ‘credit crunch’
Economics for Business and Management, 3/e
Alan Griffiths
Stuart Wall
ISBN 10: 0273735241
ISBN 13: 9780273735243
592pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
An exciting introduction to the principles and applications of microeconomics and macroeconomics to the global
business problems faced by today’s decision makers
ƒ
What are the characteristics for successful entry into new international markets?
ƒ
How can ‘sustainability’ affect decision making within businesses?
ƒ
Why are today’s global investors so concerned about national debt issues?
ƒ
In what ways does an awareness of cultural differences improve decision making by international
84
ƒ
marketing and human resource strategists?
What strategies can companies such as BP use to repair damaged global reputations?
Table of Contents
PART I: MICRO BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
1.
Markets and resource allocation
2.
Demand, revenue and consumer behaviour
3.
Supply, production and cost
4.
Business organisation, objectives and behaviour
5.
Firm size, mergers and the ‘public interest’
6.
Market structures
7.
Labour and other factor markets
8.
Market failure, regulation and competition
PART II: MACRO BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
9.
National income determination
10. Government policies: instruments and objectives
11. Political, legal, ecological and technological environment
12. Functions of management: domestic business environment
13. International business environment
14. Strategies in a globalised business environment
Appendix 1 Indifference curves, budget lines and the 'law of demand'
Appendix 2 Isoquants, isocosts and production
International Trade
Nigel Grimwade
ISBN 10: 0273718886
ISBN 13: 9780273718888
©2013 Paper
Making of the Economic Society, The, 13/e
Robert L. Heilbroner, New School for Social Research
William Milberg
ISBN 10: 0132822385
ISBN 13: 9780132822381
224pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses on Economics and Society, Economic History, Economic History of the West, and
The History of Capitalism.
Heilbroner/Milberg is the only introductory level text that traces the development of our economic society from
the Middle Ages to the present, offering a balanced perspective on why our economy is the way it is and where it
may be headed.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
The Economic Problem
The Premarket Economy
The Emergence of Market Society
The Industrial Revolution
The Impact of Industrial Technology
The Great Depression
The Rise of the Public Sector
Modern Capitalism Emerges in Europe
The Golden Age of Capitalism
The Rise and Fall of Socialism
Why Some Nations Remain Poor, Emerging Markets and the Persistence of Global Poverty
The Great Recession in Historical Perspective
Problems and Possibilities
Macroeconomics, 2/e
Glenn Hubbard
Anne Garnett
Phil Lewis
Tony O'Brien
ISBN 10: 1442533714
ISBN 13: 9781442533714
©2012 Paper
85
Basic Approach
Real examples. Real companies. Real business decisions.
The key questions students of first year economics ask themselves are: `Why am I here?” and “Will I ever
use this?’. Hubbard Macroeconomics answers these questions by demonstrating that real businesses use
economics to make real decisions every day. Each chapter of the text: opens with a case study featuring a
real business or real business situation, refers to the study throughout the chapter, and concludes with An
Inside Look—a news article format which illustrates how a key principle covered in the chapter relates to real
business situations or was used by a real company to make a real business decision.
While the core ideas of economics remain unchanged, the new 2nd edition of Macroeconomics helps students
make sense of changing economic realities, such as policy debate on health care, immigration and the
environment, the global financial crisis, and the effectiveness of economics policies aimed at minimising the
impact of the financial crisis.
Hubbard Macroeconomics presents economics as a dynamic, relevant discipline for students.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Economics: Foundations and models
2.
Choices and trade-offs in the market
PART 2: HOW THE MARKET WORKS
3.
Where prices come from: The interaction of demand and supply
PART 3: MACROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS AND ECONOMIC GROWTH
4.
GDP: Measuring total production, income and economic growth
5.
Economic growth, the financial system and business cycles
6.
Long-run economics growth: sources and policies
PART 4: SHORT-RUN FLUCTUATIONS
7.
Aggregate expenditure and output in the short run
8.
Aggregate demand and aggregate supply analysis
PART 5: UNEMPLOYMENT AND INFLATION
9.
Unemployment
10. Inflation
PART 6: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY
11. Money, banks and the Reserve Bank of Australia
12. Monetary policy
13. Fiscal policy
PART 7: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY
14. Macroeconomics in an open economy
15. The international financial system
Microeconomics, 2/e
Glenn Hubbard
Anne Garnett
Phil Lewis
Tony O'Brien
ISBN 10: 1442531770
ISBN 13: 9781442531772
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Real examples. Real companies. Real business decisions.
The key questions students of first year economics ask themselves are: `Why am I here?” and “Will I ever
use this?’. Hubbard Microeconomics answers these questions by demonstrating that real businesses use
economics to make real decisions every day. Each chapter of the text: opens with a case study featuring a
real business or real business situation, refers to the study throughout the chapter, and concludes with An
Inside Look—a news article format which illustrates how a key principle covered in the chapter relates to real
business situations or was used by a real company to make a real business decision.
This new edition of Microeconomics has been revised to provide students with the most up-to-date and relevant
content they need to succeed in the field of economics. Once again all chapters contain examples to demonstrate
the practicality and relevance of economics to decision making that students may be currently involved with.
Hubbard Microeconomics presents economics as a dynamic, relevant discipline for students.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Economics: Foundations and models
APPENDIX Using graphs and formulae
2.
Choices and trade-offs in the market
PART 2: HOW THE MARKET WORKS
3.
Where prices come from: The interaction of demand and supply
4.
Elasticity: The responsiveness of demand and supply
5.
Economic efficiency, government price setting and taxes
APPENDIX Quantitative demand and supply analysis
PART 3: CONSUMERS AND FIRMS
6.
Consumer choice and behavioural economics
APPENDIX Using indifference curves and budget lines to understand consumer behaviour
7.
Technology, production and costs
APPENDIX Using isoquants and isocosts to understand production and costs
PART 4: MARKET STRUCTURE AND FIRM STRATEGY
8.
Firms in perfectly competitive markets
86
9.
Monopoly market
APPENDIX Price discrimination
10. Monopolistic competition
11. Oligopoly: Firms in less competitive markets
APPENDIX Traditional models of oligopoly
PART 5: MARKETS FOR FACTORS OF PRODUCTION
12. The markets for labour and other factors of production
PART 6: INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
13. International trade
PART 7: THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT
14. Government intervention in the market
15. Externalities, environmental policy and public goods
16. The distribution of income and social policy
Economics, 4/e
R. Glenn Hubbard
Anthony Patrick O'Brien
ISBN 10: 0273771302
ISBN 13: 9780273771302
1176pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For the two-semester Principles of Economics courses at four- and two-year colleges and universities.
Learn economics through real business examples.
The number-one question students of economics ask themselves is, "Why am I here, and will I ever use this?".
Hubbard/O'Brien answers this question by demonstrating that real businesses use economics to make real
decisions everyday. This is something all students can connect to, whether they're business majors or not,
because students encounter businesses in their daily lives. And regardless of their future career path—opening
an art studio, doing social work, trading on Wall Street, working for the government, or bartending at the local
pub—students will benefit from understanding the economic forces behind their work.
Also Available:
Macroeconomics, 4/e
ISBN 10: 0273771523
ISBN 13: 9780273771524
728pp ©2012 Paper
Microeconomics, 4/e
ISBN 10: 0273771604
ISBN 13: 9780273771609
720pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Economics: Foundations and Models
2.
Trade-offs, Comparative Advantage, and the Market System
3.
Where Prices Come From: The Interaction of Demand and Supply
4.
Economic Efficiency, Government Price Setting, and Taxes
PART 2: MARKETS IN ACTION
5.
Externalities, Environmental Policy, and Public Goods
6.
Elasticity: The Responsiveness of Demand and Supply
PART 3: FIRMS IN THE DOMESTIC AND INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIES
7.
The Economics of Health Care
8.
Firms, the Stock Market, and Corporate Governance
PART 4: MICROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS: CONSUMERS AND FIRMS
9.
Comparative Advantage and the Gains from International Trade
10. Consumer Choice and Behavioral Economics
PART 5: MARKET STRUCTURE AND FIRM STRATEGY
11. Technology, Production, and Costs
12. Firms in Perfectly Competitive Markets
13. Monopolistic Competition: The Competitive Model in a More Realistic Setting
14. Oligopoly: Firms in Less Competitive Markets
15. Monopoly and Antitrust Policy
PART 6: MARKETS FOR FACTORS OF PRODUCTION
16. Pricing Strategy
PART 7: INFORMATION, TAXES, AND THE DISTRIBUTION OF INCOME
17. The Markets for Labor and Other Factors of Production
18. Public Choice, Taxes, and the Distribution of Income
PART 8: MACROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS AND LONG-RUN GROWTH
19. GDP: Measuring Total Production and Income
20. Unemployment and Inflation
21. Economic Growth, the Financial System, and Business Cycles
22. Long-Run Economic Growth: Sources and Policies
PART 9: SHORT-RUN FLUCTUATIONS
23. Aggregate Expenditure and Output in the Short Run
24. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Analysis
87
PART 10: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY
25. Money, Banks, and the Federal Reserve System
26. Monetary Policy
27. Fiscal Policy
28. Inflation, Unemployment, and Federal Reserve Policy
PART 11: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY
29. Macroeconomics in an Open Economy
30. The International Financial System
Essentials of Economics, 3/e
R. Glenn Hubbard
Anthony Patrick O'Brien
ISBN 10: 0133035867
ISBN 13: 9780133035865
744pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For Survey of Economics courses at four- and two-year colleges and universities.
Learn economics through real business examples.
The number-one question students of economics ask themselves is, "Why am I here, and will I ever use this?".
Hubbard/O'Brien answers this question by demonstrating that real businesses use economics to make real
decisions everyday. This is something all students can connect to, whether they're business majors or not,
because students encounter businesses in their daily lives. And regardless of their future career path–opening an
art studio, doing social work, trading on Wall Street, working for the government, or bartending at the local pub–
students will benefit from understanding the economic forces behind their work.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Economics: Foundations and Models
Appendix: Using Graphs and Formulas
2.
Trade-offs, Comparative Advantage, and the Market System
3.
Where Prices Come From: The Interaction of Demand and Supply
PART 2: MARKETS IN ACTION: POLICY AND APPLICATIONS
4.
Market Efficiency and Market Failure
5.
The Economics of Healthcare
PART 3: MICROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS: CONSUMERS AND FIRMS
6.
Firms, the Stock Market, and Corporate Governance
7.
Consumer Choice and Elasticity
8.
Technology, Production, and Costs
PART 4: MARKET STRUCTURE AND FIRM STRATEGY
9.
Firms in Perfectly Competitive Markets
10. Monopoly and Antitrust
11. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly
PART 5: MACROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS
12. GDP: Measuring Total Production and Income
13. Unemployment and Inflation
PART 6: LONG-RUN AND SHORT-RUN FLUCTUATIONS
14. Economic Growth, the Financial System and Business Cycles
15. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Analysis
Appendix: Schools of Macro Thought
PART 7: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY
16. Money, Banks, and the Federal Reserve System
17. Monetary Policy
18. Fiscal Policy
19. Comparative Advantage, International Trade, and Exchange Rates
Money, Banking, and the Financial System
R. Glenn Hubbard, Columbia University
Anthony Patrick O'Brien
ISBN 10: 0132722011
ISBN 13: 9780132722018
640pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Make the link between theory and real-world easier for students with the most up-to-date Money and
Banking text on the market Today!
Hubbard/O'Brien's new text presents Money, Banking, and the Financial System in the context of
contemporary events, policy, and business with an integrated explanation of today’s financial crisis. Reviewers
tell us that Hubbard/O'Brien helps make the link between theory and real-world easier for students!
88
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATIONS
1.
Introducing Money and the Financial System
2.
Money and the Payments System
PART 2: FINANCIAL MARKETS
3.
Interest Rates and Rates of Return
4.
Determining Interest Rates
5.
The Risk Structure and Term Structure of Interest Rates
6.
The Stock Market, Information, and Financial Market Efficiency
7.
Derivatives and Derivative Markets
PART 3: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
8.
The Market for Foreign Exchange
9.
Transactions Costs, Asymmetric Information, and the Structure of the Financial System
10. The Economics of Banking
11. Investment Banks, Mutual Funds, Hedge Funds, and the Shadow Banking System
12. Financial Crises and Financial Regulation
PART 4: MONETARY POLICY
13. The Federal Reserve and Central Banking
14. The Federal Reserve’s Balance Sheet and the Money Supply Process
15. Monetary Policy
16. The International Financial System and Monetary Policy
PART 5: THE FINANCIAL SYSTEM AND THE MACROECONOMY
17. Monetary Theory I: The Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Model
18. Monetary Theory II: The IS—MP Model
Macroeconomics
R. Glenn Hubbard
Anthony Patrick O'Brien
Matthew Rafferty
ISBN 10: 0273762176
ISBN 13: 9780273762171
656pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Make the link between theory and real-world easier for students with the most up-to-date Intermediate
Macroeconomics text on the market Today!
Hubbard, O'Brien, and Rafferty realize that most students enrolled in today's intermediate macroeconomics
courses are either undergraduate or masters students who are likely to become entrepreneurs, managers,
bankers, stock brokers, accountants, lawyers, or government officials. Very few students will pursue a Ph.D. in
economics. Given this student profile, Hubbard, O'Brien, and Rafferty's new text presents Intermediate
Macroeconomics in the context of contemporary events, policy, and business with an integrated explanation of
today's financial crisis. Student and instructor feedback tells us that Hubbard, O'Brien, and Rafferty helps make
the link between theory and real-world easier for students!
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION
1.
The Long and Short of Macroeconomics
2.
Measuring Total Production and Income
3.
The Financial System
PART II: MACROECONOMICS IN THE LONG RUN: ECONOMIC GROWTH
4.
Aggregate Production and Potential GDP
5.
Long-Run Economic Growth
6.
Money and Inflation
7.
The Labor Market
PART III: MACROECONOMICS IN THE SHORT RUN: THEORY AND POLICY
8.
Business Cycles
9.
IS-MP: A Short-Run Macroeconomic Model
9 Appendix: IS-LM: An Alternative Short-Run Macroeconomic Model
10. Monetary Policy
11. Fiscal Policy
12. Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Monetary Policy
PART IV: EXTENSIONS
13. Long-Run Implications of Fiscal Policy
14. Consumption and Investment
15. Balance of Payments, Exchange Rates, and Macroeconomic Policy
International Economics, 9/e
Steve Husted
Michael Melvin
ISBN 10: 027376828X
ISBN 13: 9780273768289
©2013 Paper
89
Basic Approach
For students taking a course in International Economics.
Capture students’ attention with the issues and real data of today’s most recent policy controversies.
International Economics is an accessible, comprehensive and relevant guide for studying international
economics. Using real data and issues that motivate theoretical discussions, this text captures students’ attention
and equips them with a practical understanding of major policy questions.
In this edition, there have been extensive updates to data sets and figures, and coverage on a number of current
issues has been expanded. In addition, more examples and real-world applications have been provided to
improve students’ comprehension and deepen their analysis of challenging theories and applications.
Mathematics for Economics and Business, 7/e
Ian Jacques
ISBN 10: 0273763563
ISBN 13: 9780273763567
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Do you need to brush up on your mathematical skills to truly excel in your economics or business course?
If you want to increase your confidence in mathematics, then this is the perfect book for you. With its friendly
and informal style, this market leading text breaks down topics into short sections making each new technique
you learn seems less daunting. Offering you the chance at every opportunity to stop and check your
understanding by working through the practice problems, you can relax and learn at your own pace.
International Economics, 9/e
Paul R. Krugman
Maurice Obstfeld
Marc Melitz
ISBN 10: 0273754092
ISBN 13: 9780273754091
736pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Nobel Prize winning economist Paul Krugman and renowned researcher Maurice Obstfeld set the standard for
International Economics courses with the text that remains the market leader in the U.S. and around the world.
International Economics: Theory and Policy is a proven approach in which each half of the book leads with
an intuitive introduction to theory and follows with self-contained chapters to cover key policy applications.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction
PART 1: INTERNATIONAL TRADE THEORY
2.
World Trade: An Overview
3.
Labor Productivity and Comparative Advantage: The Ricardian Model
4.
Specific Factors and Income Distribution
5.
Resources and Trade: The Heckscher-Ohlin Model
6.
The Standard Trade Model
7.
External Economies of Scale and the International Location of Production
8.
Firms in the Global Economy: Export Decisions, Outsourcing, and Multinational Enterprises
PART 2: INTERNATIONAL TRADE POLICY
9.
The Instruments of Trade Policy
10. The Political Economy of Trade Policy
11. Trade Policy in Developing Countries
12. Controversies in Trade Policy
PART 3: EXCHANGE RATES AND OPEN-ECONOMY MACROECONOMICS
13. National Income Accounting and the Balance of Payments
14. Exchange Rates and the Foreign Exchange Market: An Asset Approach
15. Money, Interest Rates, and Exchange Rates
16. Price Levels and the Exchange Rate in the Long Run
17. Output and the Exchange Rate in the Short Run
18. Fixed Exchange Rates and Foreign Exchange Intervention
PART 4: INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMIC POLICY
19. International Monetary Systems: An Historical Overview
20. Optimum Currency Areas and the European Experience
21. Financial Globalization: Opportunity and Crisis
22. Developing Countries: Growth, Crisis, and Reform
90
Economics Today, 16/e
Roger LeRoy Miller
ISBN 10: 013268005X
ISBN 13: 9780132680059
840pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Students learn best when they see concepts applied to examples from their everyday lives. With an abundance of
relentlessly current examples, Economics Today appeals to today’s diverse student population by presenting
ideas clearly, at an accessible level, and in the context of newsworthy applications.
Each chapter begins and ends with an Issues and Applications feature, which introduces a timely issue in the
chapter opener and analyzes the issue using the economic tools learned in that chapter at the end. This text is
supported by MyEconLab®, which includes assessment questions that tie to these Issues and Applications, as well
as ABC News video clips.
Also Available:
Economics Today: The Macro View, 16/e
ISBN 10: 0132554518
ISBN 13: 9780132554510
528pp ©2012 Paper
Economics Today: The Micro View, 16/e
ISBN 10: 0132554410
ISBN 13: 9780132554411
552pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION
1.
The Nature of Economics
2.
Scarcity and the World of Trade-Offs
3.
Demand and Supply
4.
Extensions of Demand and Supply Analysis
5.
Public Spending and Public Choice
6.
Funding the Public Sector
PART 2: INTRODUCTION TO MACROECONOMICS AND ECONOMIC GROWTH
7.
The Macroeconomy: Unemployment, Inflation and Deflation
8.
Measuring the Economy’s Performance
9.
Global Economic Growth and Development
PART 3: REAL GDP DETERMINATION AND FISCAL POLICY
10. Real GDP and the Price Level in the Long Run
11. Classical and Keynesian Macro Analyses
12. Consumption, Real GDP, and the Multiplier
13. Fiscal Policy
14. Deficit Spending and the Public Debt
PART 4: MONEY, STABILIZATION, AND GROWTH
15. Money, Banking, and Central Banking
16. Domestic and International Dimensions of Monetary Policy
17. Stabilization in an Integrated World Economy
18. Policies and Prospects for Global Economic Growth
PART 5: DIMENSIONS OF MICROECONOMICS
19. Demand and Supply Elasticity
20. Consumer Choice
21. Rents, Profits, and the Financial Environment of Business
PART 6: MARKET STRUCTURE, RESOURCE ALLOCATION, AND REGULATION
22. The Firm: Cost and Output Determination
23. Perfect Competition
24. Monopoly
25. Monopolistic Competition
26. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior
27. Regulation and Antitrust Policy in a Globalized Economy
PART 7: LABOR RESOURCES AND THE ENVIRONMENT
28. The Labor Market: Demand, Supply, and Outsourcing
29. Unions and Labor Market Monopoly Power
30. Income, Poverty, and Health Care Environmental Economics
31. Environmental Economics
PART 8: GLOBAL ECONOMICS
32. Comparative Advantage and the Open Economy
33. Exchange Rates and the Balance of Payments
91
Economics of Macro Issues, The, 5/e
Roger LeRoy Miller
Daniel K. Benjamin
ISBN 10: 0321788400
ISBN 13: 9780321788405
216pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For principles of economics and social issues courses.
Brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and classroom discussions.
The Economics of Macro Issues is a collection of brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and
classroom discussions in Principles of Economics and Social Issues. The text encourages students to apply
theoretical discussions to today’s important issues and to gain a deeper understanding of current macroeconomic
policy concerns.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: THE MIRACLE OF ECONOMIC GROWTH
1.
Rich Nation, Poor Nation (importance of institutions in promoting economic growth)
2.
Going Underground (how the underground economy sustains prosperity)
3.
Outsourcing and Economic Growth (impact of competition and voluntary exchange on wealth)
4.
Poverty, Capitalism, and Growth (does a rising tide lift all boats?)
5.
The Threat to Growth (why higher taxes can mean less prosperity)
PART TWO: THE BUSINESS CYCLE, UNEMPLOYMENT, AND INFLATION
6.
Is GDP What We Want? (is there a better measure than GDP?)
7.
What’s in a Word? Plenty, If It’s the ‘R’ Word (how is a recession defined and why we care)
8.
The Great Recession (why it happened and why it was a big deal)
9.
The Case of the Disappearing Workers (misleading measures of unemployment)
10. Poverty, Wealth, and Equality (are the rich getting richer and the poor getting poorer?)
11. Will It Be Inflation or Deflation? (why rising prices are more likely than falling prices, and why you
should care)
12. Is it Real, or is it Nominal? (why record-high prices aren’t always what they seem)
PART THREE: FISCAL POLICY
13. Are You Stimulated Yet? (why stimulus packages do—or don’t—work)
14. Health Care Reform (why spending more will get you less)
15. The Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac Flimflam (your money at waste)
16. Big Bucks for Bailouts (if it’s “too big to fail,” it’s too big to save)
17. The Pension Crisis (the future is coming and it’s going to crush us)
18. Higher Taxes Are in Your Future (why you can expect to pay higher and higher taxes in the future)
19. The Myths of Social Security (it’s not what government says it is, nor will it ever be)
PART FOUR: MONETARY POLICY AND FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
20. The Fed and Financial Panics (why the Fed was founded, and what it learned from its failures)
21. The Fed Feeding Frenzy (why monetary policy no longer looks like it used to)
22. Deposit Insurance and Financial Markets (economic implications of subsidized deposit insurance)
23. Credit Card Crunch (how Fed rules on credit cards may keep you from getting one)
PART FIVE: GLOBALIZATION AND INTERNATIONAL FINANCE
24. The Opposition to Globalization (why people object to globalization)
25. The $750,000 Job (economic consequences of attempts to restrict free trade)
26. The Trade Deficit (it sounds bad and it looks ugly, but it’s not necessarily either)
27. The Value of the Dollar (why exchange rates move and what it means for America)
Economics of Public Issues, The, 17/e
Roger LeRoy Miller
Daniel K. Benjamin
Douglass C. North
ISBN 10: 0132827689
ISBN 13: 9780132827683
264pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For principles of economics, public policy, and social issues courses.
Brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and classroom discussions.
The Economics of Public Issues is a collection of brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and
classroom discussions in Principles of Economics and Social Issues courses. This text encourages students to
apply theoretical discussions to today’s important issues and to gain a deeper understanding of current economic
policy concerns.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: THE FOUNDATIONS OF ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
1.
Death by Bureaucrat (when bureaucratic choices mean life for some people—and death for others)
2.
The Economics of Oil Spills (why they happen and who should pay)
3.
Supersize It (the economics of obesity)
4.
Flying the Friendly Skies? (how safe is commercial air travel? How safe should it be?)
5.
The Mystery of Wealth (why some nations are rich and others are poor)
PART TWO: SUPPLY AND DEMAND
92
6.
Sex, Booze, and Drugs (the unintended—and often harmful—consequences of prohibiting voluntary
exchange)
7.
Kidneys for Sale (does a market for human organs make sense?)
8.
Are We Running Out of Water? (on a planet that’s two-thirds water, how can we be running out of the
stuff?)
9.
The (Dis)incentives of High Taxes (how high taxes illustrate the old adage, “there is no free lunch”)
10. Bankrupt Landlords, from Sea to Shining Sea (when governments lower rents, tenants can suffer)
PART THREE: LABOR MARKETS
11. (Why) Are Women Paid Less? (why are women paid less, while men are working less?)
12. The Effects of the Minimum Wage (how a “living wage” can ruin the lives of minority youngsters)
13. Immigration, Superstars, and Poverty (are the rich getting richer and the poor getting poorer?)
14. The Underground World (how informal labor markets are raising wealth around the globe)
PART FOUR: MARKET STRUCTURES
15. Patent Trolls and Seed Monopolies (do patents make us better off?)
16. Contracts, Combinations, and Conspiracies (why the NCAA and OPEC have more in common than fourletter names)
17. Coffee, Tea, or Tuition-Free? (who wins and who loses from price discrimination)
18. Keeping the Competition Out (when the government steps in, the competition steps out)
PART FIVE: POLITICAL ECONOMY
19. Health Care Reform (big bucks make bad policy)
20. The Pension Crisis (our promises are coming home to roost)
21. Mortgage Meltdown (how Congress got us into the subprime mortgage mess)
22. Raising Less Corn and More Hell (how your tax dollars end up in farmers’ pockets)
23. The Graying of America (America is getting older, and you will foot the bill)
PART SIX: PROPERTY RIGHTS AND THE ENVIRONMENT
24. Save that Species (saving a species is easy—with a little bit of economics)
25. Greenhouse Economics (the economics of global climate change)
26. Ethanol Madness (environmental policy gone bad)
27. The Trashman Cometh (the costs and benefits of recycling)
PART SEVEN: GLOBALIZATION AND ECONOMIC PROSPERITY
28. Globalization and the Wealth of America (is globalization all bad?)
29. The $750,000 Steelworker (the economic consequences of restricting international trade)
30. 30: The Lion, the Dragon, and the Future (do China, India, and other modernizing nations spell the
demise of America?)
Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets,
The: The Business School Edition, 3/e
Frederic S. Mishkin
ISBN 10: 0133047938
ISBN 13: 9780133047936
720pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets set the standard for money and banking courses
when it published in its first edition, and it continues to be the worldwide market leader. For professors who
teach with less emphasis on monetary theory and prefer to focus more time on financial institutions, theBusiness
School Edition is an ideal alternative.
The historic economic events and financial crises of late 2008 have changed the entire landscape of money and
banking. Having just served as Governor of the Federal Reserve, only Mishkin has the unique insider's perspective
needed to present the current state of money and banking and explain the latest debates and issues for today’s
students.
By applying a unified analytical framework to the models, Mishkin makes theory intuitive for students, and the
rich array of current, real-world events keeps students motivated. Authoritative, comprehensive, and flexible, the
text is easy to integrate into a wide variety of syllabi, and its ancillaries provide complete support when teaching
the course.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Why Study Money, Banking, and Financial Markets?
2.
An Overview of the Financial System
3.
What Is Money?
PART 2: FINANCIAL MARKETS
4.
Understanding Interest Rates
5.
The Behavior of Interest Rates
6.
The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates
7.
The Stock Market, the Theory of Rational Expectations, and the Efficient Market Hypothesis
PART 3: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
8.
An Economic Analysis of Financial Structure
9.
Financial Crises
10. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions
11. Economic Analysis of Financial Regulation
12. Banking Industry: Structure and Competition
13. Nonbank Finance
14. Financial Derivatives
15. Conflicts of Interest in the Financial Industry
93
PART 4: CENTRAL BANKING AND THE CONDUCT OF MONETARY POLICY
16. Central Banks and the Federal Reserve System
17. The Money Supply Process
18. The Tools of Monetary Policy
19. The Conduct of Monetary Policy: Strategy and Tactics
PART 5: INTERNATIONAL FINANCE AND MONETARY POLICY
20. The Foreign Exchange Market
21. The International Financial System
PART 6: MONETARY THEORY
22. Quantity Theory, Inflation, and the Demand for Money
23. Aggregate Demand and Supply Analysis
24. Monetary Policy Theory
25. Transmission Mechanisms of Monetary Policy
The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial
Markets, 10/e
Frederic S. Mishkin
ISBN 10: 0273765736
ISBN 13: 9780273765738
720pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets set the standard for money and banking courses
when it published in its first edition, and it continues to be the worldwide market leader. By applying a unified
analytical framework to the models, Mishkin makes theory intuitive for students, and the rich array of current,
real-world events keeps students motivated. Authoritative, comprehensive, and flexible, the text is easy to
integrate into a wide variety of syllabi, and its ancillaries provide complete support when teaching the course.
This edition continues to expand on the discussion of the current financial crisis.
This Global Edition has been edited to include enhancements making it more relevant to students outside the
United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Why Study Money, Banking, and Financial Markets?
2.
An Overview of the Financial System
3.
What Is Money?
PART 2: FINANCIAL MARKETS
4.
Understanding Interest Rates
5.
The Behavior of Interest Rates
6.
The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates
7.
The Stock Market, the Theory of Rational Expectations, and the Efficient Market Hypothesis
PART 3: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
8.
An Economic Analysis of Financial Structure
9.
Financial Crises
10. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions
11. Economic Analysis of Financial Regulation
12. Banking Industry: Structure and Competition
PART 4: CENTRAL BANKING AND THE CONDUCT OF MONETARY POLICY
13. Central Banks and the Federal Reserve System
14. The Money Supply Process
15. The Tools of Monetary Policy
16. The Conduct of Monetary Policy: Strategy and Tactics
PART 5: INTERNATIONAL FINANCE AND MONETARY POLICY
17. The Foreign Exchange Market
18. The International Financial System
PART 6: MONETARY THEORY
19. Quantity Theory, Inflation, and the Demand for Money
20. The IS Curve
21. The Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Curves
22. Aggregate Demand and Supply Analysis
23. Monetary Policy Theory
24. The Role of Expectations in Monetary Policy
25. Transmission Mechanisms of Monetary Policy
Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice
Frederic S. Mishkin
ISBN 10: 0273760505
ISBN 13: 9780273760504
696pp ©2012 Paper
94
Basic Approach
Gain Hands on Insight, Make the Connections, Analyze the Theory, and Tailor the Material to Your
Course!
Building on his expertise in macroeconomic policymaking at the Federal Reserve, Mishkin’s Macroeconomics:
Policy and Practice text clearly provides a theoretical framework that illustrates the most current and relevant
policy debates in the field.
This new and exciting has everything you need to Teach Your Course Your Way and still provide your students
with the most current and locally relevant theories in Macroeconomics today!
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION
1.
The Policy and Practice of Macroeconomics
2.
Measuring Macroeconomic Data
PART TWO: MACROECONOMIC BASICS
3.
Aggregate Production and Productivity
4.
Saving and Investment in Closed and Open Economies
5.
Money and Inflation
PART THREE: LONG-RUN ECONOMIC GROWTH
6.
The Sources of Growth and the Solow Model
7.
Drivers of Growth: Technology, Policy, and Institutions
PART FOUR: BUSINESS CYCLES: THE SHORT RUN
8.
Business Cycles: An Introduction
9.
The IS Curve
10. Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand
11. Aggregate Supply and the Phillips Curve
12. The Aggregate Demand and Supply Model
13. Macroeconomic Policy and Aggregate Demand and Supply Analysis
PART FIVE: FINANCE AND THE MACROECONOMY
14. The Financial System and Economic Growth
15. Financial Crises and the Economy
16. Financial Crises in Emerging Market Economies
PART SIX: MACROECONOMIC POLICY
17. Fiscal Policy and the Government Budget
18. Exchange Rates and International Economic Policy
PART SEVEN: MICROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONSOF MACROECONOMICS
19. Consumption and Saving
20. Investment
21. The Labor Market, Employment, and Unemployment
PART EIGHT: MODERN BUSINESS CYCLE ANALYSIS AND MACROECONOMIC POLICY
22. The Role of Expectations in Macroeconomic Policy
23. Modern Business Cycle Theory
Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
Arthur O'Sullivan, Oregon State University
Steven Sheffrin
Stephen Perez
ISBN 10: 0132722003
ISBN 13: 9780132722001
792pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Economics courses.
Questions that drive interest, applications that illustrate concepts, and the tools to test and solidify
comprehension.
Students come into their first Economics course thinking they will gain a better understanding of the economy
around them. Unfortunately, they often leave with many unanswered questions. To ensure students actively
internalize economics, O'Sullivan/Sheffrin/Perez use chapter-opening questions to spark interest on important
economic concepts, applications that vividly illustrate those concepts and chapter-ending tools that test and
solidify understanding.
Also Available:
Macroeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
ISBN 10: 0132555492
ISBN 13: 9780132555494
480pp ©2012 Paper
Microeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
ISBN 10: 0132555514
ISBN 13: 9780132555517
480pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION AND KEY PRINCIPLES
1.
Introduction: What Is Economics?
2.
The Key Principles of Economics
95
3.
Exchange and Markets
4.
Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium
PART 2: THE BASIC CONCEPTS IN MACROECONOMICS
5.
Measuring a Nation’s Production and Income
6.
Unemployment and Inflation
PART 3: THE ECONOMY IN THE LONG RUN
7.
The Economy at Full Employment
8.
Why Do Economies Grow?
PART 4: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS AND FISCAL POLICY
9.
Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply
10. Fiscal Policy
11. The Income-Expenditure Model
12. Investment and Financial Markets
PART 5: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICY
13. Money and the Banking System
14. The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy
PART 6: INFLATION, UNEMPLOYMENT, AND ECONOMIC POLICY
15. Modern Macroeconomics: From the Short Run to the Long Run
16. The Dynamics of Inflation and Unemployment
17. Macroeconomic Policy Debates
PART 7: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY
18. International Trade and Public Policy
19. The World of International Finance
PART 8: A CLOSER LOOK AT DEMAND AND SUPPLY
20. Elasticity: A Measure of Responsiveness
21. Market Efficiency and Government Intervention
22. Consumer Choice Using Utility Theory
PART 9: MARKET STRUCTURES AND PRICING
23. Production Technology and Cost
24. Perfect Competition
25. Monopoly and Price Discrimination
26. Market Entry and Monopolistic Competition
27. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior
28. Controlling Market Power: Antitrust and Regulation
PART 10: EXTERNALITIES AND INFORMATION
29. Imperfect Information: Adverse Selection and Moral Hazard
30. Public Goods and Public Choice
31. External Costs and Environmental Policy
PART 11: THE LABOR MARKET AND INCOME DISTRIBUTION
32. The Labor Market, Income, and Poverty
33. Unions, Monopsony, and Imperfect Information
Survey of Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 5/e
Arthur O'Sullivan, Oregon State University
Steven Sheffrin
Stephen Perez
ISBN 10: 0132727684
ISBN 13: 9780132727686
480pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one semester Principles of Economics courses.
Questions that drive interest, applications that illustrate concepts, and the tools to test and solidify
comprehension.
Students come into their first Economics course thinking they will gain a better understanding of the economy
around them. Unfortunately, they often leave with many unanswered questions. To ensure students actively
internalize economics, O'Sullivan/Sheffrin/Perez use chapter-opening questions to spark interest on important
economic concepts, applications that vividly illustrate those concepts and chapter-ending tools that test and
solidify understanding.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction
Key Principles of Economics
Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium
Elasticity: A Measure of Responsiveness
Production and Cost
Perfect Competition: Short Run and Long Run
Monopoly
Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly, and Antitrust
Market Failure: Imperfect Information, Pollution, and Public Goods
The Labor Market
Measuring a Nation’s Production and Income
Unemployment and Inflation
Why Do Economies Grow
Aggregate Demand and Supply
Fiscal Policy
Money and the Banking System
96
17. Monetary Policy and Inflation
18. International Trade and Finance
Economics, 10/e
Michael Parkin
ISBN 10: 0273754211
ISBN 13: 9780273754213
864pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Get students to think like an Economist using the latest policy and data while incorporating Global Issues.
From our global food shortage to global warming, economic issues permeate our everyday lives. Parkin brings
critical issues to the forefront. Each chapter begins with one of today’s key issues, and additional issues appear
throughout the chapter to show the real-world applications of the theory being discussed. When the chapter
concludes, students “read between the lines” to think critically about a news article relating to the issue,
demonstrating how thinking like an economist helps make informed decisions.
Parkin is so committed to currency that he uploads news articles almost daily to MyEconLab®, the online
assessment and tutorial system that accompanies the text. Assessment questions based on the “Economics in
the News” articles will be uploaded periodically so that instructors can assign recent articles within MyEconLab.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Also Available:
Macroeconomics, 10/e
ISBN 10: 0273753584
ISBN 13: 9780273753582
456pp ©2012 Paper
Microeconomics, 10/e
ISBN 10: 0273753983
ISBN 13: 9780273753988
552pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART I: PRINCIPLES ENDURE IN TIMES OF TURMOIL
1.
The New World of Marketing Communication
2.
Integrated Brand Communication
3.
Brand Communication and Society
PART II: PRINCIPLE: BE TRUE TO THY BRAND
4.
How Brand Communication Works
5.
Segmenting and Targeting the Audience
6.
Strategic Research
7.
Strategic Planning
PART III: PRACTICE: WHERE IS CREATIVE HEADED?
8.
Creative Strategy
9.
Copywriting
10. Visual Communication
PART IV: PRACTICE: WHERE ARE MEDIA HEADING?
11. Media Basics
12. Traditional Media
13. Digital Media
14. Media Planning and Buying
PART V: PRACTICE: IMC AND TOTAL COMMUNICATION
15. Public Relations
16. Direct-Response
17. Promotions
18. The IMC Umbrella
19. Evaluation of Effectiveness
Economics European Edition, 8/e
Michael Parkin
Melanie Powell
Kent Matthews
ISBN 10: 0273736558
ISBN 13: 9780273736554
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Economics touches almost every aspect of life, from climate change to terrorism, taxes to house prices, wages, to
how much time to spend studying. Thinking like an economist will enable you to evaluate economic policies,
understand human behaviour, and make more informed decisions.
97
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE SCOPE OF ECONOMICS
1.
What Is Economics?
2.
The Economic Problem
PART 2: HOW MARKETS WORK
3.
Demand and Supply
4.
Elasticity
5.
Efficiency and Equity
6.
Government Action in Markets
7.
Global Markets in Action
PART 3: HOUSEHOLDS, FIRMS AND MARKETS
8.
Households’ Choices
9.
Organizing Production
10. Output and Costs
11. Perfect Competition
12. Monopoly
13. Monopolistic Competition
14. Oligopoly
PART 4: COPING WITH MARKET FAILURE
15. Public Choices and Public Goods
16. Economics of the Environment
PART 5: FACTOR MARKETS, INEQUALITY AND UNCERTAINTY
17. Markets for Factors of Production
18. Economic Inequality
19. Uncertainty and Information
PART 6: MONITORING MACROECONOMIC PERFORMANCE
20. Measuring GDP and Economic Growth
21. Monitoring Jobs and Inflation
PART 7: MACROECONOMIC TRENDS
22. Economic Growth
23. Finance, Saving, and Investment
24. Money, the Price Level, and Inflation
25. The Exchange Rate and the Balance of Payments
PART 8: MACROECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS
26. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand
27. Expenditure Multipliers: The Keynesian Model
28. Inflation, Unemployment, and Business Cycle
PART 9: MACROECONOMIC POLICY
29. Fiscal Policy
30. Monetary Policy
Essentials of Economics
Michael Parkin
Melanie Powell
Kent Matthews
ISBN 10: 0273718975
ISBN 13: 9780273718970
456pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Rarely has the benefit of a deeper understanding of economics been so important, relevant,
topical …and exciting.
Since the recent global financial crisis moved economics from the business report to the front page, fear has
gripped producers, consumers, financial institutions and governments.
If you want to start thinking about these events as an economist would, this is the book for you. Michael Parkin’s
books are read by over a million students around the world, so you’ll be in safe hands as you learn how to explore
difficult policy problems - and even to make more informed decisions in your own economic life.
This text covers the most important economic topics for a business or non-specialist student and presents the
material with the same rigour found in a specialist economics text. It is an undiluted presentation of economic
principles and models that will serve as a compass as you navigate the unknown future terrain through which
your business life will take you.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE SCOPE OF ECONOMICS
1.
What is Economics?
2.
The Economic Problem
PART 2: HOW MARKETS WORK
3.
Demand and Supply
4.
Efficiency and Equity
5.
Government Actions in Markets
PART 3: BUSINESS DECISIONS AND STRATEGIES
6.
Output and Costs
7.
Competitive Markets
8.
Monopoly
9.
Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly
PART 4: MONITORING BUSINESS CONDITIONS
10. Real GDP
98
11. Monitoring Jobs and Inflation
PART 5: FINANCE AND MONEY
12. Financial Markets
13. Money and Banking
PART 6: MACROECONOMIC PERFORMANCE AND POLICY
14. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate demand
15. Growth, Inflation and Cycles
16. Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy
Microeconomics, 6/e
Jeffrey M. Perloff
ISBN 10: 0273754602
ISBN 13: 9780273754602
800pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Students need to learn two skills in this course: they need to master the requisite micro theory, and at the same
time develop their problem-solving skills. Microeconomics has become a market leader because Perloff
presents theory in the context of real, data-driven examples, and then develops intuition through his hallmark
Solved Problems. Students gain a practical perspective, seeing how models connect to real-world decisions being
made in today’s firms and policy debates.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
For a calculus-based microeconomics course, consider Perloff’s new text, Microeconomics: Theory and
Applications with Calculus.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Introduction
Supply and Demand
Applying the Supply-and-Demand Model
Consumer Choice
Applying Consumer Theory
Firms and Production
Costs
Competitive Firms and Markets
Applying the Competitive Model
General Equilibrium and Economic Welfare
Monopoly
Pricing and Advertising
Oligopoly and Monopolistic Competition
Game Theory
Factor Markets
Interest Rates, Investments, and Capital Markets
Uncertainty
Externalities, Open-Access, and Public Goods
Asymmetric Information
Contracts and Moral Hazards
Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4/e
Roger Perman
Yue Ma
Michael Common
David Maddison
James McGilvray
ISBN 10: 0321417534
ISBN 13: 9780321417534
744pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Now in its fourth edition, this book is a comprehensive and contemporary analysis of the major areas of natural
resource and environmental economics. All chapters have been fully updated in light of new developments and
changes in the subject, and provide a balance of theory, applications and examples to give a rigorous grounding
in the economic analysis of the resource and environmental issues that are increasingly prominent policy
concerns.
This text has been written primarily for the specialist market of second and third year undergraduate and
postgraduate students of economics.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
An introduction to natural resource and environmental economics
The origins of the sustainability problem
Ethics, economics and the environment
Welfare economics and the environment
99
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Pollution control: targets
Pollution control: instruments
Pollution policy with imperfect information
Economy-wide modelling
International environmental problems
Trade and the Environment
Cost-benefit analysis
Valuing the environment
Irreversibility, risk and uncertainty
The efficient and optimal use of natural resources
The theory of optimal resource extraction: non-renewable resources
Stock pollution problems
Renewable resources
Forest resources
Accounting for the environment
Health Economics, 5/e
Charles E. Phelps
ISBN 10: 0132948532
ISBN 13: 9780132948531
648pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Health Economics combines current economic theory, recent research, and health policy problems into a
comprehensive overview of the field. This thorough update of a classic and widely used text follows author
Charles E. Phelps’s thirteen years of service as Provost of the University of Rochester.
Accessible and intuitive, early chapters use recent empirical studies to develop essential methodological
foundations. Later chapters build on these core concepts to focus on key policy areas, such as the structure and
effects of Medicare reform, insurance plans, and new technologies in the health care community.
Microeconomics, 8/e
Robert Pindyck
Daniel Rubinfeld
ISBN 10: 0133041700
ISBN 13: 9780133041705
768pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate economics majors who are enrolled in an Intermediate
Microeconomics course.
A book that provides a treatment of microeconomic theory that stresses the relevance and application to
managerial and public policy decision making.
Table of Contents
PART I. INTRODUCTION: MARKETS AND PRICES
1.
Preliminaries
2.
The Basics of Supply and Demand
PART II. PRODUCERS, CONSUMERS, AND COMPETITIVE MARKETS
3.
Consumer Behavior
4.
Individual and Market Demand
5.
Uncertainty and Consumer Behavior
6.
Production
7.
The Cost of Production
8.
Profit Maximization and Competitive Supply
9.
The Analysis of Competitive Markets
PART III. MARKET STRUCTURE AND COMPETITIVE STRATEGY
10. Mark et Power: Monopoly and Monopsony
11. Pricing with Market Power
12. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly
13. Game Theory and Competitive Strategy
14. Markets for Factor Inputs
15. Investment, Time, and Capital Markets
PART IV. INFORMATION, MARKET FAILURE, AND THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT
16. General Equilibrium and Economic Efficiency
17. Markets with Asymmetric Information
18. Externalities and Public Goods
100
Economics and the Business Environment, 3/e
John Sloman
Elizabeth Jones
ISBN 10: 0273734865
ISBN 13: 9780273734864
©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Economics and the Business Environment presents the essential principles of microeconomics and
macroeconomics applied to the world of business while also looking at wider, topical business issues, such as
business strategy, corporate social responsibility, ethics and the state of the global environment in which we live.
"The best basic economics book available for post graduate level."
Professor Claus Westh
Department of Business, Business Academy Copenhagen North, Denmark
Table of Contents
PART A - INTRODUCTION
1.
Business and the economic environment
PART B - MARKETS, DEMAND AND SUPPLY
2.
The working of competitive markets
3.
Demand and the consumer
4.
Supply decisions in a perfectly competitive market
PART C - THE MICROECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT OF BUSINESS
5.
Pricing and output decisions in imperfectly competitive markets
6.
Business growth and strategy
7.
Multinational corporations and business strategy in a global economy
8.
Labour and employment
9.
Government, the firm and the market
PART D - THE MACROECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT OF BUSINESS
10. The economy and business activity
11. National macroeconomic policy
12. The global trading environment
13. The global financial environment
Economics, 8/e
John Sloman
Alison Wride
Dean Garratt
ISBN 10: 0273763121
ISBN 13: 9780273763123
944pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Now in its 8th edition, Economics by Sloman et al is known and loved for its active learning, student-friendly
approach and unmatched lecturer and student support.
Retaining all the hall mark features of previous editions, it continues to provide a balanced, comprehensive and
completely up-to-date introduction to the world of economics.
Table of Contents
PART A: INTRODUCTION
1.
Introducing Economics
PART B: FOUNDATIONS OF MICROECONOMICS
2.
Supply and Demand
3.
Markets in Action
PART C: MICROECONOMIC THEORY
4.
Background to Demand
5.
Background to Supply
6.
Profit Maximising under Perfect Competition and Monopoly
7.
Profit Maximising under Imperfect Competition
8.
Alternative Theories of the Firm
9.
The Theory of Distribution of Income
PART D: MICROECONOMIC POLICY
10. Inequality, Poverty and Policies to Redistribute Income
11. Markets, Efficiency and the Public Interest
12. Environmental Policy
13. Government Policy towards Business
PART E: FOUNDATIONS OF MACROECONOMICS
14. The National Economy
15. Macroeconomic Issues and Analysis: an Overview
PART F: MACROECONOMICS
16. The Roots of Modern Macroeconomics
17. Short-run Macroeconomic Equilibrium
18. Money and Interest Rates
101
19. The Relationship between the Money and Goods Markets
20. Fiscal and Monetary Policy
21. Aggregate Supply, Unemployment and Inflation
22. Long-term Economic Growth
23. Supply-side Policies
PART G: THE WORLD ECONOMY
24. International Trade
25. The Balance of Payments and Exchange Rates
26. Global and Regional Interdependence
27. Economic Problems of Developing Countries
Appendix 1: Some Techniques of Economic Analysis
Appendix 2: Websites
Essential Mathematics for Economics Analysis, 4/e
Knut Sydsater
Peter Hammond
ISBN 10: 0273760688
ISBN 13: 9780273760689
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This text provides an invaluable introduction to the mathematical tools that undergraduate economists need. The
coverage is comprehensive, ranging from elementary algebra to more advanced material, whilst focusing on all
the core topics that are usually taught in undergraduate courses on mathematics for economists.
Environmental & Natural Resources Economics, 9/e
Tom Tietenberg
Lynne Lewis
ISBN 10: 0132843005
ISBN 13: 9780132843003
696pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Environmental & Natural Resource Economics is the best-selling text for this course, offering a policyoriented approach and introducing economic theory in the context of debates and empirical work from the field.
Students leave the course with a global perspective of both environmental and natural resource economics.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Visions of the Future
The Economic Approach: Property Rights, Externalities and Environmental Problems
Evaluating Trade-offs: Benefit-Cost Analysis and other Decision-Making Metrics
Valuing the Environment: Methods
Dynamic Efficiency and Sustainable Development
Depletable Resource Allocation: The Role of Longer Time Horizons, Substitutes and Extraction Cost
Energy: The Transition from Depletable to Renewable Resources
Recyclable Resources: Minerals, Paper, Bottles, and E-Waste
Replenishable but Depletable Resources: Water
A Locationally Fixed, Multipurpose Resource: Land
Reproducible Private-Property Resources: Agriculture and Food Security
Storable, Renewable Resources: Forests
Common-Pool Resources: Fisheries and Other Commercially Valuable Species
Economics of Pollution Control: An Overview
Stationary-Source Local and Regional Air Pollution
Climate Change
Mobile-Source Air Pollution
Water Pollution
Toxic Substances and Environmental Justice
The Quest for Sustainable Development
Population and Development
Visions of the Future Revisited
102
Economic Development, 11/e
Michael Todaro
Stephen C. Smith
ISBN 10: 1408284472
ISBN 13: 9781408284476
832pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Economic Development is the leading textbook in this field, providing a complete and balanced introduction to
the requisite theory, the driving policy issues, and the latest research.
Todaro and Smith take a policy-oriented approach, presenting economic theory in the context of critical policy
debates and country-specific case studies so students see how theory relates to the problems and prospects of
developing countries.
Table of Contents
I: PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS
1.
Economics, Institutions, and Development: A Global Perspective
2.
Comparative Economic Development
3.
Classic Theories of Economic Growth and Development
4.
Contemporary Models of Development and Underdevelopment
II: PROBLEMS AND POLICIES: DOMESTIC
5.
Poverty, Inequality, and Development
6.
Population Growth and Economic Development: Causes, Consequences, and Controversies
7.
Urbanization and Rural-Urban Migration: Theory and Policy
8.
Human Capital: Education and Health in Economic Development
9.
Agricultural Transformation and Rural Development
10. The Environment and Development
11. Development Policymaking and the Roles of Market, State, and Civil Society
III: PROBLEMS AND POLICIES: INTERNATIONAL AND MACRO
12. International Trade Theory and Development Strategy
13. Balance of Payments, Developing-Country Debt, and the Macroeconomic Stabilization Controversy
14. Foreign Finance, Investment, and Aid: Controversies and Opportunities
15. Finance and Fiscal Policy for Development
16. Some Critical Issues for the Twenty-First Century
Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice, 4/e
Don E. Waldman, Colgate University
Elizabeth J. Jensen, Hamilton College
ISBN 10: 0132770989
ISBN 13: 9780132770989
736pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Written solely for the undergraduate audience, Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice–which features
early coverage of Antitrust–punctuates its modern introduction to industrial organization with relevant empirical
data and case studies to show students how to apply theoretical tools.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE BASICS OF INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION
1.
Introduction
2.
The Firm and Its Costs
3.
Competition and Monopoly
4.
Market Structure
5.
Monopoly Practices
6.
Empirical Industrial Organization
PART II: MODERN INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION: GAME THEORY AND STRATEGIC BEHAVIOR
7.
Game Theory: A Framework for Understanding Oligopolistic Behavior
8.
The Development of Theory
9.
Collusion: The Great Prisoner’s Dilemma
10. Cartels in Action
11. Oligopoly Behavior: Entry and Pricing to Deter Entry
12. Oligopoly Behavior: Entry and Nonpricing Strategies to Deter Entry
PART III: BUSINESS PRACTICES
13. Product Differentiation
14. Advertising
15. Technological Change and Research and Development
16. Price Discrimination
17. Vertical Integration and Vertical Relationships
18. Regulation and Deregulation
103
Dormonomics: Today's Students Discuss Today's
Issues
Stephen M. Walters
John J. Walters
Christopher Appel
Crystal Callahan
Nick Centanni
Steven Maex
Dan O'Neill
ISBN 10: 0132544660
ISBN 13: 9780132544665
272pp ©2013 Paper
Economic Growth, 3/e
David N. Weil
ISBN 10: 0273769294
ISBN 13: 9780273769293
592pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Why are some countries rich and others poor? David N. Weil, one of the top researchers in economic growth,
introduces students to the latest theoretical tools, data, and insights underlying this pivotal question. By showing
how empirical data relate to new and old theoretical ideas, Economic Growth provides students with a complete
introduction to the discipline and the latest research.
With its comprehensive and flexible organization, Economic Growth is ideal for a wide array of courses,
including undergraduate and graduate courses in economic growth, economic development, macro theory,
applied econometrics, and development studies.
104
Finance
Essentials of Corporate Financial Management, 2/e
Glen Arnold
ISBN 10: 027375887X
ISBN 13: 9780273758877
600pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Essentials of Corporate Financial Management supports courses designed to cover the core topics of finance
in 15 to 30 hours of lectures. The book is primarily aimed at undergraduate students studying finance as part of
a business related degree, MBA students and others studying finance at business schools. It also provides the
foundation elements needed by students going on to study more advanced finance.
The step-by-step learning approach enables students to achieve a high level of financial knowledge without
assuming a prior knowledge of finance. Selected core topics and key concepts are delivered with depth, allowing
students to gain an understanding of the topical debates within this field, where disagreement or alternative
perspectives lead to lively discussion.
Modern Financial Markets and Institutions: A Practical Perspective
Glen Arnold
ISBN 10: 0273730355
ISBN 13: 9780273730354
792pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Modern Financial Markets and Institutions provides a comprehensive and authoritative introduction to the
workings of modern financial systems, the efficiency of money markets and the role of investment bankers,
illustrating how they impact our everyday lives.
By drawing on numerous real-world examples, this text is essential reading for students of banking, finance,
investment, business studies and economics. It will be invaluable for those looking to entering banking,
insurance, fund management and other financial services industries.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
The value of the financial system
Banking: retail and corporate
Investment banking and other banking
Insurance, pensions and collective investments
Money markets
Bond markets
Central banking
Equity markets
Raising share capital
Futures markets
Options and swaps
Foreign exchange markets
Trade, shipping, commodities and gold
Hedge funds and private equity
Regulation of the financial sector
The financial crisis
Financial Management for Decision Makers, 6/e
Peter Atrill
ISBN 10: 0273756931
ISBN 13: 9780273756934
640pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
With an innovative, open-learning approach, Atrill's Financial Management for Decision Makers 6e introduces
the the main principles of financial management in an accessible, non-technical way. Its unique focus on the
practical application of financial management and its role in decision making make it an ideal text for students
with minimal experience in the financial world taking their first course in either financial management or business
finance.
105
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
The world of financial management
Financial planning
Analysing and interpreting financial statements
Making capital investment and decisions
Making capital investment decisions: further issues
Financing a business 1: sources of finance
Financing a business 2: raising long-term finance
The cost of capital and the capital structure decision
Making distributions to shareholders
Managing working capital
Mearsuring and managing for shareholder value
Business mergers and share valuation
International Financial Management, 2/e
Geert Bekaert, Columbia University
Robert J. Hodrick, Columbia University
ISBN 10: 013284298X
ISBN 13: 9780132842983
816pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate students enrolled in an international finance course.
An approach that blends theory and practice with real-world data analysis.
International Financial Management seamlessly blends theory with the analysis of data, examples, and
practical case situations. Overall, Bekaert/Hodrick equips future business leaders with the analytical tools they
need to understand the issues, make sound international financial decisions, and manage the risks that
businesses may face in today’s competitive global environment.
All data in this edition has been updated to reflect the most recent information, including coverage on the latest
research, global financial crisis, and emerging markets.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION TO FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKETS AND RISKS
1.
Globalization and the Multinational Corporation
2.
The Foreign Exchange Market
3.
Forward Markets and Transaction Exchange Risk
4.
The Balance of Payments
5.
Exchange Rate Systems
PART II: INTERNATIONAL PARITY CONDITIONS AND EXCHANGE RATE DETERMINATION
6.
Interest Rate Parity
7.
Speculation and Risk in the Foreign Exchange Market
8.
Purchasing Power Parity and Real Exchange Rates
9.
Measuring and Managing Real Exchange Risk
10. Exchange Rate Determination and Forecasting
PART III: INTERNATIONAL CAPITAL MARKETS
11. International Debt Financing
12. International Equity Financing
13. International Capital Market Equilibrium
14. Political and Country Risk
PART IV: INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE
15. International Capital Budgeting
16. Additional Topics in International Capital Budgeting
17. Risk Management and the Foreign Currency Hedging Decision
18. Financing International Trade
19. Managing Net Working Capital
PART V: FOREIGN CURRENCY DERIVATIVES
20. Foreign Currency Futures and Options
21. Interest Rate and Foreign Currency Swaps
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 2/e
Jonathan Berk
Peter DeMarzo
Jarrad Harford
ISBN 10: 0273753460
ISBN 13: 9780273753469
768pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate corporate finance or financial management courses.
The core concepts you expect. The new ideas you want. The pedagogy your students need to succeed.
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance’s applied perspective cements students’ understanding of the modern-
106
day core principles by equipping students with a problem-solving methodology and profiling real-life financial
management practices—all within a clear valuation framework.
The second edition focuses on new topics and includes an increased emphasis on valuation.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION
1.
Corporate Finance and the Financial Manager
2.
Introduction to Financial Statement Analysis
PART II: INTEREST RATES AND VALUING CASH FLOWS
3.
Time Value of Money: An Introduction
4.
Time Value of Money: Valuing Cash Flow Streams
5.
Interest Rates
6.
Bond Valuation
7.
Stock Valuation
PART III: VALUATION AND THE FIRM
8.
Investment Decision Rules
9.
Fundamentals of Capital Budgeting
10. Stock Valuation: A Second Look
PART IV: RISK AND RETURN
11. Risk and Return in Capital Markets
12. Systematic Risk and the Equity Risk Premium
13. The Cost of Capital
PART V: LONG-TERM FINANCING
14. Raising Capital
15. Debt Financing
PART VI: CAPITAL STRUCTURE AND VALUATION
16. Capital Structure
17. Payout Policy
PART VII: FINANCIAL PLANNING
18. Financial Modeling and Pro Forma Analysis
19. Working Capital Management
20. Short-Term Financial Planning
PART VIII: SPECIAL TOPICS
21. Option Applications and Corporate Finance
22. Mergers and Acquisitions
23. International Corporate Finance
Financial Management: Core Concepts, 2/e
Raymond Brooks
ISBN 10: 0273768476
ISBN 13: 9780273768470
684pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For students taking an undergraduate corporate finance or financial management course.
You've got the know-how. We've got the how-to.
Brooks uses a tools-based approach that presents the key concepts of finance (or “tools”) early on in the text,
followed by an application of those concepts to various finance problems. By introducing key finance concepts
with personal and business-related finance examples, this text helps students understand how the tools of finance
can help them in any career or business situation.
This edition features strengthened material on financial statements, a discussion on yield curves, new and
advanced spreadsheet problems, and updated material.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND BASIC TOOLS OF FINANCE
1.
Financial Management
2.
Financial Statements
3.
The Time Value of Money (Part 1)
4.
The Time Value of Money (Part 2)
5.
Interest Rates
PART 2: VALUING STOCKS AND BONDS AND UNDERSTANDING RISK AND RETURN
6.
Bonds and Bond Valuation
7.
Stocks and Stock Valuation
8.
Risk and Return
PART 3: CAPITAL BUDGETING
9.
Capital Budgeting Decision Models
10. Cash Flow Estimation
11. The Cost of Capital
PART 4: FINANCIAL PLANNING AND EVALUATING PERFORMANCE
12. Forecasting and Short-Term Financial Planning
13. Working Capital Management
14. Financial Ratios and Firm Performance
PART 5: OTHER SELECTED FINANCE TOPICS
107
15. Raising Capital
16. Capital Structure
17. Dividends, Dividend Policy, and Stock Splits
18. International Financial Management
Appendix 1: Future Value Interest Factors
Appendix 2: Present Value Interest Factors
Appendix 3: Future Value Interest Factors of an Annuity
Appendix 4: Present Value Interest Factors of an Annuity
Appendix 5: Answers to Prepping for Exam Questions
Financial Crisis: Causes, Context and Consequences
Adrian Buckley
ISBN 10: 027373511X
ISBN 13: 9780273735113
360pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
A fascinating close-up analysis of the causes of the 2007/8 financial crisis and its consequences - Financial
Crisis places the world of finance under the microscope, bringing together evidence of the involvement of banks,
governments and regulators.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
An overview of the financial crisis 2007/8
Governments and the financial crisis
Personal finance, housing and the financial crisis
The business of banking
Subprime lenders and borrowers
Credit default swaps and toxic assets
Bank lending and control systems
Regulation
The business cycle, booms, busts, bubbles and frauds
Finance theories
Other academic theories
Bank failures in the USA
Bank failures in the UK
Bank failures in Europe
The great depression
Government responses to the crisis
Lessons and major issues
International Finance: A Practical Perspective
Adrian Buckley
ISBN 10: 0273731866
ISBN 13: 9780273731863
688pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
International Finance: A Practical Perspective is a complete and authoritative text on the theory and
practice of finance in the international arena. The book offers a user-friendly, European orientated, approach
to this sometimes complex topic and moves from the basics to the advanced with clarity and conciseness.
Table of Contents
PART A: ESSENTIAL BACKGROUND
1.
Introduction
2.
The international monetary system
PART B: FOREIGN EXCHANGE
3.
Exchange rates: the basic equations
4.
Foreign exchange markets
5.
The balance of payments
6.
Theories and empiricism on exchange rate movements
7.
Definitions of foreign exchange risk
TEST BANK 1
PART C: HEDGING
8.
Does foreign exchange exposure matter?
9.
Principles of exposure management
10. Internal techniques of exposure management
11. External techniques of exposure management
TEST BANK 2
PART D: DERIVATIVES
108
12. Swaps
13. Financial futures and foreign exchange
14. Options
15. Currency options
16. Interest rate risk
17. Financial engineering
PART E: FINANCIAL CRISIS 2007-8
18. Credit default swaps
19. The financial crisis of 2007-8: a synopsis
TEST BANK 3
PART F: INTERNATIONAL CAPITAL BUDGETING
20. The internationalisation process
21. Exchange controls and corporate tax in international investment
22. The international capital budgeting framework
23. The international capital budgeting model
24. International investment: what discount rate?
25. Country risk analysis and political risk
26. International capital budgeting: the practicalities
TEST BANK 4
PART G: INTERNATIONAL FINANCING
27. 27 Financing the multinational and its overseas subsidiaries
28. 28 Financing international trade and minimising credit risk
29. 29 Practical problems in hedging
PART H MISCELLANEOUS
30. Miscellaneous issues in international finance
TEST BANK 5
Suggested answers to end of chapter questions
Suggested answers to selected exercises
Solutions to multiple choice questions
Appendix 1 Present value of $1
Appendix 2 Present value of $1 received annually for n years
Appendix 3 Table of areas under the normal curve
Appendix 4 Black and Scholes value of call option expressed as a percentage of the share price
Appendix 5 Present value of $1 with a continuous discount rate, r, for T periods. Values of e–rt
Appendix 6 Selections from ISO 4217 currency code list, a.k.a. SWIFT codes
Introduction to Banking, 2/e
Barbara Casu
Claudia Girardone
Philip Molyneux
ISBN 10: 0273718134
ISBN 13: 9780273718130
560pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Provides a comprehensive introduction to theoretical and applied issues relating to the global banking industry.
The text is organised into four main sections: Introduction to Banking; Central Banking and Bank Regulation;
Issues in Bank Management and Comparative Banking Markets.
Over the recent years there has been a lack of a comprehensive yet accessible textbook that deals with a broad
spectrum of introductory banking issues. This text fills that gap.
This book is suitable for all undergraduate students taking courses in banking. It is also great background
reading for postgraduate students.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO BANKING
1.
What’s special about banks?
2.
Types of banking
3.
What do banks do?
4.
International banking
PART 2: CENTRAL BANKING AND BANK REGULATION
5.
Theory of central banking
6.
Central banking in practice
7.
Bank regulation and supervision
PART 3: ISSUES IN BANK MANAGEMENT
8.
Banks’ b/s and income structure
9.
Managing banks
10. Banking risks
11. Banking risks management
PART 4: COMPARATIVE BANKING MARKETS
12. UK banking
13. European banking
14. Banking in emerging and transition economies
15. Banking in the US
16. Banking in Japan
PART 5: CURRENT ISSUES IN BANKING
17. Banks and markets
109
18. Bank mergers and acquisitions
19. Bank competition and financial stability
Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 10/e
Mark S. Dorfman, University of North Carolina at Charlotte
David Cather
ISBN 10: 0131394126
ISBN 13: 9780131394124
576pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For upper level undergraduate/graduate courses in Principles of Insurance and Risk Management.
Drawing from the author’s 35-plus years of teaching experience, this book introduces students to basic insurance
concepts from the consumer’s point of view and equips them with the tools to make intelligent, informed
insurance purchasing decisions.
Multinational Business Finance, 13/e
David K. Eiteman
Arthur I. Stonehill
Michael H. Moffettt
ISBN 10: 0273765531
ISBN 13: 9780273765530
©2013
Basic Approach
For courses on International Finance.
Authoritative, comprehensive coverage of contemporary international finance.
Renowned for its authoritative, comprehensive coverage of contemporary international finance, this marketleading text trains the leaders of tomorrow’s multinational enterprises to recognize and capitalize on the unique
characteristics of global markets. Because the job of a manager is to make financial decisions that increase firm
value, the authors have embedded real-world mini-cases throughout to apply chapter concepts to the types of
situations managers of multinational firms face.
This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to
include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Bond Markets, Analysis and Strategies, 8/e
Frank J. Fabozzi
ISBN 10: 0273766139
ISBN 13: 9780273766131
704pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For students enrolled in Fixed Income Securities Courses or Bond Markets Courses.
An applied approach to understanding bond markets.
Through its applied approach, Fabozzi's Bond Markets prepares students to analyze the bond market and manage
bond portfolios without getting bogged down in the theory.
This edition has been streamlined and updated with new content, and features overall enhancements based on
previous editions’ reader and instructor feedback.
This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to
include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction
Pricing of Bonds
Measuring Yield
Bond Price Volatility
Factors Affecting Bond Yields and the Term Structure of Interest Rates
Treasury and Federal Agency Securities
Corporate Debt Instruments
Municipal Securities
International Bonds
Residential Mortgage Loans
Agency Mortgage Pass-Through Securities
Agency Collateralized Mortgage Obligations and Stripped Mortgage-Backed Securities
Nonagency Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities
110
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Commercial Mortgage Loans and Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securities
Asset-Backed Securities
Interest Rate Models
Analysis of Bonds with Embedded Options
Analysis of Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities
Analysis of Convertible Bonds
Corporate Bond Credit Analysis
Credit Risk Modeling
Bond Portfolio Management Strategies
Bond Portfolio Construction
Liability-Driven Strategies
Bond Performance Measurement and Evaluation
Interest-Rate Futures Contracts
Interest Rate Options
Interest-Rate Swaps, Caps, and Floors
Credit Default Swaps
Introduction to Corporate Finance, 5/e
Alexo Frino
Zhian Chen
Amelia Hill
ISBN 10: 1442542489
ISBN 13: 9781442542488
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The only Introductory Finance text with a ‘keep it simple’ decision-making approach and unique
industry perspective.
The continuing instability in global financial markets highlights the critical importance of making informed
decisions that maximise corporate value while minimising risk.
Introduction to Corporate Finance takes a unique industry approach that gives students a concise and
complete overview of the financial decisions that corporations make, and the actual tools and analysis they use to
do so.
This Australian text has been developed for one semester, undergraduate and postgraduate introductory finance
courses. It is clear, concise and easy for students to follow, whilst still providing a rigorous and comprehensive
introduction to the fundamentals of the finance industry.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Preliminary concepts
A review of financial mathematics
Valuation of shares and bonds
Capital budgeting: Basic techniques
Capital budgeting: Further issues
Risk and return
Capital asset pricing model
Company cost of capital
Australian equities market
The pricing efficiency of capital markets
Dividend policy
Capital structure policy
Risk management
Working Capital (NEW)
Financial Times Handbook of Financial Engineering:
Tools and Techniques for Managing Derivatives,
Options, Swaps and Risk, 3/e
Lawrence Galitz
ISBN10: 027374240X
ISBN13: 9780273742401
480pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Today's #1 guide to managing derivatives, options, swaps, and risk: how today's financial engineering tools work,
and
how to use them safely.
ƒ
Fully updated for today's instruments, market environments, and rules.
ƒ
Clearly explains how to create new financial products that reduce or eliminate risk and restructure
financial exposure.
ƒ
Includes recommended tactics and techniques, all tested with recent data.
Packed with up-to-date, fully-worked, practical examples.
Table of Contents
PART ONE – TOOLS
111
1.
Introduction
2.
The Cash Markets
3.
Forward Rates
4.
FRAs
5.
Financial Futures
6.
Short-Term Interest Rate Futures
7.
Bond and Stock Index Futures
8.
Swaps
9.
Pricing and Valuing Swaps
10. Options - From Basics to Greeks
11. Options - From Building Blocks to Portfolios
12. Interest Rate and Exotic Options
13. Credit Derivatives
PART TWO – TECHNIQUES
14. Applications for Financial Engineering
15. Managing Currency Risk
16. Managing Interest-Rate Risk using FRAs, Futures and Swaps
17. Managing Interest-Rate Risk - Using Options and Option-Based Instruments
18. Managing Equity Risk
19. Commodity Risk
20. Managing Credit Risk
21. Structured Finance
Fundamentals of Investing, 3/e
Lawrence Gitman
Michael Joehnk
Roger H. Juchau
Donald G. Ross
Sue Wright
ISBN 10: 1442532882
ISBN 13: 9781442532885
©2012 Paper Bound with PIN
Basic Approach
“What are the best investments for me?”... “What about risk?”... “Do I need professional help with my
investments and can I afford it?”
Mastering the language, concepts, vehicles and strategies of investing can be challenging. Fundamentals of
Investing shows how to make informed investment decisions, understand the risks inherent in investing and
how to confidently shape a sound investment strategy.
Fundamentals of Investing 3rd edition is completely updated and introduces core concepts and tools used by
Australian investors, providing a firm understanding of the fundamental principles of investments. Focusing on
both individual securities and portfolios, students learn how to develop, implement and monitor investment goals
after considering the risk and return of both markets and investment vehicles.
Fundamentals of Investing is suitable for introductory investments courses offered at university undergraduate or
post-graduate level, as well as colleges, professional certification programs and continuing education courses.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: PREPARING TO INVEST
1.
The Investment Environment
2.
Markets and Transactions
3.
Investment Information and Securities Transactions
PART TWO: IMPORTANT CONCEPTUAL TOOLS
4.
Return and Risk
5.
The Time Value of Money
6.
Modern Portfolio Concepts
PART THREE: INVESTING IN SHARES
7.
Shares
8.
Analysing Shares
9.
Share Valuation
10. Technical Analysis, Market Efficiency and Behavioural Finance
PART FOUR: INVESTING IN FIXED-INCOME SECURITIES
11. Fixed-Income Securities
12. Bond Valuation
PART FIVE: PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
13. Managed Funds: Professionally Managed Portfolios
14. Managing Your Own Portfolio
PART SIX: DERIVATIVE SECURITIES
15. Options: Puts and Calls Commodities and Financial Futures
Appendix A Financial Tables A-1
Index I-1
Credits C-1
WEB CHAPTERS
(at www.pearson.com.au/myfinancelab or www.pearson.com.au/9781442532885)
16. Investing in Preference Shares 525
17. Real Estate and Other Tangible Investments
112
Principles of Managerial Finance, 13/e
Lawrence J. Gitman, San Diego State University
Chad J. Zutter, University of Pittsburgh
ISBN 10: 0273754289
ISBN 13: 9780273754282
944pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Gitman’s proven Learning Goal System—a hallmark feature of Principles of Managerial Finance—weaves
pedagogy into concepts and practice, providing students with a road map to guide them through the text and
supplementary tools.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL FINANCE
1.
The Role of Managerial Finance
2.
The Financial Market Environment
PART 2: FINANCIAL TOOLS
3.
Financial Statements and Ratio Analysis
4.
Cash Flow and Financial Planning
5.
Time Value of Money
PART 3: VALUATION OF SECURITIES
6.
Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
7.
Stock Valuation
PART 4: RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN
8.
Risk and Return
9.
The Cost of Capital
PART 5: LONG-TERM INVESTMENT DECISIONS
10. Capital Budgeting Techniques
11. Capital Budgeting Cash Flows and Risk Refinements
12. Risk and Refinements in Capital Budgeting
PART 6: LONG-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS
13. Leverage and Capital Structure
14. Payout Policy
PART 7: SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS
15. Working Capital and Current Assets Management
16. Current Liabilities Management
Part 8: Special Topics in Managerial Finance
17. Hybrid and Derivative Securities
18. Mergers, LBOs, Divestitures, and Business Failure
19. International Managerial Finance
Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief, 6/e
Lawrence J. Gitman, San Diego State University
Chad J. Zutter, University of Pittsburgh
ISBN 10: 0132701065
ISBN 13: 9780132701068
704pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introduction to Managerial Finance courses.
Guide students through the material with a proven learning goal system.
Gitman’s proven Learning Goal System—a hallmark feature of Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief—
weaves pedagogy into concepts and practice, providing students with a road map to guide them through the text
and supplementary tools.
The Brief edition provides an alternative solution for instructors who are especially pressed for time. Just as
thorough and effective as Principles of Managerial Finance, the Brief edition introduces a streamlined
version of the fundamental concepts, tools, techniques, and practices.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL FINANCE
1.
The Role of Managerial Finance
2.
The Financial Market Environment
PART 2: FINANCIAL TOOLS
3.
Financial Statements and Ratio Analysis
4.
Cash Flow and Financial Planning
5.
Time Value of Money
PART 3: VALUATION OF SECURITIES
6.
Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
7.
Stock Valuation
PART 4: RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN
8.
Risk and Return
113
9.
The Cost of Capital
PART 5: LONG-TERM INVESTMENT DECISIONS
10. Capital Budgeting Techniques
11. Capital Budgeting Cash Flows and Risk Refinements
PART 6: LONG-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS
12. Leverage and Capital Structure
13. Payout Policy
PART 7: SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS
14. Working Capital and Current Assets Management
15. Current Liabilities Management
Corporate Governance: Principles and Perspectives
Robert Goddard
ISBN 10: 027375940X
ISBN 13: 9780273759409
©2013 Paper
Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance, 4/e
Craig W. Holden
ISBN 10: 0205235220
ISBN 13: 9780205235223
240pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in corporate finance or financial management.
An approach to building and estimating models through the use of Excel.
Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance focuses on active learning by showing students how to build and
estimate financial models using Excel. This approach shows the steps involved in building models, rather than
solely providing students with completed spreadsheets.
This edition contains updated information and data on the Excel model in Corporate Financial Planning, chapter on
Estimating the Cost of Capital, and the Excel model used to estimate firm valuation.
Table of Contents
PART 1: TIME VALUE OF MONEY
1.
Single Cash Flow
2.
Annuity
3.
NPV Using Constant Discounting
4.
NPV Using General Discounting
5.
Loan Amortization
PART 2: VALUATION
6.
Bond Pricing
7.
Estimating the Cost of Capital
8.
Stock Valuation
9.
Firm and Project Valuation
10. The Yield Curve
11. US Yield Curve Dynamics
PART 3: CAPITAL STRUCTURE
12. Capital Structure
PART 4: CAPITAL BUDGETING
13. Project NPV
14. Cost-Reducing Project
15. Break-Even Analysis
PART 5: FINANCIAL PLANNING
16. Corporate Financial Planning
17. Du Pont System Of Ratio Analysis
18. Life-Cycle Financial Planning
PART 6: INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE
19. International Parity
PART 7: OPTIONS AND CORPORATE FINANCE
20. Binomial Option Pricing
21. Real Options
22. Black-Scholes Option Pricing
23. Debt And Equity Valuation
PART 8: EXCEL SKILLS
24. Useful Excel Tricks
114
Excel Modeling in Investments, 4/e
Craig W. Holden
ISBN 10: 0132497875
ISBN 13: 9780132497879
240pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in corporate finance or financial management.
An approach to building and estimating models through the use of Excel.
Excel Modeling in Investments focuses on active learning by showing students how to build and estimate
financial models using Excel. This approach shows the steps involved in building models, rather than solely
providing students with completed spreadsheets.
This edition contains new content on investments.
Table of Contents
PART 1: BONDS/FIXED INCOME SECURITIES
1.
Bond Pricing
2.
The Yield Curve
3.
Affine Yield Curve Models
PART 2: PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
4.
Portfolio Optimization
5.
Constrained Portfolio Optimization
6.
Portfolio Diversification Lowers Risk
PART 3: SECURITY ANALYSIS
7.
Stock Valuation
8.
DuPont System Of Ratio Analysis
PART 4: STOCKS
9.
Asset Pricing
10. Market Microstructure
11. Life-Cycle Financial Planning
PART 5: INTERNATIONAL INVESTMENTS
12. International Parity
13. Swaps
PART 6: OPTIONS, FUTURES, AND OTHER DERIVATIVES
14. Option Payoffs and Profits
15. Option Trading Strategies
16. Put-Call Parity
17. Binomial Option Pricing
18. Black-Scholes Option Pricing
19. Futures
20. Pricing By Simulation
CONTENTS ON CD
21. Corporate Bonds
PART 7: EXCEL SKILLS
22. Useful Excel Tricks
Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives and DerivaGem CD Package,
8/e
John C. Hull
ISBN 10: 0273759078
ISBN 13: 9780273759072
888pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CDROM
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in derivatives, options and futures, financial engineering,
financial mathematics, and risk management.
Bridge the gap between theory and practice.
Designed to bridge the gap between theory and practice, this introductory text on the futures and options
markets is ideal for those with a limited background in mathematics.
The eighth edition has been updated and improved—featuring a new chapter on securitization and the credit
crisis, and increased discussion on the way commodity prices are modeled and commodity derivatives valued.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Introduction
Mechanics of Futures Markets
Hedging Strategies Using Futures
Interest Rates
Determination of Forward and Futures Prices
Interest Rate Futures
Swaps
115
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Securitization and the Credit Crisis of 2007
Mechanics of Options Markets
Properties of Stock Options
Trading Strategies Involving Options
Binomial Trees
Wiener Processes and Ito’s Lemma
The Black-Scholes-Merton Model
Employee Stock Options
Options on Stock Indices and Currencies
Options on Futures
Greek Letters
Volatility Smiles
Basic Numerical Procedures
Value at Risk
Estimating Volatilities and Correlations
Credit Risk
Credit Derivatives
Exotic Options
More on Models and Numerical Procedures
Martingales and Measures
Interest Rate Derivatives: The Standard Market Models
Convexity, Timing, and Quanto Adjustments
Interest Rate Derivatives: Models of the Short Rate
Interest Rate Derivatives: HJM and LMM
Swaps Revisited
Energy and Commodit Derivatives
Real Options
Derivatives Mishaps and What We Can Learn from Them
Derivatives markets in developing countries
Personal Finance: Turning Money into Wealth, 6/e
Arthur J. Keown, Virginia Polytechnic Instit. and State University
ISBN 10: 0132941287
ISBN 13: 9780132941280
648pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory Personal Finance course.
Through the presentation of the Ten Fundamental Principles of Personal Finance, this text empowers students
with the knowledge they need to successfully make and carry out a plan for their own financial future.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FINANCIAL PLANNING
1.
The Financial Planning Process
2.
Measuring Your Financial Health and Making a Plan
3.
Understanding and Appreciating the Time Value of Money
4.
Tax Planning and Strategies
PART 2: MANAGING YOUR MONEY
5.
Cash or Liquid Asset Management
6.
Using Credit Cards: The Role of Open Credit
7.
Using Consumer Loans: The Role of Planned Borrowing
8.
The Home and Automobile Decision
PART 3: PROTECTING YOURSELF WITH INSURANCE
9.
Life and Health Insurance
10. Property and Liability Insurance
PART 4: MANAGING YOUR INVESTMENTS
11. Investment Basics
12. Securities Markets
13. Investing in Stocks
14. Investing in Bonds and Other Alternatives
15. Mutual Funds: An Easy Way to Diversify
PART 5: LIFE CYCLE ISSUES
16. Retirement Planning
17. Estate Planning: Saving Your Heirs Money and Headaches
116
Derivatives Markets, 3/e
Robert L. McDonald, Northwestern University
ISBN 10: 0321543084
ISBN 13: 9780321543080
896pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
To be financially literate in today’s market, business students must have a solid understanding of derivatives
concepts and instruments and the uses of those instruments in corporations. This edition has an accessible
mathematical presentation, and more importantly, helps students gain intuition by linking theories and concepts
together with an engaging narrative that emphasizes the core economic principles underlying the pricing and uses
of derivatives.
Business Finance: Theory and Practice, 9/e
Eddie McLaney
ISBN 10: 0273750453
ISBN 13: 9780273750451
536pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Taking a user-friendly approach, McLaney's Business Finance explores the type of investments a business
should make and how they should be financed. The text successfully blends the theoretical, analytical and
practical aspects of finance and investments. The new edition has a real world flavour, exploring the theories
surrounding financial decision making and relating these theories to what happens in the real business world.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE BUSINESS FINANCE ENVIRONMENT
1.
Introduction
2.
A framework for financial decision making
3.
Financial (accounting) statements and their interpretation
PART 2: INVESTMENT DECISIONS
4.
Investment appraisal methods
5.
Practical aspects of investment appraisal
6.
Risk in investment appraisal
7.
Portfolio theory and its relevance to real investment decisions
PART 3: FINANCING DECISIONS
8.
Sources of long-term finance
9.
The secondary capital market (the stock exchange) and its efficiency
10. Cost of capital estimations and the discount rate
11. Gearing, the cost of capital and shareholders’ wealth
12. The dividend decision
PART 4: INTEGRATED DECISIONS
13. Management of working capital
14. Corporate restructuring (including takeovers and divestments)
15. International aspects of business finance
16. Small businesses
Financial Markets and Institutions, 7/e
Frederic S. Mishkin
Stanley Eakins
ISBN 10: 0273754440
ISBN 13: 9780273754442
704pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
In Financial Markets and Institutions, best-selling authors Mishkin and Eakins provide a practical introduction
to prepare students for today’s changing landscape of financial markets and institutions. A unifying framework
uses a few core principles to organize students’ thinking then examines the models as real-world scenarios from a
practitioner’s perspective. By analysing these applications, students develop the critical-thinking and problemsolving skills necessary to respond to challenging situations in their future careers.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION
1.
Why Study Financial Markets and Institutions?
117
2.
Overview of the Financial System
PART TWO: FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL MARKETS
3.
What Do Interest Rates Mean and What Is Their Role in Valuation?
4.
Why Do Interest Rates Change?
5.
How Do Risk and Term Structure Affect Interest Rates?
6.
Are Financial Markets Efficient?
PART THREE: FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
7.
Why Do Financial Institutions Exist?
8.
Why Do Financial Crises Occur and Why Are They So Damaging to the Economy?
PART FOUR: CENTRAL BANKING AND THE CONDUCT OF MONETARY POLICY
9.
Central Banks: A Global Perspective
10. Conduct of Monetary Policy: Tools, Goals, Strategy, and Tactics
PART FIVE: FINANCIAL MARKETS
11. The Money Markets
12. The Bond Market
13. The Stock Market
14. The Mortgage Markets
15. The Foreign Exchange Market
16. The International Financial System
PART SIX: THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS INDUSTRY
17. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions
18. Financial Regulation
19. Banking Industry: Structure and Competition
20. The Mutual Fund Industry Insurance Companies and Pension Funds
21. Insurance Companies and Pension Funds
22. Investment Banks, Security Brokers and Dealers, and Venture Capital Firms
Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, 4/e
Michael H. Moffett, Thunderbird The Garvin School of International Management
Arthur I. Stonehill, University of Hawaii at Manoa
David K. Eiteman, University of California, Los Angeles
ISBN 10: 0132829916
ISBN 13: 9780132829915
544pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate International Financial Management, International Business Finance, or
International Finance courses.
A focused, streamlined approach to creating a global financial management strategy.
Tomorrow’s business leaders will be expected to comprehend global markets and lead their organizations through
a constantly changing global environment. By grounding concepts in the context of illuminating case studies and
real-world examples, Fundamentals of Multinational Finance familiarizes students with the fundamental
concepts and tools necessary to implement an effective global financial management strategy.
This edition includes the many new financial management challenges faced by today’s business leaders—while
still providing students with a streamlined text that gets straight to the important concepts.
Table of Contents
PART I: GLOBAL FINANCIAL ENVIRONMENT
1.
Globalization and the Multinational Enterprise
2.
Financial Goals and Corporate Governance
3.
The International Monetary System
4.
The Balance of Payments
5.
Current Multinational Financial Challenges
Part II: FOREIGN EXCHANGE THEORY AND MARKETS
6.
The Foreign Exchange Market
7.
International Parity Conditions
8.
Foreign Currency Derivatives and Swaps
9.
Foreign Exchange Rate Determination and Forecasting
PART III: FOREIGN EXCHANGE EXPOSURE
10. Transaction and Translation Exposure
11. Operating Exposure
PART IV: FINANCING THE GLOBAL FIRM
12. Global Cost and Availability of Capital
13. Sourcing Equity and Debt
PART V: FOREIGN INVESTMENT DECISIONS
14. International Portfolio Theory and Diversification
15. Foreign Direct Investment and Political Risk
16. Multinational Capital Budgeting
PART VI: MANAGING MULTINATIONAL OPERATIONS
17. Multinational Tax Management
18. Working Capital Management
19. International Trade Finance
118
Financial Management, 6/e
J. William Petty
Sheridan Titman
Arthur J. Keown
Peter Martin
John D. Martin
Michael Burrow
Hoa Nguyen
ISBN 10: 1442539178
ISBN 13: 9781442539174
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The sixth edition of Financial Management provides students with an overview of financial management suited
to the first course in finance. The focus of the text is on the big picture, providing an introduction to financial
decision making grounded in current financial theory and the current state of world economic conditions.
Attention is paid to both valuation and capital markets, as well as their influence on corporate financial decisions.
The 10 basic principles of finance are introduced in the first chapter and woven throughout the text, to give
students a solid foundation from which to build their knowledge of finance.
The goal of this text is to go beyond teaching the tools of a discipline or a trade and help students gain a
complete understanding of the subject. This will give them the ability to apply what they have learnt to new and
as yet unforeseen problems—in short, to educate students in finance.
Table of Contents
PART 1: SCOPE AND ENVIRONMENT OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
1.
The role of financial management
2.
The tax environment
3.
The financial markets
4.
The time value of money
PART 2: FINANCIAL PLANNING AND ANALYSIS AND WORKING-CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
5.
Evaluating a firm’s financial performance
6.
Financial forecasting, planning and budgeting
7.
Working-capital management and short-term financing
8.
Current asset management
PART 3: VALUATION AND MANAGEMENT OF LONG-TERM INVESTMENT
9.
Risk and rates of return
10. Valuation of bonds and shares
11. Capital budgeting: concepts and methods
12. Capital budgeting: cash-flow identification and project ranking conflicts
13. Risk in capital budgeting
14. Cost of capital
PART 4: CAPITAL-STRUCTURE AND DIVIDEND POLICY
15. Analysis and impact of leverage
16. Capital-structure policy
17. Dividend policy and internal financing
PART 5: LONG-TERM FINANCING
18. Long-term debt finance
19. Shares and convertible securities
PART 6: SPECIAL TOPICS IN FINANCE
20. International business finance
21. Corporate risk management
22. Mergers and acquisitions (available on this page)
Corporate Finance and Investment: Decision and Strategies, 7/e
Richard Pike
Bill Neale
Philip Linsley
ISBN 10: 0273763466
ISBN 13: 9780273763468
856pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Corporate Finance and Investments, now in its seventh edition, is a popular and well-regarded text for
students of corporate finance. The text takes a practical approach, focusing on the strategic issues of finance in a
business setting.
With clear and accessible language and an international perspective, the seventh edition will provide students
with both essential knowledge of corporate finance and the tools to apply it.
Table of Contents
PART I: A FRAMEWORK FOR FINANCIAL DECISIONS
1.
An overview of financial management
2.
The financial environment
3.
Present values, and bond and share valuation
PART II: INVESTMENT DECISIONS AND STRATEGIES
4.
Investment appraisal methods
5.
Project appraisal – applications
119
6.
Investment strategy and process
PART III: VALUE, RISK AND THE REQUIRED RETURN
7.
Analysing investment risk
8.
Relationships between investments: portfolio theory
9.
Setting the risk premium: the Capital Asset Pricing Model
10. The required rate of return on investment
11. Enterprise value and equity value
12. Identifying and rating options
PART IV: SHORT-TERM FINANCING AND POLICIES
13. Risk and treasury management
14. Short-term asset management
15. Short- and medium-term finance
PART V: STRATEGIC FINANCIAL DECISIONS
16. Long-term finance
17. Returning value to shareholders: the divident decision
18. Capital structure and the required return
19. Does capital structure really matter?
20. Acquisitions and restructuring
PART VI: INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
21. Managing currency risk
22. Foreign investment decision
23. Key issues in modern finance: a review
Appendix A Solutions to self-assessment activities
Appendix B Solutions to selected questions
Appendix C Present value interest factor (PVIF)
Appendix D Present value interest factor for an annuity (PVIFA)
Modern Financial and Investment Planning, 2/e
Tom Valentine
Callum Scott
ISBN 10: 144254354X
ISBN 13: 9781442543546
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The most rigorous Australian financial and investment planning resource on the market.
Modern Financial and Investment Planning 2nd edition equips university students with the theory,
regulations and policies required to satisfy the strict educational requirements imposed by industry.
This includes requirements outlined within the Financial Services Act and ASIC requirements for individual
specialist knowledge areas. It also covers the requirements for a Diploma of Financial Services (Financial
Planning).
Finance and investment theories are comprehensively covered, including investment risk, asset valuation, risk
profiling, managed fund performance and portfolio construction and an exciting new chapter on real-estate
investing.
A wealth of real-life case studies at the beginning and end of each chapter illustrate theories in action and
encourage students to analyse the concepts presented therein.
This completely updated second edition reflects current legislation and covers recent developments in the finance
industry such as changes to superannuation and the impact of the Global Financial Crisis.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
The Financial Planning Profession
Saving, Financial Markets and Financial Institutions
Interest Rates and Debt Securities
Shares and Share Markets
Wealth Hazards
Investing Directly in Property: ‘Bricks and Mortar’
Managed Funds
Superannuation and retirement planning
Social security aspects of financial planning
Estate planning and asset protection
Taxation issues for investors
Principles of Investment: risk vs return
Derivatives in investment management
A financial plan
120
General Business
Foundations of Business Thought
Calvin Boardman
Alan N. Sandomir
Harris Sondak
ISBN 10: 0132856077
ISBN 13: 9780132856072
550pp ©2013 Cloth
Business in Action, 6/e
Courtland L. Bovee, Professor of Business Communication, C. Allen
Paul Distinguished Chair, Grossmont College
John V. Thill, Communication Specialists of America
ISBN 10: 0132828782
ISBN 13: 9780132828789
576pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Business.
An introduction to business text can be complete without being complex and overwhelming—and this text proves
it!
Business in Action is uniquely positioned to help today’s students become tomorrow’s focused, highly productive
business professionals. It is the only introduction to business text that emphasizes efficient, focused, objectivesdriven learning in every aspect.
Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills,
5/e
Judith Dwyer
ISBN 10: 1442548487
ISBN 13: 9781442548480
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills is a comprehensive how-to guide that will help readers
understand communication principles and apply them to the business environment. The goal of this book is to
provide a global communication tool that both expands our knowledge of what we can do to interact effectively
and provide us with working models to practise and refine how well we do it.
In this fourth edition Judith Dwyer continues to combine business communication theory and practice in a text
that is a valuable resource for both academic study and workplace reference.
Business Essentials, 9/e
Ronald J. Ebert
Ricky W. Griffin
ISBN 10: 0273766597
ISBN 13: 9780273766599
504pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For Introduction to Business Courses.
Business Essentials continues to provide a solid foundation of the essential topics that first-semester business
students need to understand. Its focus on practical skills, knowledge of the basics and important developments
in business makes for a brief book, but a rich experience.
The recent events in domestic and global economies are presenting unprecedented challenges, excitement, and
disappointments for business–and a need for a change in the Introduction to Business course and text. This text
captures the widespread significance of these developments and presents their implications on businesses today.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE CONTEMPORARY BUSINESS WORLD
1.
The U.S. Business Environment
2.
Business Ethics and Social Responsibility
3.
Entrepreneurship, New Ventures, and Business Ownership
4.
The Global Context of Business
121
PART 2: THE BUSINESS OF MANAGING
5.
Business Management
6.
Organizing the Business
7.
Operations Management and Quality
PART 3: PEOPLE IN ORGANIZATIONS
8.
Employee Behavior and Motivation
9.
Leadership and Decision Making
10. Human Resource Management and Labor Relations
PART 4: PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING
11. Marketing Processes and Consumer Behavior
12. Pricing, Distributing, and Promoting Products
PART 5: MANAGING INFORMATION
13. Information Technology for Business
14. The Role of Accountants and Accounting Information
PART 6: FINANCIAL ISSUES
15. Money and Banking
16. Managing Finances
Impact: A Guide to Business Communication, Canadian Edition,
8/e
Margot Northey, Queen's University, School of Business
Joan McKibbin, Far Barn Publishing
ISBN 10: 013257439X
ISBN 13: 9780132574396
256pp ©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
A concise, practical guide to writing effectively in the world of business.
This eighth edition of Impact: A Guide to Business Communication continues to offer a direct, concrete
approach and an opportunity for hands-on application of effective writing strategies. Now supported by
MyCanadianBusCommLab, which gives access to an eText, writing samples, interactive document makeover
exercises, and videos of real-life workplace communication.
Impact will help readers build confidence and competence to speak in public, create and give oral presentations,
handle a job interview, or run a meeting. It offers advice on writing, including letters, memos, and reports and
specific strategies for attacking common business-writing problems. Its practical approach covers tips for
collaboration and teamwork and contains explanations and exercises to give its users better results.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Thinking About Communication
Strategies in Planning for Writing and Speaking
Writing with Impact
Routine and Good-News Correspondence
Bad-News Correspondence
Persuasive Writing
Informal Reports
Formal Reports and Proposals
Presentations and Meetings
Job Search
Better Business, 2/e
Michael R. Solomon, Contributing Editor
Mary Anne S. Poatsy, Montgomery County Community College
Kendall Martin
ISBN 10: 0132599058
ISBN 13: 9780132599054
640pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Introduction to Business courses.
Better Business—a better experience for students and instructors!
Better Business offers the business content students need, but in a better way. By presenting the material in a
stimulating Q&A format, Better Business encourages students to come to class prepared to have better
conversations and a truly engaging classroom experience.
The second edition features new and updated material, including coverage of social media.
Table of Contents
PART 1: LOOKING AT THE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
1.
Business Basics
2.
Economics and Banking
3.
Ethics in Business
4.
Business in a Global Economy
Mini 1: Special Issues in Online Business
PART 2: STARTING AND STRUCTURING A BUSINESS
122
5.
Small Business and the Entrepreneur
6.
Forms of Business Ownership
Mini 2: Constructing an Effective Business Plan
PART 3: MANAGING A BUSINESS AND EMPLOYEES
7.
Business Management and Organization
8.
Motivation, Leadership, and Teamwork
9.
Human Resource Management
10. Business Technology
11. Production and Operations Management
Mini 3: Business Communications
PART 4: PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING
12. Marketing and Consumer Behavior
13. Product Development and Pricing Strategies
14. Promotion and Distribution
Mini 4: Finding a Job
PART 5: PRINCIPLES OF FINANCE
15. Financing and Tracking Business Operations
16. Securities and Investments
Mini 5: Personal Finance
Business: A Practical Introduction
Brian K. Williams
Stacey C. Sawyer
Susan Berston
ISBN 10: 0132334291
ISBN 13: 9780132334297
672pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For Introduction to Business courses.
No two Introduction to Business courses are completely alike—they’re as different and unique as the educational
professionals teaching them. And now, in order to help you create a course based on your personal teaching
interests, the new textbook Business: A Practical Introduction offers a way to make the choice all yours.
With just a few clicks, the solid Introduction to Business fundamentals of this course can be enhanced to reflect
your personal interests. So regardless of whether your interests lie in sustainability or ethics, business skills or
social media and technology, you can have a textbook and media solution suited to you and your course needs.
Table of Contents
PART 1: TODAY’S BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
1.
Starting Out
2.
Ethics & Social Responsibility
3.
Economics
4.
Globalization
PART 2: STARTING & GROWING A SUCCESSFUL BUSINESS
5.
Forms of Ownership
6.
The Entrepreneurial Spirit
PART 3: MANAGEMENT: ACHIEVING SUPERIOR RESULTS IN THE WORKPLACE
7.
Management & Leadership
8.
The Effective Organization
9.
Operations Management
10. Motivating Employees
11. Human Resource Management
PART 4: MARKETING
12. Marketing
13. Product & Pricing Strategies
14. Distribution & Promotion Strategies
PART 5: FINANCIAL RESOURCES
15. Accounting & Finance
16. Financial Management
17. Securities Markets
123
Business Communication
Business Communication Essentials, 5/e
Courtland L. Bovee, Professor of Business Communication, C. Allen Paul Distinguished
Chair, Grossmont College
John V. Thill, Communication Specialists of America
ISBN 10: 0132564807
ISBN 13: 9780132564809
528pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Business Communication courses.
Prepare students for the demands they’ll face on the job.
Only Bovée/Thill texts thoroughly address the new-media skills that employees are expected to have in today’s
business environment. Business Communication Essentials presents these technologies in the context of
proven communication strategies and essential business English skills.
The fifth edition includes updated and new content on social media and technology.
Table of Contents
PART 1: BUSINESS COMMUNICATION FOUNDATIONS
1.
Understanding Business Communication in Today’s Workplace
2.
Mastering Team Skills and Interpersonal Communication
PART 2: THE THREE-STEP WRITING PROCESS
3.
Planning Business Messages
4.
Writing Business Messages
5.
Completing Business Messages
PART 3: BRIEF BUSINESS MESSAGES
6.
Crafting Messages for Electronic Media
7.
Writing Routine and Positive Messages
8.
Writing Negative Messages
9.
Writing Persuasive Messages
PART 4: LONGER BUSINESS MESSAGES
10. Understanding and Planning Reports and Proposals
11. Writing and Completing Reports and Proposals
12. Developing Oral and Online Presentations
PART 5: EMPLOYMENT MESSAGES AND JOB INTERVIEWS
13. Building Careers and Writing Résumés
14. Applying and Interviewing for Employment
Appendix A: Format and Layout of Business Documents
Appendix B: Documentation of Report Sources
Appendix C: Correction Symbols
Business Communication Today, 11/e
Courtland Bovee
John V. Thill
ISBN 10: 0273761463
ISBN 13: 9780273761464
720pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Business Communication courses in any curriculum.
Real-world training for the business world of today and tomorrow.
The field’s leading text for more than two decades, Business Communication Today continues to provide the
cutting-edge coverage that students can count on to prepare them for real business practice. Other textbooks
release new editions that don’t reflect their copyright year, training students in practices from last decade–
Bovée/Thill provides real-world training for the business world of today and tomorrow.
This edition includes up-to-date coverage of the social communication model that’s redefining business
communication and reshaping the relationships between companies and their stakeholders.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: Understanding the Foundations of Business Communication
1.
Achieving Success through Effective Business Communication
2.
Mastering Interpersonal Communication
3.
Communicating in a World of Diversity
PART 2: Applying the Three-Step Writing Process
4.
Planning Business Messages
5.
Writing Business Messages
6.
Completing Business Messages
PART 3: Crafting Brief Messages
7.
Crafting Messages for Electronic Media
124
8.
Writing Routine and Positive Messages
9.
Writing Negative Messages
10. Writing Persuasive Messages
PART 4: Supporting Messages with Quality Information
11. Finding, Evaluating, and Processing Information
12. Designing Visual Communication
PART 5: Planning, Writing, and Completing Reports and Proposals
13. Planning Reports and Proposals
14. Writing Reports and Proposals
15. Completing Reports and Proposals
PART 6: Designing and Delivering Oral and Online Presentations
16. Developing Oral and Online Presentations
17. Enhancing Presentations with Slides and Other Visuals
PART 7: Writing Employment Messages and Interviewing for Job
18. Building Careers and Writing Résumés
19. Applying and Interviewing for Employment
Appendix A: Format and Layout of Business Documents
Appendix B: Documentation of Report Source
Appendix C: Correction Symbols
Keys to Business Communication
Carol Carter
ISBN 10: 0132598973
ISBN 13: 9780132598972
608pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Business Communication courses.
Nurturing business communication skills through a personal and practical approach.
Clear and effective communication skills are necessary in every facet of students’ lives–personal, academic, and
professional. To help create well-rounded, successful communicators Keys to Business Communication provides
the information students need so they can learn how to express themselves with confidence, clarity, and ease.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Building Your Communication Skills
Learning Teamwork and Leadership Skills in a Competitive World
Connecting Across Cultures and Generations
Preparing to Write
Writing, Revising, and Editing Messages
Designing, Proofreading, and Delivering Messages
Positive Everyday Messages: Letters, Memos, and Electronic Communications
Negative (Bad News) Messages
Persuasive Messages: Using the Right Words at the Right Time
Reports and Proposals
Business Presentations
Using Effective Visual Aids in Presentations
The Job Search
The Tools for Finding a Job: Cover Letter, Resume, and Portfolio
Interviewing and Closing the Deal
Writing Your Success Story: Becoming a World-Class Employee
Guide to Managerial Communication, 9/e
Mary M. Munter, Series Editor
ISBN 10: 0132719878
ISBN 13: 9780132719872
204pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA courses in Management Communication, Writing, and Oral Presentations.
Also a useful reference for Executive Seminars/Workshops.
A brief, professional, reader-friendly guide to improving managerial communication.
Guide to Managerial Communication is a clear, concise, practical text for cultivating effective written and oral
communication in a managerial, business, government, or professional context.
The ninth edition has been updated based on user feedback while still maintaining the brevity, easy-to-follow
organization, and professional orientation of previous editions.
Table of Contents
I.
II.
Communication Strategy
Writing: Composing Efficiently
125
III. Writing: Macro Issues
IV. Writing: Micro Issues
V.
Speaking: Verbal Structure
VI. Speaking: Visual Aids
VII. Speaking: Nonverbal Skills
Appendix A: Inclusive Language
Appendix B: Grammar and Usage
Appendix C: Punctuation
Guide to PowerPoint Version 2010
Mary M. Munter, Series Editor
David Paradi, thinkoutsidetheslide.com
ISBN 10: 0132568888
ISBN 13: 9780132568883
204pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For anyone who has to make presentations.
A brief, professional, reader-friendly guide to creating effective presentations.
Guide to PowerPoint, Version 2010, with its clear, concise, and practical information, helps readers achieve
results with PowerPoint presentations.
Table of Contents
PART I. PRESENTATION STRATEGY
1.
From Strategy to Structure
2.
From Structure to Slides
PART II. SLIDE MASTER DESIGN
3.
Slide Master Colors
4.
Slide Master Fonts
5.
Other Design Elements
PART III. INDIVIDUAL SLIDES
6.
Charts to Show “How Much”
7.
Concept Diagrams to Show “How”
8.
Text Slides to Show “Why” or “How”
9.
Other Slide Enhancements
PART IV. PRESENTATION DELIVERY
10. Nonverbal Delivery
11. PowerPoint Delivery
Management Communication, 5/e
James S. O'Rourke, University of Notre Dame
ISBN 10: 0132980630
ISBN 13: 9780132980630
438pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For managerial communication courses.
Strategic communication methods that support the development of ethical and effective managers at all levels of
business.
For professors who know students need effective communication skills to be successful in the business world, this
text provides a strategic, yet practical view of managerial communication.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Management Communication in Transition
Communication and Strategy
Communication Ethics
Speaking
Writing
Persuasion
Technology
Listening and Feedback
Nonverbal Communication
Intercultural Communication
Managing Conflict
Business Meetings That Work
Dealing with the News Media
126
Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional Presence
Barbara Shwom
Lisa Gueldenzoph Snyder
ISBN 10: 0132599031
ISBN 13: 9780132599030
600pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Business Communication.
Polishing your professional presence.
Students’ career success depends on their ability to be professional, adaptable, and strategic about their
communication choices. By providing concise, student-centered information on how to develop a strong
foundation in business communication, Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional Presence
helps students enhance their professional and personal success.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING THE FOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
1.
Becoming a Successful Business Communicator
2.
Working with Others: Interpersonal, Intercultural, and Team Communication
3.
Managing the Communication Process
PART 2: DELIVERING EFFECTIVE MESSAGES
4.
Communicating Routine Messages and Building Goodwill
5.
Communicating Persuasive Messages
6.
Communicating Negative Messages
PART 3: PROPOSING AND REPORTING
7.
Finding and Evaluating Business Information
8.
Preparing Persuasive Proposals
9.
Reporting Business Information
10. Delivering Business Presentations
PART 4: PERSUADING AN EMPLOYER TO HIRE YOU
11. Creating Cover Letters and Resumes
12. Getting the Job: Interviewing Skills
Appendix: Grammar Handbook
Excellence in Businees Communication, 10/e
John V. Thill
Courtland L. Bovee
ISBN 10: 0273768891
ISBN 13: 9780273768890
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate business communication courses.
Learn Business Communication Skills by Example.
Students need to have excellent, effective, and practical business communication skills in order to succeed in
today’s business world. Excellence in Business Communication delivers an abundance of the most realistic
model documents and tools, helping students learn business communication skills by example.
The tenth edition is a more efficient, rigorously revised textbook that maintains solid coverage of fundamentals
while focusing on today’s social media revolution and the impact it will have on students’ future careers.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING THE FOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
1.
Achieving Success Through Effective Business Communication
2.
Mastering Team and Interpersonal Skills
3.
Communicating in a World of Diversity
PART 2: APPLYING THE THREE-STEP WRITING PROCESS
4.
Planning Business Messages
5.
Writing Business Messages
6.
Completing Business Messages
PART 3: CRAFTING BRIEF MESSAGES
7.
Crafting Messages for Electronic Media
8.
Writing Routine and Positive Business Messages
9.
Writing Negative Messages
10. Writing Persuasive Messages
PART 4: PREPARING REPORTS AND ORAL PRESENTATIONS
11. Planning Reports and Proposals
12. Writing Reports and Proposals
13. Completing Reports and Proposals
14. Developing Oral Presentations
PART 5: WRITING EMPLOYMENT MESSAGES AND INTERVIEWING FOR JOBS
15. Building Careers and Writing Résumés
16. Applying and Interviewing for Employment
127
Management
Performance Management, 3/e
Herman Aguinis
ISBN 10: 0132974355
ISBN 13: 9780132974356
336pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Performance Appraisal, Compensation Management, and Training and Development.
Discover where the real success in business can be found.
What makes some businesses more successful than others? The answer: people. Organizations with motivated,
talented employees that offer outstanding customer service are more likely to pull ahead of the competition.
Performance Management is the first text to emphasize this key competitive advantage, showing students that
success in today’s globalized business world can be found, not in technology and products, but in an
organization’s people.
The third edition includes updated and current information, and features over forty new cases.
Table of Contents
PART I: STRATEGIC AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
1.
Performance Management and Reward Systems in Context
2.
Performance Management Process
3.
Performance Management and Strategic Planning
PART II: SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
4.
Defining Performance and Choosing a Measurement Approach
5.
Measuring Results and Behaviors
6.
Gathering Performance Information
7.
Implementing a Performance Management System
PART III: EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT
8.
Performance Management and Employee Development
9.
Performance Management Skills
PART IV: REWARD SYSTEMS, LEGAL ISSUES, AND TEAM PERFORM-ANCE MANAGEMENT
10. Reward Systems and Legal Issues
11. Managing Team Performance
Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success, 3/e
Lydia E. Anderson, Fresno City College
Sandra B. Bolt, Fresno City College
ISBN 10: 0132624664
ISBN 13: 9780132624664
352pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Career/Workforce Readiness, Capstone and Internship/Externship related coursework, Human
Relations, Professional and Career Development and Resume, Job Search and Interview Skills.
Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success extends beyond a typical resume/job search text to
seamlessly emphasize the relationship between resume development, job search skills, and human relations.
Developed with input from industry leaders, it addresses topics students need to know when transitioning from
campus to the workplace using case examples, activities, exercises, online video, and an interactive website.
Updated to reflect the latest in technology tools and the business climate, this third edition sets the standard by
skillfully merging self-management topics, workplace basics, relationships and career planning tools.
Table of Contents
MODULE I: SELF-MANAGEMENT
1.
Attitude, Personality, Goal Setting and Life Management
2.
Personal Financial Management
3.
Time and Stress Management/Organization Skills
MODULE 2: WORKPLACE BASICS
4.
Etiquette/Dress
5.
Ethics, Politics, and Diversity
6.
Accountability and Workplace Relationships
7.
Quality Organizations and Service
8.
Human Resource Policies and Resources
MODULE 3: RELATIONSHIPS
9.
Communication
10. Electronic Communications
11. Motivation, Leadership and Teams
12. Conflict and Negotiation
MODULE 4: CAREER PLANNING TOOLS
13. Job Search Skills
128
14. Resumé Package
15. Interview Techniques
16. Career Changes
The Psychology of People in Organisations
Melanie Ashleigh
Angela Mansi
ISBN 10: 0273755765
ISBN 13: 9780273755760
360pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
A genuinely student-friendly and engaging introduction to work psychology and organisational behaviour. Packed
with real life examples and ethical dilemmas to start debate and get students thinking critically, The Psychology
of People in Organisations offers authoritative content presented in a refreshingly accessible way.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
What is Work Psychology?
Ethical Issues and the Nature of Research in Organisations
Individual Differences – and Emotions at Work
Personality at Work – and the Dark Side of Personality
Work–Life Balance: Well-Being at Work and the Tyranny of Technology
Selection and Assessment
Perception, Attitudes and Discrimination
Motivation and Learning at Work
Working in Teams and Groups
Leadership
Organisational Change and Development
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, 4/e
Jay B. Barney
William S. Hesterly
ISBN 10: 0132560453
ISBN 13: 9780132560450
624pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in strategy and strategic management.
Core strategic management concepts without the excess.
Just the essentials–Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage strips out excess by only presenting
material that answers the question: does this concept help students analyze cases and real business situations?
This carefully crafted approach provides students with all the tools necessary for strategic analysis.
The fourth edition features several new and updated cases.
Also Available:
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage: Concepts, 4/e
ISBN 10: 0132560445
ISBN 13: 9780132560443
408pp ©2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE TOOLS OF STRATEGIC ANALYSIS
1.
What Is Strategy and the Strategic Management Process?
2.
Evaluating a Firm’s External Environment
3.
Evaluating a Firm’s Internal Capabilities
End-of-Part 1 Cases
PART 2: BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGIES
4.
Cost Leadership
5.
Product Differentiation
End-of-Part 2 Cases
PART 3: CORPORATE STRATEGIES
6.
Vertical Integration
7.
Corporate Diversification
8.
Organizing to Implement Corporate Diversification
9.
Strategic Alliances
10. Mergers and Acquisitions
11. International Strategies
End-of-Part 3 Cases
129
Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Ventures, 4/e
Bruce R. Barringer
Duane Ireland
ISBN 10: 0273761404
ISBN 13: 9780273761402
592pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Entrepreneurship and New Venture Creation.
Inspirational and informative—introduce students to the process of entrepreneurial success.
There has never been a more exciting and opportunistic time to study entrepreneurship. Around the world, the
current economic crisis is not just negatively affecting business; this crisis is also generating business
opportunities for the creative and daring. Show your class how to take advantage with Entrepreneurship:
Successfully Launching New Ventures–the text that introduces students to the process of entrepreneurial
success and shows them how to be effective every step of the way.
Table of Contents
PART 1: DECISION TO BECOME AN ENTREPRENEUR
1.
Introduction to Entrepreneurship
PART 2: DEVELOPING SUCCESSFUL BUSINESS IDEAS
2.
Recognizing Opportunities and Generating Ideas
3.
Feasibility Analysis
4.
Writing a Business Plan
5.
Industry and Competitor Analysis
6.
Developing an Effective Business Model
PART 3: MOVING FROM AN IDEA TO AN ENTREPRENEURIAL FIRM
7.
Preparing the Proper Ethical and Legal Foundation
8.
Assessing a New Venture’s Financial Strength and Viability
9.
Building a New-Venture Team
10. Getting Financing or Funding
PART 4: MANAGING AND GROWING AN ENTREPRENEURIAL FIRM
11. Unique Marketing Issues
12. The Importance of Intellectual Property
13. Preparing for and Evaluating the Challenges of Growth
14. Strategies for Firm Growth
15. Franchising
Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business (Revised), 3/e
Ian Birt
ISBN 10: 1442552654
ISBN 13: 9781442552654
©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Written from a small business operator’s viewpoint, Ian Birt’s Small Business Success series examines the
challenges faced when establishing, operating and marketing a small business, and provides practical tips and
strategies to make it a success.
Ian Birt’s student friendly approach, clear explanations and useful underpinning knowledge makes complex
business issues easy to understand.
Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business (Revised) summaries, without jargon, the main legal
and taxation requirements for establishing and running a small business. Practical tips and business strategies
are also provided to minimise any legal problems occurring in a business.
This 2011 edition has been revised to address the recent changes in legislation. The chapter updates include:
Chapter 7 – Specific Contracts
ƒ
New requirements for lay-by agreements under the Australian Consumer Law (ACL).
Chapter 12 – Unfair Trading
ƒ
Deals with the new Australian Consumer Law (ACL) prohibiting both general and specific types of unfair
business conduct.
ƒ
Addresses the main statutory consumer protection guarantees under the ACL applying to businesses
supplying goods or services.
ƒ
Covers the new ACL product safety and information requirements for products and product-related
services.
ƒ
Also covers regulation by various legislation of unsolicited marketing practices including door-to-door
selling, telephone selling, sending letterbox junk mail and spamming.
130
Efffective Training, 5/e
P. Nick Blanchard
James Thacker
ISBN 10: 0273768379
ISBN 13: 9780273768371
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For students in training courses and practitioners interested in developing training programs.
Seamlessly integrate training theory and application into your course.
Effective Training discusses the training process within an overarching framework that shows readers how
training activities meet organizational needs that are both strategic and tactical in nature.
This edition adds new material, enhancing the ease of reading and understanding.
Essentials of Management: A Concise Introduction
David Boddy
ISBN 10: 027373928X
ISBN 13: 9780273739289
392pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This concise, readable book offers an unparalleled introduction to the theory and practice of management.
Packed with examples and questions to arouse your interest, it shows how ideas and theories of management
relate to the real world.
Essentials of Management introduces the themes and functions of management, showing them within the clear
framework of planning, organising, leading and controlling. It incorporates the latest research, and uses recent
and topical examples of management in practice to bring the topic to life.
This textbook is relevant to students from all subject areas. Whether you are specialising in business, or an
engineering student taking a single module in the area, this book will offer you an engaging and clear introduction
to management.
Table of Contents
PART 1: AN INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT
1.
Managing in organisations
2.
Models of management
PART 2: THE ENVIRONMENT OF MANAGEMENT
3.
Organisation cultures and contexts
4.
Managing internationally
5.
Corporate responsibility
PART 3: PLANNING
6.
Planning
7.
Decision making
8.
Managing strategy
PART 4: ORGANISING
9.
Organisation structure
10. Information systems and e-business
11. Managing change and innovation
PART 5: LEADING
12. Influencing
13. Motivating
14. Communicating
15. Working in teams
PART 6: CONTROLLING
16. Managing operations and quality
17. Performance measurement and control
Managing People in Organisations
Nikos Bozionelos
ISBN 10: 027372679X
ISBN 13: 9780273726791
©2013 Paper
131
Understanding Cross-Cultural Management, 2/e
MarieJoelle Browaeys
Roger Price
ISBN 10: 0273732951
ISBN 13: 9780273732952
432pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Managing effectively across national and cultural boundaries is critical to the success of today’s organizations,
given the global environment of business and increasing diversity of workforces. A keen awareness and a high
degree of cross-cultural competence in management are therefore key to the career success of both present and
aspiring managers/professionals.
Understanding Cross-Cultural Management explores the key themes and issues in one of the most
challenging and fascinating areas of organizational life, and enables you to sharpen your insights and practical
skills. It offers a selective but broad view of classic and contemporary thinking on cultural management and
encourages you to apply theories and ideas to practice - and to relate them to your own experience - through
various examples and cases from the business world, and a range of practical activities.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: CULTURE AND MANAGEMENT
1.
Determinants of Culture
2.
Dimensions of Culture and Business
3.
Traditional models of culture
4.
Contemporary and developing models of culture
5.
Cultural Dimensions and Dilemmas
6.
Cultures and Styles of Management
PART TWO: CULTURE AND ORGANISATIONS
7.
Culture and Corporate Structures
8.
Culture and Leadership
9.
Culture and Strategy
10. Culture Changes in Organisations
11. Culture and Marketing
12. Culture Diversity in Organisations
PART THREE: CULTURE AND COMMUNICATION
13. Business Communication Across Cultures
14. Barriers to Intercultural Communication
15. Negotiating Internationally
16. Working with International teams
17. Conflicts and cultural differences
18. Developing Intercultural Relationships
Management: A Faith-Based Perspective
Michael E. Cafferky
ISBN 10: 0136058345
ISBN 13: 9780136058342
648pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For principles of management courses looking for a faith-based perspective.
Explore management issues through a faith-based perspective.
Management: A Faith-Based Perspective offers students the opportunity to explore management issues
through a faith-based perspective. By presenting the biblical record on major management issues and
contemporary management scholarship findings, this text encourages the integration of a perspective founded on
the values and teachings common to Christian denominations.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Management
2.
Management History
3.
External and Internal Environment
4.
Cross-Cultural Management
5.
The Manager and Moral and Social Responsibility
6.
Planning and Decision Making
7.
Strategic Thinking
8.
Organization
9.
Human Resources Management
10. Communication
11. Motivation
12. Leadership
13. Change, Power, and Conflict
14. Managerial Control and Accountability
15. Spirituality, Faith, and Management
Chapter Appendix: Assumptions in the Field of Management
132
Appendix A: Selected Hebrew and Greek Words Relevant to Managers
Appendix B: Occupations Mentioned in the Bible
Appendix C: Technology in the Bible
Appendix D: The Christian as Manager and Leader: A Small-Group Study Guide
Cases:
Case 1 – The J.M. Smucker Company Culture
Case 2 – The Burger War: In-N-Out Burger
Case 3 – eHarmony.com
Case 4 – The New Fitness Club
Case 5 – R. W. Beckett Corporation: Corporate Culture
Case 6 – Cardone Industries: Chaplain Program
Case 7 – Ethics, Decision-Making, and Responsibility: Tough Call Knowing Someone Loses
Case 8 – Coping with Scandal: Individual Redemption and Organizational Recovery
Case 9 – Choice of an Executive Assistant
Case 10 – How Gay Friendly Should Your Workplace Be?
Corporate Responsibility: Governance, Compliance and Ethics in a
Sustainable Environment, 2/e
Tom Cannon
ISBN 10: 0273738739
ISBN 13: 9780273738732
256pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This new edition of Corporate Responsibility starts with a fundamental shift in perspective from the previous
edition by highlighting the shift from corporate responsibility being a vital business issue, to being the vital issue
facing business. In the process the author brings together a comprehensive guide to the subject to addressing
contemporary developments in both theory and practice.
A distinct intellectual framework is developed which highlights the ways the issues at the heart of Corporate
Responsibility hang together. This links the ethics which underpin the values of corporations and their leadership
to the way they exercise their responsibilities as stewards not just of their business but of the natural, human and
built environment which they affect. Up-to-the minute research is integrated with case studies that allow the
teacher, student and researcher to access the body of contemporary knowledge while responding to a rapidly
changing landscape.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Corporate Social responsibility: the emerging agenda
The corporate and social/economic challenge
Defining corporate social responsibility
The role and function of business in society
Business ethics
Codes of behaviour
The nature and evolution of corporate governance
Standards, safety and security
The greening of economies and corporations – the sustainability challenge
Sustainability – the opportunities and challenges
Managing a sustainable business
Embedding CSR practice
The built environment
Ways forward and conclusions
Management Skills for Everyday Life, 3/e
Paula Caproni
ISBN 10: 0132479079
ISBN 13: 9780132479073
464pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate level Management Skills, and Organizational Behavior courses, as
well as for Executive Education for beginning through mid-level managers and professionals.
This text's engaging and practical, yet research-based style is designed to help students achieve the success they
desire. Specifically, the ideas, tools, and techniques help students enhance their effectiveness (ability to achieve
results), career potential (e.g., marketability, salaries, promotions, job satisfaction and job choice), and general
well-being (e.g., happiness, health, work-life "balance").
Table of Contents
1.
What Predicts Success?
133
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Developing Self-Awareness
Building Trust
Communicating Effectively
Gaining and Using Sustainable, Ethical Power and Influence
Managing Relationships with Your Direct Reports, Bosses, and Peers
Managing Cultural Diversity
Creating High-Performing Teams
Diverse Teams and Virtual Teams: Managing Differences and Distances
Crafting a Life: Your Guide to the Good Life
Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide for
Leaders, 5/e
James Carlopio
Graham Andrewartha
David Whetten
Kim Cameron
ISBN 10: 1442547626
ISBN 13: 9781442547629
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Develop the personal, interpersonal and group skills vital to achieving outstanding success in today’s
workplace with Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide for Leaders.
Carlopio’s hallmark five-step learning approach—self-assessment, learning, analysis, practice and application—
and its modular structure help you tailor your study to the areas you need to focus on.
This practical, hands-on style resource incorporates in-text exercises and role-playing assignments and is further
supported by a Companion Website that includes self-assessment exercises and additional online chapters on
communication skills.
Developing Management Skills 5th Edition is suitable for undergraduate or post-graduate courses with a
specific focus on managerial skills such as capstone courses, leadership or communication skills. It is also well
suited to corporate professional development training courses or simply as a resource for professionals seeking to
become better managers.
"Overall, it is an excellent mix of theory and practical reality. I congratulate the authors for their valuable and
ongoing contribution to management education and development in the Asia-Pacific region."
Peter J. Dowling, PhD
Professor of International Management and Strategy
La Trobe University , Melbourne
Table of Contents
1.
Management essentials
2.
Developing self-awareness
3.
Managing stress
4.
Solving problems analytically and creatively
5.
Communicating supportively
6.
Motivating others
7.
Managing conflict
8.
Empowering and delegating
9.
Building effective teams
10. Managing change
ONLINE:
11. Making oral and written presentations
12. Conducting interviews
Managing Change in Organizations, 6/e
Colin Carnall
ISBN 10: 0273736418
ISBN 13: 9780273736417
384pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Managing Change in Organizations provides a practical and thorough overview of how effective change can be
achieved in organizations. The text is ideal for advanced undergraduates, MBA and postgraduate students on
courses in managing change and organisational change.
Colin Carnall takes a strategic approach, outlining guidance and techniques for planning and implementing,
evaluating and learning from major organizational change. Reviewing traditional and more recent critical theories,
he also presents models and frameworks for change that are apt for the complex and fast-moving challenges of
contemporary organizations.
134
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
The challenge of change
Organization structures: choice and leadership
The transformation perspective
Theories of change: traditional models
Theories of change: critical perspectives
Theories of change: strategic management models
Organizations in the twenty-first century: the value-added organization
Sustaining organizational effectiveness
Leadership in practice
The learning organization
Strategies for change
Diagnosing change
Managing major changes
Change architecture
A strategy for organizational effectiveness
Learning from change
Culture models and organization change
Strategic convergence: a new model for organizational change
Strategies for corporate transformation
Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private
and Public Sectors, 10/e
Michael R. Carrell, Northern Kentucky University
Christina Heavrin, J.D., Labor Negotiator and Special Counsel to the
Mayor, Lousiville/Jefferson County Metro Government
ISBN 10: 0132730014
ISBN 13: 9780132730013
600pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in labor relations and collective bargaining.
Bring your best case to the table by putting theory into practice with this guide to labor relations, unions, and
collective bargaining.
Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and Public Sectors introduces students to collective
bargaining and labor relations. This text is concerned with application, as well as coverage of labor history, laws,
and practices.
Table of Contents
Part I: Labor Relations Overview
1.
Introduction to Labor Relations
2.
History and Law of Labor Relations in the Private Sector
3.
Public Sector Labor Relations: History & Laws
Part II: The Collective Bargaining Process
4.
Establishing a Bargaining Unit and the Organizing Campaign
5.
Negotiation Models, Strategies, and Tactics
6.
Negotiating a Collective Bargaining Agreement
Part III: Cost of Labor Contracts
7.
Wage and Salary Issues
8.
Employee Benefits
9.
Job Security and Seniority
Part IV: The Labor Relations Process in Action
10. Unfair Labor Practices and Contract Enforcement
11. Grievance and Disciplinary Procedures
12. The Arbitration Process
13. Comparative Global Industrial Relations
Enterprise and Small Business: Principles, Practice and Policy, 3/e
Sara Carter
Dylan Jones-Evans
ISBN 10: 0273726102
ISBN 13: 9780273726104
568pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This highly successful book provides a comprehensive introduction to entrepreneurship, enterprise and small
business for the undergraduate and postgraduate student. With over 30 specialist contributors from academic
institutions in the UK, Europe and the USA, this third edition – while building on the foundations of the first
two editions – has been extensively revised and updated.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction
135
PART 1: ENTREPRENEURSHIP
2.
The Evolution of Entrepreneurship Theory
3.
Entrepreneurship and Economic Development
4.
Government and Small Business
5.
The Real World of the Entrepreneur
PART 2: THE ENTREPRENEURIAL PROCESS
6.
The Entrepreneurial Process
7.
Entrepreneurial Opportunities
8.
Effectuation and Entrepreneurship
9.
The Psychology of the Entrepreneur
10. Entrepreneurial Failure
PART 3: TYPES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP
11. Ethnicity and Entrepreneurship
12. Gender and Entrepreneurship
13. Family Business
14. Habitual Entrepreneurs
15. Technology Entrepreneurship
16. Social Entrepreneurship
17. Community Entrepreneurship
PART 4: ENTREPRENEURIAL MANAGEMENT
18. Entrepreneurial Marketing
19. Entrepreneurial Networks and the Small Business
20. Finance and the Small Business
21. Strategy and the Small Firm
22. Growth and Development in the Small Firm
23. Internationalization and Entrepreneurial Businesses
Framework of International Business, A
S. Tamer Cavusgil
Gary Knight
John Riesenberger
ISBN 10: 0132598949
ISBN 13: 9780132598941
352pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For International Business courses.
A concise but thorough review of essential concepts and techniques.
The Cavusgil/Knight/Riesenberger author team’s new textbook A Framework of International Business
concentrates on new realities in international business, emerging markets, and small and medium-sized
enterprises.
Table of Contents
PART I: FOUNDATION CONCEPTS
1.
Introduction: What Is International Business?
2.
Theories of International Trade and Investment
3.
Organizational Participants that Make International Business
4.
Culture and Ethics in International Business
PART II: THE INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
5.
Political and Legal Systems in International Business
6.
The International Monetary Environment and Financial Management in the Global Firm
7.
Emerging Markets, Developing Economies, and Advanced Economies
PART III: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS STRATEGY AND IMPLEMENTATION
8.
Strategy and Organization in the International Firm
9.
Global Market Opportunity Assessment
10. Exporting and Countertrade
11. Foreign Direct Investment and Collaborative Ventures
12. Licensing, Franchising, and Other Contractual Strategies
13. Global Sourcing
14. Marketing in the Global Firm
15. Human Resource Management in the Global Firm
International Business: The New Realities, 2/e
S. Tamer Cavusgil
Gary Knight
John Riesenberger
ISBN 10: 0132453274
ISBN 13: 9780132453271
656pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in International Business.
An innovative teaching and learning system that captures the spirit of International Business.
136
Based on the authors’ collective teaching and working experience–as well as discussions with hundreds of
practitioners, students, and faculty–International Business: The New Realities is a complete teaching and
learning system that seamlessly integrates cases, exercises, and videos.
To reflect the major changes that have occurred in the global marketplace–due to the financial crisis, and change
in dynamic among international business participants–this edition now includes extensive new and updated
material, as well as a new chapter on ethics.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATION CONCEPTS
1.
Introduction: What Is International Business?
2.
Globalization of Markets and the Internationalization of the Firm
3.
Organizational Participants that Make International Business Happen
PART 2: THE ENVIRONMENT OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
4.
The Cultural Environment of International Business
5.
Ethics and International Business
6.
Theories of International Trade and Investment
7.
Political and Legal Systems in National Environments
8.
Government Intervention in International Business
9.
Regional Economic Integration
10. Emerging Markets, Developing Economies, and Advanced Economies
11. The International Monetary and Financial Environment
PART 3: STRATEGY AND OPPORTUNITY ASSESSMENT
12. Strategy and Organization in the International Firm
13. Global Market Opportunity Assessment
PART 4: ENTERING AND OPERATING IN INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
14. Exporting and Countertrade
15. Foreign Direct Investment and Collaborative Ventures
16. Licensing, Franchising, and Other Contractual Strategies
17. Global Sourcing
PART 5: FUNCTIONAL AREA EXCELLENCE
18. Marketing in the Global Firm
19. Human Resource Management in the Global Firm
20. Financial Management and Accounting in the Global Firm
International Business: The New Realities, Australasian Edition
S. Tamer Cavusgil
Gary Knight
John Riesenberger
Hussain G. Rammal
Susan Freeman
ISBN 10: 1442533560
ISBN 13: 9781442533561
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Remarkable change is the new reality of International Business.
The accelerating cross-border flow of products, services, capital, ideas, technology and people are driving
businesses--large and small--to internationalise.
International Business 1st Australasian edition is a rigorous resource which motivates and prepares future
managers to operate in multi-national settings, by delivering a teaching system that works.
Based on the authors’ collective teaching and working experience–as well as discussions with practitioners,
students, and faculty staff—this is a complete teaching and learning system where cases, exercises and
management skill builders are seamlessly integrated and matched to the topics in each chapter.
Case studies from a wide variety of markets relevant to Australasian businesses, including ASEAN countries (e.g.
Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia) as well as China, India, Japan, South Korea, Pakistan, Europe and the Middle
East, provide a real-world perspective to theories and examine the latest trends in international business.
International Business is accompanied by a rich and flexible set of teaching and learning resources, including
Instructor’s Manual, Companion Website and a wide range of case studies to encourage critical thinking and
reflection.
For undergraduate students majoring in international business or post-graduate courses in international
business.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Introduction: What is International Business?
Globalisation of Markets and the Internationalisation of the Firm
Organisational participants that make business happen
The cultural environment of international business
Ethics and International Business
Theories of International Trade and Investment
Political and Legal Systems in National Environments
Government Intervention in International Business
Regional Economic Integration
Understanding Emerging Markets
The International Monetary and Financial Environment
Strategy and Organisation in the international firm
Global Market Opportunity Assessment
Exporting and Countertrade
Foreign Direct Investment and Collaborative Ventures
137
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Licensing, Franchising, and Other Contractual Strategies
Global Sourcing
Marketing in the Global Firm
Human Resource Management in the Global Firm
Financial Management and Accounting in the Global Firm
Modern Management: Concept and Skills, 12/e
Samuel C. Certo
S. Trevis Certo
ISBN 10: 0273756761
ISBN 13: 9780273756767
600pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Management courses.
Core concepts, cutting-edge skill training: transform students into managers.
Modern Management is a traditionally organized principles of management text that integrates core concepts
with cutting-edge skill training–all while keeping the focus on application.
This edition provides the latest concepts and empirical research as well as the most recent examples of
management in today’s business world.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MODERN MANAGEMENT
1.
Introducing Modern Management: Concepts and Skills
2.
Managing: History and Current Thinking
PART 2: MODERN MANAGEMENT CHALLENGES
3.
Corporate Social Responsibility, Ethics, and Sustainability
4.
Management and Diversity
5.
Managing in the Global Arena
6.
Management and Entrepreneurship
PART 3: PLANNING
7.
Principles of Planning
8.
Making Decisions
9.
Strategic Planning: Strategies, Tactics, and Competitive Dynamics
10. Plans and Planning Tools
PART 4: ORGANIZING
11. Fundamentals of Organizing
12. Responsibility, Authority, and Delegation
13. Managing Human Resources
14. Organizational Change: Stress and Conflict
PART 5: INFLUENCING
15. Influencing and Communication
16. Leadership
17. Motivation
18. Groups and Teams
19. Managing Organization Culture
20. Creativity and Innovation
PART 6: CONTROLLING
21. Controlling, Information, and Technology
22. Production Management and Control
Level Three Leadership: Getting Below the Surface, 5/e
James G. Clawson, University of Virginia Darden Graduate School of Bus. Admin.
ISBN 10: 0132556413
ISBN 13: 9780132556415
464pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate, graduate, and executive courses in leadership, organizational behavior, and
management.
A flexible approach to understanding and applying leadership.
Level Three Leadership (L3L) uses a flexible leadership model to help students and practicing managers
understand and apply the principles of leadership. This text focuses on what managers can do to influence the
thinking and feeling of others–rather than focusing on changing behavior.
The fifth edition has been significantly enhanced with additions based on the recommendations of reviewers and
users.
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: INTRODUCTION
1.
The Leadership Point of View
138
2.
The Diamond Model of Leadership in Organizations
3.
Levels of Leadership
SECTION TWO: STRATEGIC FRAMES
4.
The Changing Context of Leadership
5.
Strategic Thinking
6.
The Ethical Imperative of Level Three Leadership
7.
Innovation and Leadership
8.
Personal, Work Group, and Organizational Charters
SECTION THREE: SELF
9.
Self Leadership
10. A Leader’s Guide to Why People Behave the Way They Do
11. The Reb Model
12. Leadership and Intelligence
13. Resonance, Leadership, and the Purpose of Life
14. The Global Leader
SECTION FOUR: LEADING OTHERS
15. Leading Others
16. The Appeal of Level One Leadership
17. The Limits of Level Two Leadership
18. The Focus and Impact of Level Three Leadership
19. Six Steps to Effective Leadership
20. The Language of Leadership
21. Leading Teams
SECTION FIVE: LEADING DESIGN
22. Leading by Design
23. Human Resource Management Systems
24. Leading Change
SECTION SIX: CONCLUSION
25. Conclusion
SECTION SEVEN: WORKBOOK, EXERCISES, BIBLIOGRAPHY, APPENDIX
26. Workbook
Strategic Management in Action, 6/e
Mary Coulter
ISBN 10: 0132620677
ISBN 13: 9780132620673
336pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Strategic Management.
Current theories and practice in an interesting, engaging, and easy-to-read format.
Strategic Management in Action presents current strategic management theories and practice in an engaging
and easy-to-read format. Coulter effectively blends theory with plenty of opportunity to practice throughout the
text, providing students with the ideologies, ethical dilemmas, and unique strategies of today's real managers and
organizations in action.
This edition continues its commitment to currency and includes new and updated cases and examples featuring
well-known companies.
International Business, 14/e
John Daniels
Lee Radebaugh
Daniel Sullivan
ISBN 10: 0273766953
ISBN 13: 9780273766957
888pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate International Business courses.
This classic best-seller discusses the differences faced in international environments, the overall strategies
companies can take, and the functional alternatives for operating abroad. It takes a balanced approach to all
functions of business. It features an abundance of colorful maps, strong engaging opening and closing cases, and
classic and contemporary examples.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
I. BACKGROUND FOR INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS.
1.
International Business: An Overview.
II. COMPARATIVE ENVIRONMENTAL FRAMEWORKS.
2.
The Cultural Environments Facing Business.
3.
The Political and Legal Environments Facing Business.
139
4.
The Economic Environment.
III. THEORIES AND INSTITUTIONS: TRADE AND INVESTMENT.
5.
International Trade Theory.
6.
Government Influence on Trade.
7.
Regional Economic Integration and Cooperative Agreements.
8.
Factor Mobility and Foreign Direct Investment.
IV. WORLD FINANCIAL ENVIRONMENT.
9.
The Foreign-Exchange Market.
10. The Determination of Exchange Rates.
V. THE DYNAMICS OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS-GOVERNMENT RELATIONSHIPS.
11. Government Attitudes Toward Foreign Direct Investment.
12. International Business Negotiations and Diplomacy.
VI. OPERATIONS: OVERLAYING TACTICAL ALTERNATIVES.
13. Country Evaluation and Selection.
14. Collaborative Strategies.
15. Control Strategies.
VII. OPERATIONS: MANAGING BUSINESS FUNCTIONS INTERNATIONALLY.
16. Marketing.
17. Export and Import Strategies.
18. Global Manufacturing and Supply Chain Management.
19. Multinational Accounting and Tax Functions.
20. The Multinational Finance Function.
21. Human Resource Management.
Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage
Approach, Concepts and Cases, 14/e
Fred R. David
ISBN 10: 0273767488
ISBN 13: 9780273767480
688pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in strategy.
A skills-oriented, practitioner perspective on strategy, thoroughly updated with current research and concepts.
In today’s economy, gaining and sustaining a competitive advantage is harder than ever. Strategic
Management captures the complexity of the current business environment and delivers the latest skills and
concepts with unrivaled clarity, helping students develop their own cutting-edge strategy through skill-developing
exercises and cases.
The fourteenth edition explores the current global recession and shows how it has affected the business
environment, providing students with up-to-date coverage in every chapter.
Also Available:
Strategic Management: Concepts, 14/e
ISBN 10: 0273767607
ISBN 13: 9780273767602
416pp ©2013 Paper
Table of Contents
PART 1: OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
1.
The Nature of Strategic Management
PART 2: STRATEGY FORMULATION
2.
The Business Vision and Mission
3.
The External Assessment
4.
The Internal Assessment
5.
Strategies in Action
6.
Strategy Analysis and Choice
PART 3: STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION
7.
Implementing Strategies: Management and Operations Issues
8.
Implementing Strategies: Marketing, Finance/Accounting, R&D, and MIS Issues
PART 4: STRATEGY EVALUATION
9.
Strategy Review, Evaluation, and Control
PART 5: KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS
10. Business Ethics/Social Responsibility/Environmental Sustainability
11. Global/International Issues
PART 6: STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
140
Strategy: A View From The Top, 4/e
Cornelis A. De Kluyver
John A. Pearce
ISBN 10: 0132145626
ISBN 13: 9780132145626
240pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate strategy courses.
Gain a strategic edge in today’s business world.
This short, up-to-date, practitioner-oriented guide was meant to effectively prepare practicing executives, and
MBA and EMBA students for top management responsibilities.
The fourth edition includes new content, reordered topics to improve the flow of the subject matter, and
numerous updated examples and vignettes.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
What is Strategy?
Strategy and Performance
Analyzing the External Strategic Environment
Analyzing an Industry
Analyzing an Organization’s Strategic Resource Base
Formulating Business Unit Strategy
Business Unit Strategy: Contexts and Special Dimensions
Global Strategy Formulation
Corporate Strategy: Shaping the Portfolio
Corporate Strategy: Managing the Portfolio
Sustainable Venturing
Thomas Dean
ISBN 10: 0136044891
ISBN 13: 9780136044895
256pp ©2013 Paper
Financial Time Guide to Management: The Art and Science of Being
an Effective Manager, 1/e
Phillip Delves-Broughton
ISBN10: 0273761986
ISBN13: 9780273761983
256pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Your authoritative guide to the art and science of being an effective manager.
This is an indispensable guide to management success, whether you are taking on you first management role or
are already well on your way to the top. Practical, realistic, incisive and easy-to-read it offers a realistic
touchstone for anyone who is aspiring to progress up the career ladder and wants to excel in a management role.
The Financial Times Guide to Management addresses the key issues that every manager faces and shows you
not only how to become competent in them but also how to add value. This is a wide-ranging, jargon-free
companion for today’s managers, showing you how to get the balance right between knowing enough and not
getting bogged down in the details.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Managing
Managing
Managing
Managing
Managing
Managing
Yourself
Others
the Numbers
Processes
for change
beyond the market
141
Negotiation and Dispute Resolution
Beverly DeMarr
Suzanne De Janasz
ISBN 10: 0131577530
ISBN 13: 9780131577534
408pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Negotiation/Dispute Resolution.
Complete and broad in coverage, this book addresses negotiations and dispute resolution in a wide variety of
settings. Because skill development is an important part of becoming a masterful negotiator, concepts are
augmented with numerous exercises, activities, role plays, and self-assessments. By combining theoretical
foundations with experiential exercises, the book helps students develop their ability to negotiate and resolve
conflicts in both personal and professional settings.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: FOUNDATIONS OF NEGOTIATION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
1.
Introduction
2.
The Language of Negotiation
PART TWO: NEGOTIATION PROCESSES
3.
Distributive Negotiations
4.
Integrative Negotiations
5.
Conflict and Dispute Resolution
PART THREE: INTERPERSONAL/CONTEXTUAL CHARACTERISTICS
6.
Understanding Yourself and How that Impacts Negotiation
7.
Communication in Negotiation
8.
The Role and Importance of Persuasion in Negotiation
9.
The Nature of the Relationship in Negotiating and Resolving Disputes
10. International Negotiations
11. Team and Multi-Party Negotiations
PART FOUR: NEGOTIATION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION APPLICATIONS
12. Negotiating in the Workplace
13. Negotiating the Purchase or Sale of an Automobile
14. Real Estate Negotiations: Commercial and Residential
15. Negotiating Your Future
APPENDICES:
APPENDIX A: Negotiating with Organized Labor
APPENDIX B: Resumes and Cover Letters
International Management, 2/e
Helen Deresky
Elizabeth Christopher
ISBN 10: 1442539674
ISBN 13: 9781442539679
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
International Management explores the dynamic global environment of business management by examining
the political, legal, technological, competitive, and cultural factors that shape corporations worldwide.
With its hallmark clear and concise approach, International Management places fundamental management
theories in an international context. Students will gain a comprehensive understanding of the practices, cultural
skills and sensitivities needed to operate successfully in a wide range of cross-national situations.
The second Australian edition of International Management focuses on the expanding economics of
Australasia, China, India and their increasing trade amongst themselves, the European Union and the Americas.
International Management 2nd edition incorporates up-to-date research, increased coverage of ethics, a wide
range of case studies and examines recent trends affecting international business managers in today’s
hypercompetitive global environment.
International Management is suitable for undergraduate and post graduate students majoring in international
business, general management or cross cultural studies.
Table of Contents
PART 1: OVERVIEW
1.
Assessing the environment: political, social, economic, legal and technological
2.
International social responsibility: the ethics of interdependence
PART 2: THE CULTURAL CONTEXT OF GLOBAL MANAGEMENT
3.
Understanding the role of culture
4.
Communicating across cultures
5.
Cross-cultural negotiations and decisions
PART 3: STRATEGIES FOR INTERNATIONAL OPERATIONS
6.
Strategic planning
7.
Structures and controls for overseas expansion Business relationships
PART 4 : INTERNATIONAL STAFFING POLICIES AND PRACTICES
142
8.
International patterns of employment
9.
The roles of women and minorities in international business:
10. discrimination and prejudice in industry and government
11. Motivating and leading
Comprehensive Case Appendix
Framework for Human Resource Management, A, 7/e
Gary Dessler, Florida International University
ISBN 10: 0132576147
ISBN 13: 9780132576147
422pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in human resource management.
A concise yet thorough review of essential HR management concepts.
A Framework for Human Resource Management provides students and practicing managers with a concise
yet thorough review of essential HR management concepts—including fundamental practices, methods, topics,
and relevant legal findings—in a highly readable and accessible format.
Apart from an improved visual experience, many new exercises and features enhance this edition.
Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2/e
Gary Dessler, Florida International University
ISBN 10: 0132570130
ISBN 13: 9780132570138
496pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in Human Resource Management.
A brief format, ideal for instructors who want flexibility while maintaining the integrity of the material.
Fundamentals of Human Resource Management covers a wide range of HR topics and shows students the
importance of human resource management within the restraints of a compact semester. Offering a wealth of
functional examples and applications, this text emphasizes the notion that all managers need basic human
resource management skills.
This edition is the first text on the market to build its core around the talent management process—which the
author defines as the goal-oriented and integrated process of planning, recruiting, developing, managing, and
compensating employees.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Managing Human Resources Today
2.
Managing Equal Opportunity and Diversity
3.
Strategic Human Resource Management
PART 2: STAFFING AND TALENT MANAGEMENT
4.
Recruiting and Talent Management
5.
Selecting Employees
6.
Training and Developing Employees
7.
Performance and Talent Management
8.
Compensating Employees
PART 3: EMPLOYEE AND LABOR RELATIONS
9.
Ethics, Employee Rights, and Fair Treatment at Work
10. Working with Unions and Resolving Disputes
11. Improving Occupational Safety, Health, and Security
PART 4: SPECIAL ISSUES IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
12. Managing Human Resources in Entrepreneurial Firms
13. Managing HR Globally
14. Building High-Performance Work
Human Resource Management, 13/e
Gary Dessler
ISBN 10: 0273766023
ISBN 13: 9780273766025
736pp ©2013 Paper
143
Basic Approach
For courses in Human Resources Management.
Authoritative and current information on Human Resource Management that ALL managers can use.
This best-selling HRM text is designed to provide authoritative and accurate information on HR-related
responsibilities and personnel management by focusing on practical applications, concepts, and techniques that
ALL managers can use in business.
More than 100 new topics can be found throughout this edition, along with new features and video cases.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION
1.
Introduction to Human Resource Management
2.
Equal Opportunity and the Law
3.
The Manager’s Role in Strategic Human Resource Management
PART TWO: RECRUITMENT AND PLACEMENT
4.
Job Analysis
5.
Personnel Planning and Recruiting
6.
Employee Testing and Selection
7.
Interviewing Candidates
PART THREE: TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
8.
Training and Developing Employees
9.
Performance Management and Appraisal
10. Coaching, Careers, and Talent Management
PART FOUR: COMPENSATION
11. Establishing Strategic Pay Plans
12. Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives
13. Benefits and Services
PART FIVE: EMPLOYEE RELATIONS
14. Ethics, Justice, and Fair Treatment in HR Management
15. Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining
16. Employee Safety and Health
17. Managing Global Human Resources
18. Managing Human Resources in Entrepreneurial Firms
Supervision and Leadership in a Changing World
Gary Dessler, Florida International University
ISBN 10: 0135058651
ISBN 13: 9780135058657
608pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Supervision.
Offering a new approach to supervision, this book moves beyond just order-giving strategies to address
leadership techniques that work with today’s workers and teams. Throughout the book, readers learn how to
supervise a diverse workforce that is often set in dispersed, self-managing teams. The link between supervision
and leadership is explored as well as common supervisory tasks such as planning and setting goals; organizing
jobs and work; interviewing and screening employees; and appraising and managing performance.
Table of Contents
PART I: UNDERSTANDING SUPERVISION AND LEADERSHIP IN A CHANGING WORLD
1.
The Supervisor's Role in a Changing World
2.
Leading a Diverse Workforce
PART II: SETTING UP THE WORK
3.
Solving Problems and Making Decisions
4.
Planning and Setting Goals
5.
Understanding Budgets and How to Control Work Processes
6.
Organizing Jobs and Work
PART IV: GETTING EMPLOYEES STARTED
7.
The Supervisor and Equal Employment
8.
Interviewing and Screening Employees
9.
Orienting and Training Employees
PART V: LEADING AND MOTIVATING EMPLOYEES
10. Using Motivation and Incentives
11. Leading the Team Effort
12. Coaching and Communicating at Work
PART VI: APPRAISING AND SUPERVISING EMPLOYEES
13. Appraising and Managing Performance
14. Supervising Discipline, Ethics, and Fair Treatment at Work
15. Handling Grievances and Labor Relations
16. Supervising Health and Safety at Work
144
Human Relations: Interpersonal Job-Oriented Skills, 11/e
Andrew J. DuBrin
ISBN 10: 0132680033
ISBN 13: 9780132680035
432pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Human Relations, Applied Psychology, Human Relations in the
Workplace, Career Development; also appropriate for a course in Interpersonal Skills Training.
Accomplished author and national speaker, Andrew J. DuBrin brings his expertise of Human Relations and
Business Psychology to this exciting eleventh edition. Focusing on today’s work environment, the book takes a
two-pronged approach that improves interpersonal skills by first presenting basic concepts and then by featuring
a heavy component of skill development and self-assessment. This edition features a new chapter on
interpersonal skills for the digital world and fresh cases, exercises and skill builders that prepare students for
today’s business environment.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
A Framework for Interpersonal Skill Development
Understanding Individual Differences
Building Self-Esteem and Self-Confidence
Interpersonal Communication
Interpersonal Skills for the Digital Age
Developing Teamwork Skills
Group Problem Solving and Decision Making
Cross-Cultural Relations and Diversity
Resolving Conflicts with Others
Becoming an Effective Leader
Motivating Others
Helping Others Develop and Grow
Positive Political Skills
Customer Satisfaction Skills
Enhancing Ethical Behavior
Stress Management and Personal Productivity
Job Search and Career Management Skills
Human Relations for Career and Personal Success, Canadian
Edition, 4/e
Andrew J. DuBrin
Terri M. Geerinck, Sir Standford Fleming College
ISBN 10: 0138127875
ISBN 13: 9780138127879
456pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Now updated to emphasize developing effective human relations skills in the new economy!
Human Relations for Career and Personal Success successfully combines social science research findings
with practical and accessible work-related features, making it an essential text for developing the foundations of
individual effectiveness and healthy successful relationships in the workplace. Human Relations for Career
and Personal Success shows you how you can become more effective in your work and personal life through
knowledge of and skill in human relations.
Updated and expanded to emphasize developing human relations skills for the workplace in the new economy.
New topics covered include material on life challenges, teamwork, and the impact of new technologies such as
social networking. The fourth Canadian edition also features expanded Canadian content, including new statistics
from the latest Canadian census, new Canadian research, and new Canadian illustrations and photographs.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING AND MANAGING YOURSELF
1.
Human Relations and Yourself
2.
Self-Motivation and Goal-Setting
3.
Problem Solving and Creativity
4.
Achieving Wellness and Managing Stress
5.
Dealing with Life-Changes and Personal Problems
6.
Finding Happiness and Enhancing Your Personal Life
PART 2: DEALING EFFECTIVELY WITH PEOPLE
7.
Communicating with People
8.
Developing Intercultural Competence
9.
Handling Conflict and Being Assertive
PART 3: DEVELOPING CAREER THRUST
10. Getting Along with Your Manager or Team Leader
11. Getting Along with Co-workers and Customers
12. Developing Self-Confidence and Leadership Skills
13. Choosing a Career and Developing a Portfolio Career
14. Conducting a Job Search
145
15. Developing Good Work Habits
16. Getting Ahead in Your Career
Business Ethics and Values, 4/e
Collin Fisher
Alan Lovell
ISBN 10: 0273757911
ISBN 13: 9780273757917
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive look at the fascinating and complex subject of ethics in business that is both theoretically rich
and engaging.
Fisher and Lovell focus on developing ethical awareness and give as much importance to individual conscience at
work as they do to socially responsible behaviour at the corporate level and within the global business world.
Business Ethics and Values is suitable for any Business related Ethics, Sustainability or Corporate Social
Responsibility course at an upper level undergraduate or Masters level.
Introducing Human Resource Management, 6/e
Margaret Foot
Caroline Hook
ISBN 10: 0273740989
ISBN 13: 9780273740988
544pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
This is an accessible and lively introduction to the human resource management, focusing on the frameworks of
people management strategies, and covering the basic operational areas and practices of HRM. The sixth edition
continues to explore ideas and themes in an engaging style with reference to real-life examples, and offers
student-friendly features and activities.
This edition includes new coverage of well-being, equality and diversity, and offers a greater international
perspective throughout. It is aimed at students taking an HRM option on a Business Degree, or those studying
for an HND, Foundation Degree or CIPD qualification.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Introducing human resource management
Human resource strategy and planning
High performance working: employee engagement through involvement and participation
The employment relationship
Equality and diversity
Recruitment
Selection: shortlisting, interviews and beyond (NEW combined single chapter covering all aspects of
selection)
Retention and talent management (NEW)
Performance management and appraisal
Learning and development
Payment systems
Health, safety and welfare
Discipline and grievance
Dismissal, redundancy and outplacement
Understanding and Managing Organizational Behavior, 6/e
Jennifer M. George
Gareth R. Jones
ISBN 10: 0273753797
ISBN 13: 9780273753797
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one-semester, undergraduate/graduate level courses in Organizational Behavior.
Vivid examples, thought-provoking activities—get students engaged in OB.
George/Jones uses real-world examples, thought- and discussion-provoking learning activities to help students
become more engaged in what they are learning. This text also provides the most contemporary and up-to-date
account of the changing issues involved in managing people in organizations.
The sixth edition features new cases, material addressing the economic crisis, and expanded coverage of ethics
and workplace diversity.
146
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Organizational Behavior
PART 1: INDIVIDUALS IN ORGANIZATIONS
2.
Individual Differences: Personality and Ability
3.
Values, Attitudes, and Moods and Emotions
4.
Perception, Attribution, and the Management of Diversity
5.
Learning and Creativity
6.
The Nature of Work Motivation
7.
Creating a Motivating Work Setting
8.
Pay, Careers, and Changing Employment Relationships
9.
Managing Stress and Work-Life Balance
PART 2: GROUP AND TEAM PROCESSES
10. The Nature of Work Groups and Teams
11. Effective Work Groups and Teams
12. Leaders and Leadership
13. Power, Politics, Conflict, and Negotiation
14. Communicating Effectively in Organizations
15. Decision Making and Organizational Learning
PART 3: ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESSES
16. Organizational Design and Structure
17. Organizational Culture and Ethical Behavior
18. Organizational Change and Development
International Corporate Governance
Marc Goergen
ISBN 10: 0273751255
ISBN 13: 9780273751250
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
International Corporate Governance provides a thorough introduction to the state of the art of corporate
governance research and practice. It covers a wide range of topics, including corporate control, regulation,
behavioural issues and the role of stakeholders in corporate governance. The text not only reflects the
multidisciplinary nature of corporate governance, but it also adopts an international perspective by highlighting
the major differences in corporate control and corporate governance practice across the world. While rigorous,
the text avoids needless jargon and uses language that is accessible to a wider audience. It also makes a critical
assessment of current regulation, practice and research findings.
Table of Contents
PART I – INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
1.
Defining corporate governance and key theoretical models
2.
Corporate control across the world
3.
Control versus ownership rights
PART II – INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
4.
Taxonomies of corporate governance systems
5.
Incentivising managers and the disciplining of badly performing managers
6.
Corporate governance, types of financial systems and economic growth
7.
Corporate governance regulation in an international context
PART III – CORPORATE GOVERNANCE AND STAKEHOLDERS
8.
Corporate social responsibility and socially responsible investment
9.
Debtholders
10. Employee rights and voice across corporate governance systems
11. The role of gatekeepers in corporate governance
PART IV – IMPROVING CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
12. Corporate governance in emerging markets
13. Contractual corporate governance
14. Corporate governance in initial public offerings
15. Behavioural biases and corporate governance
PART V – CONCLUSIONS
16. Learning from Diversity and Future Challenges for Corporate Governance
PART VI – GLOSSARY
147
Management
Luis R. GomezMejia, Arizona State University
David Balkin
ISBN 10: 0132604337
ISBN 13: 9780132604338
552pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses.
The basics of management—and beyond.
Students often assume the role of a manager is no different than that of a traditional “boss”—someone who
hires/fires, doles out raises/promotions, and tells employees what to do. Management takes students beyond
these preconceived notions by exposing them to the full spectrum of management practices and concepts that
will help them succeed as managers in today’s business world.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Management and its evolution
Managing in a global environment
Ethics and social responsibility
Culture and change
Managing the planning process
Decision making
Strategic Management
Entrepreneurship and innovation
Organization structure
Human Resource Management
Managing Employee Diversity
Leadership and Motivation
Managing teams
Managing communication
Operations management and control
Managing Human Resources, 7/e
Luis Gomez-Mejia
David Balkin
Robert Cardy
ISBN 10: 0132570149
ISBN 13: 9780132570145
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate level human resource management courses.
A “non-functional” approach that shows the relevance of HR topics to all employees.
Managing Human Resources prepares all future managers with a business understanding of human resource
management skills. The “non-functional” HR approach used in this text also makes human resources relevant to
anyone who has to deal with HR issues, even those who do not hold the title of manager.
All materials have been thoroughly updated in this edition including more than 800 new references.
Table of Contents
PART I. INTRODUCTION
1.
Meeting Present and Emerging Strategic Human Resource Challenges
Part II. The Contexts of Human Resource Management
2.
Managing Work Flows and Conducting Job Analysis
3.
Understanding Equal Opportunity and the Legal Environment
4.
Managing Diversity
PART III. STAFFING
5.
Recruiting and Selecting Employees
6.
Managing Employee Separations, Downsizing, and Outplacement
PART IV. EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT
7.
Appraising and Managing Performance
8.
Training the Workforce
9.
Developing Careers
PART V. COMPENSATION
10. Managing Compensation
11. Rewarding Performance
12. Designing and Administering Benefits
PART VI. GOVERNANCE
13. Developing Employee Relations
14. Respecting Employee Rights and Managing Discipline
15. Working with Organized Labor
16. Managing Workplace Safety and Health
17. International HRM Challenge
148
Managing Behavior in Organizations, 6/e
Jerald Greenberg
ISBN 10: 0132729830
ISBN 13: 9780132729833
538pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA courses in Organizational Behavior and Industrial/Organizational
Psychology.
Get students right to the point while teaching your course, your way.
Managing Behavior in Organizations provides a brief tour of the scientific and practical highlights of
organizational behavior (OB). This text focuses on the essential concepts and practices that students need to
know while offering instructors an array of material that can be tailored to their style of teaching.
The latest edition of this text contains completely new topics as well as updated material from earlier editions.
International Business, 7/e
Ricky W. Griffin
Michael W. Pustay
ISBN 10: 0273765868
ISBN 13: 9780273765868
600pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For International Business courses.
Successfully prepare students for the international marketplace.
International Business illustrates how successful managers must function in a competitive world. Packed with
current examples that reflect the vibrancy of the international business field, this student-friendly text offers a
managerial approach that keeps an emphasis on skills development, emerging markets and geographical literacy.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE WORLD’S MARKETPLACES
1.
An Overview of International Business
2.
Global Marketplaces and Business Centers
3.
Legal, Technological, Accounting, and Political Environments
4.
The Role of Culture
5.
Ethics and Social Responsibility in International Business
PART 2: THE INTERNATIONAL ENVIRONMENT
6.
International Trade and Investment
7.
The International Monetary System and the Balance of Payments
8.
Foreign Exchange and International Financial Markets
9.
Formulation of National Trade Policies
10. International Cooperation Among Nations
PART 3: MANAGING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
11. International Strategic Management
12. Strategies for Analyzing and Entering Foreign Markets
13. International Strategic Alliances
14. International Organization Design and Control
15. Leadership and Employee Behavior in International Business
PART 4: MANAGING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS
16. International Marketing
17. International Operations Management
18. International Financial Management
19. International Human Resource Management and Labor Relations
Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at
Work, 2/e
Daniel B. Griffith, Syracuse University
Cliff B. Goodwin
ISBN 10: 0132741059
ISBN 13: 9780132741057
384pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Organizational Leadership and Supervision, Human Resources Management,
Communications and Conflict Studies.
Taking a front-line view, The Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at Work focuses on topics
149
supervisors, team leads and managers need to know to address conflict in organizations. Each chapter succinctly
explains conflict theories, frameworks and models, while focusing on important interpersonal and management
skills. This classroom text and on-the-job guide presents strategies that can be used immediately in the
workplace and provides hands-on practice throughout. Fully updated in this edition, it includes a new section on
cultural communication differences, more on mediation, strategies for staying calm during confrontation and a
section on managing bullying in the workplace.
Table of Contents
1.
The Nature of Conflict
PART I: THE THEORY AND CONTEXT FOR MANAGING CONFLICT IN THE WORKPLACE
2.
Preventing Conflict
3.
Approaches to Conflict
4.
Working Toward Collaboration
PART II: INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS FOR RESOLVING CONFLICT
5.
The Three Channels of Communication
6.
Listening to Resolve Conflict and Build Lasting Relationships
7.
The Communication Continua
PART III: PREPARING TO RESOLVE CONFLICTS
8.
Are You Capable?
9.
Opening the Doors to Conflict Resolution
PART IV: APPLICATION AND PRACTICE
10. The Building Blocks of Collaboration
11. Integrative Negotiation: Negotiating as Partners
12. Overcoming Barriers to Integrative Negotiation
13. Mediating Conflicts Between Parties
14. Decision-Making Choices for the Manager
15. Handling Conflicts Requiring Direct Confrontation
16. Special Situations: "Opportunistic" Employees, Workplace Violence, Terminations, and Bullying
17. Achieving Effectiveness as a Conflict Manager
Understanding and Managing Diversity, 5/e
Carol Harvey
M. June Allard
ISBN 10: 0132847701
ISBN 13: 9780132847704
416pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in human resources.
A diverse approach to understanding and managing diversity.
Understanding and Managing Diversity uses applications to clarify the complexity of a diverse workforce, and
explains how it can be used as an organizational asset. This text also provides students with a wide range of
expertise–from the perspective of experienced interdisciplinary instructors (business, psychology, economics,
theology, law, politics, history, etc.) to practitioners (diversity trainers, corporate managers, etc.).
This edition has been substantially updated to reflect the changing diversity issues in today’s workplace–including
18 new and 15 revised articles/cases/exercises.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: UNDERSTANDING INDIVIDUAL PERSPECTIVES OF DIVERSITY
1.
DIVERSITY!
2.
Understanding Attribution Theory by Using Visual Literacy
3.
I AM…
4.
Diversity Awareness Quiz
5.
Thriving in a Multicultural Classroom
6.
Body Ritual Among the Nacirema
7.
Increasing Multicultural Understanding: Uncovering Stereotypes
8.
White Privilege and Male Privilege: A Personal Account of Coming to See Correspondences through
Work in Women’s Studies
9.
The Emotional Connection of Distinguishing Differences and Conflict
10. The Best of the Best
11. The Pitney Bowes Case: A Legacy of Diversity Management
12. Exploring Diversity in Your Organization
SECTION II: UNDERSTANDING PRIMARY ASPECTS OF DIVERSITY: RACE AND ETHNICITY
13. World View of Cultural Diversity
14. We Have an African American President: How Could Racism Still be a Major Problem?
15. To Be Asian in America
16. Inventing Hispanics: A Diverse Minority Resists Being Labeled
17. Immigration: Cultural Transmission Today
18. Negotiating: The Top Ten Ways that Culture Can Effect Your Negotiation
19. Global Call Center Exercise: Learning to Negotiate
20. The Coca-Cola Company: Then and Now
21. Being an Only
SECTION III: UNDERSTANDING PRIMARY DIVERSITY: GENDER, SEXUAL ORIENTATION, AGE,
AND PHYSICAL CHALLENGE
22. Women in Leadership Positions: Why Aren’t They There Yet?
23. The Paradox of Male Privilege
150
24. Are We Equal Yet? Making Sense of Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Issues in the Workplace
25. Generational Diversity in the Workplace
26. How Old Should You Be to Drive a Bus? Exploring Ageism
27. Musical Chairs
28. The Best Buy Case: Committed to the Inclusion of People with Disabilities
29. Sexual Harassment
30. The Cracker Barrel Restaurants
SECTION IV. UNDERSTANDING SECONDARY ASPECTS OF DIVERSITY, SOCIAL CLASS, RELIGION,
APPEARANCE, AND MILITARY EXPERIENCE
31. Social Class: The Fiction of American Meritocracy
32. Does Social Class Make a Difference?
33. Religion in the U.S. Workplace
34. Appearance and Weight Inclusion Issues in the Workplace
35. Military Veterans
36. Choosing the Board
37. Fairfax Metropolitan Hospital
SECTION V: MANAGING DIVERSITY: ETHICAL, LEGAL, COMMUNICATION, AND MARKETING
ISSUES
38. The Ethics of Workplace Diversity
39. Ethics and Diversity: Legal Applications in the Workplace
40. How Canada Promotes Workplace Diversity
41. Media Messages: The Shaping of Culture
42. Improving Communication in Today’s Diverse Workplace
43. Changing Consumer Markets: The Business Case for Diversity
44. The Bar Exam
45. The UBS Diversity Case
SECTION VI: MANAGING ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND DIVERSITY
46. Leadership, Employee Resource Groups, and Social Responsibility: What Organizations Can Do to
Manage Diversity
47. Work-Life Balance Issues: Changing When and How the Work Gets Done
48. Diversity Training: Ideological Frameworks and Social Justice Implications
49. The Diversity Awards: What Do They Mean?
50. Evaluating Diversity Management: Conducting a Diversity Audit
51. The U.S. Air Force Academy Case
Management of Organizational Behavior, 10/e
Paul H. Hersey
Kenneth H. Blanchard
Dewey E. Johnson
ISBN 10: 0132556405
ISBN 13: 9780132556408
368pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate-level courses in Organizational Behavior, Leadership, and
Organizational Development.
Forty years in the making, Management of Organizational Behavior is a readable text that makes behavioral
sciences come alive through real life examples and progressive ideology.
Management, 3/e
Michael A. Hitt
Stewart Black
Lyman W. Porter
ISBN 10: 0132378175
ISBN 13: 9780132378178
512pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Principles of Management courses.
This text connects theory with practice, incorporating the latest research findings to make management relevant
and exciting to aspiring managers.
Table of Contents
PART 1. MANAGING ETHICALLY AND GLOBALLY
1.
The Nature of Management
2.
Social Responsibility and Managerial Ethics
3.
International Management and Globalization
PART 2. PLANNING AND ORGANIZING
4.
Strategic Management
5.
Planning
6.
Organizational Structure and Design
7.
Managing Diverse Human Resources
151
PART 3. LEADING
8.
Leadership
9.
Motivation
10. Groups and Teams
11. Communication and Negotiation
12. Individual and Group Decision Making
PART 4. CONTROLLING
13. Operations Management
14. Control
15. Organizational Change and Development
Fundamentals of Strategy, 2/e
Gerry Johnson
Kevan Scholes
Richard Whittington
ISBN 10: 0273757253
ISBN 13: 9780273757252
304pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Fundamentals of Strategy is a concise version of the market-leading text Exploring Strategy. It has been
developed for students on short courses in strategy – for example, doing an initial course at undergraduate,
postgraduate or post-experience level, or studying strategy as part of a wider degree in the arts, sciences or
engineering. The book comprises 10 chapters, and focuses on the analysis and formulation of strategy.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Introducing strategy
The environment
Strategic capabilities
Strategic purpose
Business strategy
Corporate strategy and diversification
International strategy
Innovation strategies
Mergers, acquisitions and alliances
Strategy in action
Organizational Theory, Design, and Change, 7/e
Gareth R. Jones
ISBN 10: 0273765604
ISBN 13: 9780273765608
528pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Organization Theory, Organizational Design, and
Organizational Change/Development.
Business is changing at break-neck speed so managers must be increasingly active in reorganizing their firms to
gain a competitive edge.
Organizational Theory, Design, and Change continues to provide students with the most up-to-date and
contemporary treatment of the way managers attempt to increase organizational effectiveness. By making
organizational change the centerpiece in a discussion of organizational theory and design, this text stands apart
from other books on the market.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE ORGANIZATION AND ITS ENVIRONMENT
1.
Organizations and Organizational Effectiveness
2.
Stakeholders, Managers, and Ethics
3.
Organizing in a Changing Global Environment
PART 2: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN
4.
Basic Challenges of Organizational Design
5.
Designing Organizational Structure: Authority and Control
6.
Designing Organizational Structure: Specialization and Coordination
7.
Creating and Managing Organizational Culture
8.
Organizational Design and Strategy in a Changing Global Environment
9.
Organizational Design, Competences, and Technology
PART 3: ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE
10. Types and Forms of Organizational Change
11. Organizational Transformations: Birth, Growth, Decline, and Death
12. Decision Making, Learning, Knowledge Management, and Information Technology
152
13. Innovation, Intrapreneurship, and Creativity
14. Managing Conflict, Power, and Politics
Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational Thinking
Donald F. Kuratko
Jeffrey S. Hornsby
Michael G. Goldsby
ISBN 10: 0136021484
ISBN 13: 9780136021483
368pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For collegiate or executive education in Entrepreneurial Innovation.
The fundamentals of creating an innovative climate within an organization.
Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational Thinking helps students develop an understanding
of innovative organizations, the specific processes involved in corporate innovation, and how to assess an
organization’s readiness for entrepreneurial activity and innovation.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE INNOVATIVE ORGANIZATION (I-ORGANIZATION)
1.
Understanding the Innovative Mindset
2.
The Process of Corporate Innovation
PART II: INDIVIDUAL INNOVATION SKILLS (I-SKILLS)
3.
Unleashing Individual Creativity
4.
Managerial Skills for the Innovation Process
PART III: THE DESIGN FUNCTION IN INNOVATION (I-DESIGN)
5.
The Design Thinking Process
6.
Design-Driven Innovation
PART IV: ORGANIZATIONAL INNOVATION (I-TEAMS)
7.
Auditing Organizational Innovation
8.
Human Resource Management in Corporate Innovation
9.
Teams-Based Innovation
PART V: IMPLEMENTATION OF INNOVATION (I-PLANS)
10. Innovation to Commercialization
11. Effective Innovation Plans
12. Accelerating Momentum—The I-Solution
Managing Strategy and Measuring Value: A Financial
Perspective
Graham Leask
Malcolm Arnold
ISBN 10: 0273736248
ISBN 13: 9780273736240
©2013 Paper
Strategic Management, 6/e
Richard Lynch
ISBN 10: 0273750925
ISBN 13: 9780273750925
880pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Strategic Management is one of the world’s leading strategy textbooks. It covers all the major topics,
particularly from a global perspective. It delivers comprehensive coverage of all the main elements of the subject
in an easy-to-read style with extensive examples and a range of free support material that will help you learn
actively and effectively.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Strategic management
2.
A review of theory and practice
PART 2: STRATEGIC ANALYSIS AND PURPOSE
3.
Analysing the strategic environment
4.
Analysing resources and capabilities
5.
Strategy dynamics
6.
Prescriptive purpose delivered through mission, objectives and ethics
7.
Purpose emerging from knowledge, technology and innovation
153
PART 3: DEVELOPING THE STRATEGY
8.
Developing business level strategy options
9.
Developing corporate level strategy options
10. Strategy evaluation and development: the prescriptive process
11. Finding the strategic route forward: emergent and prescriptive approaches
12. Organisational structure, style and people issues
PART 4: THE IMPLEMENTATION PROCESS
13. Implementing and controlling the strategic plan
14. Developing and implementing customer-driven strategy
15. Managing strategic change
PART 5: DIFFERENT STRATEGY CONTEXTS AND BUILDING A COHESIVE STRATEGY
16. Strategic leadership
17. Entrepreneurial strategy
18. Government, public sector and not-for-profit strategies
19. International expansion and globalisation strategies
20. Building a cohesive corporate strategy
PART 6: CASE STUDIES
Case study 1 Competing against the budget airlines
Case study 2 World market for beer: what now for SAB Miller?
Case study 3 Heineken's global strategy?
Case study 4 Global automotive vehicles
Case study 5 Tata Motors goes global
Case study 6 Toyota competes with Volkswagen for world leadership
Case study 7 What can companies learn from ‘Chainsaw Al’?
Case study 8 Solving Sony's problems
Case study 9 Thinking outside the box at IBM
Case study 10 Emergent strategy: competition and innovation in the world PC market
Case study 11 Public sector strategy: how Galileo ended up in trouble
Case study 12 Emergent strategy: who will topple Apple’s iPod?
Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management
Steve Mariotti, Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship
Caroline Glackin, Shepherd University
ISBN 10: 0135030315
ISBN 13: 9780135030318
736pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management.
Written by award-winning experts, Steve Mariotti and Caroline Glackin, Entrepreneurship and Small Business
Management presents complex economic, financial and business concepts in a manner easily understood by a
variety of students. Based on a proven curriculum from the Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE), it is
organized to follow the life-cycle of an entrepreneurial venture–from concept through implementation to
harvesting or replication. Filled with examples from a broad range of industries, it moves further into the
entrepreneurial process–discussing the business plan and also the unique aspects of managing and growing
entrepreneurial ventures and small businesses.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1: WHAT BUSINESS DO YOU WANT TO START?
1.
Entrepreneurs Recognize Opportunities
2.
Franchising
3.
Finding Opportunity in an Existing Business
4.
The Business Plan: Road Map to Success
Unit 1 Case Study: FastSigns
UNIT 2: WHO ARE YOUR CUSTOMERS?
5.
Creating Business from Opportunity
6.
Exploring Your Market
Unit 2 Case Study: Nicole Miller Ltd.
UNIT 3: INTEGRATED MARKETING
7.
Developing the Right Marketing Mix and Plan
8.
Pricing and Credit Strategies
9.
Integrated Marketing Communications
10. Marketing Globally
11. Smart Selling and Effective Customer Service
Unit 3 Case Study: Ken Done Galleries
UNIT 4: FINDING, SECURING, AND MANAGING FINANCIAL RESOURCES
12. Understanding and Managing Start-Up, Fixed, and Variable Costs
13. Using Financial Statements to Guide a Business
14. Cash Flow and Taxes
15. Financing Strategy: Debt, Equity, or Both?
Unit 4 Case Study: Bridgecreek Development
UNIT 5: OPERATING A SMALL BUSINESS EFFECTIVELY
16. Addressing Legal Issues and Managing Risk
17. Operating for Success
18. Location, Facilities and Layout
19. Human Resources and Management
154
Unit 5 Case Study: Mo’s Chowder
UNIT 6: LEADERSHIP, ETHICS, AND EXITS
20. Leadership and Ethical Practices
21. Franchising, Licensing, and Harvesting: Cashing in the Brand
Unit 6 Case Study: Avocent
Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating a Small
Business, 3/e
Steve Mariotti, Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship
Caroline Glackin, Shepherd University
ISBN 10: 0132784084
ISBN 13: 9780132784085
592pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Entrepreneurship, Small Business Management, and How to Start Your Own Business
Courses in Continuing Education.
Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating A Small Business, Third Edition, demystifies the process of
starting a business by presenting difficult economic, financial and business concepts in a manner easily
understood by beginning business students. This edition is based on a proven curriculum from the Network For
Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE) and includes new case studies, a new Honest Tea Business Plan, and more on
topics such as cash flow and e-marketing. Drawing on the experience of Steve Mariotti and Caroline Glackin,
students will begin building their business plan as soon as they open the text! In a step by step process students
will learn how to start a small business, operate a small business and turn their ideas into viable business
opportunities.
Table of Contents
UNIT I: ENTREPRENEURIAL PATHWAYS
1.
Entrepreneurs Recognize Opportunities
2.
The Business Plan: Road Map to Success
The Honest Tea Business Plan
3.
Creating Business from Opportunity
Unit I Case Study: Nicole Miller Company
UNIT II: INTEGRATED MARKETING
4.
Exploring Your Market
5.
Developing the Right Marketing Mix and Plan
6.
Smart Selling and Effective Customer Service
Unit II Case Study: Ken Done Studios
UNIT III: SHOW ME THE MONEY: FINDING, SECURING, AND MANAGING IT
7.
Understanding and Managing Start-Up, Fixed, and Variable Costs
8.
Using Financial Statements to Guide a Business
9.
Cash Flow and Taxes
10. Financing Strategy: Debt, Equity, or Both?
Unit III: Case Study: FASTSIGNS
UNIT IV: OPERATING A SMALL BUSINESS EFFECTIVELY
11. Addressing Legal Issues and Managing Risk
12. Operating for Success
13. Management, Leadership and Ethical Practices
Unit III: Case Study: Mo's Chowder
14. Franchising, Licensing, and Harvesting: Cashing in Your Brand
Unit IV: Case Study: Avocent
APPENDIX I: HONEST TEA SAMPLE BUSINESS PLAN–ANNOTATED
APPENDIX II: SAMPLE STUDENT BUSINESS PLAN
APPENDIX III: BIZBUILDER BUISINESS PLAN
APPENDIX IV: RESOURCES FOR ENTREPRENEURS
APPENDIX V: USEFUL FORMULAS AND EQUATIONS
APPENDIX VI: ACCOUNTING JOURNAL DISTRIBUTION GUIDE
APPENDIX VII: USING BUSINESS PLAN PRO®
APPENDIX VIII: GLOSSARY
Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource
Management Approach, 7/e
Joseph J. Martocchio
ISBN 10: 0132975203
ISBN 13: 9780132975209
408pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For graduate and undergraduate courses in compensation, staffing, and human resources.
The art and science of compensation practice.
Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource Management Approach illustrates the art and science of
155
compensation practice and its role in promoting a company’s competitive advantage.
The seventh edition was thoroughly revised, and now includes current statistics and a new chapter offering the
latest information to compensation professionals.
Table of Contents
PART I: SETTING THE STAGE FOR STRATEGIC COMPENSATION
1.
Strategic Compensation: A Component of Human Resource Systems
2.
Contextual Influences on Compensation Practice
PART II: BASES FOR PAY
3.
Traditional Bases for Pay: Seniority and Merit
4.
Incentive Pay
5.
Person-Focused Pay
PART III: DESIGNING COMPENSATION SYSTEMS
6.
Building Internally Consistent Compensation Systems Workforce
7.
Building Market-Competitive Compensation Systems
8.
Building Pay Structures That Recognize Employee Contributions
PART IV: EMPLOYEE BENEFITS
9.
Discretionary Benefits
10. Employer-Sponsored Retirement Plans and Health Insurance Programs
11. Legally Required Benefits
PART V: COMPENSATION CHALLENGES FOR STRATEGIC EMPLOYEE GROUPS
12. Compensating Executives
13. Compensating the Flexible: Contingent Employees and Flexible Work Schedules
PART VI: COMPENSATION ISSUES AROUND THE WORLD
14. Compensating Expatriates
15. Pay and Benefits outside the United States
EPILOGUE:
16. Challenges Facing Compensation Professionals
Management: A Focus on Leaders
Annie McKee
ISBN 10: 0132478803
ISBN 13: 9780132478809
720pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses.
We need leadership now.
Financial crises, catastrophic disasters, and business scandals are constantly making today’s headlines. Annie
McKee, author of the new textbook Management: A Focus on Leaders, believes that amidst these issues we
are experiencing a unique opportunity to add new fervor to the way we prepare students for the future. Directly
addressing the challenges and opportunities in our changing world, Management: A Focus on Leaders shows
future managers how to lead in a complex, yet exciting, global environment.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Managing and Leading Today: The New Rules
The Leadership Imperative: It’s Up to You
Motivation and Meaning: What Makes People Want to Work?
Communication: The Key to Resonant Relationships
Planning and Strategy: Bringing the Vision to Life
The Human Side of Planning: Decision Making and Critical Thinking
Change: A Focus on Adaptability and Resiliency
Workplace Essentials: Creativity, Innovation, and a Spirit of Entrepreneurship
Organizing for a Complex World: Structure and Design
Teams and Team Building: How to Work Effectively with Others
Working in a Virtual Word: Technology as a Way of Life
Organizational Controls: People, Processes, Quality, and Results
Culture: It’s Powerful
Globalization: Managing Effectively in a Global Economic Environment
Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility: Ensuring the Future
Managing and Leading for Tomorrow: A Focus on Your Future
The Strategy Process, 5/e
Henry Mintzberg
Sumantra Ghoshal
ISBN 10: 027371628X
ISBN 13: 9780273716280
©2013 Paper
156
Basic Approach
Strategic Management at all levels. Also courses in strategic marketing, organization theory, decision theory,
public administration, and political science departments. Breaking away from the traditional formulation, implementation approach that dominates strategy textbooks, this text sees strategy analysis as taking place in a
wider organizational and managerial context.
Human Resource Management, 12/e
R. Wayne Mondy
ISBN 10: 0273752995
ISBN 13: 9780273752998
456pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Human Resources Management.
The most student accessible HRM text on the market!
There is no greater asset to a company than its employees–which is why Human Resource Management shows
readers how to maximize a firm’s potential through identifying and keeping an ideal workforce.
The twelfth edition addresses the changes in HR that have happened since the 2008 recession, as well as the
expansive growth of social media. Over 900 new sources went into the development of this edition.
Table of Contents
PART ONE. INTRODUCTION
1.
Strategic Human Resource Management: An Overview
PART TWO. ETHICAL, SOCIAL, AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS
2.
Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility
3.
Workforce Diversity, Equal Employment Opportunity, and Affirmative Action
PART THREE. STAFFING
4.
Job Analysis, Strategic Planning, and Human Resource Planning
5.
Recruitment
6.
Selection
PART FOUR. HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT
7.
Training and Development
Appendix 7—Career Planning and Development
8.
Performance Management and Appraisal
PART FIVE. COMPENSATION
9.
Direct Financial Compensation
10. Indirect Financial Compensation (Benefits) and Nonfinancial Compensation
PART SIX. SAFETY AND HEALTH
11. A Safe and Healthy Work Environment
PART SEVEN. EMPLOYEE AND LABOR RELATIONS
12. Labor Unions and Collective Bargaining
Appendix 12—History of Unions in the United States
13. Internal Employee Relations
PART EIGHT. OPERATING IN A GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT
14. Global Human Resource Management
Essentials of Organisational Behaviour, 3/e
Laurie J. Mullins
ISBN 10: 0273757342
ISBN 13: 9780273757344
528pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
This concise introduction to Organisational Behaviour has been developed specifically for short courses and/or
non-specialist business students. It focuses on the core topics of the discipline in a detailed and engaging way,
providing a readable introduction to the key theory and offering real-life examples to show its application in
practice.
Written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes, this text is particularly suitable for
students of non-business disciplines (e.g. engineering, IT, social sciences and others) who are taking an
introductory module in business.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE ORGANISATIONAL SETTING
1.
Nature of Organisational Behaviour
2.
Approaches to Organisation and Management
PART 2: THE INDIVIDUAL
3.
Individual Differences and Diversity
4.
Perception and Communication
5.
Work Motivation and Job Satisfaction
157
PART 3: GROUPS, TEAMS AND LEADERSHIP
6.
Work Groups and Teams
7.
Nature of Leadership
8.
Nature of Management
PART 4: THE ORGANISATION
9.
Strategy and Structure
10. Control and Power
11. Corporate Responsibility and Ethics
12. Culture and Change
Art and Science of Leadership, The, 6/e
Afsaneh Nahavandi
ISBN 10: 0132729741
ISBN 13: 9780132729741
416pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in leadership.
Nahavandi’s text has an application emphasis with a cross cultural perspective on leadership.
Table of Contents
PART I: BUILDING BLOCKS
1.
Definition and Significance of Leadership
2.
The Global and Cultural Contexts
3.
Early Theories: The Foundations of Modern Leadership
4.
Individual Differences and Traits
5.
Power
PART II: CONTEMPORARY CONCEPTS
6.
New Models of Leadership: Neo-Charisma, Inspiration and the Relationship with Followers
7.
Other Leadership Perspectives: Upper Echelon and Leadership of Nonprofits
PART III: LEADING
8.
Participative Management and Leading Teams
9.
Leading Change
10. Developing Leaders
Mastering Self Leadership: Empowering Yourself for
Personal Excellence, 6/e
Chris Neck
Charles Manz
ISBN 10: 013275441X
ISBN 13: 9780132754415
192pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in leadership or anyone interested in honing their leadership skills.
It starts with you–follow the best path to effectively leading others.
Mastering Self-Leadership is a comprehensive self-help guide that’s thoroughly grounded in sound principles
and research. The powerful advice and tools found in this text emphasize that proper self-leadership is a
precursor for the effective leadership of others.
This edition features new real-life examples and fresh coverage on corporate and entrepreneurial applications,
social responsibility, emotional intelligence, and self-leadership.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
The Journey
Mapping the Route
Rough Roads, Detours, and Roadblocks
Scenic Views, Sunshine, and the Joys of Traveling
Travel Thinking
Travel Thinking Continued...
Team Self-Leadership
Reviewing Travel Tales of Previous Journeys
The Destination
Fitness and Self-Leadership
Finding the Path to Uniqueness
The Journey Completed
158
Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach,
9/e
Joyce S. Osland, San Jose State University
Marlene E. Turner, San Jose State University
David Kolb
ISBN 10: 0132374730
ISBN 13: 9780132374736
736pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Organizational Behavior, Individual Behavior in Organizations, and Industrial
Psychology.
Reflecting the state of the art in the practice of experiential learning, Organizational Behavior: An
Experiential Approach shows students the general psychological principles and how to apply those principles to
social and organizational situations. It also teaches students how to become continuous learners, capable of
responding to demands for change and new skills throughout their career.
Strategic Staffing, 2/e
Jean Phillips
Stan Gully
ISBN 10: 0132763591
ISBN 13: 9780132763592
432pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Human Resources, Staffing, and HRM.
Where the strategy of staffing and business align.
Strategic Staffing prepares all current and future managers to take a strategic and modern approach to the
identification, attraction, selection, deployment, and retention of talent. Grounded in research but full of realworld examples, this text describes how organizations can develop a staffing strategy that reinforces business
strategy, leverages staffing technology, and evaluates and improves staffing systems.
This edition includes new and relevant topics on staffing that students will be able to immediately apply in their
future careers–including a discussion on how Twitter and Facebook can be used for sourcing and managing
staffing systems.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Strategic Staffing
Business and Staffing Strategies
The Legal Context
Strategic Job Analysis and Competency Modeling
Forecasting and Planning
Sourcing: Identifying Recruits
Recruiting
Measurement
Assessing External Candidates
Assessing Internal Candidates
Choosing and Hiring Candidates
Managing Workforce Flow
Staffing System Evaluation and Technology
Management, 6/e
Stephen Robbins
Rolf Bergman
Ian Stagg
Mary Coulter
ISBN 10: 1442538600
ISBN 13: 9781442538603
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Inspire… with Robbins Management 6e!
We live in dynamic times and business as usual is no longer an option. Management students must be well
prepared to manage modern, ever-changing organisations.
The new 6th edition of Management is once again a resource at the leading edge of thinking and research for this
dynamic discipline. Blending management theory with inspiring and innovative management practices, Robbins
shows managers and organisations how to meet their economic, environmental and social responsibilities.
Management 6e is accompanied by a flexible and completely revised suite of instructor and student resources
designed to encourage critical thinking, make management concepts meaningful, and excite students about the
possibilities of a career in management.
159
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Introduction to organisations and management
2.
Management yesterday and today
PART 2: DEFINING THE MANAGER’S TERRAIN
3.
Environment and organisational culture: The constraints
4.
Managing in a global environment
5.
Social responsibility and managerial ethics
6.
Managing change and innovation
PART 3: PLANNING
7.
Decision making: The essence of a manager’s job
8.
Foundations of planning
9.
Strategic management
PART 4: ORGANISING
10. Organisational structure and design
11. Managers and communication
12. Human resource management
PART 5: LEADING
13. Understanding individual behaviour
14. Understanding groups and teams
15. Motivating employees
16. Leadership
PART 6: CONTROLLING
17. Foundations of control
18. Managing operations
Management, 11/e
Stephen P. Robbins
Mary Coulter
ISBN 10: 0273752774
ISBN 13: 9780273752776
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses.
REAL Managers, REAL Experiences: Bring management theories to life!
This bestselling principles text vividly illustrates management theories by incorporating the perspectives of reallife managers. Throughout this text, students will see and experience management in action, helping them
understand how the concepts they’re reading about work in today’s business world.
The eleventh edition contains two new chapters on diversity and change, as well as updated information and
scenarios featuring REAL managers at work.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
Part I: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT
1.
Management and Organizations
Management History Module
2.
Understanding Management’s Context: Constraints and Challenges
Part II: INTEGRATIVE MANAGERIAL ISSUES
3.
Managing in a Global Environment
4.
Managing Diversity
5.
Managing Social Responsibility and Ethics
6.
Managing Change and Innovation
Part III: PLANNING
7.
Managers as Decision Makers
8.
Foundations of Planning
Planning Tools and Techniques Module
9.
Strategic Management
Part IV: ORGANIZING
10. Basic Organizational Design
11. Adaptive Organizational Design
12. Managing Human Resources
Managing Your Career Module
13. Managing Teams
Part V: LEADING
14. Understanding Individual Behavior
15. Managers and Communication
16. Motivating Employees
17. Managers as Leaders
Part VI: CONTROLLING
18. Introduction to Controlling
19. Managing Operations
160
Fundamentals of Management, 8/e
Stephen Robbins
David A. De Cenzo
Mary Coulter
ISBN 10: 0273766171
ISBN 13: 9780273766179
504pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses.
The practical tools of management presented through in-depth practice.
Robbins/DeCenzo/Coulter is a brief, paperback text that gives students more depth and breadth with practical
tools to practice their management skills than any other textbook.
The eighth edition provides a self-contained section on developing management skills and includes new exercises,
modules, and boxes.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
1.
Managers and Management
Module: A Brief History of Management's Roots
2.
The Management Environment
3.
Integrative Managerial Issues
PLANNING
4.
Foundations of Decision Making
Module: Quantitative Decision-Making Aids
5.
Foundations of Planning
ORGANIZING
6.
Organization Structure
7.
Managing Human Resources
Module: Managing Your Career
8.
Managing Change and Innovation
LEADING
9.
Foundations of Individual Behavior
10. Understanding Groups and Managing Work Teams
11. Motivating and Rewarding Employees
12. Leadership and Trust
13. Managing Communication and Information
CONTROLLING
14. Foundations of Control
15. Operations Management
Module: Managing Entrepreneurial Ventures
Management: The Essentials
Stephen Robbins
David A. DeCenzo
Mary Coulter
Megan Woods
ISBN 10: 1442533625
ISBN 13: 9781442533622
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Making Management Manageable
This brand new text covers essential Management concepts in a fresh, lively format that’s perfectly suited to a
typical university semester.
Management: The Essentials is packed with examples from Australasian businesses — big and small, private
and public — and promises:
ƒ
a rigorous and engaging introduction to the essential management principles, theories and practices
ƒ
an understanding of why these principles are important and relevant to you (whether or not you ever
become a manager)
ƒ
a clear, easy-to-read design which breaks material into manageable sections designed for maximum
comprehension
ƒ
a clear set of examples and exercises designed to help you start developing the skills to become the
manager you want to be.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
Managers and management
History module A brief history of management theory
2.
The external management environment
PART 2: PLANNING
3.
Foundations of decision making
4.
Foundations of planning
Entrepreneurship module Managing entrepreneurial ventures
PART 3: ORGANISING
5.
Organisational structure and culture
161
6.
Managing human resources
7.
Managing change and innovation
PART 4: LEADING
8.
Foundations of individual behaviour
9.
Understanding groups and managing work teams
10. Motivating and rewarding employees
11. Leadership and trust
12. Communication and interpersonal skills
PART 5: CONTROLLING
13. Foundations of control
Supervision Today!, 7/e
Stephen P. Robbins, San Diego State University
David A. DeCenzo, Coastal Carolina University
Robert Wolter
ISBN 10: 0132784033
ISBN 13: 9780132784030
504pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Appropriate for Supervision, Supervision Management, and Intro to Management.
Supervision Today has earned a reputation of being the one of the most effective supervision books because it
blends traditional and contemporary topics, as well as theories and experiential skills. Offering a three-tier
learning system, it focuses on building readers’ knowledge, improving their comprehension and applying concepts
directly to skill development. Known for its lively tone and four-color design, it captures the latest in supervision
literature and includes cases to invigorate any lecture. This edition includes new information on contingent
workforces, entrepreneurship, employee theft, work/life balance, IM, texting, and workplace diversity.
Table of Contents
PART I: DEFINING SUPERVISION AND SUPERVISORY CHALLENGES
1.
Supervision Definitions
2.
Supervision Challenges
PART II: PLANNING, ORGANIZING, STAFFING, CONTROLLING, AND DECISION-MAKING
3.
Planning and Goal Setting
4.
Organizing
5.
Staffing and Recruiting
6.
Controlling
7.
Problem Analysis an Decision Making
PART III: MOTIVATING, LEADING, COMMUNICATING, AND DEVELOPING
8.
Motivating Followers
9.
Leading Followers
10. Communicating Effectively
11. Developing Groups
PART IV: APPRAISAL, SAFETY, NEGOTIATION, CHANGE, AND LABOR RELATIONS
12. Performance Appraisal
13. Workplace Health and Safety
14. Conflict, Politics, Discipline, and Negotiation
15. Change Management
16. Supervision and Labor
POSTSCRIPT: PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT
Training in Interpersonal Skills: TIPS for Managing People at Work,
6/e
Stephen P. Robbins, San Diego State University
Phillip L. Hunsaker
ISBN 10: 0132778432
ISBN 13: 9780132778435
416pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in organizational behavior and human resources.
An applied approach to developing and practicing interpersonal skills.
By developing and practicing the material in Training in Interpersonal Skills, students can learn how to build
productive relationships for any situation. This text also helps students master the skills necessary for personal
and organizational effectiveness such as self-management, communication, teaming, and problem solving.
The sixth edition includes several new pedagogical tools–such as self-assessment quizzes, exercises, cases, etc.–
and information on the importance and usage of social networking.
Table of Contents
PART I: SELF-AWARENESS
1.
Skills: An Introduction
2.
Self-Awareness: A Point of Departure
3.
Self-Management: Clarifying Values, Setting Goals, and Planning
162
4.
Applying Emotional Intelligence
PART II: COMMUNICATING
5.
Sending Interpersonal Messages
6.
Listening and Reading Nonverbal Messages
7.
Providing Feedback
8.
Communicating Across Cultures
PART III: MOTIVATING
9.
Goal Setting
10. Coaching, Counseling, and Mentoring
11. Empowering People Through Delegation
PART IV: LEADING
12. Politicking
13. Persuading
14. Applying Leadership Style
15. Managing Change
PART V: TEAMING
16. Facilitating Teamwork
17. Valuing Diversity
PART VI: PROBLEM SOLVING
18. Ethical Decision Making
19. Creative Problem Solving
20. Resolving Conflicts
21. Negotiating
PART VII: INTEGRATING EXERCISES
Essentials of Organizational Behavior, 11/e
Stephen P. Robbins
Timothy A. Judge
ISBN 10: 0273752669
ISBN 13: 9780273752660
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one-semester undergraduate and graduate level courses in Organizational Behavior.
Concise fundamentals for students. Ultimate flexibility for instructors.
This bestselling, brief alternative for the OB course covers all the key concepts needed to understand, predict,
and respond to the behavior of people in real-world organizations. This text also includes cutting-edge topics and
streamlined pedagogy to allow maximum flexibility in designing and shaping your course.
The eleventh edition contains expanded and updated coverage on international issues, as well as new sections on
the management of information, safety and emotions at work, risk aversion, self-determination theory, managing
information, and downsizing.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: PROLOGUE
1.
Introduction to Organizational Behavior
PART 2: THE INDIVIDUAL IN THE ORGANIZATION
2.
Attitudes and Job Satisfaction
3.
Emotion and Moods
4.
Personality and Values
5.
Perception and Individual Decision Making
6.
Motivation Concepts
7.
Motivation: From Concept to Application
PART 3: GROUPS IN THE ORGANIZATION
8.
Foundations of Group Behavior
9.
Understanding Work Teams
10. Communication
11. Leadership
12. Power and Politics
13. Conflict and Negotiation
PART 4: THE ORGANIZATION SYSTEM
14. Foundations of Organization Structure
15. Organizational Culture
16. Organizational Change and Stress Management
163
Organizational Behavior, 15/e
Stephen P. Robbins
Timothy A. Judge
ISBN 10: 0273765299
ISBN 13: 9780273765295
720pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Organizational Behavior.
Captivate the class with a clear writing style, cutting-edge content, and compelling pedagogy.
Robbins/Judge provides the research you want, in the language your students understand. This text continues its
tradition of making current, relevant research come alive for students.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION
1.
What Is Organizational Behavior?
PART 2: THE INDIVIDUAL
2.
Diversity in Organizations
3.
Attitudes and Job Satisfaction
4.
Emotions and Moods
5.
Personality and Values
6.
Perception and Individual Decision Making
7.
Motivation Concepts
8.
Motivation: From Concepts to Applications
PART 3: THE GROUP
9.
Foundations of Group Behavior
10. Understanding Work Teams
11. Communication
12. Leadership
13. Power and Politics
14. Conflict and Negotiation
PART 4: THE ORGANIZATION SYSTEM
15. Foundations of Organization Structure
16. Organizational Culture
17. Human Resource Policies and Practices
18. Organizational Change and Stress Management
Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated
Approach, 5/e
Derek Rollinson
ISBN 10: 0273756680
ISBN 13: 9780273756682
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive introduction to Organisational Behaviour, steering a neutral path through the sociological,
psychological and managerial approaches to the discipline. It balances coverage of the micro – (organisational
behaviour) with the macro – (organisational analysis) level issues, with a cross-cultural theme running through
the book.
It is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, or business-related
disciplines.
International Business, 6/e
Alan M. Rugman
Simon Collinson
ISBN 10: 0273760971
ISBN 13: 9780273760979
808pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
International Business provides students with a comprehensive introduction to International Business from
authors at the forefront of research in international and strategic management.
Taking a regional approach, this text challenges some of the underlying assumptions behind globalization and
focuses on both the dominant economies – the EU, the US and Japan – as well as emerging markets in world
trade, such as Brazil, India and China. The book also integrates analysis of the competitive environment and the
internal resources of the firm to provide a strategic view of international business.
164
The book is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, or
business-related disciplines.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: THE WORLD OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
1.
Regional and Global Strategy
2.
The Multinational Enterprise
3.
The Triad and International Business
PART TWO: THE ENVRIRONMENT OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
4.
International Politics
5.
International Culture
6.
International Trade
7.
International Financial Markets and Institutions
PART THREE: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS STRATEGIES
8.
Multinational Strategy
9.
Organizing Strategy
10. Corporate Strategy and National Competitiveness
11. Innovation, Entrepreneurship and "Born Global" Firms
PART FOUR: FUNCTIONAL AREA STRATEGIES
12. Production Strategy
13. Marketing Strategy
14. Human Resource Management Strategy
15. Political Risk and Negotiation Strategy
16. International Financial Management
PART FIVE: REGIONAL STRATEGIES
17. European Union
18. Japan
19. North America
20. Emerging Economics
21. China
22. Corporate Ethics and the Natural Environment
Doing Research in Business & Management: An Essential Guide to
Planning Your Project
Mark N.K. Saunders
Philip Lewis
ISBN 10: 0273726412
ISBN 13: 9780273726418
256pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Doing Research in Business & Management brings the theory and techniques of research methods to life and
covers all of the areas of research, from a review of secondary data or literature, or writing a research proposal,
to completing an entire research project. The book is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate
degree programmes in business, management or related disciplines.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Choosing your research topic
Reviewing the literature
Managing the research process
Using secondary data
Choosing your research design
Collecting data
Analysing data
Writing and presenting the research proposal
Research Methods for Business Students, 6/e
Mark N.K. Saunders
Philip Lewis
Adrian Thornhill
ISBN 10: 0273750755
ISBN 13: 9780273750758
720pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive introduction to research methods in business for students planning or undertaking a dissertation
or extensive research project in business and management.
The sixth edition of Research Methods for Business Students brings the theory, philosophy and techniques of
research to life and enables students to understand the practical relevance of the research methods. A highly
accessible style and logical structure have made this the ‘student choice’ and run-away market leader.
The book is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, or
business-related disciplines.
165
Table of Contents
1.
Business and management research, reflective diaries and the purpose of this book
Case 1: Reporting evidence from Business and Management research
2.
Formulating and clarifying the research topic
Case 2: Self-service technology: Does co-production harm value creation
3.
Critically reviewing the literature
Case 3: Individual workplace performance: systematically reviewed
4.
Understanding research philosophies and approaches
Case 4: Organisational learning in an English regional theatre
5.
Formulating the research design
Case 5: Sangita’s career
6.
Negotiating access and research ethics
Case 6: The impact of colour on children’s brand choices
7.
Selecting samples
Case 7:Comparing UK and French perceptions and expectations of online supermarket shopping
8.
Using secondary data
Case 8: Trust repair in a major finance company
9.
Collecting primary data through observation
Case 9: Strategy options in a mature market
10. Collecting primary data using semi-structured, in-depth and group interviews
Case 10: Organisations in a flash?
11. Collecting primary data using questionnaires
Case 11: A quantitative evaluation of students’ desire for self employment
12. Analysing quantitative data
Case 12: Food miles, carbon footprints and supply chains
13. Analysing qualitative data
Case 13: Creating environmentally friendly office spaces
14. Writing and presenting your project report
Case 14: Clare’s research project presentation
Effective Small Business Management, 10/e
Norman M. Scarborough
ISBN 10: 0132378159
ISBN 13: 9780132378154
888pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in entrepreneurship and/or small business management.
Discover how to successfully launch and manage a small business.
Open your students’ minds to the possibilities, challenges, and rewards of becoming a small business owner with
Effective Small Business Management. This text provides students with the tools they need in order to launch
and manage a small business.
This edition features new and current examples, updated information on ethics and social responsibility, and
several new pedagogical features.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: THE CHALLENGE OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP
1.
Entrepreneurs: The Driving Force behind Small Business
SECTION 2: BUILDING THE BUSINESS PLAN: BEGINNING CONSIDERATIONS
2.
Strategic Management and the Entrepreneur
3.
Choosing a Form of Ownership
4.
Franchising and the Entrepreneur
5.
Buying an Existing Business
6.
Conducting a Feasibility Analysis and Crafting a Winning Business Plan
SECTION 3: BUILDING A BUSINESS PLAN: FINANCIAL ISSUES
7.
Creating a Solid Financial Plan
8.
Managing Cash Flow
SECTION 4: BUILDING A BUSINESS PLAN: MARKETING YOUR COMPANY
9.
Building a Guerrilla Marketing Plan
10. Creative Use of Advertising and Promotion
11. Pricing and Credit Strategies
12. Global Marketing Strategies
13. E-Commerce and Entrepreneurship
SECTION 5: PUTTING THE BUSINESS PLAN TO WORK: FINDING FINANCING
14. Sources of Equity Financing
15. Sources of Debt Financing
SECTION 6: LOCATION AND LAYOUT
16. Location, Layout, and Physical Facilities
SECTION 7: MANAGING A SMALL BUSINESS: TECHNIQUES FOR ENHANCING PROFITABILITY
17. Supply Chain Management
18. Managing Inventory
SECTION 8: MANAGING PEOPLE: A COMPANY’S MOST VALUABLE RESOURCE
19. Staffing and Leading a Growing Company
SECTION 9: LEGAL ASPECTS OF SMALL BUSINESS: SUCCESSION, ETHICS, AND GOVERNMENT
REGULATION
166
20. Management Succession and Risk Management Strategies in the Family Business
21. Ethics and Social Responsibility: Doing the Right Thing
22. The Legal Environment: Business Law and Government Regulation
Managing Across Cultures, 3/e
Susan Schneider
Jean-Louis Barsoux
Eric Davoine
ISBN 10: 0273746324
ISBN 13: 9780273746324
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
MBA and executive International Management; MBA and executive International Business; MBA/postgraduate
modules in cross-cultural management, intercultural communication or intercultural management; undergraduate
and postgraduate degree programs in international business or management. This very accessible book draws
upon a broad and growing literature on culture and management to discover national differences in management
practice. It clearly relates cultural differences to daily business practice by using many and varied examples.
Diverse range of topics covered, from structure and strategy to social responsibility and ethics.
Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into
Practice, 3/e
Bert Spector, Northeastern University
ISBN 10: 0132970171
ISBN 13: 9780132970174
208pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For both practitioners and students of change management.
Learn how to be a leader in business by spearheading change in your organization, a vital skill for every
executive.
Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into Practice provides a framework upon which readers can
understand and analyze effective change management.
This edition has been significantly enhanced based on recommendations for reviewers and users, and includes
new research, a new chapter, and several new cases.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Organizational Change
Theories of Effective Change Implementation
Mutual Engagement and Shared Diagnosis
Organizational Redesign
People Alignment
Reinforcing New Behaviors
Leading Change
Going Green
Labour Relations, 3/e
Larry Suffield, Lambton College
Andrew Templer, University of Windsor
ISBN 10: 0132626322
ISBN 13: 9780132626323
400pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Appropriate for labour relations, industrial relations, and collective bargaining courses.
An excellent resource for anyone intending to pursue Certified Human Resources Professional (CHRP)
Certification, this new edition now links the content directly to the Required Professional Capabilities (PCs)
necessary for certification.
Exploring the complex world of labour contracts and negotiations while balancing practical techniques with
cotemporary analysis of the newest changes in the field, this new edition makes learning about labour relations
easy and interesting. Numerous real-life examples, cases, practical strategies and comprehensive analysis
provide you with the skills necessary to make sense of labour relations today.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Labour Relations
167
2.
The Environment
3.
Unions: Objectives, Processes, Structure, and History
4.
Employers: Objectives, Processes, and Strategy
5.
Governments, Labour Relations Boards, and Other Parties
6.
Collective Bargaining Rights
Appendix to Chapter 6 Collective Bargaining Rights Appendices
7.
The Collective Agreement
8.
Negotiation of the Collective Agreement
9.
Administration of the Collective Agreement
10. Contract Dispute Resolution, Strikes, and Lockouts
Appendix to Chapter 10 Third-Party Assistance in Contract Disputes
11. Public Sector Labour Relations
12. Summary and Future of Labour Relations
Appendix A: Cases
Appendix B: Grievance and Arbitration
Appendix C: Contract Negotiation Simulation
Appendix D: Canadian Council of Human Resources Associations’ Required Professional Capabilities
Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, The, 5/e
Leigh Thompson
ISBN 10: 0132827662
ISBN 13: 9780132827669
432pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate-level business courses that cover the skills of negotiation.
Delve into the mind and heart of the negotiator in order to enhance negotiation skills.
The Mind and Heart of the Negotiator is dedicated to negotiators who want to improve their ability to
negotiate–whether in multimillion-dollar business deals or personal interactions. This text provides an integrated
view of what to do and what to avoid at the bargaining table, facilitated by an integration of theory, scientific
research, and practical examples.
This edition contains new examples and chapter-opening sections, as well as more than a hundred new scientific
articles on negotiations.
Table of Contents
PART I: ESSENTIALS OF NEGOTIATION
1.
Negotiation: The Mind and the Heart
2.
Preparation: What to Do before Negotiation
3.
Distributive Negotiation: Slicing the Pie
4.
Win-Win Negotiation: Expanding the Pie
PART II: ADVANCED NEGOTIATION SKILLS
5.
Developing a Negotiating Style
6.
Establishing Trust and Building a Relationship
7.
Power, Persuasion, and Ethics
8.
Creativity and Problem Solving in Negotiations
PART III: APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL SCENARIOS
9.
Multiple Parties, Coalitions, and Teams
10. Cross-Cultural Negotiation
11. Tacit Negotiations and Social Dilemmas
12. Negotiating via Information Technology
APPENDICES
Appendix 1: Are You a Rational Person? Check Yourself
Appendix 2: Nonverbal Communication and Lie Detection
Appendix 3: Third-Party Intervention
Appendix 4: Negotiating a Job Offer
Human Resource Management, 8/e
Derek Torrington
Stephen Taylor
Laura Hall
Carol Atkinson
ISBN 10: 0273756923
ISBN 13: 9780273756927
848pp ©2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
This best selling textbook provides a comprehensive introduction to human resource management, covering all
the main areas of HRM practice as well as the key skills that HR practitioners will need. The book is written from
a practical perspective in a clear and engaging style. It includes full coverage of operational issues and
introduces the major academic debates of relevance to the field. It is written as an introduction for students of
HRM at all levels, including those on CIPD courses.
168
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION
1.
The nature of Human Resource Management
2.
Strategic Human Resource Management
3.
Planning: jobs and people
4.
The international dimension
PART II: RESOURCING
5.
Strategic aspects of resourcing
6.
Contracts, contractors and consultants
7.
Recruitment
8.
Selection methods and decisions
9.
Staff retention
10. Ending the contract
PART III: PERFORMANCE
11. Strategic aspects of performance
12. Organisational performance: knowledge and learning
13. Employee Performance Management
14. Leadership and change management
15. Managing absence and attendance
PART IV: DEVELOPMENT
16. Strategic aspects of development
17. Context, competence and competencies
18. Learning and development
19. Career development
PART V: EMPLOYEE RELATIONS
20. Strategic aspects of employee relations
21. Employee involvement
22. Health, safety and welfare
23. The legal framework for equality
24. Equal opportunities and diversity
25. Grievance and discipline
PART VI: REWARD
26. Strategic aspects of reward
27. Salaries
28. Incentives
29. Pensions and benefits
PART VII: EMERGING ISSUES
30. Ethics and corporate social responsibility
31. Work-life balance
32. The changing HR function
33. Information Technology and Human Capital Measurement
34. The future of work
PART VIII: FOCUS ON SKILLS
Training in Australia, 4/e
Michael Tovey
Diane Lawlor
ISBN 10: 144253902X
ISBN 13: 9781442539020
©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
The essential resource for trainers and assessors
Training in Australia continues to examine the impact of important developments in the training industry and
the many changes this brings to the workplace. By finding the right mix of enthusiasm, content, techniques and
approaches, Training in Australia continues to make the path to training excellence a little clearer for all.
This highly respected text, now in its 4th edition, has been updated and revised to include coverage of the:
ƒ
TAE10 Training and Education Training Package
ƒ
.
2010 AQTF Essential Conditions and Standards for Continuing Registration
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Context of training in Australia
Plan effective learning
Analyse training need
Design and develop training
Assess training
Deliver training
Validate training
Manage training
169
Entrepreneurship: Perspectives and Cases
Paul Westhead
Gerard McElwee
Mike Wright
ISBN 10: 0273726137
ISBN 13: 9780273726135
480pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Entrepreneurship is a hot topic, yet there is no agreed definition of entrepreneurship. There is even debate
about whether entrepreneurship can be taught!
This text and case study collection is designed to stimulate critical thinking and reflective learning relating to
entrepreneurship. This book enables you to focus on the key issues that need to be considered with regard to
new ventures and/or a business plan module, as well as courses on theory and policy relating to entrepreneurship
and small businesses.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Introduction: Context Issues and Case Study Selection
Contributions of Entrepreneurial Firms
Theoretical Insights: Economic Approaches
Theoretical Insights: Sociological and Psychological Approaches
‘Types’ of Entrepreneurs I: Habitual Entrepreneurs
‘Types’ of Entrepreneurs II: High Technology and Academic Entrepreneurs
‘Types’ of Organizations I: Family Firms
‘Types’ of Organizations II: Corporate Entrepreneurship
‘Types’ of Organizations III: Management Buy-Outs
‘Types’ of Organizations IV: Social Entrepreneurship
External Environmental Context for Enterprise
Entrepreneurial Finance
International Entrepreneurship
Venture Development and Performance
Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global
Sustainability, 13/e
Thomas L. Wheelen
J. David Hunger, Iowa State University
ISBN 10: 0132570203
ISBN 13: 9780132570206
912pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Strategic Management and Business Policy courses.
Class-tested approach to Strategy with new focus on environmental sustainability.
Wheelen and Hunger’s class-tested approach to teaching Strategy is brought into sharper focus with a new
theme: environmental sustainability. By bringing the sustainability theme into focus, this text equips students
with the strategic concepts they will need to know as they face issues such as climate change, global warming
and energy availability.
This thirteenth edition provides students with an array of timely, well-researched, and class-tested cases—
nineteen of which are new or revised.
Also Available:
Concepts in Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e
ISBN 10: 0132570211
ISBN 13: 9780132570213
440pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND BUSINESS POLICY
1.
Basic Concepts in Strategic Management
2.
Corporate Governance
3.
Ethics and Social Responsibility in Strategic Management
PART TWO: SCANNING THE ENVIRONMENT
4.
Environmental Scanning & Industry Analysis
5.
Internal Scanning & Organizational Analysis
PART THREE: STRATEGY FORMULATION
6.
Strategy Formulation: Situation Analysis & Business Strategy
7.
Strategy Formulation: Corporate Strategy
8.
Strategy Formulation: Functional Strategy & Strategic Choice
PART FOUR: STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL
9.
Strategy Implementation: Organizing for Action
10. Strategy Implementation: Staffing & Directing
11. Evaluation & Control
PART FIVE: INTRODUCTION TO CASE ANALYSIS
12. Suggestions for Case Analysis
PART SIX: WEB CHAPTERS: OTHER STRATEGIC ISSUES
170
Web Chapter A. Strategic Issues in Managing Technology & Innovation
Web Chapter B. Strategic Issues in Entrepreneurial Ventures & Small Businesses
Web Chapter C. Strategic Issues in Not-For-Profit Organizations
PART SEVEN: CASES IN STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Section A. Corporate Governance and Social Responsibility
Case 1: The Recalcitrant Director at Byte Products, Inc.: Corporate Legality versus Corporate Responsibility
Case 2: The Wallace Group 4
Section B. Business Ethics
Case 3: Everyone Does It
Case 4: The Audit
Section C. International Issues in Strategic Management
Case 5: Starbucks’ Coffee Company: The India Dilemma
Case 6: Guajilote Cooperativo Forestal: Honduras
Section D. General Issues in Strategic Management
Case 7: Apple, Inc.
Case 8: iRobot: Finding the Right Market Mix?
Case 9: Dell, Inc., Changing the Business Model (Mini Case)
Case 10: Rosetta Stone Inc., Changes the Way People Learn Languages
Case 11: Logitech (Mini Case)
Case 12: Google
Case 13: Reorganizing Yahoo
Case 14: TiVo, Inc: TiVo vs. Cable and Satellite DVR Can VO Survive?
Case 15: Marvel Entertainment
Case 16: Carnival Corporation & plc
Case 17: Chrysler in Trouble
Case 18: Tesla Motors, Inc.
Case 19: Harley Davidson: Thriving Through Recession
Case 20: JetBlue: Always Growing Pains?
Case 21: TomTom: New Competition Everywhere!
Case 22: Volcom Inc.: Riding the Wave
Case 23: TOMS Shoes
Case 24: Best Buy Co., Inc.: Sustainable Customer Centricity Model?
Case 25: The Future of Gap Inc.
Case 26: Rocky Mountain Chocolate Factory, Inc.
Case 27: Dollar General Corporation: 2011 Growth Expansion Plans
Case 28: Inner-City Paint Corporation (Revised)
Case 29: The Carey Plant
Case 30: The Boston Beer Company: Brewers of Samuel Adams Boston Lager
Case 31: Wal-Mart and Vlasic Pickles
Case 32: Panera Bread Company (2010): Still Rising Fortunes?
Case 33: Whole Food Market 2010: How to Grow in An Increasingly Competitive Market?
Case 34: Burger King
Case 35: Church & Dwight: Time to Rethink the Portfolio
Management Consulting: Delivering an Effective Project, 4/e
Philip Wickham
Louise Wickham
ISBN 10: 0273768743
ISBN 13: 9780273768746
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Management Consulting remains a popular career choice but undertaking a consulting project for the first time
can seem a daunting prospect for any student or new professional.
This book, now in its fourth edition, aims specifically to guide you through the process of management
consultancy, while also providing tips and techniques for the more seasoned practitioner. The authors and
contributors, who all have been consultants, deliver this from their accumulated knowledge and insights.
Anybody studying management consulting or undertaking a consulting project will benefit from the ideas
contained inside this book.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: MANAGEMENT CONSULTING IN CONTEXT AND HOW IT ADDS VALUE
1.
The nature of management consulting and how it adds value
2.
Consulting: the wider context and consulting process
3.
The skills of the consultant and the project proposal
4.
Consulting across borders and cultures
Robinson Mason case study: Part 1
PART TWO: PROJECT EVALUATION AND ANALYSIS
5.
Defining the destination, developing a strategy and understanding change
6.
Evaluating client capabilities and business opportunities
7.
Working with clients and teams: the 'soft skills'
Robinson Mason case study: Part 2
PART THREE: UNDERTAKING THE PROJECT
8.
Working with the client
9.
Creative approaches for developing solutions
171
10. Analysing decision-making in the client business and the decision context
11. Consulting project planning and time management
Robinson Mason case study: Part 3
PART FOUR: DELIVERING THE PRODUCT TO THE CLIENT
12. Communication skills and presenting your ideas
13. Learning from success
14. Consulting as a career
Appendix: Example of a consulting report
International Business, 6/e
John J. Wild
Kenneth L. Wild
ISBN 10: 027375257X
ISBN 13: 9780273752578
480pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory International Business courses with the need for a brief, accessible text.
A readable, concise, and innovative tour through the study of international business.
International Business: The Challenges of Globalization presents international business in a comprehensive
yet concise framework with unrivaled clarity. Real-world examples and engaging features help to bring the
concepts to life and make international business accessible for all students.
The sixth edition captures and explains the influence of the global credit crisis and recent recession on
international business, while also emphasizing its focus on the crucial role of emerging markets in today’s global
marketplace.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: GLOBAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENTS
1.
Globalization
PART 2: NATIONAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENTS
2.
Cross-Cultural Business
3.
Politics, Law, and Business Ethics
4.
Economics and Emerging Markets
PART 3: INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND INVESTMENT
5.
International Trade
6.
Business-Government Trade Relations
7.
Foreign Direct Investment
8.
Regional Economic Integration
PART 4: THE INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL SYSTEM
9.
International Financial Markets
10. International Monetary System
PART 5: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
11. International Strategy and Organization
12. Analyzing International Opportunities
13. Selecting and Managing Entry Modes
14. Developing and Marketing Products
15. Managing International Operations
16. Hiring and Managing Employees
Organisation Design
Nicolay Worren
ISBN 10: 0273738836
ISBN 13: 9780273738831
288pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Organization Design is part of every manager and leader’s job: attempting to understand and improve how
organizations function through creating or adjusting of roles, processes, and structures. In fact, most managers
are faced with organization design challenges on an almost daily basis.
Managers constantly design and redesign individual roles, define new projects (including their structure and
reporting relationships), and contemplate better ways to co-ordinate organizational processes with multiple
internal stakeholders. Periodically they may also make more fundamental changes to business structures, or
adapt and implement high-level designs developed by others.
This textbook introduces concepts and frameworks for designing complex organizations. It starts by outlining
some of the key concepts that serve as a foundation to understanding how the theory applies in practice. It also
reviews the status of organisation design - as a field of research and as a practical discipline - both its
achievements, and some of its challenges and limitations. It then discusses how the field can develop to ensure
that it provides research-based and useful knowledge that contributes to enhancing the effectiveness of
172
organizations.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Why design matters
Organisational complexity
Managing the organisation design process
Designing multidimensional organizations
Designing sub-units
Structuring vertical layers
Configuring interfaces
Rooting out complexity
Total Global Strategy, 3/e
George S. Yip, China Europe International Business School
G. Tomas M. Hult, Michigan State University
ISBN 10: 0132374722
ISBN 13: 9780132374729
350pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For graduate courses in International Business, Competitive Strategy, International Marketing, and
Strategic Management.
A uniquely integrated view of the global strategy issues facing firms today.
Written by the subject's leading academic authorities, this highly readable text (a student favorite) addresses the
most challenging task faced by multinational companies—how to deal with globalization and the resulting need for
globally integrated strategies.
The third edition—in addition to featuring new coauthor Tomas Hult—presents a complete rewrite of all chapters,
a more integrated view of eBusiness and service issues, and a new slate of innovative, practical examples in the
text and case vignettes.
Table of Contents
1.
Understanding Global Strategy
2.
Diagnosing Industry Globalization Potential
3.
Building Global Market Participation
4.
Designing Global Products and Services
5.
Locating Global Activities
6.
Creating Global Marketing
7.
Making Global Competitive Moves
8.
Building the Global Organization
9.
Regional Strategy
10. Measuring Industry Drivers, Strategy Levers, Organization Factors, and Regional Focus
11. Conducting a Global Strategy Analysis
Appendix: Worksheets for Evaluating Core Strategy
Leadership in Organizations, 8/e
Gary A. Yukl
ISBN 10: 0273765663
ISBN 13: 9780273765660
544pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate-level courses in Leadership.
An exploration of what makes an effective leader.
Leadership in Organizations provides a balance of theory and practice as it surveys the major theories and
research on leadership and managerial effectiveness in formal organizations.
The eighth edition includes new examples, citations, and guidelines, and has been enhanced for better clarity and
presentation.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Introduction
Managerial Work
Effective Leadership Behavior
Leading Change and Innovation
Participative Leadership and Empowerment
Leadership Traits and Skills
Contingency Theories and Adaptive Leadership
Power and Influence Tactics
173
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Dyadic Relations and Followers
Leadership in Groups and Teams
Strategic Leadership in Organizations
Charismatic and Transformational Leadership
Ethical, Servant, Spiritual, and Authentic Leadership
Cross-cultural Leadership and Diversity
Developing Leadership Skills
Overview and Integration
174
Marketing
International Marketing and Export Management, 7/e
Gerald Albaum
Edwin Duerr
ISBN 10: 0273743880
ISBN 13: 9780273743880
1024pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
International Marketing and Export Management 7e offers an accessible and authoritative perspective on
international marketing with a strong export management orientation, comprehensively describing the evolving
competitive landscape as created by technological advances and international trade patterns. The seventh edition
retains its clear and informed coverage of the opportunities for companies of all sizes and in all industries in the
export of goods, services, intellectual property and business models.
Written in a no-nonsense style, the book has been updated to offer the most up-to-date discussion of the
literature in the area, as well as new and engaging cases and examples in every chapter.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
International Marketing and Exporting
Bases of International Marketing
The International Environment: Culture, Economic and Competition
The International Environment: Government, Political and Legal forces
Export Market Selection: Definition and Strategies
Information for International Market(ing) Decisions
Market Entry Strategies
Export Entry Modes
Non-export Entry Modes
Product Decisions
Pricing Decisions
Financing and Methods of Payment
Promotion and Marketing Communication
Handling Export Orders and Supply Chain Management
Organization of International Marketing Activities
Principles of Marketing, 5/e
Gary Armstrong
Stewart Adam
Sara Denize
Phillip Kotler
ISBN 10: 144253110X
ISBN 13: 9781442531109
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Collaboration. Value Creation.
Never content to rest on our laurels, during 2009 and 2010 we undertook a rigorous revision of the 4th Australian
edition of Principles of Marketing. We collaborated with a total of 63 academics who reviewed, critiqued and
provided suggestions to evolve the 5th Australian edition into an unsurpassed teaching and learning solution. We
also collaborated with students who helped design the new cover.
The 5th edition of Principles of Marketing makes the road to learning and teaching marketing more effective,
easier, and more enjoyable than ever. Its streamlined approach strikes a careful balance between depth of
coverage and ease of learning. The 5th edition’s brand new learning design—with an integrative Concept Map at
the start of each chapter, and insightful author comments throughout—enhances student understanding. When
combined with a completely new MyMarketingLab, our online homework study tool, Principles of Marketing
ensures that your students will come to class well prepared and leave class with a richer understanding of core
marketing concepts, strategies, and practices.
We have thoroughly updated the 5th edition of Principles of Marketing to reflect the major trends and forces
that marketing must take into account in this era of customer value and relationships.
Table of Contents
PART 1: DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS
1.
Marketing: Creating and Capturing Customer Value
2.
Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships
PART 2: UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS
3.
Analysing the Marketing Environment
4.
Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insights
5.
Understanding Consumer and Business Buyer Behaviour
PART 3: DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN STRATEGY AND MIX
6.
Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers
7.
Products, Services and Brands: Building Customer Value
8.
Developing New Products and Managing the Product Life Cycle
9.
Pricing to Capture Customer Value
175
10. Placement: Customer Value Fulfilment
11. Communicating Customer Value: Advertising and Public Relations
12. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion
13. Direct and Digital Marketing: Building One-to-One Customer Relationships
PART 4: EXTENDED MARKETING
14. Sustainable Marketing: Social Responsibility, Ethics and Legal Compliance
Appendix 1 Marketing Metrics Spotlights
Appendix 2 The Marketing Plan: An Introduction
Marketing: An Introduction, 11/e
Gary Armstrong
Philip Kotler
ISBN 10: 0273767186
ISBN 13: 9780273767183
672pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses.
This best-selling, brief text introduces marketing through the lens of creating value for customers.
Today’s marketing is about creating customer value and building profitable customer relationships. With
engaging real-world examples and information, Marketing: An Introduction shows students how customer
value–creating it and capturing it–drives every effective marketing strategy.
Table of Contents
PART 1: DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS
1.
Marketing: Creating and Capturing Customer Value
2.
Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships
PART 2: UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS
3.
Analyzing the Marketing Environment
4.
Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insights
5.
Understanding Consumer and Business Buyer Behavior
PART 3: DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN STRATEGY AND MIX
6.
Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers
7.
Products, Services, and Brands: Building Customer Value
8.
Developing New Products and Managing the Product Life-Cycle
9.
Pricing: Understanding and Capturing Customer Value
10. Marketing Channels: Delivering Customer Value
11. Retailing and Wholesaling
12. Communicating Customer Value: Advertising and Public Relations
13. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion
14. Direct and Online Marketing: Building Direct Customer Relationships
PART 4: EXTENDING MARKETING
15. The Global Marketplace
16. Sustainable Marketing: Social Responsibility and Ethics
Appendix 1 Marketing Cases
Appendix 2 Marketing Plan
Appendix 3 Marketing by the Numbers
Marketing: An Introduction, 2/e
Gary Armstrong
Philip Kotler
Michael Harker
Ross Brennan
ISBN 10: 0273762605
ISBN 13: 9780273762607
648pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Putting you in control of your own journey through marketing.
Marketing: An Introduction is your clear, comprehensive and concise guide to the key ideas in marketing,
focusing on how to deliver improved customer value in order to achieve marketing success.
The second European edition of this classic text has been updated with the latest ideas in marketing and with
numerous new European marketing examples and case studies. The Authors prompt students to discover the
concepts of marketing and translate them into real commercial practice for themselves.
Table of Contents
PART 1 – DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS
1.
Marketing: Managing profitable Customer Relationships
2.
Company and Marketing Strategy: partnering to build customer relationships
PART 2 – UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS
3.
The Marketing Environment
4.
Managing Marketing Information
5.
Consumer and Business Buyer behaviour
176
PART 3 – DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN MARKETING STRATEGY AND MARKETING MIX
6.
Segmentation, targeting and positioning: Building the right relationships with the right customers
7.
Product, services and branding strategy
8.
New-product development and product life-cycle strategies
9.
Pricing: understanding and capturing customer value
10. Marketing channels and supply chain management
11. Retailing and wholesaling
12. Communicating customer value: Advertising, sales promotion and public relations
13. Communicating customer value: Personal selling and direct marketing
PART 4 – EXTENDING MARKETING
14. Marketing in the digital age
15. The global marketplace
16. Ethics, social responsibility and sustainability
Appendix 1, Marketing plan
Appendix 2, Marketing metrics
Appendix 3, Careers in marketing
Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12/e
Barry R. Berman
Joel R. Evans
ISBN 10: 0273768565
ISBN 13: 9780273768562
688pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate retail management courses.
The text that helps students thrive in today’s retailing industry.
Without a pre-defined and well-integrated strategy, a retail firm may flounder as it’s attempting to cope with the
changing environment that surrounds it. Berman/Evans’ reader-friendly text, Retail Management: A Strategic
Approach, provides a strategic, decision-making approach that illustrates how retailers plan for, and adapt to,
today’s changing and complex retail environment.
Market-Based Management, 6/e
Roger Best
ISBN 10: 0132848163
ISBN 13: 9780132848169
576pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Best is the book that focuses on marketing performance, marketing profitability, and the role marketing
strategies play in building the profits of a business.
Table of Contents
Part I: Market Orientation and Marketing Performance
1.
Customer Focus, Customer Performance and Profit Impact
2.
Marketing Metrics and Marketing Profitability
Part II: Market Analysis
3.
Market Potential, Market Demand, and Market Share
4.
The Customer Experience and Value Creation
5.
Market Segmentation and Segmentation Strategies
6.
Competitive Position and Sources of Advantage
Part III: Marketing Mix Strategies
7.
Product Positioning, Branding, and Product Line Strategies
8.
Value-Based Pricing and Pricing Strategies
9.
Marketing Channels and Channel Mapping
10. Marketing Communications, Social Media, and Customer RESPONSE
Part IV: Strategic Marketing
11. Portfolio Analysis and Strategic Market Planning
12. Strategic Offensive Strategies
13. Strategic Defensive Strategies
Part V: Marketing Plans and Performance
14. Building a Marketing Plan
15. Marketing Metrics, Performance, and Strategy Implementation
16. Market-Based Management and Financial Performance
177
Selling Financial Products
James B. Bexley
ISBN 10: 0132752131
ISBN 13: 9780132752138
192pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses focusing on selling financial products and services.
A solid foundation to selling financial products and services.
Bexley is designed to take the fear out of selling by explaining key concepts and then effectively showing students
how to apply the concepts to selling financial products. And since sales are a skill that needs to be practiced, this
text promotes practice by providing several cases and exercises.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Times Have Changed
Introduction to Selling
Selling Scope
The Selling Officer
Prospecting for Business
Successful Selling Cycle
Product Knowledge
Pricing in the Selling Process
Calling Program a Must to Sell
Advertising/Marketing to Sell
Marketing Research to Successfully
Ethics in Selling Financial Products and Services
Essentials of Marketing, 5/e
Jim Blythe
ISBN 10: 0273757687
ISBN 13: 9780273757689
368pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Essentials of Marketing 5e provides a vibrant and accessible introduction to Marketing providing concise and
accessible coverage of:
ƒ
traditional marketing techniques and theories,
ƒ
the practical and tactical decision-making processes involved in marketing,
ƒ
up-to-date topics such as corporate social responsibility, social media and ethics.
The book takes a practical approach, with plentiful examples and up-to-date case studies, complimented by a full
range of online resources including video cases for every chapter and new author podcasts making this book
perfect for undergraduates taking a one semester introductory marketing course.
Cutlip and Center's Effective Public Relations, 11/e
Glen Broom
ISBN 10: 0273768395
ISBN 13: 9780273768395
496pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Introductory Public Relations.
Cutlip & Center offers students the gold standard in public relations, providing the most up-to-date reference in
the market.
Table of Contents
PART I: CONCEPT, PRACTITIONERS, CONTEXT, AND ORIGINS
1.
Introduction to Contemporary Public Relations
2.
Practitioners of Public Relations
3.
Organizational Settings
4.
Historical Origins and Evolution
PART II: FOUNDATIONS
5.
Professionalism and Ethics
6.
Legal Considerations
7.
Theory: Adjustment and Adaptation
8.
Theory: Communication and Public Opinion
178
9.
Internal Relations and Employee Communication
10. External Media and Media Relations
PART III: MANAGEMENT PROCESS
11. Step One: Defining Public Relations Problems
12. Step Two: Planning and Programming
13. Step Three: Taking Action and Communicating
14. Step Four: Evaluating the Program
PART IV: THE PRACTICE
15. Business and Industry
16. Government and Politics
17. Military Public Affairs
18. Nonprofits and NGOs
19. Health Care
20. Education
21. Associations and Unions
eTourism: Information Technology for Strategic
Tourism Management, 2/e
Ebert Dimitrios Buhalis
ISBN 10: 027373783X
ISBN 13: 9780273737834
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The book is aimed at advanced undergraduate and postgraduate students in business, tourism and hospitality
programmes that need to explore how they can use ICTs in a strategic context. It is also anticipated that
researchers and practitioners will find it useful and stimulating.
This book addresses the digitization of all processes and value chains in the tourism, travel, hospitality and
catering industries. By analysing the new technological trends it provides a solid basis for analysing the impacts
of the Information Communication Technology (ICT) revolution on the tourism industry. The book adopts a
strategic management and marketing perspective for tourism enterprises and destinations. It suggests that
eTourism revolutionizes all business processes, the entire value chain as well as the strategic relationships of
tourism organizations with all their stakeholders. It additionally focuses on how ICTs are employed in airlines,
hotels, travel agencies, tour operators and destinations management organizations. The book demonstrates that
eTourism increasingly determines the competitiveness of the organization, and therefore, it is critical for the
competitiveness of the industry in the longer term.
Basic Marketing Research with Excel, 3/e
Alvin C. Burns
Ronald F. Bush
ISBN 10: 0132598965
ISBN 13: 9780132598965
416pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Marketing Research courses.
A concise presentation of marketing research fundamentals.
Basic Marketing Research uses Excel add-in software for data analysis, an integrated case, and experiential
learning exercises to present a concise introduction to market research fundamentals. This text also provides
students with resources they can use in their future careers.
The third edition provides an improved software package–XL Data Analyst™–and includes more information on
qualitative research.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
An Introduction to Marketing Research
The Marketing Research Industry
The Marketing Research Process Including the Problem and Research Objectives
Research Design Alternatives and Qualitative Research
Information Types and Sources: Secondary Data and Standardized Information
Data Collection Methods
Measurement Scales
Designing Data Collection Forms
Determining Sample Size and the Sample Plan
179
Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e
Dave Chaffey
Fiona Ellis-Chadwick
Kevin Johnston
Richard Mayer
ISBN 10: 0273746103
ISBN 13: 9780273746102
656pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The Internet has revolutionised marketing practice, connecting potential customers to businesses in a way never
before possible. Today, with online audiences spending more time using price comparison sites, search engines
and social networks, this text explains how marketers can find new and engaging ways of getting their message
across.
This text provides comprehensive, practical guidance on how companies can get the most out of the web to meet
their marketing goals. Edited by Dave Chaffey, one of Europe’s top thinkers in this area, this text links marketing
theory with case studies on cutting edge companies to help students to understand digital marketing in the real
world.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTERNET MARKETING FUNDAMENTALS
1.
Introducing Internet marketing
2.
The Internet micro-environment
3.
The Internet macro-environment
PART II: INTERNET STRATEGY DEVELOPMENT
4.
Internet marketing strategy
5.
The Internet and the marketing mix
6.
Relationship marketing using the Internet
PART III: INTERNET MAKKETING: IMPLEMENTATION & PRACTICE
7.
Delivering the online customer experience
8.
Campaign planning for digital media
9.
Marketing communications using digital media channels
10. Evaluation and improvement of digital channel performance
11. Business-to-consumer Internet marketing
12. Business-to-business Internet marketing
Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communications, 5/e
Kenneth E. Clow
Donald Baack
ISBN 10: 0273753282
ISBN 13: 9780273753285
464pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Advertising and Integrated Marketing Communication courses.
Clow and Baack examine advertising and promotions through the lens of integrated marketing communications.
The carefully integrated approach of this text blends advertising, promotions and marketing communications
together, providing students with the information they need to understand the process and benefits of successful
IMC campaigns.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE IMC FOUNDATION
1.
Integrated Marketing Communications
2.
Corporate Image and Brand Management
3.
Buyer Behaviors
4.
The IMC Planning Process
PART 2: IMC ADVERTISING TOOLS
5.
Advertising Management
6.
Advertising Design: Theoretical Frameworks and Types of Appeals
7.
Advertising Design: Message Strategies and Executional Frameworks
PART 3: IMC MEDIA TOOLS
8.
Traditional Media Channels
9.
E-active Marketing
10. Alternative Marketing
PART 4: IMC PROMOTIONAL TOOLS
11. Database and Direct Response Marketing and Personal Selling
12. Sales Promotions
13. Public Relations and Sponsorship Programs
PART 5: IMC ETHICS, REGULATION, AND EVALUATION
14. Regulations and Ethical Concerns
15. Evaluating an Integrated Marketing Program
180
Integrated Marketing Communication
Kenneth E. Clow
Marshall
Julian
McCarthy
Donald Baack
ISBN 10: 0733992900
ISBN 13: 9780733992902
©2012 Paper
Essentials of Tourism
Chris Cooper
ISBN 10: 027372438X
ISBN 13: 9780273724384
392pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Essentials of Tourism offer a concise and student-friendly introduction to the field of tourism.
Written in a lively and engaging style, the book boasts an extensive range of case studies from around the world,
and provides you with a coherent and consistent text, blending tourism principles and theory with practice. Each
chapter features three case studies which illustrate contemporary practice in the leisure and tourism industry.
Examples are drawn from a wide variety of destinations from around the globe, giving this text a truly
international approach.
The book is the essential companion for undergraduate students studying Tourism and Tourism Management. It
is accompanied by a companion website packed with extra resources for both students and lecturers, including
multiple choice questions, PowerPoint slides and links to further reading.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: TOURISM ESSENTIALS: AN INTRODUCTION
1.
Tourism Essentials
SECTION 2: DESTINATION ESSENTIALS
2.
The Destination
3.
The Economic Consequences of Tourism
4.
The Environmental Consequences of Tourism
5.
The Social and Cultural Consequences of Tourism
6.
Sustainable Tourism
SECTION 3: TOURISM SECTOR ESSENTIALS
7.
Attractions
8.
Hospitality
9.
Intermediaries
10. Transport
11. Government and Tourism
SECTION 4: TOURISM DEMAND AND MARKETING ESSENTIALS
12. Demand
13. Tourism Marketing
SECTION 5: TOURISM FUTURES: THE ESSENTIALS
14. Tourism Futures
Advertising Research: Theory & Practice, 2/e
Joel J. Davis, San Diego State University
ISBN 10: 0132128322
ISBN 13: 9780132128322
704pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Advertising Research.
Discover how to design and use advertising research.
In order to become successful advertising professionals, students need to understand the importance of research.
Advertising Research: Theory & Practice shows students how research helps advertisers make the best
decisions in regards to strategy, target audiences, and creativity in a complex consumer and media environment.
New chapters have been added in this edition that highlight recent developments in advertisers’ behaviors.
Changes and advancements in research design and methodology are also addressed.
Table of Contents
PART I. FOUNDATIONS
1.
The Nature and Process of Research
2.
Research Ethics
PART II. SOURCES OF INFORMATION
181
3.
Secondary Research
4.
Sampling
PART III. QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
5.
Collecting Qualitative Insights
6.
Focus Groups
7.
Analysis of Qualitative Data
PART IV. QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH
8.
Data Collection through Observation: Human and Automated
9.
Data Collection through Observation: Biometrics
10. Survey Research
11. Measurement
12. Asking Questions
13. Questionnaire Design
14. Experiments
15. Quantitative Data Analysis: Descriptive Statistics
16. Quantitative Data Analysis: Inferential Statistics
PART V. APPLIED TOPICS
17. Segmentation
18. Brand Maps
19. Concept and Benefit Testing
20. Post-Production Advertising Testing and Optimization
21. Presenting Research
Social Marketing
Lynne Eagle
Alan Tapp
Stephan Dahl
Sara Bird
ISBN 10: 0273727222
ISBN 13: 9780273727224
456pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Social marketing is receiving unprecedented focus and support from government, the private sector and
charities internationally. Social marketing attempts to educate people in the hope that they will make ‘informed’
(i.e. healthy) choices regarding diet, lifestyle and health related issues. The effective application of social
marketing principles can be complex and controversial. Social marketing planning cannot be reduced to a simple
set of actions on a checklist; there is no single strategy for success and strategies that have proved successful
with one population may not transfer to other populations. This text will explore the complexities involved in
researching, planning and implementing effective social marketing programmes, using illustrative cases from both
successful and unsuccessful real-world programmes.
The authors provide a critical analysis of the origins of social marketing as a concept and of the claims made by
its supporters and detractors in order to highlight what social marketing can and cannot achieve. This is followed
by a review of strategic issues that must be considered in developing social marketing programmes, including
persuasion resistance, message relevance and message framing.
Key themes included in the text are the impact of cultural factors on health-related behaviours, ethical issues and
attitudes as a key factor underlying health-related behaviours. The authors introduce concepts, theories and
strategies that will aid the development, testing and implementation of social marketing interventions.
The book is suitable for both undergraduate and postgraduate students of business and marketing and those
studying modules in social marketing.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE PRINCIPLES OF SOCIAL MARKETING
1.
What is socialmarketing?
2.
The core principlesof social marketing
3.
The social marketing intervention planning process
4.
Upstream, policy, and partnershipsin social marketing
5.
Ethical issues in social marketing
PART 2: UNDERSTANDING THE CITIZEN
6.
Understanding the citizen: the role of developing effective social marketing interventions
7.
Segmentation in social marketing
8.
Research in social marketing
9.
Social forces and population level effects
PART 3: DESIGNING EFFECTIVE SOCIAL MARKETING SOLUTIONS
10. Designing social marketing interventions: products, services, locations, channels.
11. Message platforms for effective social marketing communications
12. Creativity in social marketing communications
13. Media in social marketing
14. Measurement and evaluation of social marketing programmes
182
Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies in
Marketing, 4/e
John Egan
ISBN 10: 0273737783
ISBN 13: 9780273737780
328pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Relationship Marketing comprehensively examines relationships in marketing and how these influence modern
marketing strategy and practice, by critically reviewing and analysing what has been described as 'marketing's
new paradigm'.
Established as the key text in the area, the fourth edition continues to offer an accessible and authoritative
introduction to this increasingly important subject. It retains its informed coverage of the most recent and
important literature, as well as clearly organising and structuring the book around its core themes. The new
edition includes a wide range of examples to illuminate the real world relevance of concepts. In addition,
overviews and summaries add clarity and help consolidate understanding.
A complete package of supplements is available to assist students and instructors in using this book. Visit
www.pearsoned.co.uk/egan to find an Instructor’s Manual, PowerPoint slides, and links to other useful sites.
This book is ideal for undergraduates and postgraduates taking modules in Relationship Marketing, Customer
Services, and Marketing Communications. It is core reading for the CIM Level 4 module on ‘Stakeholder
Marketing’.
Table of Contents
PART I - RELATIONSHIPS
1.
100 Years of Marketing
2.
Relationships in Marketing
3.
Relationships
4.
Relationship economics
5.
Strategy continuum
6.
Relationship drivers
7.
Customer partnerships
8.
Internal partnerships
9.
Supplier partnerships
10. External Partnerships
11. Relationship technology
12. Conceptual Developments
Sustainable Marketing
Barry Emery
ISBN 10: 1408292777
ISBN 13: 9781408292778
©2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Consideration for the ethics of business, social responsibility and the environment has put sustainability at the top
of the agenda for many organisations and marketing has a key role to play in driving this agenda. This book
explores the complex and challenging environment of sustainable marketing.
The author starts by considering the background of traditional marketing in order to understand the changes that
have occurred over recent times and their significance. From corporate social responsibility to societal and green
marketing movements, leading to the development of sustainable marketing practice, this book is the most
complete and accessible introduction to Sustainable Marketing on the market.
Key themes covered in the book include:
ƒ
Current developments in the marketing environment and their role in stimulating or impeding the
progress of sustainability
ƒ
The nature of consumption in relation to sustainability
ƒ
The underlying attitudes of consumers towards sustainable consumption
ƒ
The use of social marketing for planning and implementing behavioural change in consumers towards a
more sustainable lifestyle
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Marketing in the sustainable environment
The backdrop to sustainability
Consumer attitudes to sustainability
The evolution of sustainable segmentation
Motivating behavioural change
Reconciling product sustainability
Addressing supply chain sustainability
Communicating sustainability
Managing sustainable change
The future for sustainability: Raising the game, changing the game
183
Sports Marketing
Michael Fetchko
Donald Roy
Kenneth E. Clow, University of Louisiana at Monroe
ISBN 10: 0132135469
ISBN 13: 9780132135467
624pp ©2013 Cloth
Essentials of Marketing Communications
Chris Fill
ISBN 10: 0273738445
ISBN 13: 9780273738442
440pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Essentials of Marketing Communications offer a concise and student-friendly introduction to the principles
and theories of marketing communications.
Written in a lively and engaging style, the book provides you with a coherent and consistent text, blending
marketing communications principles and theory with practice. Divided into three parts, the book considers the
strategic issues associated with managing marketing communications activities before moving on to look at
branding, budgeting and evaluation issues and concluding with chapters on stakeholders, international marketing
communications, and the operations and personnel involved in the industry.
The book is the essential companion for undergraduate and postgraduate students studying Marketing
Communications. It is also an invaluable resource for students studying for professional marketing qualifications,
most notably those studying courses offered by the Chartered Institute of Marketing.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS
1.
The Scope of Marketing Communications
2.
Communication: interactivity & conversations
3.
Audiences: attitudes, behaviour & decision making
PART TWO: MANAGING MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS
4.
Strategies, objectives and positioning
5.
Integration and Planning
6.
Branding, Budgeting & Evaluation
7.
Agencies: Practice, Regulation & International Communications
8.
Shaping Relationships with Marketing Communications
PART THREE: THE MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS MIX
9.
Advertising
10. Public Relations and Sponsorship
11. Direct Marketing and Personal Selling
12. Sales Promotion, Exhibitions and Product Placement
13. Media: conventional and digital
14. Interactive Marketing Communications
15. Content: credibility, messages and creative approaches
Advertising
Chris Fill
Graham Hughes
Scott De Francesco
ISBN 10: 0273760890
ISBN 13: 9780273760894
504pp ©2013 Paper
Corporate Reputation, Brand and Communication
Chris Fill
Stuart Roper
ISBN 10: 0273727591
ISBN 13: 9780273727590
360pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Why should and how can organisations manage their reputations? All organisations, the executives who direct
184
them, the employees who create value and their stakeholders who influence them, all interact and can impact
corporate reputation.
In a 24/7 media environment, where even a tweet can shape impressions, the importance of reputation
management has never been higher. Every single move, decision taken and each isolated event that involves a
company or public figure, is scrutinised, documented and publicised globally, compounding the task of reputation
managers. Just ask BP, Toyota or Tiger Woods.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
The Rise of Corporate Reputation
The Scope of Corporate Reputation
The Significance of Corporate Culture
The Measurement of Corporate Reputation
The Branding – Reputation Dilemma
The Rise of Corporate Brands
Measuring Corporate Brands
The Future of Brands
The Dimensions of Corporate Communication
Contexts for Corporate Communication
Symbols, Tools and the Media
Methods of Corporate Communication
Critical Thinking in Consumer Behavior, 3/e
Judy F. Graham
ISBN 10: 0132760118
ISBN 13: 9780132760119
140pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Designed to be used alone or packaged WITH ANY core texts in consumer behavior.
This unique casebook applies consumer behavior theory to practice via thirty-five cases and activities.
Strategic Communication: Cases in Marketing, Public Relations,
Advertising and Media
Greenland
Bainbridge
Galloway
Gill
ISBN 10: 1442555491
ISBN 13: 9781442555495
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Strategic Communications: Cases in Marketing, Public Relations, Advertising and Media provides a
collection of 13 comprehensive, contemporary case studies for use in Advertising, Marketing, PR and Media
courses with a focus on Australia, New Zealand and the wider Asia Pacific region.
In the past it has been the norm for these disciplines to remain distinct entities. However, with growing
recognition and emergence of the all encompassing theme of communication in the contemporary business arena,
modern professionals need to be skilled in all these communication related areas.
Edited by an expert multi-disciplinary group of communications specialists, and supported by an instructor’s
manual, Strategic Communications will help lecturers provide their students with a solid grounding in the
theoretical and practical aspects of contemporary business communication practices.
Table of Contents
MARKETING
1.
Does plain packaging spell death for cigarette brands in Australia and beyond?
2.
‘Where’s the harm, dude?’ Taking the ‘party’ out of ‘party drugs’ with anti-drugs communications?
3.
It’s all in the design: How IKEA makes you buy with clever store design.
MEDIA
4.
Justin Bieber: A case study on celebrity and the participatory culture of YouTube
5.
Freeview: A case study in television's survival in the post-broadcast era
6.
Wikileaks and Journalism in the 21st century
PUBLIC RELATIONS
7.
Aviva solar car: Using ‘green sponsorship’ to enhance CSR reputation
8.
Managing the risk of trouble in the tap: Desalination and ‘drought-proofing’ Melbourne
9.
An Utterly Fantastic online campaign: How the Australian Diary Industry use online social networking
for
community relations and issues in management
ADVERTISING
10. eftpos: The building of a brand
11. Licensed to sell: Product placement in the James Bond film series
12. The mother of all scare campaigns: The role of advertising in the miner’s campaign to defeat the
185
Resources Super Profits Tax (RSPT)
13. Making it work!
Consumer Behaviour: A European Outlook, 2/e
Havard Hansen
Leon G. Schiffman
Leslie Kanuk
ISBN 10: 0273736957
ISBN 13: 9780273736950
480pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The second European edition of Schiffman and Kanuk's classic Consumer Behaviour focuses not only on what
consumers buy, but also why they buy, when they buy, where they buy, how they evaluate their purchase, and
how they ultimately dispose of it. The text has been thoroughly adapted and revised to reflect European
conditions, and to focus attention on critical concepts in consumer behaviour. The authors discuss the effects of
family, social class, culture and subculture on the decision-making process, and, by taking a psychological
approach, illuminate the ways in which marketers apply the principles of consumer behaviour to the development
and implementation of marketing strategies.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION
1.
An introduction to the study of Consumer Behavior
2.
Consumer Research
3.
Market Segmentation
PART TWO: THE CONSUMER AS AN INDIVIDUAL
4.
Consumer Decision Making
5.
Consumer Motivation
6.
Personality and Consumer Behavior
7.
Consumer Perception
8.
Consumer Learning
9.
Consumer Attitude Formation and Change
10. Communication and Consumer Behavior
PART THREE: CONSUMERS IN THEIR SOCIAL AND CULTURAL SETTINGS
11. Reference Groups and Family Influences
12. Social Class and Consumer Behavior
13. The Influence of Culture and Subculture on Consumer Behavior
14. Cross-Cultural Consumer Behaviour: An International Perspective
PART FOUR: MORE ON THE CONSUMER'S DECISION-MAKING PROCESS
15. Consumer Influence and the Diffusion of Innovations
16. Consumer Decision Making - Again
Customer Service: A Practical Approach, 6/e
Elaine K. Harris
ISBN 10: 0132974347
ISBN 13: 9780132974349
192pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Customer Service, Training and Development, and Service Marketing;
also as a supplement for a course in Marketing Principles.
The market-leader, Customer Service: A Practical Approach, Sixth Edition, goes beyond providing reasons
why customer service is important to defining proven methods for creating customer service excellence. Using a
hands-on approach, it covers a wide range of knowledge and skills and offers an extensive collection of activities
to enliven and invigorate any lecture. This edition features a revised chapter on technology, new Ethics in Action
exercises and coverage of the latest trends in the customer service field. Focusing on problem solving,
communication strategies and technology, this classic text pinpoints the skills needed to improve and sustain
customer satisfaction and business relationships.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
What is Customer Service?
The Challenges of Customer Service
Problem Solving
Strategy for Formulating a Plan for Success
Empowerment
Communications in Customer Service
Coping with Challenging Customers
Motivation
Leadership in Customer Service
Customer Retention and Measurement of Satisfaction
Technology and Customer Service
186
12. Excellence in Customer Service
Essential of Global Marketing, 2/e
Svend Hollensen
ISBN 10: 0273756540
ISBN 13: 9780273756545
624pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Essentials of Global Marketing offers a concise and manageable approach to the subject. The accessible
structure takes the reader through the entire international marketing planning process, and fundamental concepts
are illuminated by examples from a wide range of companies, small and large, from around the world.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Global Marketing in the firm
Initiation of internationalisation
Internationalisation theories
Development of the firm's international competitiveness
The political and economic environment
The sociocultural environment
The international market selection process
Some approaches to the choice of entry mode
Export, intermediate and hierarchical entry modes
International buyer-seller relationships
Product and pricing decisions
Distribution and communication decisions
Cross-cultural sales negotiations
Organisation and control of the global marketing programme
Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning, 5/e
Graham Hooley
Brigitte Nicoulaud
Nigel F. Piercy
ISBN 10: 0273740938
ISBN 13: 9780273740933
592pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning 5e deals with the process of developing and implementing a
marketing strategy. The book focuses on competitive positioning at the heart of marketing strategy and includes
in-depth discussion of the processes used in marketing to achieve competitive advantage.
The book is primarily about creating and sustaining superior performance in the marketplace. It focuses on the
two central issues in marketing strategy formulation – the identification of target markets and the creation of a
differential advantage. In doing that, it recognises the emergence of new potential target markets born of the
recession and increased concern for climate change; and it examines ways in which firms can differentiate their
offerings through the recognition of environmental and social concerns.
Table of Contents
PART I: MARKETING STRATEGY
1.
Market-led strategic management
Case Study: Psion
2.
Strategic marketing planning
Case Study: iPhone
PART II: COMPTETIVE MARKET ANALYSIS
3.
The Changing Market Environment
Case Study: Virgin Megastore
4.
Customer analysis
Case Study: Procter & Gamble
5.
Competitor analysis
Case Study: Emap
6.
Understanding the Organisational Resource Base
Case Study: Miele
7.
Forecasting future demand and market requirements
Case Study: Boeing
PART III: IDENTIFYING CURRENT AND FUTURE COMPETITIVE POSITIONS
8.
Segmentation and positioning principles
Case Study: Internet Exchange
9.
Segmentation and positioning research
Case Study: Asianet, Zee TV, Namaste and more
10. Selecting market targets
Case Study: B&O
187
PART IV: COMPETITIVE POSITIONING STRATEGIES
11. Creating Sustainable Competitive Advantage
Case Study: Nokia
12. Competing through the New Marketing Mix
Case Study: Tyrrell's
13. Competing through innovation
Case Study: Gillette
14. Competing through superior service and customer relationships
Case Study: Pret a Manger
PART V: IMPLEMENTING THE STRATEGY
15. Strategic customer management
Case Study: Xerox
16. Strategic alliances and networks
Case Study: Yahoo and eBay
17. Strategy implementation and internal marketing
Case Study: British Airways
18. Corporate Social Responsibility
Case Study: Ballantyne, Smythson and others
19. Twenty-first Century Marketing
Case Study: Trend spotting at the Henley Centre and elsewhere
Selling and Sales Management, 9/e
David Jobber
Geoffrey Lancaster
ISBN 10: 0273762656
ISBN 13: 9780273762652
592pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Over the last twenty years, Selling and Sales Management has proved itself to be the definitive text in this
exciting and fast-moving area.
This new edition comes fully updated with brand new case studies using working businesses to connect sales
theory to the practical implications of selling in a modern environment.
This edition continues to place emphasis on global aspects of selling and sales management whilst also covering
all of the important elements of the marketing mix. Topics covered include the technological applications of
selling and sales management, the ethics of selling & sales management, a look at the sales cycle, cold
canvassing and systems selling, and a thorough coverage of B2B and B2C selling.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: SALES PERSPECTIVE
1.
Development and role of selling in marketing
2.
Sales strategies
PART TWO: SALES ENVIRONMENT
3.
Consumer and organisational buyer behaviour
4.
Sales settings
5.
International selling
6.
Law and ethical issues
PART THREE: SALES TECHNIQUE
7.
Sales responsibilities and preparation
8.
Personal selling skills
9.
Key account management
10. Relationship selling
11. Direct marketing
12. Internet and IT applications in selling and sales management
PART FOUR: SALES MANAGEMENT
13. Recruitment and selection
14. Motivation and training
15. Organisation and control
16. Sales forecasting and budgeting
17. Salesforce evaluation
Global Marketing, 7/e
Warren J. Keegan
Mark Green
ISBN 10: 0273766716
ISBN 13: 9780273766711
624pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate global marketing courses.
The excitement, challenges, and controversies of global marketing.
188
Global Marketing strives to reflect current issues and events while offering conceptual and analytical tools that
will help readers apply the 4Ps to global marketing.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Introduction to Global Marketing
The Global Economic Environment
The Global Trade Environment
Social and Cultural Environments
The Political, Legal, and Regulatory Environments of Global Marketing
Global Information Systems and Market Research
Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning
Importing, Exporting, and Sourcing
Global Market Entry Strategies: Licensing, Investment, and Strategic Alliances
Product and Brand Decisions
Pricing Decisions
Global Marketing Channels and Physical Distribution
Global Marketing Communications Decisions I:Advertising and Public Relations
Global Marketing Communications Decisions II: Sales Promotion, Personal Selling, Special Forms of
Marketing Communication, New Media
15. Global Marketing and the Digital Revolution
16. Strategic Elements of Competitive Advantage
17. Leadership, Organization, and Corporate Social Responsibility
Best Practice Cases in Branding, Strategic Brand
Management, 4/e
Kevin Lane Keller
ISBN 10: 0132664267
ISBN 13: 9780132664264
372pp ©2013 Cloth
Strategic Brand Management, 4/e
Kevin Lane Keller
ISBN 10: 0132664259
ISBN 13: 9780132664257
710pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Keller, Strategic Brand Management provides insights into how to create profitable brand strategies by
building, measuring, and managing brand equity.
Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective, 2/e
Kevin Lane Keller
Tony Aperia
Mats Georgson
ISBN 10: 0273737872
ISBN 13: 9780273737872
968pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Strategic Brand Management provides a comprehensive and up-to-date treatment of the subjects of brands,
brand equity, and strategic brand management. Strategic brand management involves the design and
implementation of marketing programmes and activities to build, measure, and manage brand equity. The book
aims to provide managers with concepts and techniques to improve the long-term profitability of their brand
strategies. It incorporates current thinking and developments on these topics from both academics and industry
participants. It also combines a comprehensive theoretical foundation with numerous practical insights to assist
managers in their day-to-day and long-term brand decisions.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Brands and brand management
Customer-based brand equity
Brand positioning
Choosing brand elements to build brand equity
Designing marketing campaigns to build brand equity
189
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Integrating marketing campaigns to build brand equity
Using secondary brand associations to build brand equity
Developing a brand equity measurement and management system
Measuring sources of brand equity: capturing the customer mindset
Measuring outcomes of brand equity: capturing market performance
Designing and implementing branding strategies
Introducing and naming products and brand extensions
Managing brands over time
Managing brands over geographic boundaries and market segments
Closing observations
Strategic Marketing Problems, 13/e
Roger Kerin
Robert Peterson
ISBN 10: 0273768948
ISBN 13: 9780273768944
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate marketing strategy courses.
A comprehensive, practice-driven approach to developing decision-making skills in marketing.
Decision-making in marketing is first and foremost, a skill. And since all skills are learned through practice,
Strategic Marketing Problems: Cases and Comments balances the concepts and tools used for solving
marketing problems with numerous case studies that challenge students to apply what they’ve learned.
This edition includes new cases, updated material and a new chapter on Global Marketing.
Principles of Marketing, 14/e
Philip Kotler
Gary Armstrong
ISBN 10: 027375243X
ISBN 13: 9780273752431
744pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses
Today’s marketing challenge is creating vibrant, interactive communities of consumers who make products and
brands a part of their daily lives. Learn how to create value and gain loyal customers.
Kotler/Armstrong is a comprehensive, classic principles text organized around an innovative customer-value
framework. Students learn how to create customer value, target the correct market, and build customer
relationships. The changing nature of consumer expectations means that marketers must learn how to build
communities in addition to brand loyalty.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1– DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS
1.
Marketing: Creating and Capturing Customer Value
2.
Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships
PART 2– UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS
3.
The Marketing Environment
4.
Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insights
5.
Consumer Markets and Consumer Buyer Behavior
6.
Business Markets and Business Buyer Behavior
PART 3– DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN MARKETING STRATEGY AND MARKETING MIX
7.
Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers
8.
Product, Services, and Brands: Building Customer Value
9.
New-Product Development and Life-Cycle Strategies
10. Pricing: Understanding and Capturing Customer Value
11. Pricing Strategies
12. Marketing Channels: Delivering Customer Value
13. Retailing and Wholesaling
14. Communicating Customer Value: Integrated Marketing Communication Strategy
15. Advertising and Public Relations
16. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion
17. Direct and Online Marketing: Building Direct Customer Relationships
PART 4– EXTENDING MARKETING
18. Creating Competitive Advantage
19. The Global Marketplace
20. Marketing Ethics and Social Responsibility
190
Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective, 3/e
Philip Kotler
Gary Armstrong
Ang Swee Hoon
Leong Siew Meng
Tan Chin Tiong
Oliver Hong-Ming Yau
ISBN 10: 9810687532
ISBN 13: 9789810687533
790pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduates studying Principles of Marketing courses.
Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective provides a comprehensive coverage on topics of Marketing set
in an Asian context. Learning is made more engaging for students and teaching more convenient for instructors.
Table of Contents
PART 1– DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS
1.
Marketing: Managing Profitable Customer Relationships
2.
Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships
PART 2– UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS
3.
The Marketing Environment
4.
Managing Marketing Information
5.
Consumer Markets and Consumer Buyer Behavior
6.
Business Markets and Business Buyer Behavior
PART 3– DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN STRATEGY AND MIX
7.
Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers
8.
Product, Services, and Branding Strategy
9.
New-Product Development and Product Life-Cycle Strategies
10. Pricing Products: Understanding and Capturing Customer Value
11. Pricing Products: Pricing Strategies
12. Marketing Channels and Supply Chain Management
13. Retailing and Wholesaling
14. Communicating Customer Value: Integrated Marketing Communications Strategy
15. Advertising and Public Relations
16. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion
17. Direct and Online Marketing: Building Direct Customer Relationships
PART 4– EXTENDING MARKETING
18. Creating Competitive Advantage
19. The Global Marketplace
20. Sustainable Marketing: Social Responsibility and Ethics
Appendix 1: Marketing Plan
Appendix 2: Marketing by the Numbers
Framework for Marketing Management, 5/e
Philip Kotler
Kevin Lane Keller
ISBN 10: 0273752510
ISBN 13: 9780273752516
368pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For graduate and undergraduate marketing management courses.
Framework for Marketing Management is a concise adaptation of the gold standard marketing management
textbook for professors who want authoritative coverage of current marketing management practice and theory,
but the want the flexibility to add outside cases, simulations, or projects.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT
1.
Defining Marketing for the 21st Century
2.
Developing and Implementing Marketing Strategies and Plans
3.
Understanding Markets, Market Demand, and the Marketing Environment
PART II: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS
4.
Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction, and Loyalty
5.
Analyzing Consumer Markets
6.
Analyzing Business Markets
7.
Identifying Market Segments and Targets
PART III: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS
8.
Creating Brand Equity
9.
Crafting the Brand Positioning and Dealing with Competition
Part IV: Shaping the Market Offerings
10. Setting Product Strategy and Marketing Through the Life Cycle
11. Designing and Managing Services
191
12. Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs
PART V: DELIVERING VALUE
13. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Channels
14. Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics
PART VI: COMMUNICATING VALUE
15. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
16. Managing Mass Communications
17. Managing Personal Communications
PART VII: CREATING SUCCESSFUL LONG-TERM GROWTH
18. Managing Marketing in the Global Economy
Marketing Management, 14/e
Philip Kotler
Kevin Lane Keller
ISBN 10: 0273753363
ISBN 13: 9780273753360
816pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in marketing management.
Stay on the cutting-edge with the gold standard text that reflects the latest in marketing theory and practice.
The world of marketing is changing everyday–and in order for students to have a competitive edge, they need a
textbook that reflects the best of today’s marketing theory and practices. Marketing Management is the gold
standard marketing text because its content and organization consistently reflect the latest changes in today’s
marketing theory and practice.
Remaining true to its gold-standard status, the fourteenth edition includes an overhaul of new material and
updated information, and now is supported by mymarketinglab–Pearson’s online tutorial and assessment
platform.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT
1.
Defining Marketing for the 21st Century
2.
Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans
PART 2: CAPTURING MARKETING INSIGHTS
3.
Gathering Information and Scanning the Environment
4.
Conducting Marketing Research and Forecasting on Demand
PART 3: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS
5.
Creating Long-term Loyalty Relationships
6.
Analyzing Consumer Markets
7.
Analyzing Business Markets
8.
Identifying Market Segments and Targets
PART 4: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS
9.
Creating Brand Equity
10. Crafting the Brand Position
11. Competitive Dynamics
PART 5: SHAPING THE MARKET
12. Setting Product Strategy
13. Designing and Managing Services
14. Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs
PART 6: DELIVERING VALUE
15. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing
16. Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics
PART 7: COMMUNICATING VALUE
17. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
18. Managing Mass Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotions, Events and Experiences, and Public
Relations
19. Managing Personal Communications: Direct and Interactive Marketing, Word of Mouth, and Personal
Selling
PART 8: CREATING SUCCESSFUL LONG-TERM GROWTH
20. Introducing New Marketing Offerings
21. Tapping into Global Markets
22. Managing a Holistic Marketing Organization
Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/e
Philip Kotler
Kevin Lane Keller
Ang Swee Hoon
Leong Siew Meng
Tan Chin Tiong
ISBN 10: 9810687974
ISBN 13: 9789810687977
192
976pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduates studying Marketing Management courses.
Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/E boasts a host of new features and continues with the
key factors that have made the earlier editions successful.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT
1.
Defining Marketing for the 21st Century
2.
Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans
PART 2: CAPTURING MARKETING INSIGHTS
3.
Gathering Information and Scanning the Environment
4.
Conducting Marketing Research and Forecasting on Demand
PART 3: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS
5.
Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction, and Loyalty
6.
Analyzing Consumer Markets
7.
Analyzing Business Markets
8.
Identifying Market Segments and Targets
PART 4: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS
9.
Creating Brand Equity
10. Crafting the Brand Positioning
11. Competitive Dynamics
PART 5: SHAPING THE MARKET OFFERINGS
12. Setting Product Strategy
13. Designing and Managing Services
14. Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs
PART 6: DELIVERING VALUE
15. Designing and Managing Marketing Channels and Value Networks
16. Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics
PART 7: COMMUNICATING VALUE
17. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
18. Managing Mass Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotions, Events and Public Relations
19. Managing Personal Communications: Direct and Personal Selling
PART 8: CREATING SUCCESSFUL LONG-TERM GROWTH
20. Introducing New Marketing Offerings
21. Tapping into Global Markets
22. Managing a Holistic Marketing Organization
Marketing Management: European Edition, 2/e
Philip Kotler
Kevin Lane Keller
Mairead Brady
Malcolm Goodman
Torben Hansen
ISBN 10: 0273743619
ISBN 13: 9780273743613
©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
The American edition of Marketing Management is the world's leading marketing text because its content and
organization consistently reflect changes in marketing theory and practice. This European Edition of Marketing
Management has been inspired by the American edition and explores the challenges facing European marketing
practitioners, with all the case studies and exercises newly re-written for European students.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT
1.
Defining Marketing : The European Context
2.
Understanding Marketing Management
3.
Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans
4.
Managing Digital Technology in Marketing
PART 2: CAPTURING MARKETING INSIGHTS
5.
The Changing Marketing Environment and Information Management
6.
Managing Market Research and Forecasting
7.
Analysing Consumer Markets
8.
Analysing Business Markets
9.
Dealing with the Competition
PART 3: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS
10. Segmenting, Analysing and Creating Target Market Differentiating and Positioning Strategies
11. Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction and Loyalty
PART 4: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS
12. Creating and Managing Brands and Brand Equity
13. Digital and Global Brand Management Strategy
PART 5: SHAPING THE MARKET OFFERING
14. Designing, Developing and Managing Market Offerings
15. Introducing New Market Offerings
16. Developing and Managing Pricing Strategies
PART 6: DELIVERING VALUE
193
17. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing channels and global value networks
18. Managing process, people and physical evidence and the Customer Interface
PART 7: COMMUNICATING VALUE
19. Designing and Managing Marketing Communications
20. Managing Global and Personal Communications
PART 8: MANAGING MARKETING IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL
21. Implementing Marketing Management
22. Managing Marketing Metrics
Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied, 2/e
Michael Levens
ISBN 10: 0132719894
ISBN 13: 9780132719896
384pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses.
A unique breakdown of marketing that speaks to students’ learning style.
Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied was written from the ground up with student feedback to be the most
usable reference guide for Principles of Marketing students. The unique visual and organizational style of the text
clearly presents key information that draws students into the material, allowing them to use their text rather than
passively read it.
The second edition features a new format that makes it easier for students to study and learn the material.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
The Meaning of Marketing
The Market in Marketing
Planning and Marketing in an Organization
A Broader Perspective on Marketing
Global Marketing
Value for Customers
A Perspective on Consumer Behavior
Consumer Insight
The Brand
Segmenting, Targeting, and Positioning
The Marketing Plan
Product and Service Strategies
Pricing Strategies
Supply Chain and Distribution Strategies
Retailing and Wholesaling
Marketing Communications: Advertising and Sales Promotion
Personal Selling and Direct Marketing Strategies
Integrated Marketing Communications
The Marketing Mix
Marketing Measurement
Essentials of Services Marketing, 2/e
Jochen Wirtz
Patricia Chew
Christopher H Lovelock
ISBN 10: 9810686188
ISBN 13: 9789810686185
600pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate services marketing courses.
Essentials of Services Marketing delivers streamlined coverage of services marketing topics with an exciting
global outlook. With its visual learning aids and clear language, students read less to learn more.
Table of Contents
PART I — UNDERSTANDING SERVICE PRODUCTS, CONSUMERS, AND MARKETS
1.
Introduction to Services Marketing
2.
Consumer Behavior in a Services Context
3.
Positioning Services in Competitive Markets
PART II — APPLYING THE 4Ps OF MARKETING TO SERVICES
4.
Developing Service Products: Core and Supplementary Elements
5.
Distributing Services through Physical and Electronic Channels
6.
Setting Prices and Implementing Revenue Management
7.
Promoting Services and Educating Customers
PART III — DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE CUSTOMER INTERFACE
8.
Designing and Managing Service Processes
194
9.
Balancing Demand and Productive Capacity
10. Crafting the Service Environment
11. Managing People for Service Advantage
PART IV — DEVELOPING CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS
12. Managing Relationships and Building Loyalty
13. Complaint Handling and Service Recovery
PART V — STRIVING FOR SERVICE EXCELLENCE
14. Improving Service Quality and Productivity
15. Managing Change and Leading towards Service Excellence
CASES
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques
Jim Macnamara
ISBN 10: 1442543299
ISBN 13: 9781442543294
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques 1st edition is an essential resource for Australian public
relations students.
Jim Macnamara, one of Australia’s best-known and widely-respected public relations and communication
professionals, clearly explains public relations concepts, models and theories and applies theory to Australian
practice with case studies and culturally relevant examples.
The latest industry practices, methods and activities, including the latest thinking about Web 2.0 and Web 3.0
media and communication practices are covered in detail. In addition, practical tools, resources and case studies
are provided in the Appendices.
In a clear, lively and engaging style, Jim challenges the US-centric models and theories of public relations and
encourages students to think critically about communication and public relations.
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques is accompanied by an Instructor Manual and additional case
studies.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATIONAL UNDERSTANDINGS: COMMUNICATION CHALLENGES, THEORIES &
MODELS
1.
The best and worst job in the world
2.
Understanding how humans communicate—or don’t
3.
Understanding media
4.
Public relations
PART 2: PRACTICES, METHODS & THE INDUSTRY
5.
Public relations practices
6.
Public relations methods and activities
7.
The public relations industry
PART 3: CRITIQUES & CHANGE
8.
Public relations critiques
9.
Public relations futures
APPENDICES: PRACTICAL TOOLS FOR PUBLIC RELATIONS
Appendix 1 Public relations case studies
Appendix 2 PR resources
Basic Marketing Research, 4/e
Naresh K. Malhotra
ISBN 10: 0132570181
ISBN 13: 9780132570183
672pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate-level courses in Marketing Research.
With a hands-on, do-it-yourself approach, Malhotra offers a contemporary focus on decision making, illustrating
the interaction between marketing research decisions and marketing management decisions.
195
Marketing Research: An Applied Approach, 4/e
Naresh Malhotra
David Birks
Peter Wills
ISBN 10: 0273725858
ISBN 13: 9780273725855
856pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Marketing Research: An Applied Approach forms a comprehensive, authoritative and thoroughly European
introduction to applied marketing research and covers both quantitative and qualitative techniques in depth.
This text is aimed at students studying marketing research at undergraduate and postgraduate level.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to marketing research
2.
Defining the marketing research problem and developing a research approach
3.
Research design
4.
Secondary data collection and analysis
5.
Internal secondary data and the use of databases
6.
Qualitative research: its nature and approaches
7.
Qualitative research: focus group discussions
8.
Qualitative research: depth interviewing and projective techniques
9.
Qualitative research: data analysis
10. Survey and quantitative observation techniques
11. Causal research design: experimentation
12. Measurement and scaling: fundamentals, comparative and non-comparative scaling
13. Questionnaire design
14. Sampling: design and procedures
15. Sampling: final and initial sample size determination
16. Survey fieldwork
17. Data preparation
18. Frequency distribution, cross-tabulation and hypothesis testing
19. Analysis of variance and covariance
20. Correlation and regression
21. Discriminant analysis
22. Factor analysis
23. Cluster analysis
24. Multidimensional scaling and conjoint analysis
25. Structural Equation Modelling and Path Analysis
26. Report preparation and presentation
27. International marketing research
28. Business-to-business (b2) marketing research
Appendix: Statistical tables
Selling Today, 12/e
Gerald L. Manning, Des Moines Area Community College
Michael L. Ahearne, University of Houston
Barry L. Reece, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University
ISBN 10: 013257019X
ISBN 13: 9780132570190
544pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Sales and Personal Selling.
Extensive, real-world applications, carefully integrated with current personal selling concepts.
Selling Today: Partnering to Create Value helps students understand the value of developing their personal
selling skills by exposing them to a careful integration of personal selling academic theory and real-world
applications. And with the largest number of “learn by doing” materials available in any personal selling text,
Manning/Ahearne/Reece offers instructors a variety of teaching tools to strengthen the learning process.
As the developed nations of the world transition from a production focus to a sales-and-service focus, this
cutting-edge new edition prepares students to succeed as members of a new generation of businesspeople.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Relationship Selling Opportunities in the Information Economy
Evolution of Selling Models that Complement the Marketing Concept
Developing a Relationship Strategy
Communication Styles: A Key to Adaptive Selling Today
Ethics: The Foundation for Relationships in Selling
Developing a Product Strategy
Product-Selling Strategies that Add Value
The Buying Process and Buyer Behavior
Developing and Qualifying a Prospect Base
Approaching the Customer with Adaptive Selling
Determining Customer Needs with a Consultative Questioning Strategy
Creating Value with the Consultative Presentation
196
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Negotiating Buyer Concerns
Adapting the Close and Confirming the Partnership
Servicing the Sale and Building the Partnership
Management of Self and Others
Management of the Sales Force
Sustainable Marketing
Diane Martin
John Schouten
ISBN 10: 0136117074
ISBN 13: 9780136117070
264pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Sustainable Marketing or as a supplement to marketing courses that include
sustainability as a focus.
A lasting approach to marketing.
As the engine that drives the global economy, marketing leaves an enormous footprint on the environment and
society. To help readers make a lasting impression in their marketing efforts, Martin/Schouten provides the
concepts behind valuable—and lucrative—sustainable marketing strategies.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
An Introduction to Sustainable Marketing
Sustainable Marketing Strategy
Ethical Dimensions of Sustainable Marketing
The Marketing Environment and Processes
Consumer Behavior and Sustainable Marketing
Measurement and Research for Sustainable Marketing
Market Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning for Sustainability
Global Problems, Global Opportunities
Sustainable Products and Services
Sustainable Branding and Packing
Marketing Channels: Sustainability in the Value Chain
Sustainable Pricing
Sustainable Marketing Communication
Sustainability in the Promotion Mix—Methods, Media, and Customer Relationships
Digital Media and Sustainable Marketing
Strategic Marketing
Todd Mooradian
Kurt Matzler
Lawrence J. Ring
ISBN 10: 0137136978
ISBN 13: 9780137136971
408pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For highly applied undergraduate and graduate marketing management or strategy courses.
An all-purpose approach to strategic marketing management.
Because strategic marketing is the essential marketing activity, Mooradian provides students with a highly applied
decision-making framework and exploration of the tools that can be used to solve marketing problems.
Table of Contents
SECTION I – OVERVIEW
1.
Overview of Marketing Strategy and the Strategic Marketing Process
2.
Situation Assessment: The External Environment
3.
Situation Assessment: The Company
4.
Strategy Formation
5.
Implementation
6.
Planning, Assessment and Adjustment
SECTION II – SITUATION ASSESSMENT
Note 1: Market Definition
Note 2: Context (PEST)
Note 3: Customer Assessment – Trends and Insights
Note 4: Consumer and Organizational Buyer Behavior
Note 5: Competitor Analysis – Competitive Intelligence
Note 6: Company Assessment – Missions and Visions
Note 7: Company Assessment – The Value Chain
Note 8: Industry Analysis
Note 9: Product Lifecycle
Note 10: Experience Curve Effects on Cost Reduction
Note 11: Economies and Diseconomies of Scale
197
Note 12: Economies of Scope/Synergies and Virtuous Circles
Note 13: Market Share Effects
Note 14: Scenario Analysis
SECTION III – MARKETING STRATEGIES
Note 15: The Marketing Concept
Note 16: What Is a Marketing Strategy?
Note 17: Generic Strategies – Advantage and Scope
Note 18: Generic Strategies – The Value Map
Note 19: Generic Strategies – Product-Market Growth Strategies
Note 20: Specific Marketing Strategies
SECTION IV – STRATEGY FORMULATION
Note 21: Market Segmentation
Note 22: Loyalty-Based Marketing, Customer Acquisition, and Customer Retention
Note 23: Customer Lifetime Value
Note 24: Competitive Advantages
Note 25: SWOT Analysis
Note 26: Targeting
Note 27: Positioning
SECTION V – IMPLEMENTATION
Note 28: Customer-Oriented Market Research
Note 29: Brands and Branding
Note 30: Products – New Product Development
Note 31: Products – Innovations
Note 32: Products – Product Portfolios
Note 33: Pricing Strategies
Note 34: Promotion and People – Integrated Marketing Communications
Note 35: Place – Distribution
SECTION VI – DOCUMENTATION, AND ASSESSMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Note 36: Budgets, Forecasts, and Objectives
Note 37: Staircase Analysis
Note 38: Assessment and Adjustment
Appendix A: Basic Financial Math for Marketing Strategy
Appendix B: Strategic Marketing Plan Exercise
Appendix C: The One-Page Memo
Appendix D: Case Analysis and Action-Oriented Decisions
Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practices, 9/e
Sandra Moriarty
Nancy Mitchell
William Wells
ISBN 10: 0273752928
ISBN 13: 9780273752929
688pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in advertising.
An accessible, well-written, and student-friendly approach to advertising.
Advertising tracks the changes in today’s dynamic world of media and marketing communication–as well as the
implications of these changes to traditional practice–and presents them to students through an accessible, wellwritten approach.
The ninth edition highlights the increasing importance of consumers as the driving force in today’s advertising
strategies, social media, and the Internet evolution/revolution. It also includes an increased IMC and brand focus.
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the
world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: PRINCIPLES ENDURE IN TIMES OF TURMOIL
1.
The New World of Marketing Communication
2.
Integrated Brand Communication
3.
Brand Communication and Society
PART II: PRINCIPLE: BE TRUE TO THY BRAND
4.
How Brand Communication Works
5.
Segmenting and Targeting the Audience
6.
Strategic Research
7.
Strategic Planning
PART III: PRACTICE: WHERE IS CREATIVE HEADED?
8.
Creative Strategy
9.
Copywriting
10. Visual Communication
PART IV: PRACTICE: WHERE ARE MEDIA HEADING?
11. Media Basics
12. Traditional Media
13. Digital Media
14. Media Planning and Buying
PART V: PRACTICE: IMC AND TOTAL COMMUNICATION
15. Public Relations
16. Direct-Response
198
17. Promotions
18. The IMC Umbrella
19. Evaluation of Effectiveness
Brand You for Marketing: Real People Real Choices, 7/e
Kim Richmond
ISBN 10: 013038853X
ISBN 13: 9780130388537
312pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Products aren’t alone in benefiting from branding. People can benefit too. Branding strategies help professionals
get noticed and position them for exciting new career opportunities. Prepared by Kim Richmond of Saint Joseph’s
University, the Brand You handbook gives students concrete advice on how to thrive in a competitive
marketplace and provides a hands-on approach to achieving career success. Brand You boxes appear throughout
this textbook to help students plot their own branding strategies.
Consumer Behavior, 11/e
Leon G. Schiffman
Leslie G. Kanuk
ISBN 10: 0132170264
ISBN 13: 9780132170260
576pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate consumer behavior courses.
The text that set the standard for consumer behavior study.
Consumer Behavior explores how the examination and application of consumer behavior is central to the
planning, development, and implementation of marketing strategies.
This edition captures the impact of new media on consumer behavior and focuses on the marketers’ ability to
learn more about customers’ purchases in order to implement strategy with greater precision.
This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to
include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Sports Marketing, 5/e
Matthew D. Shank
ISBN 10: 0132809486
ISBN 13: 9780132809481
480pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Sports Marketing.
Shank provides a framework or conceptual model of the strategic marketing process that can be applied to the
sports industry.
Consumer Behavior, 10/e
Michael R. Solomon
ISBN 10: 0273767313
ISBN 13: 9780273767312
640pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA courses in consumer behavior.
Solomon goes beyond the discussion of why people buy things and explores how products, services, and
consumption activities contribute to shape people’s social experiences.
This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to
include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
199
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: CONSUMERS IN THE MARKETPLACE
1.
Buying, Having, and Being
SECTION 2: CONSUMERS AS INDIVIDUALS
2.
Perception
3.
Learning and Memory
4.
Motivation and Global Values
5.
The Self
6.
Personality and Psychographics
SECTION 3: CONSUMERS AS DECISION MAKERS
7.
Attitudes and Persuasion
8.
Decision Making
9.
Buying and Disposing
10. Organizational and Household Decision Making
SECTION 4: CONSUMERS AND SUBCULTURES
11. Groups and Social Media
12. Social Class and Lifestyles
13. Subcultures
14. Culture
Marketing: Real People, Real Choices, 7/e
Michael R. Solomon, Saint Joseph's University
Greg W. Marshall, Rollins College
Elnora W. Stuart, The University of South Carolina Upstate
ISBN 10: 0132494027
ISBN 13: 9780132494021
600pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses.
Real people, real choices–give students a real feel for marketing.
Marketing: Real People, Real Choices is the only text to introduce marketing from the perspective of real
people who make real marketing decisions at leading companies everyday. This reader-friendly text conveys
timely and relevant material in a dynamic presentation, highlighting how marketing concepts are implemented,
and what they mean in the marketplace.
The seventh edition includes more information on marketing metrics, today’s new approach to advertising and
promotions, and an increased emphasis on the links between marketing principles and the real world.
Table of Contents
PART 1: MAKE MARKETING VALUE DECISIONS
1.
Welcome to the World of Marketing: Create and Deliver Value
2.
Strategic Market Planning: Take the Big Picture
3.
Thrive in the Marketing Environment: The World Is Flat
PART 2: UNDERSTAND CONSUMERS’ VALUE NEEDS
4.
Marketing Research: Gather, Analyze, and Use Information
5.
Consumer Behavior: How and Why We Buy
6.
Business-to-Business Markets: How and Why Organizations Buy
7.
Sharpen the Focus: Target Marketing Strategies and Customer Relationship Management
PART 3: CREATE THE VALUE PROPOSITION
8.
Create the Product
9.
Manage the Product
10. Services and Other Intangibles: Marketing the Product That Isn’t There
11. Price the Product
PART 4: COMMUNICATE THE VALUE PROPOSITION
12. Old and New Media: From One to Many to Many to Many
13. Advertising, Sales Promotion, and Public Relations: One to Many
14. Personal Selling, Sales Management, and Direct Marketing: One to One
PART 5: DELIVER THE VALUE PROPOSITION
15. Deliver Value through Supply Chain Management, Channels of Distribution, and Logistics
16. Retailing: Bricks and Clicks
Appendix A: Marketing Plan: The S&S Smoothie Company
Appendix B: Marketing Math
Brand You: Marketing: Real People, Real Choices: European Edition
Michael R. Solomon
Greg Marshall
Elnora Stuart
Kim Richmond
John Kawalek
ISBN 10: 0273709488
ISBN 13: 9780273709480
256pp ©2012 Paper
200
Basic Approach
What does your Facebook profile say about you to future employers?
How do you communicate your value proposition in a crowded market?
Personal branding is becoming increasingly important in today’s competitive jobs market.
The Brand You workbook gives you concrete advice on how to thrive in a competitive marketplace and provides
a hands-on approach to achieving career success. Brand You boxes appear throughout the text to help you plot
their own branding strategies. The ability to talk about yourself so that others understand what you do and
appreciate the value of your work separates the successful from the also-rans.
Suitable for all undergraduates and postgraduates studying Business Management and Marketing and those
taking modules in Public Relations.
Table of Contents
STEP 1 – CHOOSING YOUR PATH
1.
Welcome to Brand You: A Framework for Your Career Search
2.
Planning Your Career: Setting Your Direction
3.
Choosing the Right Work Environment: How to Find the Right “Fit”
STEP 2 – RESEARCHING THE MARKET
4.
Career Information and Research: Know Where to Look
5.
Why Employers Buy: How to Build Your Brand Based on Employers’ Needs
6.
Meeting Employers’ Needs: How the Selection Process Works
7.
Sharpening Your Focus: How to Use Target Marketing in Your Search for Work
STEP 3 – CREATING YOUR VALUE PROPOSITION
8.
Creating the Product—You: Identifying Your Value
9.
Managing the Product—You: Launching and Managing Your Career
10. Providing Services as Brand You: Exploring Entrepreneurship and Other Alternative Ways to Work
11. Pricing the Product: What Salary Can You Expect?
STEP 4 – COMMUNICATING YOUR VALUE PROPOSITION
12. Creating Your Communication Plan: Getting the Word Out about Your Brand
13. Advertising Your Brand: Crafting Your Resumé and Cover Letter
14. Personal Selling: How Networking Can Help You Achieve Your Goals
STEP 5 – DELIVERING YOUR VALUE PROPOSITION
15. Delivering Value: How to Make Every Interview Successful
16. Evaluating and Finalizing Your Offer: Get What You Want
Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action
Stephan Sorger
ISBN 10: 0132544709
ISBN 13: 9780132544702
352pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses on marketing planning.
Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action offers marketing students and professionals a practical,
step by step guide to creating marketing plans that deliver measurable results. It presents a comprehensive
framework for strategic marketing planning and outlines a structured approach for developing effective marketing
plans. The approach uses numerous figures, checklists, and decision charts to leverage proven marketing
techniques and market data for high quality marketing plans. The book is packed with current examples,
culminating in a complete sample marketing plan that demonstrates the book’s unique approach. The book is
ideal for planning-related courses in upper-level undergraduate and lower-level graduate school programs, as well
as for business executives seeking a competitive edge in the speed and quality of their marketing planning.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
The Planning Process
Objectives
Market Overview
Market Segments
Competitive Landscape
Strategy
Products and Services
Pricing
Distribution
Promotion
Finance
Implementation
Sample Marketing Plans
201
E-Marketing, 6/e
Judy Strauss
Raymond Frost
ISBN 10: 0132806460
ISBN 13: 9780132806466
448pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Internet Marketing or E-marketing.
Traditional marketing coverage with an e-marketing twist.
Strauss/Frost offers traditional marketing coverage with a twist: its focus is on the Internet and other
technologies that have had a profound effect on marketing.
The sixth edition focuses more on e-marketing strategy and practice, and less on principles of marketing
refresher material.
Table of Contents
PART 1: E-MARKETING IN CONTEXT
1.
Past, Present, and Future
2.
Strategic E-Marketing and Performance Metrics
3.
The E-Marketing Plan
PART 2: E-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT
4.
Building Inclusive E-Markets
5.
Ethical and Legal Issues
PART 3: E-MARKETING STRATEGY
6.
E-Marketing Research
7.
Consumer Behavior Online
8.
Segmentation, Targeting, Differentiation, and Positioning Strategies
PART 4: E-MARKETING MANAGEMENT
9.
Product: The Online Offer
10. Pricing: The Online Value
11. The Internet for Distribution
12. E-Marketing Communication Tools
13. Engaging Customers with Social Media
14. Buying Digital Media Space
15. Customer Relationship Management
Appendix A: Internet Penetration Worldwide in 2009
Appendix B: Glossary
Appendix C: References
Innovation Management and New Product Development, 5/e
Paul Trott
ISBN 10: 0273736566
ISBN 13: 9780273736561
648pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Most of the significant inventions of the past two centuries have not come from flashes of inspiration but from
collaborative endeavours. This book argues that innovation is a management process that continues to be at the
forefront of economic and political debate about how to improve the competitiveness of economies and firms.
Innovation Management and New Product Development offers an accessible and authoritative multifunctional perspective on innovation management and new product development. Its clear and informed
coverage of the management processes of new product development, coupled with a practical orientation of
taking you through real life challenges and dilemmas, results in a book that brings together the most up-to-date
and accessible discussion of the literature in this area, as well as a wealth of examples and illustrations in every
chapter.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INNOVATION MANAGEMENT
1.
Innovation Management: An Introduction
2.
Entrepreneurship and Market Adoption
3.
Managing Innovation within Firms
4.
Process Innovation and Operations Management
5.
Imitation, Counterfeit Products and Intellectual Property
PART 2: MANAGING TECHNOLOGY AND KNOWLEDGE
6.
Managing Organisational Knowledge
7.
Strategic Alliances And Networks
8.
Knowledge Transfer and Open Innovation in Innovation
9.
Management of Research & Development
10. Managing R&D projects
PART 3: NEW PRODUCT/SERVICE DEVELOPMENT
11. Product & Brand Strategy
12. New Product Development
202
13.
14.
15.
16.
New Service Development
Packaging and Product Development
The Role Of Market Research In New Product Development
Practical Steps to Help Innovation and New Product Development
Social Media Marketing
Tracy Tuten
Michael R. Solomon, Saint Joseph's University
ISBN 10: 0132551799
ISBN 13: 9780132551793
272pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The social media content that students—and their future employers—need to have.
Tuten/Solomon is the first social media marketing textbook that focuses on showing students how social media
fits into the marketer’s toolbox.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING
1.
The Horizontal Revolution
2.
Strategic Planning with Social Media
3.
Social Consumers
4.
Digital communities
SECTION II: THE FOUR ZONES OF SOCIAL MEDIA
5.
Social Communities
6.
Social Publishing
7.
Social Entertainment
8.
Social Commerce
SECTION III: MEASURING USERS AND SOCIAL MEDIA CAMPAIGNS
9.
Social Media for Consumer Insight
10. Social Media Metrics
Marketing Across Culture, 6/e
Jean-Claude Usunier
Julie Lee
ISBN 10: 0273757733
ISBN 13: 9780273757733
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
In an increasingly interconnected global business environment it is crucial that marketers recognise how a better
understanding of cultural differences can help improve performance.
Marketing Across Cultures examines how multinational companies can appreciate and adapt to international
diversity. By comparing national marketing systems with local commercial customs, Usunier and Lee use a crosscultural approach that provides essential information on how marketing strategies can be implemented in
different national contexts.
This edition is full of up-to-date examples of internationally recognised companies that illuminate the various
theories that underpin this area. Using clear language and numerous illustrations the text guides students
through key cultural marketing issues, including new material on hot topics such as ethics, corporate social
responsibility, and bribery.
Advertising: Principles and Practice, Australasian Edition, 2/e
William Wells
Ruth Spence-Stone
Robert Crawford
Sandra Moriarty
Nancy Mitchell
ISBN 10: 1442525126
ISBN 13: 9781442525122
©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Advertising-the Australian way!
How do you define great advertising?
How do you encourage creativity in advertising?
Do interactive and digital media add value to advertising?
Advertising: Principles and Practice 2e is the only practical, applied guide to the real world of advertising in
Australasia showing how and why effective advertising is achieved.
203
Wells presents completely updated award-winning examples and the latest research on the expanding array of
advertising methods available to advertisers. Consumer behaviour, measuring, planning and executing effective
advertising, getting the right kind of attention and a wide range of ethical and sustainable issues are
comprehensively covered.
Advertising: Principles and Practice 2e is accompanied by an enhanced and updated set of teaching
resources designed to underpin student success.
Table of Contents
PART I: FOUNDATIONS
1.
Introduction to advertising
2.
Advertising’s role in marketing
3.
Regulation and ethics of advertising
PART II: PLANNING AND STRATEGY
4.
How advertising works
5.
Defining audiences for advertising
6.
Strategic research in advertising
7.
Advertising strategy and planning
PART III: EFFECTIVE ADVERTISING MEDIA
8.
Print and out-of-home media
9.
Broadcast media
10. Interactive and digital media
11. Media strategy, planning and buying
PART IV: CREATIVE ADVERTISING AND EFFECTIVE ADVERTISING
12. The creative side and message strategy
13. Copywriting
14. Art direction and production
Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
Alan Wilson
ISBN 10: 0273718703
ISBN 13: 9780273718703
432pp ©2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, Third Edition, is invaluable for anyone studying marketing
research at a degree or diploma level. The author is the lead examiner for modules in the professional
qualifications of the Market Research Society and the Chartered Institute of Marketing, and the content of the
book has been developed to fully support the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s Marketing Information and
Research Professional Certificate module and The Market Research Society’s Principles of Market and Social
Research and Information Diploma module.
The book places research in the bigger picture of marketing and demonstrates how an understanding of
marketing research is a key requirement of any effective marketing professional. The text integrates the key
concepts and techniques of marketing research with both the management of customer information from
customer databases along with the monitoring of user-generated content appearing on online social networks.
Marketing Research is written in a clear and accessible style using many examples, real-life case histories and
discussions of current issues in marketing research and customer information management, making it ideal for
supporting the delivery of single semester modules on marketing research.
Table of Contents
1.
The role of marketing research and customer information in decision making
2.
The marketing research process
3.
Secondary data and customer databases
4.
Collecting observation data and monitoring online user-generated contents
5.
Collecting and analysing qualitative data
6.
Collecting quantitative data
7.
Designing questionnaires
8.
Sampling methods
9.
Analysing quantitative data
10. Presenting the research results
MARKETING RESEARCH IN ACTION: CASE HISTORIES
Case 1: Lynx - launching a new brand
Case 2: Sony Ericsson - understanding the mobile phone market
Case 3: AIR MILES - researching advertising effectiveness
Case 4: The Metro - newspaper media research and understanding the reader
Case 5: Birmingham airport - researching customer satisfaction
Case 6: Gu - establishing a community for research
Case 7: English Rugby - researching participation
Case 8: Malta and MTV - researching attitudes
Case 9: Allied Domecq - researching lifestyles
Case 10: Dove - researching beauty for a communications campaign
CURRENT ISSUES IN MARKETING RESEARCH
Issue 1: Marketing research versus customer insight
Issue 2: Merging marketing research with customer databases
Issue 3: Observation and surveillance cameras
Issue 4: Declining response rates
204
Issue 5: Challenges of business-to-business research
Issue 6: Difficulties in achieving representative samples
Issue 7: Research and social media
Issue 8: Multi-mode interviewing
Issue 9: Using technology for data collection
Issue 10: Clients going direct to respondents
Issue 11: International research
Issue 12: The respondents’' view of research
Appendix 1 Statistical tables
Appendix 2 Snap Getting Started Guide
205
Hospitality & Tourism
Events Management
John Beech
Sebastian Kaiser
Robert Kaspar
ISBN 10: 0273758624
ISBN 13: 9780273758624
©2013 Paper
Casino Gaming Technology
Jane Bokunewicz
Donald Kneisel
Maria McNichols
ISBN 10: 0135046041
ISBN 13: 9780135046043
192pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Hospitality Information Systems and Gaming Technology.
The first of its kind, this book explores the systems and technologies crucial to casino operations. Offering broad
coverage, it traces the evolution of technology in slots, tables, casino cage, marketing, security, and
miscellaneous systems like race/simulcast and sports book. Written from a business perspective, it focuses on
how technology and systems are used to make better decisions, improve customer service and streamline
operations. Each chapter includes learning activities and in-class discussions that prompt students to understand
the past, present, and future impact of technology on the casino business.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: INTRODUCTION
1.
Evolution of Gaming Technology
2.
Casino Information Systems and Interfaces
SECTION II: TABLES
3.
Table Games Management
4.
Cage Credit Collections
5.
Table Player Rating
SECTION III: SLOTS
6.
The History of Slot Machines
7.
Slot Machine Technology
8.
Slot Information Systems
SECTION IV: MARKETING
9.
Player Loyalty Programs
10. Database Marketing
SECTION V:
11. Security and Surveillance
12. Race and Simulcast Systems
13. Sports Betting Systems
14. A Look to the Future
Meetings, Expositions, Events & Conventions: An Introduction to
the Industry, 3/e
George G. Fenich, University of New Orleans
ISBN 10: 0132719916
ISBN 13: 9780132719919
360pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Meeting, Event, Exposition and Convention Planning and Management.
The Meetings, Expositions, Events, and Conventions industry continues to grow and garner increasing attention
from the hospitality industry, communities, and college faculty. With a broad view of the industry, this book
moves beyond just one segment to include all aspects related to the MEEC industry. Developed as a collaborative
work, the text features contributions from some of the best and most notable practitioners and educators in the
field. (Using the Delphi method, even the text’s topics were selected based on industry input.) Now in its third
edition, this revision features over 30 new case studies, the latest statistics and a new chapter devoted to green
meetings and social responsibility.
206
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Introduction to the Meetings, Expositions, Events, and Conventions Industry
Meeting, Exhibition, Event, And Convention Organizers and Sponsors
Destination Marketing Organizations (DMOs)
Meeting and Convention Venues
Exhibitions
Service Contractors
Destination Management Companies (DMC)
Special Events Management
Planning and Producing MEEC Gatherings
Food and Beverage
Legal Issues in the MEEC Industry
Technology and the Meeting Professional
Green Meetings & Social Responsibility
International Aspects in MEEC
Pulling It All Together
Tourism: Principles and Practice, 5/e
John Fletcher
Alan Fyall
David Gilbert
Stephen Wanhill
ISBN 10: 0273758276
ISBN 13: 9780273758273
©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
In a changing and turbulent environment for tourism, Tourism: Principles and Practice offers the reader the
fundamental and underlying principles with which to approach the study of tourism, contributing a complete
framework that effectively integrates theory and practice. The text has been updated to take into account
developments such as growing concern for climate change and the maturing response of tourism to the safety
and security of tourists.
Foundations of Lodging Management, 2/e
David K. Hayes
Jack D. Ninemeier
Allisha A. Miller
ISBN 10: 0132560895
ISBN 13: 9780132560894
456pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For junior college or undergraduate courses in hotel management, lodging operations, and hospitality.
Written in an easy-to-read, easy-to-understand style, Foundations of Lodging Management, 2e explores how
the lodging industry and the hotels in the industry operate. With coverage of both small and large hotels, it
addresses each department, including the front office, sales and marketing, housekeeping, maintenance and
more! This edition features more on green initiatives, expanded discussion of revenue optimization, and an
updated Front Office Simulation that helps students learn how to manage a hotel’s front office and better
understand the complexity of the entire property.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to the Lodging Industry
2.
The Structure of the lodging Industry
3.
Guest Service in the Lodging Industry
4.
Managing Lodging Operations
5.
Staffing the Lodging Operation
6.
The Front Office Department
7.
The Sales and Marketing Department
8.
The Housekeeping Department
9.
The Maintenance Department
10. Food and Beverage Operations: Limited Service Hotels
11. Food and Beverage Operations: Full-Service Hotels
12. The Accounting Department
13. Safety and Security
14. Careers in the Lodging Industry
15. The Front Office Management Simulation
I.
Front Office Management Training Challenges
II. The Front Office Management Simulation (FOMS)
III. Revenue Management Lessons
IV. Reservation Management Lessons
V.
Guest Stay Information Lessons
VI. Guest Departure and Payment
VII. Accounting and Financial Summaries
VIII. FOMS Completion
207
The Business of Tourism, 9/e
Chris Holloway
Claire Humphreys
ISBN 10: 0273755145
ISBN 13: 9780273755142
840pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The tourism industry is in a constant state of flux, where trends and attitudes are frequently susceptible to
outside influences such as changes in technology and economical factors. The Business of Tourism by Chris
Holloway and Claire Humphreys is the ideal textbook to help you to not only understand these new changes but
look at them with a critical eye and predict future trends.
This book is the ideal foundation text for Tourism or Tourism Management students. The historical context is
combined with background theory and research plus up-to-date international case studies. The result is a
practical and relevant text for any student wishing to work in the Tourism sector.
Table of Contents
PART I: DEFINING AND ANALYSING TOURISM AND ITS IMPACTS
1.
An introduction to tourism
2.
The development and growth of tourism to the mid 20th century
3.
The era of popular tourism: 1950 to the twenty-first century
4.
The demand for tourism
5.
The economic impact of tourism
6.
The socio-cultural impact of tourism
7.
The environmental impact of tourism
PART II: THE TRAVEL AND TOURISM PRODUCT
8.
The structure and organisation of the travel and tourism industry
9.
Tourist destinations
10. Visitor attractions
11. Business tourism
12. The hospitality sector: accommodation and catering services
13. Tourist transport by air
14. Tourist transport by water
15. Tourist transport on land
PART III: INTERMEDIARIES IN THE PROVISION OF TRAVEL AND TOURISM
16. Visitor management
17. The structure and role of the public sector in tourism
18. Tour operating
19. Selling and distributing travel
20. Ancillary tourism services
PART IV: CASE STUDIES
Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism
Bulent I. Kastarlak
Brian Barber
ISBN 10: 0135078814
ISBN 13: 9780135078815
480pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For all courses in tourism development planning for both the public and private sectors.
Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism brings into focus the growing importance of tourism in
developing economies of the world, for social change, alleviating poverty, and achieving sustained growth. It
offers a complete, organized, and quantifiable methodology for tourism development planning that reflects
economics, marketing, and crucial issues such as conservation, capacity constraints, and social acceptability. It
covers all steps used for analyzing and planning tourism development in free market, mixed, and centrallyplanned economies. The text is replete with historical explorations and examples, including several real life case
studies illuminating both successes and failures in tourism planning and development.
Table of Contents
PART I. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF PLANNING AND DEVELOPING TOURISM
1.
Understanding Tourism Development
2.
Toward a General Theory of Tourism Planning and Development. the BIK System
3.
Prerequisites for Sustainable Tourism
4.
Examples of General and Special Interest Tourism
PART II. PLANNING ISSUES FOR TOURISM DEVELOPMENT
5.
Market System and Planned Growth
6.
Practicing Sustainable Tourism Development
PART III. PLANNING PROCESSES FOR TOURISM DEVELOPMENT
7.
Planning Cycle in Government Assisted Tourism Development
8.
Tourism Development in Market Economic Systems
9.
Government Policies and Legislations for Tourism Development
208
10. Financing Government and Private Sector Tourism Projects
PART IV. TECHNIQUES FOR PLANNING AND DEVELOPING TOURISM
11. Surveying the Tourism Product
12. Analyzing Tourism Economy and Tourism Product
13. Planning Tourism At National, Regional, and Local Destination Levels
14. Project Design, Permit and Construction
15. Project Financing, Agreements and Ownership
16. Computer Simulations, Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Geographic Information System (GIS)
17. Managing, Planning and Marketing Tourism
PART V. HISTORIES AND CASE STUDIES OF TOURISM PLANNING
• Waterfront Tourism Destination and Redevelopment, Boynton Beach, Florida, USA
• Suite Hotel & Resort (Apart-Hotel), Marmaris, Mu
Technology Strategies for the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
Peter Nyheim, The Pennsylvania State University
Daniel Connolly, University of Denver
ISBN 10: 0135038022
ISBN 13: 9780135038024
288pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate/graduate-level courses in Hospitality Information Systems, and Hospitality
Technology.
This text examines technology strategies for the hospitality industry using case studies, interviews, and an
interactive web page. Exceptionally practical in approach, this edition includes a new chapter on technology in
the casino industry and a new chapter on technology for meetings and events. A separate chapter is devoted to
planning and investment as students learn what technology exists and how to use it to succeed in the hospitality
business.
Table of Contents
1.
If You Think You Don’t Need to Know About IT, Think Again!
2.
Using Information Technology to Drive Competitive Advantage
3.
Computing Essentials
4.
Networks and Security
5.
E-commerce
6.
Restaurant Management Systems
7.
Hotel and Resort Technology
8.
Hotel Global Distribution Systems and Channels
9.
Databases
10. Competing on Knowledge: How the Power of Information Can Enable Great Things
11. Technology in the Casino Industry
12. Technology for the Meetings and Events Industry
13. Strategic Hospitality Technology Investment
APPENDIX I: Sample Request for Proposal (RFP)
Foundations of Cost Control
Daniel Traster
ISBN 10: 0132156555
ISBN 13: 9780132156554
288pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Culinary Cost Control.
Foundations of Cost Control inspires students to learn cost control as an essential skill for any future chef or
foodservice manager. Students begin by mastering key culinary math basics, making subsequent cost control
equations easier to understand and compute. Balancing real-world industry challenges with cost control theory,
the text covers topics such as recipe costing and sales price determination, purchasing and storeroom control,
labor control, revenue management, and income statements and budgeting. Throughout the text, author Daniel
Traster encourages students to think critically about the material, promoting a deeper understanding of cost
control.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Introduction to Cost Control
Basic Math
Unit and Recipe Conversions
Yields
Recipe Costing
Calculating Sales Price and Food Cost
Beverage Control
Control through the Purchasing Process
209
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Receiving, Storage, and Issuing Control
Employee Organization and Scheduling
Labor Management and Control
Revenue Prediction
Revenue Management
Income Statements and Budgets
A Discussion of Other Expenses
Check-in Check-Out: Managing Hotel Operations,
9/e
Gary K. Vallen, Northern Arizona University
Jerome J. Vallen, University of Nevada, Las Vegas
ISBN 10: 0132706717
ISBN 13: 9780132706711
624pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in hotel administration that focus on front desk operations or hotel management, and as
an adjunct to other hotel courses such as housekeeping, hotel accounting, hotel marketing or hotel
personnel/human resources.
Now in its Ninth Edition, Check-in Check-Out remains the leading guide to managing profitable hotel operations.
Extensively revised to reflect the industry’s rapid change, it presents rich detail about best practices and future
directions, while offering the widest coverage of any book in the field. Students gain an intuitive understanding
based on the flow of the guest’s experience: through reservation, arrival, registration, service purchasing,
departure, billing, and recordkeeping. The entire rooms division is covered thoroughly, and linked to other
hospitality functions, related industries, and the broader economy. Extensive new coverage includes: increased
internationalization; green operations; new financing sources; boutique and urban collections; new reservations
strategies; and much more. This edition has been streamlined to help students learn more in less time, and
contains 150+ exhibits to promote visual learning.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE HOTEL INDUSTRY
1.
The Traditional Hotel Industry
2.
The Modern Hotel Industry
3.
The Structures of the Hotel Industry
PART II: THE RESERVATIONS PROCESS
4.
Forecasting Availability and Overbooking
5.
Global Reservations Technologies
6.
Individual Reservations and Group Reservations
PART III: GUEST SERVICE AND RATE STRUCTURES
7.
Managing Guest Services
8.
Arrival, Registration, Assignment and Rooming
9.
The Role of the Room Rate
PART IV: THE HOTEL REVENUE CYCLE
11. Billing the Guest Folio
12. Cash or Credit: The City Ledger
PART V: TECHNOLOGY
10. The Night Audit
11. Hotel Technology
Hospitality Management, 3/e
Lynn Van der Wagen
ISBN 10: 1442534796
ISBN 13: 9781442534797
©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Hospitality Management, 3e covers the core competency units in SIT07 Tourism, Hospitality and Events
Training Package for the Diploma and Advanced Diploma in Hospitality Management. It provides the foundation
knowledge needed for the role of a hospitality manager.
The 3rd edition continues to combine theory with a skills building approach to explain the key principles of
hospitality management at a supervisory, line management and senior management level. The text helps
students develop the professional skills necessary to ensure quality products and services in all hospitality
operations.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FRONTLINE SERVICE
1.
The hospitality industry
2.
A culturally diverse workplace
3.
The customer service experience
4.
Procedures for health, safety and the environment
210
PART 2: OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT
5.
Operational planning
6.
OHS systems and procedures
7.
Recruitment and selection
8.
Coaching and monitoring performance
9.
Leadership and motivation
10. Interpreting financial information
11. Stock control
PART 3: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
12. Strategic marketing
13. Coordinate marketing activities
14. Legal compliance
15. Business relationships
16. Budgetary management
17. Financial management
18. Asset management
19. Risk management
20. Customer service management
21. Human resource management
22. Business planning
Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism, 4/e
A.J. Veal
ISBN 10: 0273717502
ISBN 13: 9780273717508
592pp ©2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Now in its fourth edition, Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism has quickly become the ultimate
reference text for both students undertaking academic research and practising managers.
This book combines comprehensive coverage of a wide variety of qualitative and quantitative research methods
with in-depth step-by step guidance through research software including Excel, SPSS and NVivo.
Table of Contents
PART ONE – PREPERATION
1.
Introduction to research: what, why and who?
2.
Approaches to leisure, sport and tourism research
3.
Starting out - research plans and proposals
4.
Research ethics
5.
The range of research methods
6.
Reviewing the literature
PART TWO - DATA COLLECTION
7.
Secondary data sources
8.
Observation
9.
Qualitative data collection
10. Questionnaires - surveys, design and coding
11. Experimental methods
12. The Case Study method
13. Sampling
PART THREE - DATA ANALYSIS
14. Analysing secondary data
15. Analysing qualitative data
16. Survey analysis
17. Statistical analysis
PART FOUR - COMMUNICATING RESULTS
18. Preparing a research report
Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
John R. Walker
ISBN 10: 0135118859
ISBN 13: 9780135118856
384pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Hospitality.
Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2e offers broad coverage of the hospitality industry in an easy-to-read,
conversational style. Written by best-selling author John Walker, this book is less theoretical and more industryrelevant than most–emphasizing the people, companies, and positions that make up the hospitality industry
today. Moving beyond just restaurants and hotels, it includes new growth areas such as event management,
211
meeting planning, cruising, theme parks, attractions and entertainment. With a new focus on sustainability, this
edition features case studies, practitioners and corporations that engage and involve readers as they explore the
trends in this ever-growing field.
Table of Contents
PART I: HOSPITALITY, TOURISM, AND TRAVEL
1.
Hospitality Spirit
2.
Tourism
3.
Why People Travel
PART II: LODGING AND CRUISING
4.
Lodging
5.
Lodging Operations
6.
Cruising
PART III: FOOD AND BEVERAGE SERVICE AND MANAGEMENT
7.
Restaurants
8.
Restaurant Operations
9.
Managed Services
10. Beverages
PART IV: CLUB MANAGEMENT, ATTRACTIONS, AND RECREATION
11. Clubs
12. Theme Parks and Attractions
13. Gaming Entertainment
PART V: ASSEMBLIES AND EVENT MANAGEMENT
14. Meetings, Conventions, and Expositions
15. Special Events
Introduction to Hospitality, 6/e
John R. Walker
ISBN 10: 0132993074
ISBN 13: 9780132993074
600pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For all introductory-level courses in hospitality.
The Sixth Edition of Introduction to Hospitality focuses on hospitality operations while offering a broad,
comprehensive foundation of current knowledge about the world’s largest industry. Throughout, author John R.
Walker invites students to share this industry’s unique enthusiasm and passion. The text is organized into five
sections: the hospitality industry and tourism; lodging; restaurants, managed services, and beverages;
recreation, theme parks, clubs, and gaming entertainment; and assemblies and event management. Each
section includes insight from industry professionals, contains up-to-date information on career opportunities, and
includes many examples illuminating current industry trends and realities. Extensively revised and updated, this
edition contains new photos, new page layouts, and new coverage on topics ranging from sustainability to
globalization.
Table of Contents
PART 1. INTRODUCING HOSPITALITY AND LODGING
1.
Introducing Hospitality
2.
The Hotel Business
3.
Rooms Division Operations
4.
Food and Beverage Operations
PART 2. BEVERAGES, RESTAURANTS AND MANAGED SERVICES
5.
Beverages
6.
The Restaurant Business
7.
Restaurant Operations
8.
Managed Services
PART 3. TOURISM, RECREATION, ATTRACTIONS, CLUBS, AND GAMING
9.
Tourism
10. Recreation, Attractions and Clubs
11. Gaming and Entertainment
PART 4. ASSEMBLIES, EVENTS, ATTRACTIONS, LEADERSHIP AND MANAGEMENT
12. Meetings, Conventions, and Expositions
13. Special Events
14. Leadership
Introduction to Hospitality Management, 4/e
John R. Walker
Josielyn T. Walker
ISBN 10: 0132959941
ISBN 13: 9780132959940
704pp ©2013 Cloth
212
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Hospitality and Hospitality Management.
Capturing the flavor and breadth of the industry, Introduction to Hospitality Management explores all
aspects of the field including: travel and tourism; lodging; foodservice; meetings, conventions and expositions;
and leisure and recreation. Devoting six chapters to management, the text focuses on hospitality and
management and uses first-person accounts, corporate profiles and industry morsels to foster a student’s
appreciation for the field.
Spa Management: An Introduction
Mary S. Wisnom
Lisa L. Capozio
ISBN 10: 0135039444
ISBN 13: 9780135039441
264pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Spa Management, Spa Operations, Spa Customer Experience, and Resort/Club
Management.
This book provides a contemporary look at the spa industry, and the unique aspects of spa operations, and
management. Complete with photos, tables and figures, it addresses spa industry basics, how to establish a spa
business, operations and management, business skills and knowledge, and future trends in the industry. Each
chapter includes a realistic view of operations and is accompanied by creative exercises and assignments. An
appendix of industry resources and robust online resources help readers understand what it takes to manage a
spa and succeed in this evolving industry.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: SPA INDUSTRY BASICS
1.
Introduction to the Spa Industry
PART TWO: ESTABLISHING THE BUSINESS
2.
Spa Business Basics
3.
Spa Offerings
4.
Spa Facility Design and Construction
PART THREE: OPERATIONS AND MANAGEMENT
5.
Standard Operating Procedures
6.
Spa Human Resources
7.
Spa Facility Operations
8.
Spa Client Management
PART FOUR: BUSINESS SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
9.
Spa Operations and the Law
10. Spa Financial Management
11. Spa Marketing and Promotion
12. Spa Business Evaluation
PART FOUR: SPA PROFESSIONALS AND THE FUTURE OF THE INDUSTRY
13. The Spa Management Professional
14. Trends and the Future of the Spa Industry
APPENDIX: SPA INDUSTRY RESOURCES
213
Culinary Arts
Menu, The: Development, Strategy, and
Application
David Barrish
ISBN 10: 0135078660
ISBN 13: 9780135078662
312pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Menu Planning, Menu Management, Menu Marketing, Restaurant Management, Culinary
Management, Strategic Restaurant Marketing, Food Service Operations, and Food Service
Management.
The Menu: Development, Strategy, and Application offers an indispensable business resource for creative
culinarian and hospitality manager students transitioning into careers. This text bridges understanding and action
by avoiding a prescriptive approach in favor of recommendations and examples of best practices that bolster the
creative process. Contextual exercises throughout each chapter help today’s student actively transform learning
into relevant, career-based skill sets. Following a logical sequence, the text addresses American Culinary
Federation competencies such as Beverage Management, Business and Math Skills, Food Preparation, Nutrition,
Purchasing and Receiving, and Sanitation.
Table of Contents
1.
A Holistic Context for Menu Development
2.
Where Food and Beverages are Served
3.
How Customers Buy Your Products
4.
The Strategic Value of Knowledge
5.
Positioning Your Menus for Business Success
6.
Operational Considerations
7.
Conceiving Menus that Respond to Your Market
8.
Menu Pricing
9.
Communicating with Menus
10. Menu Analysis
Appendix A: Extract from Food and Drug Administration Guidance for Industry: A Labeling Guide for
Restaurants and Other Retail Establishments Selling Away-From-Home Foods
World of Culinary Management, The:
Leadership and Development of Human
Resources, 5/e
Jerald W. Chesser
Noel C. Cullen, Boston University
ISBN 10: 013274774X
ISBN 13: 9780132747745
312pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Human Resource Management; Supervision; Management; sophomore/senior-level
undergraduate courses in Food and Beverage; courses in all culinary arts two- and four-year degree
programs; training seminars for chefs; and certification programs for the American Culinary
Federation Educational Institute.
The World of Culinary Management: Leadership and Development of Human Resources, Fifth Edition,
gives aspiring chefs the foundational knowledge and skills required to lead, supervise, and manage foodservice
workers. It outlines in clear terms those elements crucial to success in today's quality-driven foodservice
industry, with in-depth exploration of the roles and responsibilities of a successful kitchen manager. It examines
all aspects of training as it affects the chef supervisor, providing practical, step-by-step discussions on crucial
management skills and functions. Written specifically for the associate degree and certificate level program, this
is one of the only texts available that’s designed to provide complete information on human resource
management from a culinary perspective.
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: THE WORLD OF SUPERVISION
1.
Supervision
2.
Legal Aspects
3.
Recruiting and Selecting Team Members
4.
Compensation, Benefits and Scheduling
SECTION TWO: THE WORLD OF TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
5.
Orientation
6.
Training and Quality
7.
Training Objectives and Planning
8.
Training Methods
9.
Instructional Delivery
10. Performance Appraisal
11. Work Environment
214
SECTION THREE: THE WORLD OF MANAGEMENT
12. Management
13. Motivation
14. Team Building
15. Respect
16. Discipline
SECTION FOUR: THE WORLD OF LEADERSHIP
17. Leadership
18. Communication
19. Time Management
20. Problem Solving and Decision Making
Food Defense Fundamentals: Using the S.H.A.R.E. Principle To
Protect the Global Food Supply
Michael Dixon
Tara Paster
ISBN 10: 013139181X
ISBN 13: 9780131391819
192pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For all courses in food safety intended for students who will participate in the food industry, food
regulation, or academia.
This is a comprehensive, all-inclusive global food defense solution intended to help students protect families,
friends, colleagues, public health, their brands, and the food industry from deliberate contamination. Students
are guided through creating a food defense culture, writing a food defense plan, and building the confidence of
both managers and employees. Successful completion of this eight-hour program will enable students to earn a
Food Defense certification that is valid for four years.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Strategy
Hazards
Accessibility
Restrictions
Enforcement
Practical Chef's Reference, The: A Compendium
of Charts, Formulas and Ratios
Russell Furdell
ISBN 10: 0135125774
ISBN 13: 9780135125779
432pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Culinary Arts, Post-Secondary; Culinary Arts, Secondary.
The Practical Chef’s Reference: A Compendium of Charts, Formulas, and Ratios is designed to serve as a
data reference, a basic formula reference, and a teaching tool. Developed to address the need for a compact,
single source, comprehensive culinary data reference, this book provides broad coverage of culinary arts
fundamentals in an accessible chart format.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Batter/Dough/Crumb Crust
Beverage
Charcuterie
Chemical Leavening
Chocolate
Cocoa
Condiment
Custard
Dairy Products
Eggs
Equipment
Fats
Fish/Seafood
Flour
Fruit
Gelatin
Math
Meat
Meringue
Methods
Nuts
Pasta Products
215
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Poultry
Safety
Sanitation
Sauce
Seasoning
Soup
Spice/Herb
Stock
Sweeteners
Vegetable
Weight/Measure
Yeast
Food Service Organizations: A Managerial and
Systems Approach, 8/e
Mary B. Gregoire, College of Family and Consumer Sciences
Apparel, Educational Studies, Hospitality
ISBN 10: 0132620812
ISBN 13: 9780132620819
600pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For all dietetic and foodservice management courses covering topics such as procurement, financial
management, quantity food production, human resource management, and leadership.
Organized around the well-proven foodservice systems model, this text provides detailed and current information
on how managers can optimally transform human, material, facility, and operational inputs into outputs of meals,
customer satisfaction, employee satisfaction, and financial accountability. Blending theory and practice, it gives
foodservice managers a strong empirical base for managing operations. After thoroughly introducing the model,
it presents in-depth coverage of each functional subsystem: procurement, production, distribution, service,
safety, sanitation, and maintenance. Next, readers master today’s most relevant leadership, communication,
decision making, HR, financial, and marketing techniques. The book concludes with a full section on system
outputs, including methods for evaluating them. This edition adds new coverage of sustainability; updated
information on energy management and food safety; expanded coverage of marketing and globalization; and the
latest dietary guidelines.
Table of Contents
PART 1. THE FOODSERVICE SYSTEMS MODEL
1.
Systems Approach to a Foodservice Organization
2.
Managing Quality
3.
The Menu
PART 2. TRANSFORMATION: FUNCTIONAL SUBSYSTEMS
4.
Food Product Flow and Kitchen Design
5.
Procurement
6.
Food Production
7.
Distribution and Service
8.
Safety, Sanitation, and Maintenance
PART 3. TRANSFORMATION: MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS AND LINKING PROCESSES
9.
Management Principles
10. Leadership and Organizational Change
11. Decision Making, Communication, and Balance
12. Management of Human Resources
13. Management of Financial Resources
14. Marketing Foodservice
PART 4. OUTPUTS OF THE SYSTEM
15. Meals, Satisfaction, and Accountability
APPENDIX A. Sample Specifications for Food Products
APPENDIX B. Resources for Writing Specifications
APPENDIX C. Standards for Food Products
Professional Kitchen Manager, The
David K. Hayes
Allisha A. Miller
Jack D. Ninemeier
ISBN 10: 0131391747
ISBN 13: 9780131391741
336pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Culinary Arts courses in Cost Control, Menu Planning and Development, Purchasing, and
Supervision.
Focusing on back-of-house management, Professional Kitchen Management addresses topics such as
supervision, menu planning, development and use of standard recipes, purchasing, and cost control. Students
will learn how to evaluate menus, manage inventory, train personnel and deliver food services on a budget.
216
An innovative format pairs concepts presented in each chapter with cleverly animated and highly interactive
Kitchen Management Simulations (KMS) lessons to provide hands-on training that is fun for students and time
freeing for instructors.
Reader-friendly features explain why concepts are important to daily operations and identify the skills needed to
manage a high-quantity food production kitchen.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Kitchen
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Managers
Get Ready for Food Production
Select and Train Production Employees
Lead Food Production Employees
Plan Their Menus
Design Their Menu
Use Standard Recipes
Cost Recipes and Assist Food Servers
Use Effective Purchasing Practices
Use Effective Receiving, Inventory, Management and Issuing Practices
Analyze Their Menus
Analyze Sales and Control Revenue
International Cooking: A Culinary Journey, 2/e
Patricia A. Heyman
ISBN 10: 0132126117
ISBN 13: 9780132126113
576pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in International Cookery, Continental Cookery, Cuisines of the World, World Cookery.
Streamlined in this edition, this text looks at the world’s cuisines and how they developed and evolved.
Organized by continent, each country and cuisine is explored in terms of its history, topography, cooking
methods, common foods, flavorings, and general characteristics. Over 340 recipes appear in this edition and
represent a variety of foods and dishes from all segments of the menu. This edition features 90 brand new
recipes, three new countries and ideas for modernizing classic recipes. With an emphasis on flavor components
and traditional and contemporary cookery, this edition reflects the evolving nature of world cuisine.
Table of Contents
I.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
II.
8.
III.
9.
10.
IV.
11.
12.
13.
14.
V.
15.
VI.
16.
17.
18.
EUROPE
British Isles
Spain and Portugal
France
Italy
Germany
Scandinavia
Russia and Eastern Europe
AFRICA
The Countries of Africa
MIDDLE EAST
Lebanon, Jordan, Iraq, Saudi Arabia, Syria, Iran, Greece, and Turkey
Israel
ASIA
China
Japan and Korea
Vietnam, Thailand, Indonesia, and the Philippines
India
AUSTRALIA
Australia and New Zealand
LATIN AMERICA
Mexico
South America
Caribbean Islands
On Baking, 3/e
Sarah R. Labensky
Priscilla A. Martel
Eddy Van Damme
ISBN 10: 0132374560
ISBN 13: 9780132374569
848pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in baking and the pastry arts.
217
On Baking, Third Edition brings a fresh new design and 350+ new images to the “fundamentals” approach that
has prepared thousands of students for successful careers in the baking and pastry arts. It teaches both the
“hows” and “whys,” starting with general procedures, highlighting core principles and skills, and then presenting
many applications and sample recipes. Professionalism, breads, desserts and pastries, and advanced pastry work
are each covered in detail, and baking and pastry arts are presented in cultural and historical context throughout.
An expanded recipe testing program involving chef-instructors at leading culinary schools ensures superior
accuracy, clarity and instructional value. This edition reflects key trends including artisan baking, sensory
science, and flavor pairing, and is complemented by a greatly enhanced support package, including media
solutions MyCulinaryLab for course management and Pearson Kitchen Manager for recipe management.
Table of Contents
PART I. PROFESSIONALISM AND THE BAKESHOP
1.
Professionalism
2.
Tools and Equipment for the Bakeshop
3.
Principles of Baking
4.
Bakeshop Ingredients
5.
Mise En Place
PART II. BREADS
6.
Quick Breads
7.
Yeast Breads
8.
Enriched Yeast Breads
9.
Laminated Doughs
PART III. DESSERTS AND PASTRIES
10. Cookies and Brownies
11. Pies and Tarts
12. Pastry and Dessert Components
13. Cakes and Icings
14. Custards, Creams and Sauces
15. Ice Cream and Frozen Desserts
16. Healthful and Special-Needs Baking
PART IV. ADVANCED PASTRY WORK
17. Tortes and Specialty Cakes
18. Petits Fours and Confections
19. Restaurant and Plated Desserts
20. Chocolate and Sugar Work
Appendix I. Measurement and Conversion Charts
Appendix II. Fresh Fruit Availability Chart
Appendix III. Volume Formulas
Appendix IV. Templates
Food Fundamentals, 10/e
Margaret McWilliams, California State University, Los Angeles
ISBN 10: 0132747731
ISBN 13: 9780132747738
576pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For introductory courses serving students who intend to pursue degrees and careers in food science,
dietetics, or nutrition.
This text integrates the scientific principles of safe and nutritious food preparation with the basic techniques
students need to work effectively with food. It introduces the scientific basis of current practices and procedures,
and explains ingredients both as nutrient sources and as food product components. The effects of preparation
techniques are discussed in the context of the science underlying food manipulation, ingredients, ratios, effects of
heat and cold, storage, preservation, and evaluation. Foods from diverse cultures are covered, and “Cultural
Accents” features present a global perspective. Study aids include “Key Concepts” chapter roadmaps; “Science
Notes” and “Industry Insights”; “Judging Points” to help students evaluate food products; updated web links; and
many new illustrations. Fully revised to reflect MyPlate and the 2010 Dietary Guidelines for Americans, this
edition adds more information on healthy food choices, labeling, vegetarian diets, and gluten-free products.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1. FOUNDATION FOR FOOD STUDY
1.
Food for Today
2.
Nutrition and Food
3.
Food Safety
SECTION 2. FOOD PREPARATION
4.
Factors in Food Preparation
5.
Vegetables
6.
Fruits
7.
Salads and Salad Dressings
8.
Fats and Oils
9.
Carbohydrates: Sugar
10. Carbohydrates: Starches and Cereals
11. Proteins: Milk and Cheese
12. Proteins: Eggs
13. Proteins: Meats, Poultry, and Fish
218
14. Leavening Agents
15. Basics of Batters and Doughs
16. Breads
17. Cakes, Cookies, and Pastries
18. Beverages
19. Preserving Food
SECTION 3. FOOD IN THE CONTEXT OF LIFE
20. Menu Planning and Meal Preparation
21. Meal Service and Hospitality
Appendix A. The Metric System
Appendix B. Some Food Additives
Appendix C. Dietary Reference Intakes
Foods: Experimental Perspectives, 7/e
Margaret McWilliams, California State University, Los Angeles
ISBN 10: 013707929X
ISBN 13: 9780137079292
600pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For all courses in experimental foods, food science, and related topics.
Foods: Experimental Perspectives, Seventh Edition will help students pursuing food-related careers broaden
and deepen their scientific knowledge of food and its safe preparation. It clearly explains food science’s
foundational principles and most important emerging technologies. The text first surveys the consumer
marketplace, career opportunities, and basic food research techniques. Next, it discusses food’s physical aspects
and preparation, and thoroughly explains carbohydrates, lipids, and proteins. Finally, it presents up-to-date
coverage of food safety, preservation, and additives. Learning is promoted through “Food for Thought” boxes,
photos, objectives, margin notes, definitions, charts, web links, and study questions. Updated throughout, this
edition includes extensively revised coverage of food safety, GMOs, trans fats, alternative sweeteners, and much
more.
Table of Contents
PART I. RESEARCH PERSPECTIVES
1.
Dimensions of Food Studies
2.
The Research Process
3.
Sensory Evaluation
4.
Objective Evaluation
PART II. PHYSICAL PERSPECTIVES
5.
Water
6.
Physical Aspects of Food Preparation
PART III. CARBOHYDRATES
7.
Overview of Carbohydrates
8.
Monosaccharides, Disaccharides, and Sweeteners
9.
Starch
10. Vegetables and Fruits
PART IV. LIPIDS
11. Overview of Fats and Oils
12. Fats and Oils in Food Products
PART V. PROTEINS
13. Overview of Proteins
14. Milk and Milk Products
15. Meat, Fish, and Poultry
PART VI. FOOD SUPPLY PERSPECTIVES
16. Food Safety Concerns and Controls
17. Food Preservation
18. Food Additives
Illustrated Guide to Food Preparation, 11/e
Margaret McWilliams, California State University, Los Angeles
ISBN 10: 0132738759
ISBN 13: 9780132738750
408pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For first-year introductory foods courses; and first or second-year courses in Dietetics/Consumer &
Family Sciences, Food & Nutrition, Nutrition Science, Food Science, or Food Technology.
Uniting scientific and aesthetic principles with laboratory realities, students learn about the distinctive
characteristics of a wide range of ingredients, and develop the skills and knowledge they need to cost-effectively
create delicious and nourishing dishes. Reflecting society’s growing focus on locally-grown foods, phytochemicals,
and weight control, this edition deepens its emphasis on preparing fruits and vegetables in appetizing ways.
219
Throughout, recipes have been tailored to minimize calories and maximize appeal. Many are integrated in an
updated meal management chapter showing how to create appealing, nutritious dishes within tight budgets and
schedules. Topic coverage includes: fruits/vegetables; salads/dressings; sugar, starch, cereals, and eggs; meats,
poultry, and fish; breads, cakes, cookies, and pies; beverages, and preservation.
Table of Contents
1.
Laboratory Basics
2.
Vegetables
3.
Fruits
4.
Salads and Salad Dressings
5.
Sugar Cookery
6.
Starch and Cereal Cookery
7.
Milk and Cheese
8.
Egg Cookery
9.
Meats, Poultry, and Fish
10. Breads
11. Cakes and Cookies
12. Pies
13. Beverages
14. Food Preservation
15. Meal Management
Appendix A. The Metric System
HACCP Food Safety Employee Manual
Tara Paster
ISBN 10: 0131391828
ISBN 13: 9780131391826
78pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For all courses in food safety intended for retail food service employees, food handlers, cooks, frontof-house team members, and back-of-house team members; especially for courses covering the
HACCP system and/or preparing students to take the Basic HACCP Certification Exam.
This easy-to-read text teaches the basics of food safety using the HACCP system, presenting the core knowledge,
skills, and abilities that retail foodservice employees need to prevent accidental or deliberate food contamination.
The easy-to-understand HACCP Star concept is used throughout to illustrate how HACCP’s standard operating
procedures and seven principles work together. The text begins by presenting basic food safety and food defense
standard operating procedures, and explaining why they are so important. Next, it covers all elements of
creating and using an effective HACCP plan, including: conducting hazard analyses, determining critical control
points, establishing critical limits monitoring procedures, and corrective actions; verifying that the system works,
and keeping records.
Table of Contents
HACCP
HACCP
HACCP
HACCP
HACCP
Star
Star
Star
Star
Star
Point
Point
Point
Point
Point
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Master Prerequisite Food Safety Programs
Apply Food Defense
Create A HACCP Plan
Work The Plan
Checks And Balances
Foodservice Management: Principles and Practices, 12/e
June Payne-Palacio, Pepperdine University
Monica Theis, University of Wisconsin, Madison
ISBN 10: 0132719924
ISBN 13: 9780132719926
600pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in foodservice management or administration; hospitality management; quantity food
production and/or purchasing; foodservice accounting/financial management; menu planning;
foodservice marketing/merchandising, or related topics.
This is today’s most comprehensive, current, and practical overview of foodservice operations and the business
principles needed to manage them successfully. Authored by leading industry experts and experienced
instructors, it covers all core topics, including food safety, organizational design, human resources, performance
improvement, finance, equipment, design, layout, and marketing. This 12th Edition is retitled to better reflect its
college level. The content is still concentrated on basic principles, but increasingly reflects the impact of current
social, economic, technological, and political factors. For example, it now focuses on sustainability throughout,
and offers greater emphasis on culinary issues. The textbook also contains a new running case study based on
University of Wisconsin, Madison’s University Dining Services.
220
Table of Contents
PART I. THE FOUNDATIONS
1.
The Foodservice Industry
2.
The Systems Approach
PART II. THE FUNDAMENTALS
3.
Food Safety
4.
Cleaning, Sanitation, and Environmental Safety
5.
The Menu
PART III. THE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS
6.
Purchasing
7.
Receiving, Storage, and Inventory
8.
Production
9.
Service
PART IV. THE FACILITIES
10. Facilities Planning and Design
11. Equipment and Furnishings
12. Environmental Management
PART V. THE MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
13. Organizational Design
14. Leadership
15. Human Resource Management
16. Performance Improvement
17. Financial Management
18. Marketing
APPENDIX A. Principles of Basic Cooking
APPENDIX B. Foodservice Equipment
American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking
Lou Sackett
David Haynes
ISBN 10: 0131109367
ISBN 13: 9780131109360
912pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in American Regional Cooking or American Cuisine.
Filled with colorful recipes and comprehensive information on American food culture and history, this book
provides an overview of American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking. Featuring over 300 master
recipes, it examines the culture, products and cuisine of fifteen culinary regions—from New England to Hawaii—
and the micro-cuisines that exist within each region. Designed for the working chef, its recipes offer an ideal
format based on how professionals actually cook in restaurants. The authors’ foodservice and education
backgrounds give the book the scholarly knowledge and the professional experience needed to make it an
authentic reference that meets the demands of today’s culinary students.
Table of Contents
KEYS TO UNDERSTANDING AMERICAN REGIONAL CUISINES
1.
Defining and Exploring America’s Regional Cuisines
2.
The Haynes Five Factors in the Development of a Regional Cuisine
3.
The Restaurant Recipe Format
THE PLANTATION SOUTH
4.
The Food Culture of the Plantation South
5.
The Carolina Lowcountry and Soul Food Micro-Cuisines
6.
Recipes and Ingredients of the Plantation South
NEW ENGLAND
7.
The Food Culture of New England
8.
The New England Acadian Micro-Cuisine
9.
Recipes and Ingredients of New England
THE CHESAPEAKE BAY SHORE
10. The Food Culture of the Chesapeake Bay Shore
11. Recipes and Ingredients of the Chesapeake Bay Shore
THE MID-ATLANTIC
12. The Food Culture of the Mid-Atlantic
13. The Pennsylvania Dutch Micro-Cuisine
14. Recipes and Ingredients of the Mid-Atlantic
LOUISIANA
15. The Food Culture of Louisiana
16. Recipes and Ingredients of Louisiana
THE MEXICAN BORDER
17. The Food Culture of the Mexican Border
18. The Southwestern Native American Micro-Cuisines
19. Recipes and Ingredients of the Mexican Border
THE APPALACHAIN SOUTH
20. The Food Culture of the Appalachian South
21. Recipes and Ingredients of the Appalachian South
THE CENTRAL FARMLANDS AND CITIES
221
22. The Food Culture of the Central Farmlands and Cities
23. The German-American, Polish-American, and Scandinavian-American Micro Cuisines
24. Recipes and Ingredients of the Central Farmlands and Cities
THE WESTERN AND CENTRAL RANCHLANDS
25. The Food Culture of the Western and Central Ranchlands
26. Recipes and Ingredients of the Western and Central Ranchlands
ANGLO-ASIAN CALIFORNIA
27. The Food Culture of Anglo-Asian California
28. The Chinese-American Micro-Cuisine
29. Recipes and Ingredients of Anglo-Asian California
THE PACIFIC NORTHWEST
30. The Food Culture of the Pacific Northwest
31. Recipes and Ingredients of the Pacific Northwest
THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS AND THE GREAT BASIN
32. The Food Culture of the Rocky Mountains and the Great Basin
33. Recipes and Ingredients of the Rocky Mountains and the Great Basin
HAWAII
34. The Food Culture of Hawaii
35. Recipes and Ingredients of Hawaii
SOUTH FLORIDA AND THE AMERICAN CARIBBEAN
36. The Food Culture of South Florida and the American Caribbean
37. The Cuban-American and Puerto Rican Micro-Cuisines
38. Recipes and Ingredients of South Florida and the American Caribbean
THE NEW YORK CITY MELTING POT
39. The Food Culture of the New York City Melting Pot
40. The Italian-American and Jewish-American Micro-Cuisines
41. Recipes and Ingredients of the New York City Melting Pot
AMERICA’S NATIONAL CUISINE
42. The Development, Decline, and Renaissance of America’s National Cuisine
AMERICAN BASICS
43. Fundamental Recipes
APPENDIX I:
BARBEQUE
APPENDIX II:
CURING AND SMOKING
APPENDIX III:
SEASONAL AVAILABILITY CHART FOR REGIONAL PRODUCTS
APPENDIX IV:
PRODUCT SOURCES
APPENDIX V:
GUIDE TO READING AND LISTENING
APPENDIX VI:
INDEX
Professional Server, The: A Training Manual,
2/e
Edward E. Sanders, Hospitality News Group
Paul C. Paz
Ronald C. Wilkinson
Marcella Giannasio
ISBN 10: 0131709925
ISBN 13: 9780131709928
240pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Hospitality/Travel/Tourism courses that focus on waiter/waitress training and
service of food.
Filled with real-life examples, The Professional Server: A Training Manual covers all aspects of dining room
service. This edition contains in-depth coverage of everything a good waiter or waitress needs to know to be
successful in this competitive profession–from professional appearance, to server readiness, to guest
communication. Self-contained chapters flow in a logical sequence and offer an explanation of table settings,
wine and beverage service and current technologies. Restaurant Reality stories, Server Profiles, charts and
photos give students an insider’s look into the realities of the profession.
Table of Contents
1.
The Professional Server
2.
Professional Appearance
3.
Table Settings, Napkin Presentations, and Table Service
4.
Serving Food and Beverages
5.
Service Readiness
6.
Wine and Beverage Service
7.
Guest Communication
8.
The Technology of Service
9.
The Host
10. Banquets, Catering, and Buffet Service
Appendix A: Common Menu Terms
Appendix B: Wine Terminology: General, Sight, Smell, and Taste
Appendix C: Spirit Brands and Related Cocktails
Appendix D: Ales, Lagers, and Non-Alcoholic Beers
222
Beverage Manager's Guide to Wines, Beers and
Spirits, The, 3/e
Albert W.A. Schmid
John Peter Laloganes
ISBN 10: 0132706725
ISBN 13: 9780132706728
360pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Beverage Management, Wines, Beers and Spirits, Dining Room Services and Beverage
Purchasing and Cost Control.
The Beverage Manager’s Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits, Third Edition, navigates the reader through
an intriguing journey on the vast world of alcoholic beverages. The text serves as an authoritative guide intended
to inspire those individuals pursuing or enhancing a career in the food and beverage industry; the book will be
equally fascinating for the beverage enthusiast. Written in a lively and engaging literary style, that is both
comprehensive and yet concise; exploring the essential management and service aspects of drink. Designed to
be intellectually appealing, with stimulating photography while providing the necessary knowledge on building and
sustaining a profitable beverage program. This read provides marvelous insights into the beverage industry by
discovering the sometimes perplexing, yet enduring influence of wines, beers and spirits that have been
inseparable from the evolution of civilization.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1.0 – AN EXPLORATION OF ALCOHOL BEVERAGES
1.
The Evolution of Alcoholic Beverages
2.
Alcohol Safety and Professional Beverage Service
UNIT 2.0 – AN EXPLORATION OF WINES
3.
Viticulture: Outside in the Vineyard
4.
Enology: Inside the Winery
5.
Wine Regulations and Labeling Methods
6.
The Wine Styling Approach
7.
Other Wines: Sparkling, Fortified and Dessert Wines
UNIT 3.0 – AN EXPLORATION OF BEERS
8.
The Brewery: Beer Production and Other Fermented Beverages
9.
Ales And Lagers Of The World
UNIT 4.0 – AN EXPLORATION OF SPIRITS
10. The Distillery: Spirits and Liqueurs of the World
11. Mixology: The Art and Science of the Cocktail
UNIT 5.0 – AN EXPLORATION OF BAR AND BEVERAGE MANAGEMENT
12. Constructing the Beverage Concept
13. Managing for Profit
14. Marketing the Beverage Establishment
APPENDIX
A.
The Science of Fermentation
B.
The Tasting Process
C. Food and Drink Pairing
D. Lexicon of Beverage Terms
Garde Manger: Cold Kitchen Fundamentals
The American Culinary Federation
Edward Leonard, Certified Master Chef, WACS Master Chef
Brenda R. Carlos
Tina Powers
ISBN 10: 0131182196
ISBN 13: 9780131182196
912pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in the Cold Kitchen, Banquets & Catering & Charcuterie.
ACF’s Cold Kitchen Fundamentals covers all aspects of the garde manger, from simple salad prep, to dressing and
sauce making, to appetizers, soups and sandwiches, to charcuterie, cheese making, and ice carving. Each
chapter is rich with photos, chef’s tips, and recipes and each unit includes learning activities and benchmark
formulas that encourage specific learning outcomes. Offering unique coverage of competition and food
technology, the book helps students understand the underlying principals of the cold kitchen and develop the
skills needed to produce their own signature sauces, salads, and more!
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE HISTORY OF THE COLD KITCHEN AND BASIC SANITATION
1.
Introduction of the Cold Kitchen
2.
Sanitation and Safety
SECTION TWO: EQUIPMENT AND INGREDIENTS
3.
Basic Equipment
4.
Flavorings
5.
Produce, Legumes and Grains
6.
Proteins in the Cold Kitchen
SECTION THREE: APPETIZERS
7.
Canapés
223
8.
Appetizers
SECTION FOUR: SANDWICHES AND COLD SOUPS
9.
Sandwiches
10. Cold Soups
SECTION FIVE: SALADS
11. Salad Basics
12. Side Salads
13. Main Course Salads
SECTION SIX: DRESSINGS, DIPS AND COLD SAUCES
14. Dressings
15. Cold Sauces, Dips, Aioli, Salsas, Relishes and Chutneys
SECTION SEVEN: FABRICATION
16. Curing, Smoking, Marinating, Drying and Pickling
17. Basic Charcutière
SECTION EIGHT: BUFFETS & CATERING
18. Buffets
19. Catering
SECTION NINE: THE CRAFT
20. Decorative Work, the Heart of the Garde Manger
21. Preparing for Culinary Competitions
Appendices
Appendix A Safety Charts
Appendix B Miscellaneous Charts
Appendix C Food Charts
Appendix D ACF COMPETITIONS
Appendix E Sources
224
Fashion
Retail Buying, 9/e
Jay Diamond, Nassau Community College
Gerald Pintel, Nassau Community College
ISBN 10: 0132179350
ISBN 13: 9780132179355
384pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Retail Buying, Retail Merchandising and Fashion Merchandising.
Retail Buying, Ninth Edition is known for its clear depiction of retail buying, reflecting what buyers face every
day in their pursuit of excellence. Focusing on the changes in today’s market, the book addresses topics such as
diverse ethnicities and the nuances of purchasing abroad. Contemporary market considerations are highlighted
throughout, including chapters on buying for discount operations, using the Internet for product procurement,
and methods of analyzing customer demand. With a host of end-of-chapter materials and visual aids, this book
continues its tradition of effectively preparing students for their role as professional retail buyers.
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL BUYING
1.
The Retail Playing Field
2.
The Buyer’s Role
3.
Buying Practices for the Different Retail Classifications
4.
The Market Specialists and how They Service Retailers
SECTION TWO: PLANNING THE PURCHASE
5.
Consumer Analysis
6.
Multiculturalism: Assessing the Product Needs of America’s Major Ethnicities
7.
What to Buy
8.
How Much to Buy
9.
Merchandise Sourcing and Timing the Purchase
SECTION THREE: MAKING THE PURCHASE
10. Purchasing in the Domestic Marketplace
11. Foreign Market Purchasing
12. The Importance of Business Etiquette When Purchasing in Global Markets
13. Wholesale Purchasing on the Internet
14. Negotiating the Purchase and Writing the Order
SECTION FOUR: ADDITIONAL BUYER RESPONSIBILITIES
15. Merchandise Pricing
16. The Development of Private-Label Programs
17. Disseminating Product information to Retail personnel
18. The Buyer’s Role in Planning Advertising, Special Events, and Visual Merchandising
Merchandising Mathematics for Retailing, 5/e
Cynthia R. Easterling
Ellen L. Flottman
Marian H. Jernigan, Texas Woman's University
Beth ES Wuest
ISBN 10: 0132724162
ISBN 13: 9780132724166
336pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in mathematics for retail merchandising.
Written by experienced retailers, this text introduces students to the essential principles and techniques of
merchandising mathematics, and explains how to apply them in solving everyday retail merchandising problems.
Instructor- and student-friendly, it features clear and concise explanations of key concepts, followed by problems,
case studies, spreadsheets, and summary problems using realistic industry figures. Most chapters lend
themselves to spreadsheet use, and skeletal spreadsheets are provided to instructors. This edition is extensively
updated to reflect current trends, and to discuss careers from the viewpoint of working professionals. It adds
20+ new case studies that encourage students to use analytic skills, and link content to realistic retail challenges.
This edition also contains a focused discussion of profitability measures, and an extended discussion of
assortment planning.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Introduction
Basic Merchandising Mathematics
Profitability
Cost of Merchandise Sold
Markup as a Merchandising Tool
Retail Pricing for Profit
Inventory Valuation
225
8.
9.
The Dollar Merchandise Plan
Open-to-Buy and Assortment Planning
Design Basics for Apparel
Virginia Elsasser
Julia Sharp
ISBN 10: 0132375281
ISBN 13: 9780132375283
250pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in fashion design or fashion merchandising.
Design Basics for Apparel is a handbook for students and professionals in the fashion industry who need a
good understanding of visual design. The book provides valuable information for fashion design and
merchandising students, encouraging readers to consider the elements and principles of design as a whole with
emphasis on the emotional and physical effect of clothing.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction to the Aspects of Design
Space
Line
Shape and Form
Light
Color
Texture
Repetition
Emphasis
Balance
Scale and Proportion
Unity and Harmony
Specialized Application in Apparel Design
Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global Economy
Susan S. Fiorito
Myron Gable
ISBN 10: 0135046602
ISBN 13: 9780135046609
432pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Retail Buying; Fashion Merchandising Planning and Buying; The Apparel Industry;
Advanced Retailing.
Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global Economy details every aspect of a buyer’s job and includes
step-by-step videos that detail the completion of Excel® spread sheets for assignments and in-depth instruction.
The text provides students with insights into buying from a truly global perspective, preparing them for the global
economy in which they will be working. In addition, students will find in-depth coverage of topics–such as
financial statements and ratios, branding, and technology–not found in other texts. From large international
specialty stores to small privately owned stores, this text covers all the skills and concepts students need to
pursue a career in retail buying.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Introduction to Retail Buying
Why Consumers Buy
A Basic Understanding of Financial Statements and Ratios
Determination of Markup and Pricing of Merchandise
Essentials of Markdown Management
The Merchandise Budget Planning Process
Assortment Planning
Branding
Selecting, Categorizing & Evaluating Vendor Relationships and Performance
The Legal Environment and Negotiating with Vendors
Advertising and Sales Promotion
Merchandise Resources
Buying in a Global Marketplace
The Basics of Fashion
Technology Trends in the Buying Process
226
Retail Category Management
Deborah Fowler
Ben Goh
ISBN 10: 0135152089
ISBN 13: 9780135152089
128pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Category Management or Retail Management.
Retail Category Management was created to help undergraduate students majoring in retailing, marketing, or
supply chain management understands the nature of the retail process. The text starts off with fundamental
concepts, such as an explanation of the original eight-step category, before moving to more complex topics,
including the latest models and concepts in the field. A final chapter on careers offers practical insights and
examples to help students as they consider their career options. The text is structured so that anyone with a
retail background can teach from it—even those not versed in category management.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Introduction
Retail Evolution and Strategies
Measurements and Productivity
Retail Value Chain Management
Category Management Cycles
Category Role
Category Management Strategies
Category Tactics
Shopper Insights
Careers in Category Management
Portfolio for Fashion Designers
Kathryn Hagen, Otis College of Art and Design
Julie Hollinger
ISBN 10: 0135020476
ISBN 13: 9780135020470
425pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For all junior and senior-level courses in fashion design that cover portfolio development.
This text brings together detailed information and step-by-step guidance for fashion design students seeking to
prepare portfolios that represent their personality and creative vision, and showcase their strongest skills.
Replete with examples of student work, it covers every topic related to fashion portfolio design and development.
Coverage includes: time management, four groups planning, mood boards, fabric, rendering and figures,
designing groups, flat templates, flats as a presentation layout, digital, resumes, and more. All of this text’s key
concepts and techniques are integrated through a complete portfolio example.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
The Big Picture
Gather Your Resources
Develop Your Fabric Skills
Creating Your Mini-Mockup Portfolio
Develop Your Designs
Develop Your Poses
Draw and Render Your Designs
Garment and Technical Flats
Digital Portfolios
Additional Portfolio Categories
Getting and Keeping the Job
Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion, An
Daniel Delis Hill
ISBN 10: 0131963678
ISBN 13: 9780131963672
504pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Fashion Design, Fashion/Costume History, Fashion Sketching/Illustration, and Theater
Costuming.
An Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion presents a comprehensive survey of dress from around
227
the world including Asia, Africa, the Islamic Empire, and the Ancient Americas. This extensive study features
descriptions and analysis of men’s, women’s and children’s clothing, accessories, and cultural styles from
prehistory into the twenty-first century. Lavishly illustrated, it features more than 1600 images—including over
100 in full color—and is a valuable resource for students of historical dress, fashion designers, theater costumers,
textile researchers, costume collectors and curators, and anyone interest in clothing and style customs of the
world.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Prehistory
The Ancient Near East
Egypt
The Aegean
Etruria and Rome
Byzantium
Northern Europe in the Early Middles Ages
Islamic Empire
China
Japan
India
Africa
The Ancient Americas
Middle Ages
Italy and Spain in the Renaissance 1450—1600
Northern Renaissance
The Seventeenth Century
The Eighteenth Century
The Nineteenth Century 1800—1850
The Nineteenth Century 1850–1900
The Twentieth Century 1900—1920
The Twentieth Century 1920–1940
The Twentieth Century 1940—1960
The Twentieth Century 1960–1980
The Twentieth Century 1980—Present
The Fashion Makers
Fashion from Victoria to the New Millennium
Daniel Delis Hill
ISBN 10: 013227518X
ISBN 13: 9780132275187
384pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Fashion Design, Fashion/Costume History, Fashion Sketching/Illustration, and Theater
Costuming.
This study of EuroAmerican fashion and style features a detailed, thoroughly illustrated chronology of women’s,
men’s, and children’s dress since 1800. Each chapter covers in detail virtually all categories of attire including
day attire, evening dress, outerwear, sportswear and swimwear, undergarments, sleepwear, accessories,
footwear, hats, hairstyles and grooming, and more. Over 800 illustrations, including more than 100 in full color,
visually document the past 200 years of fashion and style. Each era is introduced with an overview of the history
and cultural developments that impacted modern fashion. Also included are classroom projects for research and
portfolio, chapter glossaries of terms, an extensive bibliography, and a comprehensive index.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Prelude: The Empire and Romantic Eras: 1800-1850
The Victoria Age: 1850-1900
Edwardianism: 1900-1909
The End of Innocence and World War I: 1910-1919
The Jazz and Gin Age: 1920-1929
The Great Depression: 1930-1939
The Second World War and a New Look: 1940-1949
The Jet Age: 1950-1959
The Space Age: 1960-1969
The Me Decade: 1970-1979
A New Gilded Age: 1980-1989
From Cyberspace into the New Millennium: 1990 to Present
The Fashion Makers
228
Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising Math
Angella L. Hoffman
ISBN 10: 0132724146
ISBN 13: 9780132724142
288pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Retail Buying, Merchandising Math, Merchandise Management, Advanced Buying,
Strategic Merchandise Planning.
Bridging the gap between current merchandising math textbooks and retail buying textbooks, Fundamentals of
Retail Buying with Merchandising Math incorporates both buying philosophies and merchandising math. The
text's problem-based method of learning incorporates questions and problems that train the reader to think like a
buyer and encourage group collaboration and critical thinking. Simulated exercises mimic real-life buying
responsibilities. Additionally, the order of the chapters and content within each chapter mimic the training of an
assistant buyer in a corporate buying office. Providing a full, broad view of the retail buyer’s role, the text also
includes the key merchandising math formulae that is the basis of all retail buying analysis.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1: FORMULAS AND BASIC PRINCIPLES
1.
Sales and Percent Change
2.
Percent to Total
3.
Sell Thru
4.
Stock-to-Sales Analysis
5.
Markup & Markdowns
UNIT 2: MANAGING THE BUSINESS
6.
Purchase Orders
7.
The Six Month Merchandise Plan
8.
Profit & Loss Statement
9.
Cooperative Advertising
UNIT 3: PRIORITIZING AND NEGOTIATING
10. Buying Simulations
11. End-of-Season Negotiations
12. Monday Morning Reports (Sales)
13. Monday Morning Reports (Markdowns)
Draping for Fashion Design, 5/e
Hilde Jaffe, Fashion Institute of Technology
Nurie Relis, Fashion Institute of Technology
ISBN 10: 0132447274
ISBN 13: 9780132447270
272pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Fashion Design, Pattern Making, Draping, Introduction to Fashion, and Fashion
Promotion.
Draping for Fashion Design, Fifth Edition, is the definitive basic instructional text for draping in numerous
fashion design programs since its original publication. This book covers all of the fundamental material for
beginning and advanced study in an intensive fashion design program and prepares students for the industry.
Based on current industry methods, it reflects the dramatic changes of computer integration into the basic design
and pattern development process and demonstrates simplified methods wherever they are employed in the
industry. Updated throughout, the fifth edition offers a new chapter on children's wear, new illustrations, and
revised diagrams that enhance clarity.
Table of Contents
1.
Basic Preparation
2.
Basic Patterns
3.
Bodices
4.
Skirts
5.
Pants
6.
The Midriff and Yokes
7.
Collars
8.
Sleeves
9.
The Shift
10. The Princess Dress
11. Sportswear and Casual Wear
12. Tailored Garments
13. Children's Wear
14. Functional Finishes
15. Pockets
16. Draping in Fabric and Fitting
Appendix A: Conversion of Inches to Centimeters
229
Textiles: Basics
Sara J. Kadolph, Iowa State University
ISBN 10: 0132620820
ISBN 13: 9780132620826
336pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Textiles, Beginning Textiles, Basic Textiles, Textiles I, Textile Science.
Textiles: Basics provides students with a basic knowledge of textiles, preparing them for a career in the global
textile and apparel industry. This book gives students the foundation they need to make informed decisions
regarding textile materials and textile products and to communicate effectively with other individuals and
companies in the workplace.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Textiles
2.
Textile Serviceability and Sustainability
3.
Natural Fibers
4.
Manufactured and Synthetic Fibers
5.
Yarns
6.
Woven Fabrics
7.
Knit Fabrics
8.
Other Fabrics
9.
Finishes
10. Dyeing and Printing
11. Care of Textiles
Appendix A. Common Trade Names for Fibers, Fabrications, and Finishes
Appendix B. Guide to Stain Removal
Appendix C. World Map
Appendix D. Major Dye Classes
Appendix E. Fiber Names in Other Languages
Appendix F. Fiber Property Charts
Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e
Susan Lazear, Mesa College
ISBN 10: 0132785773
ISBN 13: 9780132785778
456pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For college and high school courses in Fashion Design by Computer, Fashion Illustration by Computer,
Computer Design, and CAD for Fashion.
This fully-updated text addresses industry’s need to train fashion students to draw fashion flats and illustrations,
textile designs, and presentations using the latest versions of Adobe Illustrator. Emphasizing the creative
process, Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e explores Illustrator’s powerful capabilities as related to
drawings of clothing, fashion poses, and textile prints. It offers clear and illustrated instructions throughout,
guiding students through learning all the electronic drawing techniques they will need to work successfully in
fashion. In this second edition, new online videos show students how to perform many key techniques step-bystep, and online examples of previous student projects inspire new students. This Second Edition also adds
updated coverage of merchandising techniques, electronic portfolio preparation, technical drawings, tech packs,
and much more.
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: TOUR OF ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR
1.
Overview of Adobe Illustrator
2.
Quick Start: Basic Drawing in Illustrator
3.
Illustrator’s Tools Panel
4.
Illustrator’s Menus
5.
Illustrators’ Panels
SECTION TWO: BASIC DRAWING EXERCISES
SECTION THREE: FASHION FLATS EXERCISES
SECTION FOUR: FASHION ILLUSTRATION EXERCISES
SECTION FIVE: TEXTILE DESIGN EXERCISES
SECTION SIX: PRESENTATION EXERCISES
230
Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal Appearance, 7/e
Suzanne Marshall
Hazel Jackson, California State University, Long Beach
M. Sue Stanley
ISBN 10: 0136136265
ISBN 13: 9780136136262
384pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Fashion and Fashion Merchandising.
Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal Appearance, Seventh Edition, provides a strong,
multidisciplinary foundation for individual and family clothing choices. Balancing theory with actual applications,
the authors present a broad base of knowledge at an introductory level for students' general education. Packed
with activities, learning objectives, illustrations, and photographs, this user-friendly book meets the needs of
future fashion professionals as well as students taking a single fashion course.
Table of Contents
I.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
II.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
III.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
INFLUENCES ON CONSUMER CLOTHING SELECTION
Socio-Psychological Influences
Cultural Influences
Physical Influences
Fashion Industry Influences
Target Market Influences
DESIGN ELEMENTS AND PRINCIPLES APPLIED TO CLOTHING SELECTION
Design Elements: Space, Shape, Form, and Line
Design Elements: Color
Design Elements: Texture
Design Principles
Fabric Design
CONSUMER CLOTHING SELECTION ISSUES
Clothing Fit
Clothing Quality
Clothing Care
Wardrobe Strategies
Clothing Purchasing Strategies
Workbook for the Fashion Designer: The Complete
Guide to Fashion Illustration
Aeran Park
ISBN 10: 0132675811
ISBN 13: 9780132675819
180pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For primary fashion drawing or illustration courses.
Workbook for The Fashion Designer: The Complete Guide To Fashion Illustration brings together
comprehensive and easy-to-understand step-by-step instructions for the core aspects of fashion illustration,
including figure variation examples, preparing beginning students to grow within their own styles and eventually
master advanced professional techniques. The author provides progressive instructional content for a 16 week
course, showing instructors who are not professional illustrators exactly “how to do it," with detailed instructions
and fully illustrated basic figure details and variations. It emphasizes stylized garment drawings, simplified
fashion drawing processes, practical usage, and skills that can be learned easily at students’ own pace. All
chapters are fully illustrated and gradually progress to rendering as students’ skills develop.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Understanding Body Proportion
Eyes. Nose. Mouth. Ears. Head
Hands. Arms. Feet. Legs
Hair
Fashion Poses-I Weight on One Leg Poses
Fashion Poses-II Three Quarter View Poses
Fashion Poses-III Variations
Garment Rendering: Tops
Garment Rendering: Bottoms
Garment Rendering: Jackets. Coats
Detailing Rendering: Drapery
Texture Rendering: Sheer. Lace. Satin
Texture Rendering: Patterns. Prints
Texture Rendering: Fur. Knits
Shoes. Handbags. Hats
Men. Children
231
Fashionomics
Donna W. Reamy
Deidra W. Arrington
ISBN 10: 0132109816
ISBN 13: 9780132109819
320pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses that integrate fashion, business, and economics; Fashion Merchandising; Survey of
Fashion; Global Fashion Business.
Fashionomics gives students a fundamental understanding of economic principles and their direct application to
the rational and decision-making of the fashion industry. From the Industrial Revolution to contemporary trends
in textiles and fashion, this text explores business and economic theories through real-world, up-to-date
examples applied to the fashion industry.
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
A Fashion History
The Language of Fashion
Fashion Economics
Fashion: Big Business
Profit = Success
Competition, the Stock Market, and Financial Measurement
Government Policies Affect Fashion
Dominating Segments of the Fashion Industry
Domestic and International Fashion Consumers
The Economic Impact of International Fashion Centers
International Fashion Economics
Trends in Fashionomics
Sewing for the Apparel Industry, 2/e
Claire Shaeffer
ISBN 10: 0131884433
ISBN 13: 9780131884434
600pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For freshmen-level courses in Industrial Sewing, Introduction to Industry Methods, Sewn Product
Techniques, Production Management, Workroom Techniques, and Beginning Apparel Construction.
Sewing for the Apparel Industry, Second Edition focuses on the fundamental principles of garment
construction, the interrelationship of assembly methods, and the elements which the designer must consider at
the outset of individual design creation. It details easy-to-master production operations, while emphasizing the
equipment, practical skills, and sewing processes used in apparel manufacturing. Efficient and cost effective
procedure descriptions complement material on the basic concept of design and desired quality, providing
students with an understanding of various production methods and how they affect design decisions and relate to
garment quality and labor and material costs.
Table of Contents
I APPAREL PRODUCTION
1.
Overview to Apparel Production
Quick Start Tutorial
2.
Orientation: The Lockstitch Machine
3.
Basic Machine Skills: The Lockstitch Machine
4.
Other Industrial Equipment
5.
Basic Production Skills
II BASIC OPERATIONS
6.
Seams, Types, Classifications, and Basic Plain Seams
7.
More Plain Seams
8.
Seam Finishes
9.
Self-finished Seams
10. Hems
11. Darts
12. Facings
13. Plackets
14. Interlinings
III BASIC PRODUCTION OPERATIONS
15. Assembling the Garment
16. Bands: Cuffs and Waistbands
17. Sleeves
18. Closures
19. Zippers
20. Collars
21. Pockets
232
22. Bias
23. Linings
IV BASIC KNIT APPLICATIONS: SEAMS, HEMS, EDGE FINISHES, BANDS AND CUFFS, ZIPPERS,
PLACKETS, AND SLEEVES
24. Knit Types and Seams
25. Hems and Edge Finishes
26. More Applications for Knits
Appendix 1: Safety Rules
Appendix 2: Forms
Appendix 3: Using Measuring Tools
Appendix 4: Fibers, Yarns, and Fabrics
Appendix 5: Hand Stitches
Appendix 6: Schematics of Seams and Stitches
Appendix 7: Troubleshooting Stitching and Pressing Defects
Appendix 8: Basic Tools and Supplies
Appendix 9: Burn Test
Appendix 10: Pattern Numbers and Shapes
At Your Fingertips
Jan Symington
Karen Peppercorn
ISBN 10: 1442544554
ISBN 13: 9781442544550
©2011 Paper Bound with PIN
Basic Approach
With over 250 colour photos and images, At Your Fingertips provides the foundation to this creative and vibrant
profession all in one volume. Basic salon and customer service skills, step-by-step procedures, as well as the
science of nails, and diseases and disorders of the hands, are all presented in plain English and full colour –
bringing the theory of nail technology to life.
At Your Fingertips covers all ten core units and five elective units in the Certificate II in Nail Technology from
the SIB10 Beauty Training Package.
Table of Contents
1.
Workplace personal health and safety
2.
Communication in the workplace
3.
Providing client services
4.
Financial transactions
5.
Selling products and services
6.
Applying nail science to nail services
7.
Performing manicure and pedicare services
8.
Nail enhancements
9.
Removing artificial nail enhancements
10. Applying gel enhancements
11. Applying acrylic enhancements
12. Applying nail art
13. Using electrical equipment
Appendix 1 Troubleshooting
Appendix 2 Research and apply beauty industry information
Fashion Drawing: Illustration Techniques for Fashion Designers
Michele Wesen Bryant, Virginia Commonwealth University
ISBN 10: 0135094240
ISBN 13: 9780135094242
416pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Appropriate for courses in Fashion Illustration and Introduction to Fashion.
This book is a comprehensive, practical guide to fashion drawing for students and designers looking to improve
their skills. With a contemporary and comprehensive approach, the book offers step-by-step guidance and shows
how drawing is an integral function of the garment design process. Illustrated throughout with a wide range of
images from key illustrators and designers, Fashion Drawing provides the instruction necessary to allow
students to develop their own illustration style.
Table of Contents
PART I: DRAWING FASHION FIGURES:
1.
Drawing Women
2.
Drawing Men
3.
Drawing Children and Young Adults
4.
Zooming In
233
5.
Working from Life/Model Drawing
PART II: GARMENT DETAILS:
6.
Basic Garment Details
7.
Drapery
8.
Tailored Clothing
PART III: RENDERING TECHNIQUES:
9.
Shine
10. Woven Wools
11. Print Fabrics
12. Sheers
234
Interior Design
Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers
Lydia Cline
ISBN 10: 013506421X
ISBN 13: 9780135064214
416pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Visual Presentation for Interior Design and Drafting for Interior Design.
Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers teaches architectural drafting skills, color rendering,
and visual presentation techniques for interior design students. Taking a tutorial approach, this easy-to-read text
walks students step-by-step from simple to more complex skills. Every step of the way full-color illustrations and
photos help students learn such techniques as concept sketching, drafting floor plans, creating 3-D pictorials,
rendering with markers, constructing color boards and models, and cutting a mat. Tear-out worksheets reinforce
the competencies for each chapter, providing easy opportunities for students to apply the concepts they have
learned.
Table of Contents
1.
The Design/Graphics Relationship
2.
Sketching
3.
Drafting and Lettering
4.
The Floor Plan
5.
Other Architectural Drawings
6.
Paraline Drawing
7.
Perspective Drawings
8.
Shade, Shadow and Reflections
9.
Color Theory
10. Rendering
11. Drawing Efficiencies
12. Color Boards and Books
13. The Scale Model
14. The Verbal Presentation
Appendices
I. Scaled line drawings of floor plans and interior elevations
II. How to cut a mat
Designer's Guide to Building Construction and Systems
Treena Crochet, A Matter of Style, Ltd.
ISBN 10: 0132414287
ISBN 13: 9780132414289
168pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Building Construction and Systems.
Designer’s Guide to Building Construction and Systems offers students a concise, easy-to-understand guide
for learning about building construction and systems in preparation for a successful practice as an interior
designer. Using language geared for students of interior design, the text covers basic structural principles applied
to the building environment through a review of common building methods including timber frame, masonry, and
steel construction for residential and commercial projects as applicable.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION: A BRIEF HISTORY OF STRUCTURES, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
SECTION I: RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION AND SYSTEMS
1.
Residential Construction: Building the Envelope
2.
Systems for Residential Construction
3.
Interior Finish-Out for Residential Construction
SECTION II: COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION AND SYSTEMS
4.
Commercial Construction: Building the Envelope
5.
Mechanical Systems for Commercial Buildings
6.
Interior Construction for Commercial Buildings
235
Designer's Guide to Furniture Styles, 3/e
Treena Crochet, A Matter of Style, Ltd.
ISBN 10: 0132050412
ISBN 13: 9780132050418
464pp ©2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in the history of interiors, history of furniture, and furniture design and construction.
This image-rich text introduces significant movements in the evolution of the decorative arts, including furniture,
design motifs, and accessories related to interior design and architectural settings from the Neolithic Age to the
21st century. It augments the study of art and architectural history by discussing the function and aesthetic
purpose of furniture, pottery, glassware, lighting, textiles, mirrors, metalworking, clocks, and wallcoverings; as
well as their integration into interior design. The author presents crucial contextual information on political and
social events and the technological advances that influenced each period’s design trends, and compares objects
from different periods, demonstrating how ideas and concepts progress through their stylistic development.
Descriptions of period room settings show how the decorative arts complement architecture and interior design.
Valuable websites and bibliographic information are provided for further exploration, and a glossary highlights key
vocabulary.
Table of Contents
PART 1. HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENTS
1.
The Ancient World
2.
Ancient Greece and Rome
3.
The Medieval Period
PART 2. THE MODERN WORLD
4.
Fifteenth and Sixteenth Centuries
5.
The Seventeenth Century
6.
The Eighteenth Century
7.
The Late Eighteenth and Early Nineteenth Centuries
8.
The Nineteenth Century
9.
The Twentieth and Twenty-First Centuries
10. Furniture Construction
Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History to the
Present
Buie Harwood, Professor Emeritus, Virginia Commonwealth University
Bridget May, Marymount University
Curt Sherman, Professor Emeritus, Winthrop University
ISBN 10: 0135093570
ISBN 13: 9780135093573
912pp ©2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
The book is most appropriate for an integrated design history course, typically titled History of
Architecture, Interior Design, Furnishings, and Decorative Arts.
Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History to the Present provides a survey of architecture,
interiors, furniture, and decorative arts from the past to the present. It is a completely integrated and
interdisciplinary reference for: architecture, architectural details, architectural surface treatments, space
planning, interior design, interior architectural features, interior surface treatments, motifs, furniture, color,
lighting, textiles, and decorative accessories.
The unique scope allows comparison in all areas of the built environment through the centuries to illustrate
historical, social, cultural, and stylistic influences. Narrative and graphics interweave design analysis with
architectural and design history.
Table of Contents
A. INTRODUCTION
1.
Cultural Precedents
B. EAST ASIA
2.
China
3.
Japan
C. ANTIQUITY
4.
Egypt
5.
Greece
6.
Rome
D. MIDDLE AGES
7.
Early Christian
8.
Byzantine
9.
Islamic
10. Romanesque
11. Gothic
E. RENAISSANCE
12. Italian Renaissance
13. Spanish Renaissance
236
14. French Renaissance
15. English Renaissance
16. American Colonial
F. BAROQUE
17. European Baroque
18. Louis XIV
19. English Restoration
G. ROCOCO
20. Regence & Louis XV
21. English Neo-Palladian & Georgian
22. American Georgian
H. EARLY NEOCLASSIC
23. Louis XVI & French Provincial
24. Late English Georgian
25. American Federal
I. REVOLUTION
26. Industrial Revolution
J. LATE NEOCLASSIC
27. Directoire, French Empire
28. German Greek Revival, Biedermeier
29. English Regency, British Greek Revival
30. American Greek Revival, American Empire
K. VICTORIAN REVIVALS
31. Gothic Revival
32. Italianate, Renaissance Revival
33. Second Empire, Rococo Revival
34. Exoticism
35. Stick, Queen Anne
L. ACADEMIC HISTORICISM
36. Romanesque Revival
37. Classical Eclecticism
38. Colonial Revival
39. Spanish Colonial Revival
M. REFORMS
40. The Shakers
41. Aesthetic Movement
42. English Arts & Crafts
43. Shingle, American Arts & Crafts
N. INNOVATION
44. Art Nouveau
45. Vienna Secession
46. Chicago School
47. Modern Forerunners
48. DeStijl
49. The Bauhaus
O. MODERNISM
50. International Style
51. Art Deco, Art Moderne
52. Scandinavian Modern
53. Geometric Modern
54. Organic & Sculptural Modern
55. Modern Historicism
P. EXPERIMENTATION
56. Late Modern • 1
57. Post Modern
58. Late Modern • 2
59. Environmental Modern
60. Neo-Modern
Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design
Samuel L. Hurt, R.I.D., P.E., R.A.
ISBN 10: 0137033036
ISBN 13: 9780137033034
240pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses, or portions of courses, focused on Codes, Regulations, and Standards for Interior Design.
Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design shows interior design students and practitioners how
to make the incorporation of code requirements an integral part of their design process. The text develops a
clear understanding of the reasons for, the history of, the meaning and application of, and the enforcement of
applicable codes, regulations, and standards to real problems in Interior Design. Hurt instills in students that
codes, regulations, and standards are not "necessary evils", but are there to assist them as designers in
understanding and applying the principles of life safety and property protection, both of which are important and
integral goals in any design project. The text covers the most current reference documents available today–
primarily the 2009 series of model codes from the International Code Council.
237
Table of Contents
1.
Why is Code Language So Difficult?
2.
What Are Codes?
3.
What is Code Enforcement?
4.
What is Building Type?
5.
What is Occupancy Type?
6.
What is Egress?
7.
What is Accessibility?
8.
Interior Materials Requirements
9.
Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing
10. Residential Requirements
11. Building Renovation Requirements
Appendix A: Design Tips
Appendix B: Definitions
Appendix C: Resources
Appendix D: Exercises
Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals,
3/e
Peter A. Koenig, Florida State University
ISBN 10: 013713696X
ISBN 13: 9780137136964
192pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For beginning/intermediate-level Basic Design Drawing courses in Interior Design, Architecture, and
other related programs.
Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals, Third Edition, combines–in a single
volume–simple techniques and skills related to sketching, design-development, and the schematic or preliminary
phase of design presentation. Emphasizing drawing as a mental as well as physical exercise, the text helps
students draw designs on paper faster and easier, showing them how visual communication with clients can
provide better, more economical design solutions. Practical, straightforward, and reader-friendly, Design
Graphics provides more complete coverage of the basics, making concepts and techniques accessible to students
with highly diversified educational and technical backgrounds.
Table of Contents
Introduction: Drawing
I SKETCHING
1.
The Basics
2.
Line
3.
Light
4.
Texture
II DESIGN DRAWING
5.
Conceptual/Doodle Diagrams
6.
Perspective Drawing
III DRAWING PROCESS
7.
One-Point Eyeball Perspective
8.
Two-Point Eyeball Perspective
9.
Overlay Method
10. Entourage for Final Drawings
11. Presentation
Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and Writing
Dak Kopec
Edith Sinclair
Bruce Matthes
ISBN 10: 0132174065
ISBN 13: 9780132174060
224pp ©2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Research Methods, Design Research, Design Thesis, or Dissertation Preparation.
Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and Writing serves as a guide to help students
conceptualize and formulate their design ideas and then to evaluate and test those ideas through a succinct,
organized process. The result is the culmination of a comprehensive document that articulates a design concept
and justifies key design attributes. Step-by-step, students are guided through the process of writing a robust,
research-based document geared towards empirical design research. From developing a critical position to
performing a thorough review of the literature to providing an overview of common research methods, this text is
a perfect guide for students producing an evidence-based thesis or dissertation.
Table of Contents
1.
Call for Methods-Based Research
238
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Importance of Citations
Developing a Line of Logic
Formation of a Topic and Argument
Review of Literature
Issues in Research
Methods
Site Analysis and Case Studies
Surveys, Interviews and Observations
Historical Analysis Method and Photo Analysis Method
Experimentation and Computer Modeling
The Final Phase
Perspective and Sketching for Designers
Jessica Newman
Jack Beduhn
ISBN 10: 0132574942
ISBN 13: 9780132574945
230pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For all first perspective drawing courses at the Freshman/Sophomore level for majors including
Interior Design, Graphic Design, Game Art, Animation, and Industrial Design; and for all courses in
Interior Design Perspective, Sketch, and/or Presentation. This book will also be useful in high school
courses for students pursuing careers in the Applied Arts.
This book helps students learn how to draw quickly and believably by mastering practical techniques for
perspective drawing and estimating scale and proportion. Drawing on extensive experience teaching beginners,
the authors overcome many limitations of previous books. Rather than featuring professional work that
beginners can’t possibly duplicate, they show examples of student drawings, helping students gain confidence and
gauge their progress. Avoiding unnecessary theory, math, and jargon, they help students develop an intuitive
sense of scale and proportion for creating believable perspectives, and offer valuable tricks and shortcuts
throughout. In place of lengthy narratives, they support each lesson with supporting video walking through key
techniques. The authors also devote lessons to SketchUp (for blocking out perspectives) and Photoshop (for
enhancing sketches).
Table of Contents
Introduction
Lesson 1.
Lesson 2.
Lesson 3.
Lesson 4.
Lesson 5.
Lesson 6.
Lesson 7.
Lesson 8.
Lesson 9.
Lesson 10.
Lesson 11.
Lesson 12.
Lesson 13.
Lesson 14.
Perspective Basics
One-point Perspective
Two-point Perspective and Ellipses
Two-point Perspective Proportioning Methodologies
Proportioning a Two-point Perspective
Perceived Sale and Multiple Vanishing Points
Shadows and Reflections
People, Lighting and Colorizing
Three-point Perspective and Horizon Line Tricks
Chiaroscuro/value
Markers and color
Color pencils
Metallic surfaces
Wood
Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior
Design, The
Josette H. Rabun, Assessment Training Institute, Inc.
Catherine L. Kendall, University of Tennessee
Julie H. Rabun, University of Pittsburg, Johnstown
ISBN 10: 0130925381
ISBN 13: 9780130925381
400pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Appropriate as a working tool for Interior Designers as well as professionals in related fields.
The Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design includes traditional, historic, and modern day
terminology ranging from pre-classical to present day. The scope of the words, articulated with precise anglicized
definitions that include illustrations where appropriate, will prove to be an invaluable resource to the professional
and amateur alike.
Table of Contents
Guide to Pronunciation
Dictionary of Words
Architects, Artists, and Designers
Appendix
239
Conceptualize, Create, Communicate: Designing
Living Spaces with Google SketchUp
Bonnie Roskes
Annie Elliott
ISBN 10: 0135125804
ISBN 13: 9780135125809
350pp ©2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Interior Design.
Until now, interior design education has focused on overly complex software programs such as AutoCAD—the
equivalent of hitting a fly with a sledgehammer. This breakthrough text helps create and present designs using
free, easy-to-learn software: Google SketchUp. Created specifically for college-level courses in Interior Design,
the text covers all of the ways SketchUp can be used for interior design and decorating. Step-by-step, illustrated
projects walk readers through the design process, including modeling an empty room, finding or creating
furniture and accessories, using color and materials, and presenting designs to clients.
Table of Contents
Introduction
1.
Model a Room
2.
Furnish a Room
3.
Basic Furniture: Straight Lines
4.
Advanced Furniture: Curvy Lines
5.
Working with 3D Warehouse Models
6.
Working with Colors and Materials
7.
Working with Digital Images
8.
Kitchen Design
9.
Presenting Your Designs
10. Labels, Dimensions, and Plans
Appendix:
Additional Products
240
AUTHOR
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
BUSINESS & ECONOMICS
© YR
Page
A
Aguinis
Performance Management, 3/e
0132974355
9780132974356
2013
128
Albaum
International Marketing and Export Management, 7/e
0273743880
9780273743880
2011
175
Alon
Global Franchising Operations Management: Cases in
International and Emerging Markets Operations, 1/e
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Corporations,
Partnerships, Estates and Trusts, 26/e
Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success, 3/e
0132884143
9780132884143
2012
61
0132891549
9780132891547
2013
35
Anderson
Anderson
0132624664
9780132624664
2013
128
Jump Right In: Essential Computer Skills Using
Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e
Managing Business Process Flows, 3/e
013297570X
9780132975704
2013
38
0132811367
9780132811361
2012
61
0273754947
9780273754947
2012
2
Armstrong
Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software,
14/e
Marketing: An Introduction, 11/e
0273767186
9780273767183
2013
176
Armstrong
Marketing: An Introduction, 2/e
0273762605
9780273762607
2012
176
Armstrong
Principles of Marketing, 5/e
144253110X
9781442531109
2012
175
Arnold
Essentials of Corporate Financial Management, 2/e
027375887X
9780273758877
2013
105
Arnold
Modern Financial Markets and Institutions: A Practical
Perspective, 1/e
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and
Associations, 7/e
The Psychology of People in Organisations, 1/e
0273730355
9780273730354
2012
105
1442519568
9781442519565
2012
2
0273755765
Andrews
Anupindi
Arens
Arthur
Ashleigh
9780273755760
2012
129
0273769987
9780273769989
2011
3
Atrill
Management Accounting: Information for DecisionMaking and Strategy Execution, 6/e
Financial Management for Decision Makers, 6/e
0273756931
9780273756934
2011
105
Atrill
Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
144253480X
9781442534803
2012
4
Atrill
Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e
0273763458
9780273763451
2011
3
Atrill
Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e
0273762265
9780273762263
2012
4
Author
IT Project Library Project #1, 1/e
0132766884
9780132766883
2013
45
Author
IT Project Library Project #2, 1/e
0132766949
9780132766944
2013
45
Author
IT Project Library Project #3, 1/e
0132766930
9780132766937
2014
45
Author
IT Project Library Project #4, 1/e
0132766914
9780132766913
2013
45
Author
IT Project Library Project #5, 1/e
0132766892
9780132766890
2013
45
Author
IT Project Library Project #6, 1/e
0132766957
9780132766951
2013
45
Author
IT Project Library Project #7, 1/e
0132766906
9780132766906
2013
45
Bade
Essential Foundations of Economics, 6/e
0132833115
9780132833110
2013
76
Bade
Foundations of Economics, 6/e
0132984873
9780132984874
2013
76
Bade
Foundations of Macroeconomics, 6/e
0133029522
9780133029529
2013
76
Bade
Foundations of Microeconomics, 6/e
0132830884
9780132830881
2013
76
Balakrishnan
Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3/e
0132969440
9780132969444
2013
62
Barney
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, 4/e
0132560453
9780132560450
2012
129
Barney
0132560445
9780132560443
2012
129
0273761404
9780273761402
2012
130
0135078660
9780135078662
2013
214
Beams
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage:
Concepts, 4/e
Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New
Ventures, 4/e
Menu, The: Development, Strategy, and Application,
1/e
Advanced Accounting, 11/e
0132830361
9780132830362
2012
5
Beasley
Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e
0132815591
9780132815598
2012
5
Beech
Events Management, 1/e
0273758624
9780273758624
2013
206
Beekman
0132737515
9780132737517
2012
39
0132737523
9780132737524
2012
39
Bekaert
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You,
Complete, 10/e
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You,
Introductory, 10/e
International Financial Management, 2/e
013284298X
9780132842983
2012
106
Berenson
Basic Business Statistics, 12/e
0273753185
9780273753186
2012
62
Berk
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 2/e
0273753460
9780273753469
2012
106
Berman
Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12/e
0273768565
9780273768562
2013
177
Best
Market-Based Management, 6/e
0132848163
9780132848169
2012
177
Best
Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e
1442541199
9781442541191
2011
6
Bexley
Selling Financial Products, 1/e
0132752131
9780132752138
2012
178
Bhimani
Introduction to Management Accounting, 1/e
0273737554
9780273737551
2012
7
Bhimani
Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e
0273762230
9780273762232
2012
6
Atkinson
B
Barringer
Barrish
Beekman
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
B
Birt
1442552654
9781442552654
2011
130
Blanchard
Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business
(Revised), 3/e
Effective Training, 5/e
0273768379
9780273768371
2013
131
Blanchard
Macroeconomics: A European Perspective, 1/e
0273763113
9780273763116
2011
77
Blythe
Essentials of Marketing, 5/e
0273757687
9780273757689
2012
178
Boardman
Foundations of Business Thought, 1/e
0132856077
9780132856072
2013
121
Bocij
0273736450
9780273736455
2012
49
Boczko
Business Information Systems: Technology,
Development and Management, 5/e
Introduction to Accounting Information Systems, 1/e
0273739387
9780273739388
2012
7
Boddy
Essentials of Management: A Concise Introduction, 1/e
027373928X
9780273739289
2012
131
Bodnar
Accounting Information Systems, 11/e
0132871939
9780132871938
2013
8
Bokunewicz
Casino Gaming Technology, 1/e
0135046041
9780135046043
2012
206
Bovee
Business Communication Essentials, 5/e
0132564807
9780132564809
2012
124
Bovee
Business Communication Today, 11/e
0273761463
9780273761464
2012
124
Bovee
Business in Action, 6/e
0132828782
9780132828789
2013
121
Boyle
Corporate Computer Security, 3/e
0132599023
9780132599023
2013
49
Bozarth
027377008X
9780273770084
2012
63
Bozionelos
Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain
Management, 3/e
Managing People in Organisations, 1/e
027372679X
9780273726791
2013
131
Braun
Managerial Accounting, 3/e
0132954796
9780132954792
2013
8
Breitner
Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e
0132744392
9780132744393
2013
9
Breitner
Essentials of Accounting, 11/e
0273771469
9780273771463
2012
9
Brooks
Financial Management: Core Concepts, 2/e
0273768476
9780273768470
2012
107
Broom
Cutlip and Center's Effective Public Relations, 11/e
0273768395
9780273768395
2012
178
Browaeys
Understanding Cross-Cultural Management, 2/e
0273732951
9780273732952
2011
132
Brown
Managing Information Technology, 7/e
0132737531
9780132737531
2012
49
Brunsdon
Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical Approach,
6/e
Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant
2011: A Practical Approach and QuickBooks 2011
Software, 5/e
Learning Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Student Edition,
1/e
Financial Crisis: Causes, Context and Consequences,
1/e
International Finance: A Practical Perspective, 1/e
0132751674
9780132751674
2013
10
0132743256
9780132743259
2012
10
0135112109
9780135112106
2012
44
027373511X
9780273735113
2011
108
0273731866
Brunsdon
Bucki
Buckley
Buckley
9780273731863
2012
108
Quantitative Methods for Business and Management,
1/e
eTourism: Information Technology for Strategic
Tourism Management, 2/e
Basic Marketing Research with Excel, 3/e
0273736280
9780273736288
2012
63
027373783X
9780273737834
2013
179
0132598965
9780132598965
2012
179
Cafferky
Management: A Faith-Based Perspective, 1/e
0136058345
9780136058342
2012
132
Cannon
Corporate Responsibility: Governance, Compliance and
Ethics in a Sustainable Environment, 2/e
Management Skills for Everyday Life, 3/e
0273738739
9780273738732
2012
133
0132479079
9780132479073
2012
133
1442547626
9781442547629
2012
134
0273736418
9780273736417
2013
134
0132730014
9780132730013
2013
135
0132598973
Buglear
Buhalis
Burns
C
Caproni
Carlopio
Carnall
Carrell
Carter
Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive
Guide for Leaders, 5/e
Managing Change in Organizations, 6/e
Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and
Public Sectors, 10/e
Keys to Business Communication, 1/e
9780132598972
2012
125
0273726102
9780273726104
2012
135
Case
Enterprise and Small Business: Principles, Practice and
Policy, 3/e
Principles of Economics, 10/e
027375372X
9780273753728
2012
78
Case
Principles of Macroeconomics, 10/e
0273754823
9780273754824
2012
78
Case
Principles of Microeconomics, 10/e
0273754696
9780273754695
2012
78
Casu
Introduction to Banking, 2/e
0273718134
9780273718130
2013
109
Cavusgil
Framework of International Business, A, 1/e
0132598949
9780132598941
2013
136
Cavusgil
International Business: The New Realities, 2/e
0132453274
9780132453271
2012
136
Cavusgil
International Business: The New Realities, Australasian
Edition, 1/e
Modern Management: Concepts and Skills, 12/e
1442533560
9781442533561
2012
137
0273756761
9780273756767
2011
138
0273752014
9780273752011
2011
50
Carter
Certo
Chaffey
E-Business and E-Commerce Management: Strategy,
Implementation and Practice, 5/e
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
C
Chaffey
0273746103
9780273746102
2012
180
013274774X
9780132747745
2013
214
Chopra
Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and
Practice, 5/e
World of Culinary Management, The: Leadership and
Development of Human Resources, 5/e
Supply Chain Management, 5/e
0273765221
9780273765226
2013
64
Clawson
Level Three Leadership: Getting Below the Surface, 5/e
0132556413
9780132556415
2012
138
Cline
013506421X
9780135064214
2012
235
0273753282
9780273753285
2012
180
Clow
Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers,
1/e
Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communications, 5/e
Integrated Marketing Communications, 1/e
0733992900
9780733992902
2012
181
Cole
SharePoint for Students, 1/e
0130000094
9780130000095
2012
50
Conger
Hands-On Database, 1/e
013610827X
9780136108276
2012
51
Cooper
Essentials of Tourism, 1/e
027372438X
9780273724384
2012
181
Cooter
Law and Economics, 6/e
0132846152
9780132846158
2012
79
Cotter
Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to
IFRS, 1/e
Strategic Management in Action, 6/e
0273732358
9780273732358
2012
10
Chesser
Clow
Coulter
0132620677
9780132620673
2013
139
0273761900
9780273761907
2013
64
Coyle
Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories and
Practice, 2/e
Next Series: Web 2.0, 2/e
0132840154
9780132840156
2012
42
CPA
Accounting Handbook 2012, 1/e
1442558105
9781442558106
2012
11
CPA
Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012, 1/e
1442558091
9781442558090
2012
12
Crochet
Designer's Guide to Building Construction and
Systems, 1/e
Designer's Guide to Furniture Styles, 3/e
0132414287
9780132414289
2012
235
0132050412
9780132050418
2013
236
0273720481
9780273720485
2012
64
Cousins
Crochet
Crocker
Inbound Logistics Management: Storage and Supply of
Materials for the Modern Supply Chain, 7/e
D
Dagwell
Corporate Accounting in Australia, 1/e
1442527161
9781442527164
2012
13
Daniels
International Business, 14/e
0273766953
9780273766957
2013
139
David
0273767488
9780273767480
2013
140
0273767607
9780273767602
2013
140
Davies
Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage
Approach, Concepts and Cases, 14/e
Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage
Approach, Concepts, 14/e
Business Accounting and Finance, 1/e
027372312X
9780273723127
2011
13
Davies
Financial Accounting, 1/e
0273723073
9780273723073
2012
14
Davis
Advertising Research: Theory & Practice, 2/e
0132128322
9780132128322
2012
181
David
De Kluyver
Strategy: A View From The Top, 4/e
0132145626
9780132145626
2012
141
Dean
Sustainable Venturing, 1/e
0136044891
9780136044895
2013
141
Delves-Broughton
0273761986
9780273761983
2012
141
DeMarr
Financial Time Guide to Management: The Art and
Science of Being an Effective Manager, 1/e
Negotiation and Dispute Resolution, 1/e
0131577530
9780131577534
2013
142
Deresky
International Management, 2/e
1442539674
9781442539679
2012
142
Dessler
Framework for Human Resource Management, A, 7/e
0132576147
9780132576147
2013
143
Dessler
Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2/e
0132570130
9780132570138
2012
143
Dessler
Human Resource Management, 13/e
0273766023
9780273766025
2013
143
Dessler
Supervision and Leadership in a Changing World, 1/e
0135058651
9780135058657
2012
144
Diamond
Retail Buying, 9/e
0132179350
9780132179355
2013
225
Dixon
013139181X
9780131391819
2012
215
Donnelly
Food Defense Fundamentals: Using the S.H.A.R.E.
Principle To Protect the Global Food Supply, 1/e
Business Statistics, 1/e
0132145391
9780132145398
2013
65
Dorfman
Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 10/e
0131394126
9780131394124
2013
110
Dubrin
Human Relations: Interpersonal Job-Oriented Skills,
11/e
Human Relations for Career and Personal Success,
Canadian Edition, 4/e
Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills, 5/e
0132680033
9780132680035
2012
145
0138127875
9780138127879
2012
145
1442548487
9781442548480
2013
121
Eagle
Social Marketing, 1/e
0273727222
9780273727224
2013
182
Easterling
Merchandising Mathematics for Retailing, 5/e
0132724162
9780132724166
2013
225
Ebert
Business Essentials, 9/e
0273766597
9780273766599
2013
121
Egan
Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies
in Marketing, 4/e
0273737783
9780273737780
2011
183
DuBrin
Dwyer
E
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
013272765X
9780132727655
2012
79
Eiteman
Modern Labor Economics: Theory and Public Policy,
11/e
Multinational Business Finance, 13/e
0273765531
9780273765530
2013
110
Elliott
Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e
0273760882
9780273760887
2012
14
Elsasser
Design Basics for Apparel, 1/e
0132375281
9780132375283
2013
226
Emery
Sustainable Marketing, 1/e
1408292777
9781408292778
2012
183
Estrin
Microeconomics, 6/e
0273734873
9780273734871
2012
80
Evans
Business Analytics, 1/e
0133051714
9780133051711
2013
65
Evans
Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling, 5/e
0273768220
9780273768227
2012
65
Evans
Technology In Action Complete, 9/e
0132928388
9780132928380
2013
39
Evans
Technology In Action Introductory, 9/e
0132924528
9780132924528
2013
39
Fabozzi
Bond Markets, Analysis and Strategies, 8/e
0273766139
9780273766131
2013
110
Farrington
Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, 8/e
0273723685
9780273723684
2012
66
Fenich
0132719916
9780132719919
2012
206
0132861070
9780132861076
2012
40
Ferrett
Meetings, Expositions, Events and Conventions: An
Introduction to the Industry, 3/e
Computer Literacy for IC3 Unit 2: Using Productivity
Software, 1/e
Computer Literacy for IC3 Update for Windows 7, 1/e
0132873974
9780132873970
2012
40
Ferrett
GO! with Office 2010 Volume 1, 2/e
0132840162
9780132840163
2013
46
Fetchko
Sports Marketing, 1/e
0132135469
9780132135467
2013
184
E
Ehrenberg
F
Ferrett
Fill
Essentials of Marketing Communications, 1/e
0273738445
9780273738442
2011
184
Fill
Advertising, 1/e
0273760890
9780273760894
2013
184
Fill
Corporate Reputation, Brand and Communication, 1/e
0273727591
9780273727590
2012
184
Finkler
0132912813
9780132912815
2013
15
0135046602
9780135046609
2012
226
Fisher
Financial Management for Public, Health, and Not-forProfit Organizations, 4/e
Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global
Economy, 1/e
Business Ethics and Values, 4/e
0273757911
9780273757917
2012
146
Fletcher
Tourism: Principles and Practice, 5/e
0273758276
9780273758273
2013
207
Folland
Economics of Health and Health Care, The, 7/e
013295480X
9780132954808
2013
81
Foot
Introducing Human Resource Management, 6/e
0273740989
9780273740988
2011
146
Foster
Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain, 5/e
0273768255
9780273768258
2013
67
Fowler
Retail Category Management, 1/e
0135152089
9780135152089
2012
227
Freeman
Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e
0132751267
9780132751261
2013
15
Frino
Introduction to Corporate Finance, 5/e
1442542489
9781442542488
2012
111
Froyen
Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies, 10/e
0273765981
9780273765981
2013
81
Furdell
Practical Chef's Reference, The: A Compendium of
Charts, Formulas and Ratios, 1/e
0135125774
9780135125779
2013
215
027374240X
9780273742401
2013
111
0132544849
9780132544849
2012
46
0132844125
9780132844123
2013
46
Gaskin
Financial Times Handbook of Financial Engineering:
Tools and Techniques for Managing Derivatives,
Options, Swaps and Risk, 3/e
GO! with Microsoft Office Web Apps Getting Started,
1/e
Go! All in One: Computer Concepts and Applications,
1/e
GO! with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started, 1/e
013293454X
9780132934541
2012
46
Gaskin
GO! With Microsoft Excel 2010 Introductory, 1/e
0132743787
9780132743785
2011
46
Gaskin
GO! with Microsoft OneNote 2010 Getting Started, 1/e
0132542994
9780132542999
2012
46
Gaskin
GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
0132791285
9780132791281
2012
46
Gaskin
GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Getting Started, 1/e
013702536X
9780137025367
2012
46
Gaskin
GO! with Microsoft Publisher 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
0132791722
9780132791724
2012
46
Gaskin
GO! with Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Getting Started,
1/e
GO! with Microsoft Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e
0132543028
9780132543026
2012
46
Fiorito
G
Galitz
Gaskin
Gaskin
Gaskin
0132375753
9780132375757
2012
47
013254329X
9780132543293
2012
47
Gaskin
GO! with Microsoft Windows Live and Windows Live
Essentials Getting Started, 1/e
GO! with Office 2010 Integrated Projects, 1/e
0132843307
9780132843300
2012
46
Gaskin
GO! with Office 365 Getting Started, 1/e
0132955741
9780132955744
2013
47
Gendron
Business Driven Data Communications, 1/e
0131564978
9780131564978
2013
51
Geoghan
Visualizing Technology, Complete, 1/e
0137056346
9780137056347
2012
41
Geoghan
Visualizing Technology, Introductory, 1/e
013137625X
9780131376250
2012
41
Gaskin
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
G
George
0273753797
9780273753797
2012
146
Gitman
Understanding and Managing Organizational Behavior,
6/e
Fundamentals of Investing, 3/e
1442532882
9781442532885
2012
112
Gitman
Principles of Managerial Finance, 13/e
0273754289
9780273754282
2012
113
Gitman
Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief, 6/e
0132701065
9780132701068
2012
113
Glazer
0132779889
9780132779883
2012
67
027375940X
9780273759409
2013
114
Goergen
High Performance Operations: Leverage Compliance to
Lower Costs, Increase Profits, and Gain Competitive
Advantage, 1/e
Corporate Governance: Principles and Perspectives,
1/e
International Corporate Governance, 1/e
0273751255
9780273751250
2012
147
Gomez-Mejia
Management, 1/e
0132604337
9780132604338
2012
148
Gomez-Mejia
Managing Human Resources, 7/e
0132570149
9780132570145
2012
148
Gonzalez-Rivera
Forecasting for Economics and Business, 1/e
0131474936
9780131474932
2013
81
Gordon
Macroeconomics, 12/e
0132727676
9780132727679
2012
82
Graham
Critical Thinking in Consumer Behavior, 3/e
0132760118
9780132760119
2013
185
Grant
Logistics Management, 1/e
0273731351
9780273731351
2012
67
Grauer
0132140136
9780132140133
2012
44
0132149621
9780132149624
2012
45
Grauer
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with
VBA, 1/e
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with
Web Apps, 1/e
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e
0132873605
9780132873604
2013
44
Gravelle
Microeconomics, 4/e
0273710400
9780273710400
2013
82
Greenberg
Managing Behavior in Organizations, 6/e
0132729830
9780132729833
2013
149
Greene
Econometric Analysis, 7/e
0273753568
9780273753568
2012
83
Greenland
Strategic Communication: Cases in Marketing, Public
Relations, Advertising and Media, 1/e
Food Service Organizations: A Managerial and Systems
Approach, 8/e
International Business, 7/e
1442555491
9781442555495
2012
185
0132620812
9780132620819
2013
216
0273765868
Goddard
Grauer
Gregoire
Griffin
9780273765868
2013
149
0132741059
9780132741057
2013
149
Griffiths
Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at
Work, 2/e
Applied Economics, 12/e
0273736906
9780273736905
2011
84
Griffiths
Economics for Business and Management, 3/e
0273735241
9780273735243
2011
84
Grimwade
International Trade, 1/e
0273718886
9780273718888
2013
85
Hagen
Portfolio for Fashion Designers, 1/e
0135020476
9780135020470
2013
227
Hansen
Consumer Behaviour: A European Outlook, 2/e
0273736957
9780273736950
2012
186
Harris
Customer Service: A Practical Approach, 6/e
0132974347
9780132974349
2013
186
Harvey
Understanding and Managing Diversity, 5/e
0132847701
9780132847704
2012
150
Harwood
Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History
to the Present, 1/e
Foundations of Lodging Management, 2/e
0135093570
9780135093573
2012
236
0132560895
Griffith
H
Hayes
9780132560894
2012
207
0273768174
9780273768173
2013
16
Hayes
Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to International
Standards on Auditing, 3/e
Professional Kitchen Manager, The, 1/e
0131391747
9780131391741
2012
216
Heilbroner
Making of the Economic Society, The, 13/e
0132822385
9780132822381
2012
85
Hersey
Management of Organizational Behavior, 10/e
0132556405
9780132556408
2013
151
Heyman
International Cooking: A Culinary Journey, 2/e
0132126117
9780132126113
2012
217
Hill
0131963678
9780131963672
2012
227
0132883708
9780132883702
2012
68
Hill
Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion, An,
1/e
Encyclopedia of Operations Management, The: A Field
Manual and Glossary of Operations Management Terms
and Concepts, 1/e
Fashion from Victoria to the New Millennium, 1/e
013227518X
9780132275187
2013
228
Hitt
Management, 3/e
0132378175
9780132378178
2012
151
Hoffer
Modern Database Management, 11/e
0132662256
9780132662253
2013
52
Hoffman
0132724146
9780132724142
2012
229
Hogan
Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising
Math, 1/e
Practical Computing, 3/e
0132839962
9780132839969
2013
41
Holden
Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance, 4/e
0205235220
9780205235223
2012
114
Holden
Excel Modeling in Investments, 4/e
0132497875
9780132497879
2012
115
Hollensen
Essentials of Global Marketing, 2/e
0273756540
9780273756545
2012
187
Holloway
The Business of Tourism, 9/e
0273755145
9780273755142
2012
208
Hooley
Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning, 5/e
0273740938
9780273740933
2012
187
Hayes
Hill
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
H
Hopp
0132908662
9780132908665
2013
68
Horne
Hospital Operations: Applying the Principles of
Operations Management to Improve Health Care
Systems, 1/e
QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e
0132751755
9780132751759
2013
16
Horngren
Accounting, 7/e
1442551925
9781442551923
2013
17
Horngren
Accounting, 9/e
0273770268
9780273770268
2013
18
Horngren
Cost Accounting, 14/e
0273753878
9780273753872
2012
17
Horngren
Cost Accounting, Revised Edition, 1/e
1442554770
9781442554771
2011
20
Horngren
Financial Accounting, 7/e
1442551933
9781442551930
2013
17
Horngren
0132497948
9780132497947
2012
18
0132497921
9780132497923
2012
18
Horngren
Financial and Managerial Accounting , Ch 1-15
(Financial Chapters), 3/e
Financial and Managerial Accounting Ch 14-24
(Managerial Chapters), 3/e
Financial and Managerial Accounting, 3/e
0132497999
9780132497992
2012
18
Horngren
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e
0273770179
9780273770176
2013
19
Horngren
Management Accounting, Canadian Edition, 6/e
013257084X
9780132570848
2012
19
Hubbard
Economics, 4/e
0273771302
9780273771302
2012
87
Hubbard
Essentials of Economics, 3/e
0133035867
9780133035865
2013
88
Hubbard
Macroeconomics, 1/e
0273762176
9780273762171
2012
89
Hubbard
Macroeconomics, 2/e
1442533714
9781442533714
2012
85
Hubbard
Macroeconomics, 4/e
0273771523
9780273771524
2012
87
Hubbard
Microeconomics, 2/e
1442531770
9781442531772
2012
86
Hubbard
Microeconomics, 4/e
0273771604
9780273771609
2012
87
Hubbard
Money, Banking, and the Financial System, 1/e
0132722011
9780132722018
2012
88
Hull
Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives and
DerivaGem CD Package, 8/e
Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design,
1/e
International Economics, 9/e
0273759078
9780273759072
2012
115
0137033036
9780137033034
2012
237
027376828X
9780273768289
2013
89
Introduction to Governmental and Not-for-Profit
Accounting, 7/e
0132776014
9780132776011
2013
21
Jacques
Mathematics for Economics and Business, 7/e
0273763563
9780273763567
2013
90
Jaffe
Draping for Fashion Design, 5/e
0132447274
9780132447270
2012
229
Jelassi
Strategies For E-Business: Concepts and Cases, 3/e
0273757873
9780273757870
2013
52
Jobber
Selling and Sales Management, 9/e
0273762656
9780273762652
2012
188
Johnson
Fundamentals of Strategy, 2/e
0273757253
9780273757252
2012
152
Johnston
Service Operations Management: Improving Service
Delivery, 4/e
Organizational Theory, Design, and Change, 7/e
0273740482
9780273740483
2012
69
0273765604
9780273765608
2013
152
Kadolph
Textiles: Basics, 1/e
0132620820
9780132620826
2013
230
Kastarlak
Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism, 1/e
0135078814
9780135078815
2012
208
Katsaropolous
0135112095
9780135112090
2012
44
0132132524
9780132132527
2012
21
Keator
Learning Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2010, Student
Edition, 1/e
Accounting Information Systems: The Crossroads of
Accounting and IT, 1/e
Skills for Success with Concepts Getting Started, 1/e
0135088348
9780135088340
2012
47
Keegan
Global Marketing, 7/e
0273766716
9780273766711
2013
188
Keller
Best Practice Cases in Branding, Strategic Brand
Management, 4/e
Strategic Brand Management, 4/e
0132664267
9780132664264
2013
189
0132664259
Horngren
Hurt
Husted
I
Ives
J
Jones
K
Kay
Keller
9780132664257
2013
189
0273737872
9780273737872
2012
189
Kemp
Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective,
2/e
Financial Accounting, 2/e
0132771586
9780132771580
2013
21
Keown
Personal Finance: Turning Money into Wealth, 6/e
0132941287
9780132941280
2013
116
Kerin
Strategic Marketing Problems, 13/e
0273768948
9780273768944
2013
190
Kinser
Your Office: Getting Started with Advanced Cases for
Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e
Your Office: Getting Started with Business
Communication, 1/e
Your Office: Getting Started with Computing Concepts,
1/e
0132675498
9780132675499
2013
48
013267548X
9780132675482
2013
48
0132625350
9780132625357
2013
48
Keller
Kinser
Kinser
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
K
Kinser
Your Office: Getting Started with Outlook 2010, 1/e
0132675463
9780132675468
2012
48
Kinser
Your Office: Getting Started with Web 2.0, 1/e
0132675455
9780132675451
2013
48
Kinser
Your Office: Getting Started with Windows 7, 1/e
0132675471
9780132675475
2012
48
Kinser
Your Office: Microsoft Access 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
0132560887
9780132560887
2012
48
Kinser
Your Office: Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 1/e
0132604299
9780132604291
2012
48
Koenig
013713696X
9780137136964
2012
238
0132174065
9780132174060
2012
238
Kotler
Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design
Professionals, 3/e
Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and
Writing, 1/e
Framework for Marketing Management, 5/e
0273752510
9780273752516
2012
191
Kotler
Marketing Management, 14/e
0273753363
9780273753360
2012
192
Kotler
Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/e
9810687974
9789810687977
2012
192
Kotler
Marketing Management: European Edition, 2/e
0273743619
9780273743613
2012
193
Kotler
Principles of Marketing, 14/e
027375243X
9780273752431
2012
190
Kotler
Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective, 3/e
9810687532
9789810687533
2012
191
Krajewski
027376683X
9780273766834
2013
69
Kroenke
Operations Management: Processes and Supply
Chains, 10/e
Experiencing MIS, 3/e
0132570173
9780132570176
2012
52
Kroenke
MIS Essentials, 2/e
013266500X
9780132665001
2012
53
Kroenke
Using MIS, 5/e
0273766481
9780273766483
2013
53
Kroenke
Database Concepts, 6/e
0132742926
9780132742924
2013
54
Kroenke
Database Processing, 12/e
0132570114
9780132570114
2012
54
Kroenke
Experiencing MIS, 2/e
1442533145
9781442533141
2012
54
Kroenke
Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction
to MIS, 1/e
International Economics, 9/e
0132783479
9780132783477
2013
55
Kopec
Krugman
0273754092
9780273754091
2012
90
Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational
Thinking, 1/e
0136021484
9780136021483
2012
153
Labensky
On Baking, 3/e
0132374560
9780132374569
2013
217
Laberta
Computers Are Your Future Complete, 12/e
0132818310
9780132818315
2012
42
Laberta
Computers Are Your Future, Introductory, 12/e
0132545187
9780132545181
2012
42
Laudon
E-Commerce 2012, 8/e
0273761293
9780273761297
2012
56
Laudon
Essentials of MIS, 10/e
0273765426
9780273765424
2013
56
Laudon
Management Information Systems, 12/e
027375453X
9780273754534
2012
56
Lawson
Skills for Success with Office 2010 Web Applications
Getting Started, 1/e
Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e
0132550040
9780132550048
2013
47
0132785773
Kuratko
L
Lazear
9780132785778
2012
230
0273736248
9780273736240
2013
153
Levens
Managing Strategy and Measuring Value: A Financial
Perspective, 1/e
Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied, 2/e
0132719894
9780132719896
2012
194
Levine
Business Statistics: A First Course, 6/e
0273770926
9780273770923
2013
70
Lo
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 1, 1/e
0132612119
9780132612111
2012
22
Lo
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 2, 1/e
0132657953
9780132657952
2012
22
Lynch
Strategic Management, 6/e
0273750925
9780273750925
2012
153
Macnamara
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques, 1/e
1442543299
9781442543294
2012
195
Malhotra
Basic Marketing Research, 4/e
0132570181
9780132570183
2012
195
Malhotra
Marketing Research: An Applied Approach, 4/e
0273725858
9780273725855
2012
196
Manning
Selling Today, 12/e
013257019X
9780132570190
2012
196
Marghitu
Exploring Getting Started with SharePoint 2010, 1/e
0132882086
9780132882088
2012
45
Marghitu
Exploring Microsoft SharePoint 2010, 1/e
0138007373
9780138007379
2012
45
Mariotti
Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management, 1/e
0135030315
9780135030318
2012
154
Mariotti
Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating a Small
Business, 3/e
Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal
Appearance, 7/e
Sustainable Marketing, 1/e
0132784084
9780132784085
2013
155
0136136265
9780136136262
2012
231
0136117074
Leask
M
Marshall
Martin
9780136117070
2012
197
0132975203
9780132975209
2013
155
May
Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource
Management Approach, 7/e
Effective Writing, 9/e
0132842998
9780132842990
2012
23
McDonald
Derivatives Markets, 3/e
0321543084
9780321543080
2013
117
McIntosh
Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context, 3/e
1442562552
9781442562554
2011
23
Martocchio
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
156
M
McKee
Management: A Focus on Leaders, 1/e
0132478803
9780132478809
2012
McKeen
IT Strategy: Issues and Practices, 2/e
0132843013
9780132843010
2012
57
McLaney
Business Finance: Theory and Practice, 9/e
0273750453
9780273750451
2011
117
McWilliams
Food Fundamentals, 10/e
0132747731
9780132747738
2013
218
McWilliams
Foods: Experimental Perspectives, 7/e
013707929X
9780137079292
2012
219
Melville
International Financial Reporting: A Practical Guide,
3/e
Taxation: Finance Act 2011, 17/e
0273758152
9780273758150
2011
24
0273758284
Melville
9780273758280
2012
24
0273737619
9780273737612
2012
25
Miller
Management Control Systems: Performance
Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, 3/e
Economics Today, 16/e
013268005X
9780132680059
2012
91
Miller
Economics Today: The Macro View, 16/e
0132554518
9780132554510
2012
91
Miller
Economics Today: The Micro View, 16/e
0132554410
9780132554411
2012
91
Miller
Next Series: Best Practices in using Office 2010, 1/e
0132540312
9780132540315
2013
43
Miller
0132552124
9780132552127
2012
43
0132725185
9780132725187
2012
43
Miller
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Personal
Apps, 1/e
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Productivity
Apps, 1/e
Economics of Macro Issues, The, 5/e
0321788400
9780321788405
2012
92
Miller
Economics of Public Issues, The, 17/e
0132827689
9780132827683
2012
92
Mintzberg
The Strategy Process, 5/e
027371628X
9780273716280
2013
156
Mishkin
0133047938
9780133047936
2013
93
0273765736
9780273765738
2013
94
Mishkin
Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets,
The: The Business School Edition, 3/e
Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets,
The, 10/e
Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice, 1/e
0273760505
9780273760504
2012
94
Mishkin
Financial Markets and Institutions, 7/e
0273754440
9780273754442
2012
117
Moffett
Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, 4/e
0132829916
9780132829915
2012
118
Mondy
Human Resource Management, 12/e
0273752995
9780273752998
2012
157
Mooradian
Strategic Marketing, 1/e
0137136978
9780137136971
2012
197
Moriarty
Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practices, 9/e
0273752928
9780273752929
2012
198
Morris
Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies, 8/e
0273738720
9780273738725
2012
70
Motiwalla
Enterprise Systems for Management, 2/e
0132570165
9780132570169
2012
58
Mullins
Essentials of Organisational Behaviour, 3/e
0273757342
9780273757344
2011
157
Munter
Guide to Managerial Communication, 9/e
0132719878
9780132719872
2012
125
Munter
Guide to PowerPoint Version 2010, 1/e
0132568888
9780132568883
2012
126
Merchant
Miller
Mishkin
N
Nahavandi
Art and Science of Leadership, The, 6/e
0132729741
9780132729741
2012
158
Neck
013275441X
9780132754415
2013
158
Newbold
Mastering Self Leadership: Empowering Yourself for
Personal Excellence, 6/e
Statistics for Business and Economics, 8/e
0273767062
9780273767060
2013
71
Newman
Perspective and Sketching for Designers, 1/e
0132574942
9780132574945
2013
239
Nobes
Comparative International Accounting, 12/e
0273763792
9780273763796
2012
26
Northey
Impact: A Guide to Business Communication, Canadian
Edition, 8/e
Technology Strategies for the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
013257439X
9780132574396
2012
122
0135038022
9780135038024
2012
209
Ormiston
Understanding Financial Statements, 10/e
0132655063
9780132655064
2013
26
O'Rourke
Management Communication, 5/e
0132980630
9780132980630
2013
126
Osland
Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach, 9/e
0132374730
9780132374736
2013
159
O'Sullivan
Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
0132722003
9780132722001
2012
95
O'Sullivan
Macroeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools,
7/e
Microeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
0132555492
9780132555494
2012
95
Nyheim
O
O'Sullivan
0132555514
9780132555517
2012
95
Survey of Economics: Principles, Applications and
Tools, 5/e
0132727684
9780132727686
2012
96
Panko
Business Data Networks and Security, 9/e
0132742934
9780132742931
2013
58
Park
0132675811
9780132675819
2013
231
Parkin
Workbook for the Fashion Designer: The Complete
Guide to Fashion Illustration, 1/e
Economics, 10/e
0273754211
9780273754213
2012
97
Parkin
Macroeconomics, 10/e
0273753584
9780273753582
2012
97
Parkin
Microeconomics, 10/e
0273753983
9780273753988
2012
97
O'Sullivan
P
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
97
P
Parkin
Economics: European Edition, 8/e
0273736558
9780273736554
2012
Parkin
Essentials of Economics, 1/e
0273718975
9780273718970
2012
98
Paster
HACCP Food Safety Employee Manual, 1/e
0131391828
9780131391826
2012
220
Payne-Palacio
0132719924
9780132719926
2012
220
Perman
Foodservice Management: Principles and Practices,
12/e
Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4/e
0321417534
9780321417534
2011
99
Petty
Financial Management, 6/e
1442539178
9781442539174
2012
119
Phelps
Health Economics, 5/e
0132948532
9780132948531
2013
100
Phillips
Strategic Staffing, 2/e
0132763591
9780132763592
2012
159
Pike
Corporate Finance and Investment: Decision and
Strategies, 7/e
Microeconomics, 8/e
0273763466
9780273763468
2012
119
0133041700
9780133041705
2013
100
0273767429
9780273767428
2013
71
Pindyck
Pinto
0273752359
9780273752356
2012
27
Poatsy
Project Management: Achieving Competive Advantage,
3/e
Financial Statement Analysis: Valuation - Credit
Analysis - Executive Compensation, 1/e
Exploring Getting Started with Internet Explorer 9, 1/e
0132886219
9780132886215
2013
45
Poatsy
Exploring Getting Started with Programming, 1/e
0132896540
9780132896542
2013
45
Pope
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Comprehensive,
26/e
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Individuals, 26/e
0132891646
9780132891646
2013
35
Plenborg
Pope
0132891379
9780132891370
2013
36
Managerial Accounting: Decision Making and
Performance Improvement, 4/e
0273764489
9780273764489
2012
27
0130925381
9780130925381
2013
239
Reamy
Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design,
The, 1/e
Fashionomics, 1/e
0132109816
9780132109819
2013
232
Render
Quantitative Analysis for Management, 11/e
0273752863
9780273752868
2012
72
Richmond
Brand You for Marketing: Real People Real Choices, 7/e
013038853X
9780130388537
2012
199
Robbins
Essentials of Organizational Behavior, 11/e
0273752669
9780273752660
2012
163
Robbins
Fundamentals of Management, 8/e
0273766171
9780273766179
2013
161
Robbins
Management, 11/e
0273752774
9780273752776
2012
160
Robbins
Management, 6/e
1442538600
9781442538603
2012
159
Robbins
Management: The Essentials, 1/e
1442533625
9781442533622
2012
161
Robbins
Organizational Behavior, 15/e
0273765299
9780273765295
2013
164
Robbins
Supervision Today!, 7/e
0132784033
9780132784030
2013
162
Robbins
Training in Interpersonal Skills: TIPS for Managing
People at Work, 6/e
Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated
Approach, 5/e
Accounting Information Systems, 12/e
0132778432
9780132778435
2012
162
0273756680
9780273756682
2013
164
0273754378
9780273754374
2012
28
0135125804
9780135125809
2013
240
0273760971
9780273760979
2012
164
Proctor
R
Rabun
Rollinson
Romney
Roskes
Rugman
Conceptualize, Create, Communicate: Designing Living
Spaces with Google SketchUp, 1/e
International Business, 6/e
S
Sackett
0131109367
9780131109360
2012
221
Sanders
American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking,
1/e
Professional Server, The: A Training Manual, 2/e
0131709925
9780131709928
2013
222
Sangster
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 1, 12/e
0273759280
9780273759287
2012
28
Sangster
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 2, 12/e
0273767925
9780273767923
2012
29
Saunders
0273726412
9780273726418
2012
165
Saunders
Doing Research in Business & Management: An
Essential Guide to Planning Your Project, 1/e
Research Methods for Business Students, 6/e
0273750755
9780273750758
2012
165
Scarborough
Effective Small Business Management, 10/e
0132378159
9780132378154
2012
166
Schiffman
Consumer Behavior, 11/e
0132170264
9780132170260
2012
199
Schmid
0132706725
9780132706728
2013
223
Schneider
Beverage Manager's Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits,
The, 3/e
Managing Across Cultures, 3/e
0273746324
9780273746324
2013
167
Schoenebeck
Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 6/e
0132746247
9780132746243
2013
30
Scott
Financial Accounting Theory, 6/e
0135119154
9780135119150
2012
31
Shaeffer
Sewing for the Apparel Industry, 2/e
0131884433
9780131884434
2013
232
Shank
Sports Marketing, 5/e
0132809486
9780132809481
2013
199
Shapland
Shapland & Turner Cases in Financial Accounting, 1/e
0132752816
9780132752817
2013
31
Shwom
Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional
Presence, 1/e
0132599031
9780132599030
2012
127
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
0135108993
9780135108994
2012
444
0273756192
9780273756194
2011
73
0273768808
9780273768807
2011
72
32
S
Skintik
Slack
Slack
Learning Microsoft Office Publisher 2010, Student
Edition, 1/e
Essentials of Operations Management, 1/e
0132772175
9780132772174
2013
Slater
Operations and Process Management: Principles and
Practice for Strategic Impact, 3/e
College Accounting Chapters 1-12 with Study Guide
and Working Papers, 12/e
College Accounting, 12/e
013277206X
9780132772068
2013
31
Sloman
Economics and the Business Environment, 3/e
0273734865
9780273734864
2011
101
Sloman
Economics, 8/e
0273763121
9780273763123
2012
101
Solomon
Consumer Behavior, 10/e
0273767313
9780273767312
2013
199
Solomon
Better Business, 2/e
0132599058
9780132599054
2012
122
Solomon
0273709488
9780273709480
2012
200
Solomon
Brand You: Marketing: Real People, Real Choices:
European Edition, 1/e
Marketing: Real People, Real Choices, 7/e
0132494027
9780132494021
2012
200
Sorger
Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action, 1/e
0132544709
9780132544702
2012
201
Soyka
0132874407
9780132874403
2012
73
0132970171
9780132970174
2013
167
Strauss
Creating a Sustainable Organization: Approaches for
Enhancing Corporate Value Through Sustainability, 1/e
Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into
Practice, 3/e
E-Marketing, 6/e
0132806460
9780132806466
2012
202
Suffield
Labour Relations, 3/e
0132626322
9780132626323
2012
167
Sydsaeter
Essential Mathematics for Economic Analysis, 4/e
0273760688
9780273760689
2012
102
Symington
At Your Fingertips, 1/e
1442544554
9781442544550
2011
233
Taylor
Introduction to Management Science, 11/e
0273766406
9780273766407
2013
74
The American Culinary
Federation
Thill
Garde Manger: Cold Kitchen Fundamentals, 1/e
0131182196
9780131182196
2012
223
Excellence in Business Communication, 10/e
0273768891
9780273768890
2012
127
Thompson
Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, The, 5/e
0132827662
9780132827669
2012
168
Tietenberg
Environmental & Natural Resources Economics, 9/e
0132843005
9780132843003
2012
102
Todaro
Economic Development, 11/e
1408284472
9781408284476
2011
103
Torrington
Human Resource Management, 8/e
0273756923
9780273756927
2011
168
Tovey
Training in Australia, 4/e
144253902X
9781442539020
2011
169
Townsend
0132934558
9780132934558
2012
47
Townsend
Skills for Success with Internet Explorer 9 Getting
Started, 1/e
Skills for Success with Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e
0132375761
9780132375764
2012
47
Townsend
Skills for Success with Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e
0132840324
9780132840323
2013
47
Traster
Foundations of Cost Control, 1/e
0132156555
9780132156554
2013
209
Trott
Innovation Management and New Product
Development, 5/e
Lakeside Company: Case Studies in Auditing, 12/e
0273736566
9780273736561
2012
202
Slater
Spector
T
Trussel
0132567253
9780132567251
2012
32
027376134X
9780273761341
2012
58
Turban
Electronic Commerce 2012: A Managerial and Social
Networks Perspectives, 7/e
Introduction to Electronic Commerce, 4/e
0132742918
9780132742917
2013
59
Tuten
Social Media Marketing, 1/e
0132551799
9780132551793
2013
203
Marketing Across Cultures, 6/e
0273757733
9780273757733
2013
203
Turban
U
Usunier
V
Vaidyanathan
IT Project Management, 1/e
0132807181
9780132807180
2013
59
Valacich
Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design, 5/e
0132599015
9780132599016
2012
59
Valacich
Information Systems Today, 5/e
0273756818
9780273756811
2011
60
Valentine
Modern Financial and Investment Planning, 2/e
144254354X
9781442543546
2012
120
Vallely
1442545860
9781442545861
2011
32
Vallen
MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19: A Hands On
Approach, 5/e
Check-in Check-Out: Managing Hotel Operations, 9/e
0132706717
9780132706711
2013
210
Van der Wagen
Hospitality Management, 3/e
1442534796
9781442534797
2012
210
Van Looy
Services Management: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
027373203X
9780273732037
2013
74
Van Peursem
Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand, 6/e
1442543671
9781442543676
2011
33
Veal
Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism, 4/e
0273717502
9780273717508
2011
211
Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice, 4/e
0132770989
9780132770989
2013
103
W
Waldman
Author
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
W
Walker
Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
0135118859
9780135118856
2012
211
Walker
Introduction to Hospitality, 6/e
0132993074
9780132993074
2013
212
Walker
Introduction to Hospitality Management, 4/e
0132959941
9780132959940
2013
212
Wallace
Information Systems in Organizations, 1/e
0136115624
9780136115625
2013
60
Walters
0132544660
9780132544665
2013
104
Waters
Dormonomics: Today's Students Discuss Today's
Issues, 1/e
Quantitative Methods for Business, 5/e
0273739476
9780273739470
2011
75
Weetman
Financial & Management Accounting, 5/e
027376196X
9780273761969
2011
34
Weetman
Financial Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
0273761811
9780273761815
2012
33
Weil
Economic Growth, 3/e
0273769294
9780273769293
2013
104
Weixel
Learning Microsoft Office Word 2010, Student Edition,
1/e
Advertising: Principles and Practice, Australasian
Edition, 2/e
Fashion Drawing: Illustration Techniques for Fashion
Designers, 1/e
Entrepreneurship: Perspectives and Cases, 1/e
0135112265
9780135112267
2012
44
1442525126
9781442525122
2011
203
0135094240
9780135094242
2012
233
0273726137
9780273726135
2011
170
0132570211
9780132570213
2012
170
0132570203
9780132570206
2012
170
Wells
Wesen Bryant
Westhead
Wheelen
0273768743
9780273768746
2012
171
Wild
Concepts in Strategic Management and Business
Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e
Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward
Global Sustainability, 13/e
Management Consulting: Delivering an Effective
Project, 4/e
International Business, 6/e
027375257X
9780273752578
2012
172
Williams
Business: A Practical Introduction, 1/e
0132334291
9780132334297
2013
123
Wilson
Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
0273718703
9780273718703
2012
204
Wirtz
Essentials of Services Marketing, 2/e
9810686188
9789810686185
2012
194
Wisnom
Spa Management: An Introduction, 1/e
0135039444
9780135039441
2012
213
Worren
Organisation Design, 1/e
0273738836
9780273738831
2012
172
Yip
Total Global Strategy, 3/e
0132374722
9780132374729
2012
173
Yukl
Leadership in Organizations, 8/e
0273765663
9780273765660
2013
173
Wheelen
Wickham
Y
TITLE
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
BUSINESS & ECONOMICS
© YR
Page
A
Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion, An, 1/e
Hill
0131963678
9780131963672
2012
227
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and
Associations, 7/e
Accounting Handbook 2012, 1/e
Arthur
1442519568
9781442519565
2012
2
CPA
1442558105
9781442558106
2012
11
Accounting Information Systems, 11/e
Bodnar
0132871939
9780132871938
2013
8
Accounting Information Systems, 12/e
Romney
0273754378
9780273754374
2012
28
Accounting Information Systems: The Crossroads of
Accounting and IT, 1/e
Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context, 3/e
Kay
0132132524
9780132132527
2012
21
McIntosh
1442562552
9781442562554
2011
23
Accounting, 7/e
Horngren
1442551925
9781442551923
2013
17
Accounting, 9/e
Horngren
0273770268
9780273770268
2013
18
Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
Atrill
144253480X
9781442534803
2012
4
Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e
Lazear
0132785773
9780132785778
2012
230
Advanced Accounting, 11/e
Beams
0132830361
9780132830362
2012
5
Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to
IFRS, 1/e
Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practices, 9/e
Cotter
0273732358
9780273732358
2012
10
Moriarty
0273752928
9780273752929
2012
198
Advertising Research: Theory & Practice, 2/e
Davis
0132128322
9780132128322
2012
181
Advertising, 1/e
Fill
0273760890
9780273760894
2013
184
Advertising: Principles and Practice, Australasian
Edition, 2/e
American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking,
1/e
Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design,
The, 1/e
Applied Economics, 12/e
Wells
1442525126
9781442525122
2011
203
Sackett
0131109367
9780131109360
2012
221
Rabun
0130925381
9780130925381
2013
239
Griffiths
0273736906
9780273736905
2011
84
Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History
to the Present, 1/e
Art and Science of Leadership, The, 6/e
Harwood
0135093570
9780135093573
2012
236
Nahavandi
0132729741
9780132729741
2012
158
At Your Fingertips, 1/e
Symington
1442544554
9781442544550
2011
233
Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software,
14/e
Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e
Arens
0273754947
9780273754947
2012
2
Beasley
0132815591
9780132815598
2012
5
Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012, 1/e
CPA
1442558091
9781442558090
2012
12
Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e
Best
1442541199
9781442541191
2011
6
Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand, 6/e
Van Peursem
1442543671
9781442543676
2011
33
Basic Business Statistics, 12/e
Berenson
0273753185
9780273753186
2012
62
Basic Marketing Research with Excel, 3/e
Burns
0132598965
9780132598965
2012
179
Basic Marketing Research, 4/e
Malhotra
0132570181
9780132570183
2012
195
Best Practice Cases in Branding, Strategic Brand
Management, 4/e
Better Business, 2/e
Keller
0132664267
9780132664264
2013
189
Solomon
0132599058
9780132599054
2012
122
Beverage Manager's Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits,
The, 3/e
Bond Markets, Analysis and Strategies, 8/e
Schmid
0132706725
9780132706728
2013
223
Fabozzi
0273766139
9780273766131
2013
110
Brand You for Marketing: Real People Real Choices, 7/e
Richmond
013038853X
9780130388537
2012
199
Brand You: Marketing: Real People, Real Choices:
European Edition, 1/e
Business Accounting and Finance, 1/e
Solomon
0273709488
9780273709480
2012
200
Davies
027372312X
9780273723127
2011
13
Business Analytics, 1/e
Evans
0133051714
9780133051711
2013
65
Business Communication Essentials, 5/e
Bovee
0132564807
9780132564809
2012
124
Business Communication Today, 11/e
Bovee
0273761463
9780273761464
2012
124
Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional
Presence, 1/e
Business Data Networks and Security, 9/e
Shwom
0132599031
9780132599030
2012
127
Panko
0132742934
9780132742931
2013
58
Business Driven Data Communications, 1/e
Gendron
0131564978
9780131564978
2013
51
Business Essentials, 9/e
Ebert
0273766597
9780273766599
2013
121
Business Ethics and Values, 4/e
Fisher
0273757911
9780273757917
2012
146
Business Finance: Theory and Practice, 9/e
McLaney
0273750453
9780273750451
2011
117
Business in Action, 6/e
Bovee
0132828782
9780132828789
2013
121
Business Information Systems: Technology,
Development and Management, 5/e
Business Statistics, 1/e
Bocij
0273736450
9780273736455
2012
49
Donnelly
0132145391
9780132145398
2013
65
B
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
Business Statistics: A First Course, 6/e
Levine
0273770926
9780273770923
2013
70
Business: A Practical Introduction, 1/e
Williams
0132334291
9780132334297
2013
123
Casino Gaming Technology, 1/e
Bokunewicz
0135046041
9780135046043
2012
206
Check-in Check-Out: Managing Hotel Operations, 9/e
Vallen
0132706717
9780132706711
2013
210
Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design,
1/e
College Accounting Chapters 1-12 with Study Guide and
Working Papers, 12/e
College Accounting, 12/e
Hurt
0137033036
9780137033034
2012
237
Slater
0132772175
9780132772174
2013
32
Slater
013277206X
9780132772068
2013
31
Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills, 5/e
Dwyer
1442548487
9781442548480
2013
121
Comparative International Accounting, 12/e
Nobes
0273763792
9780273763796
2012
26
Computer Literacy for IC3 Unit 2: Using Productivity
Software, 1/e
Computer Literacy for IC3 Update for Windows 7, 1/e
Ferrett
0132861070
9780132861076
2012
40
Ferrett
0132873974
9780132873970
2012
40
Computers Are Your Future Complete, 12/e
Laberta
0132818310
9780132818315
2012
42
Computers Are Your Future, Introductory, 12/e
Laberta
0132545187
9780132545181
2012
42
Concepts in Strategic Management and Business Policy:
Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e
Conceptualize, Create, Communicate: Designing Living
Spaces with Google SketchUp, 1/e
Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at
Work, 2/e
Consumer Behavior, 10/e
Wheelen
0132570211
9780132570213
2012
170
Roskes
0135125804
9780135125809
2013
240
Griffith
0132741059
9780132741057
2013
149
Solomon
0273767313
9780273767312
2013
199
Consumer Behavior, 11/e
Schiffman
0132170264
9780132170260
2012
199
Consumer Behaviour: A European Outlook, 2/e
Hansen
0273736957
9780273736950
2012
186
Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e
Breitner
0132744392
9780132744393
2013
9
Corporate Accounting in Australia, 1/e
Dagwell
1442527161
9781442527164
2012
13
Corporate Computer Security, 3/e
Boyle
0132599023
9780132599023
2013
49
Corporate Finance and Investment: Decision and
Strategies, 7/e
Corporate Governance: Principles and Perspectives, 1/e
Pike
0273763466
9780273763468
2012
119
Goddard
027375940X
9780273759409
2013
114
Corporate Reputation, Brand and Communication, 1/e
Fill
0273727591
9780273727590
2012
184
Corporate Responsibility: Governance, Compliance and
Ethics in a Sustainable Environment, 2/e
Cost Accounting, 14/e
Cannon
0273738739
9780273738732
2012
133
Horngren
0273753878
9780273753872
2012
17
Cost Accounting, Revised Edition, 1/e
Horngren
1442554770
9781442554771
2011
20
Creating a Sustainable Organization: Approaches for
Enhancing Corporate Value Through Sustainability, 1/e
Critical Thinking in Consumer Behavior, 3/e
Soyka
0132874407
9780132874403
2012
73
Graham
0132760118
9780132760119
2013
185
Customer Service: A Practical Approach, 6/e
Harris
0132974347
9780132974349
2013
186
Cutlip and Center's Effective Public Relations, 11/e
Broom
0273768395
9780273768395
2012
178
Database Concepts, 6/e
Kroenke
0132742926
9780132742924
2013
54
Database Processing, 12/e
Kroenke
0132570114
9780132570114
2012
54
Derivatives Markets, 3/e
McDonald
0321543084
9780321543080
2013
117
B
C
D
Design Basics for Apparel, 1/e
Elsasser
0132375281
9780132375283
2013
226
Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design
Professionals, 3/e
Designer's Guide to Building Construction and Systems,
1/e
Designer's Guide to Furniture Styles, 3/e
Koenig
013713696X
9780137136964
2012
238
Crochet
0132414287
9780132414289
2012
235
Crochet
0132050412
9780132050418
2013
236
Carlopio
1442547626
9781442547629
2012
134
Chaffey
0273746103
9780273746102
2012
180
Beekman
0132737515
9780132737517
2012
39
Beekman
0132737523
9780132737524
2012
39
Saunders
0273726412
9780273726418
2012
165
Walters
0132544660
9780132544665
2013
104
Cline
013506421X
9780135064214
2012
235
Jaffe
0132447274
9780132447270
2012
229
Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide
for Leaders, 5/e
Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and
Practice, 5/e
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You,
Complete, 10/e
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You,
Introductory, 10/e
Doing Research in Business & Management: An
Essential Guide to Planning Your Project, 1/e
Dormonomics: Today's Students Discuss Today's
Issues, 1/e
Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers,
1/e
Draping for Fashion Design, 5/e
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
E-Business and E-Commerce Management: Strategy,
Implementation and Practice, 5/e
E-Commerce 2012, 8/e
Chaffey
0273752014
9780273752011
2011
50
Laudon
0273761293
9780273761297
2012
56
Econometric Analysis, 7/e
Greene
0273753568
9780273753568
2012
83
Economic Development, 11/e
Todaro
1408284472
9781408284476
2011
103
Economic Growth, 3/e
Weil
0273769294
9780273769293
2013
104
Economics and the Business Environment, 3/e
Sloman
0273734865
9780273734864
2011
101
Economics for Business and Management, 3/e
Griffiths
0273735241
9780273735243
2011
84
Economics of Health and Health Care, The, 7/e
Folland
013295480X
9780132954808
2013
81
Economics of Macro Issues, The, 5/e
Miller
0321788400
9780321788405
2012
92
Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets,
The: The Business School Edition, 3/e
Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets,
The, 10/e
Economics of Public Issues, The, 17/e
Mishkin
0133047938
9780133047936
2013
93
Mishkin
0273765736
9780273765738
2013
94
Miller
0132827689
9780132827683
2012
92
Economics Today, 16/e
Miller
013268005X
9780132680059
2012
91
Economics Today: The Macro View, 16/e
Miller
0132554518
9780132554510
2012
91
Economics Today: The Micro View, 16/e
Miller
0132554410
9780132554411
2012
91
Economics, 10/e
Parkin
0273754211
9780273754213
2012
97
Economics, 4/e
Hubbard
0273771302
9780273771302
2012
87
Economics, 8/e
Sloman
0273763121
9780273763123
2012
101
Economics: European Edition, 8/e
Parkin
0273736558
9780273736554
2012
97
Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
O'Sullivan
0132722003
9780132722001
2012
95
Effective Small Business Management, 10/e
Scarborough
0132378159
9780132378154
2012
166
Effective Training, 5/e
Blanchard
0273768379
9780273768371
2013
131
Effective Writing, 9/e
May
0132842998
9780132842990
2012
23
Electronic Commerce 2012: A Managerial and Social
Networks Perspectives, 7/e
E-Marketing, 6/e
Turban
027376134X
9780273761341
2012
58
Strauss
0132806460
9780132806466
2012
202
Encyclopedia of Operations Management, The: A Field
Manual and Glossary of Operations Management Terms
and Concepts, 1/e
Enterprise and Small Business: Principles, Practice and
Policy, 3/e
Enterprise Systems for Management, 2/e
Hill
0132883708
9780132883702
2012
68
Carter
0273726102
9780273726104
2012
135
Motiwalla
0132570165
9780132570169
2012
58
Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management, 1/e
Mariotti
0135030315
9780135030318
2012
154
Entrepreneurship: Perspectives and Cases, 1/e
Westhead
0273726137
9780273726135
2011
170
Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating a Small
Business, 3/e
Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New
Ventures, 4/e
Environmental & Natural Resources Economics, 9/e
Mariotti
0132784084
9780132784085
2013
155
Barringer
0273761404
9780273761402
2012
130
Tietenberg
0132843005
9780132843003
2012
102
Essential Foundations of Economics, 6/e
Bade
0132833115
9780132833110
2013
76
Essential Mathematics for Economic Analysis, 4/e
Sydsaeter
0273760688
9780273760689
2012
102
E
Essentials of Accounting, 11/e
Breitner
0273771469
9780273771463
2012
9
Essentials of Corporate Financial Management, 2/e
Arnold
027375887X
9780273758877
2013
105
Essentials of Economics, 1/e
Parkin
0273718975
9780273718970
2012
98
Essentials of Economics, 3/e
Hubbard
0133035867
9780133035865
2013
88
Essentials of Global Marketing, 2/e
Hollensen
0273756540
9780273756545
2012
187
Essentials of Management: A Concise Introduction, 1/e
Boddy
027373928X
9780273739289
2012
131
Essentials of Marketing Communications, 1/e
Fill
0273738445
9780273738442
2011
184
Essentials of Marketing, 5/e
Blythe
0273757687
9780273757689
2012
178
Essentials of MIS, 10/e
Laudon
0273765426
9780273765424
2013
56
Essentials of Operations Management, 1/e
Slack
0273756192
9780273756194
2011
73
Essentials of Organisational Behaviour, 3/e
Mullins
0273757342
9780273757344
2011
157
Essentials of Organizational Behavior, 11/e
Robbins
0273752669
9780273752660
2012
163
Essentials of Services Marketing, 2/e
Wirtz
9810686188
9789810686185
2012
194
Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design, 5/e
Valacich
0132599015
9780132599016
2012
59
Essentials of Tourism, 1/e
Cooper
027372438X
9780273724384
2012
181
eTourism: Information Technology for Strategic Tourism
Management, 2/e
Events Management, 1/e
Buhalis
027373783X
9780273737834
2013
179
Beech
0273758624
9780273758624
2013
206
Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and
Writing, 1/e
Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance, 4/e
Kopec
0132174065
9780132174060
2012
238
Holden
0205235220
9780205235223
2012
114
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
Excel Modeling in Investments, 4/e
Holden
0132497875
9780132497879
2012
115
Excellence in Business Communication, 10/e
Thill
0273768891
9780273768890
2012
127
Experiencing MIS, 2/e
Kroenke
1442533145
9781442533141
2012
54
Experiencing MIS, 3/e
Kroenke
0132570173
9780132570176
2012
52
Exploring Getting Started with Internet Explorer 9, 1/e
Poatsy
0132886219
9780132886215
2013
45
Exploring Getting Started with Programming, 1/e
Poatsy
0132896540
9780132896542
2013
45
Exploring Getting Started with SharePoint 2010, 1/e
Marghitu
0132882086
9780132882088
2012
45
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with
VBA, 1/e
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with
Web Apps, 1/e
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e
Grauer
0132140136
9780132140133
2012
44
Grauer
0132149621
9780132149624
2012
45
Grauer
0132873605
9780132873604
2013
44
Exploring Microsoft SharePoint 2010, 1/e
Marghitu
0138007373
9780138007379
2012
45
Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
Walker
0135118859
9780135118856
2012
211
E
F
Fashion Drawing: Illustration Techniques for Fashion
Designers, 1/e
Fashion from Victoria to the New Millennium, 1/e
Wesen Bryant
0135094240
9780135094242
2012
233
Hill
013227518X
9780132275187
2013
228
Fashionomics, 1/e
Reamy
0132109816
9780132109819
2013
232
Financial & Management Accounting, 5/e
Weetman
027376196X
9780273761969
2011
34
Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e
Elliott
0273760882
9780273760887
2012
14
Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e
Atrill
0273763458
9780273763451
2011
3
Financial Accounting Theory, 6/e
Scott
0135119154
9780135119150
2012
31
Financial Accounting, 1/e
Davies
0273723073
9780273723073
2012
14
Financial Accounting, 2/e
Kemp
0132771586
9780132771580
2013
21
Financial Accounting, 7/e
Horngren
1442551933
9781442551930
2013
17
Financial Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
Weetman
0273761811
9780273761815
2012
33
Financial and Managerial Accounting , Ch 1-15
(Financial Chapters), 3/e
Financial and Managerial Accounting Ch 14-24
(Managerial Chapters), 3/e
Financial and Managerial Accounting, 3/e
Horngren
0132497948
9780132497947
2012
18
Horngren
0132497921
9780132497923
2012
18
Horngren
0132497999
9780132497992
2012
18
Financial Crisis: Causes, Context and Consequences,
1/e
Financial Management for Decision Makers, 6/e
Buckley
027373511X
9780273735113
2011
108
Atrill
0273756931
9780273756934
2011
105
Financial Management for Public, Health, and Not-forProfit Organizations, 4/e
Financial Management, 6/e
Finkler
0132912813
9780132912815
2013
15
Petty
1442539178
9781442539174
2012
119
Financial Management: Core Concepts, 2/e
Brooks
0273768476
9780273768470
2012
107
Financial Markets and Institutions, 7/e
Mishkin
0273754440
9780273754442
2012
117
Financial Statement Analysis: Valuation - Credit Analysis
- Executive Compensation, 1/e
Financial Time Guide to Management: The Art and
Science of Being an Effective Manager, 1/e
Financial Times Handbook of Financial Engineering:
Tools and Techniques for Managing Derivatives,
Options, Swaps and Risk, 3/e
Food Defense Fundamentals: Using the S.H.A.R.E.
Principle To Protect the Global Food Supply, 1/e
Food Fundamentals, 10/e
Plenborg
0273752359
9780273752356
2012
27
Delves-Broughton
0273761986
9780273761983
2012
141
Galitz
027374240X
9780273742401
2013
111
Dixon
013139181X
9780131391819
2012
215
McWilliams
0132747731
9780132747738
2013
218
Food Service Organizations: A Managerial and Systems
Approach, 8/e
Foods: Experimental Perspectives, 7/e
Gregoire
0132620812
9780132620819
2013
216
McWilliams
013707929X
9780137079292
2012
219
Foodservice Management: Principles and Practices, 12/e
Payne-Palacio
0132719924
9780132719926
2012
220
Forecasting for Economics and Business, 1/e
Gonzalez-Rivera
0131474936
9780131474932
2013
81
Foundations of Business Thought, 1/e
Boardman
0132856077
9780132856072
2013
121
Foundations of Cost Control, 1/e
Traster
0132156555
9780132156554
2013
209
Foundations of Economics, 6/e
Bade
0132984873
9780132984874
2013
76
Foundations of Lodging Management, 2/e
Hayes
0132560895
9780132560894
2012
207
Foundations of Macroeconomics, 6/e
Bade
0133029522
9780133029529
2013
76
Foundations of Microeconomics, 6/e
Bade
0132830884
9780132830881
2013
76
Framework for Human Resource Management, A, 7/e
Dessler
0132576147
9780132576147
2013
143
Framework for Marketing Management, 5/e
Kotler
0273752510
9780273752516
2012
191
Framework of International Business, A, 1/e
Cavusgil
0132598949
9780132598941
2013
136
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 1, 12/e
Sangster
0273759280
9780273759287
2012
28
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
F
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 2, 12/e
Sangster
0273767925
9780273767923
2012
29
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 2/e
Berk
0273753460
9780273753469
2012
106
Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2/e
Dessler
0132570130
9780132570138
2012
143
Fundamentals of Investing, 3/e
Gitman
1442532882
9781442532885
2012
112
Fundamentals of Management, 8/e
Robbins
0273766171
9780273766179
2013
161
Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, 4/e
Moffett
0132829916
9780132829915
2012
118
Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism, 1/e
Kastarlak
0135078814
9780135078815
2012
208
Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising Math,
1/e
Fundamentals of Strategy, 2/e
Hoffman
0132724146
9780132724142
2012
229
Johnson
0273757253
9780273757252
2012
152
The American Culinary
Federation
Alon
0131182196
9780131182196
2012
223
0132884143
9780132884143
2012
61
G
Garde Manger: Cold Kitchen Fundamentals, 1/e
Global Franchising Operations Management: Cases in
International and Emerging Markets Operations, 1/e
Global Marketing, 7/e
Keegan
0273766716
9780273766711
2013
188
Go! All in One: Computer Concepts and Applications,
1/e
GO! with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started, 1/e
Gaskin
0132844125
9780132844123
2013
46
Gaskin
013293454X
9780132934541
2012
46
GO! With Microsoft Excel 2010 Introductory, 1/e
Gaskin
0132743787
9780132743785
2011
46
GO! with Microsoft Office Web Apps Getting Started, 1/e
Gaskin
0132544849
9780132544849
2012
46
GO! with Microsoft OneNote 2010 Getting Started, 1/e
Gaskin
0132542994
9780132542999
2012
46
GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
Gaskin
0132791285
9780132791281
2012
46
GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Getting Started, 1/e
Gaskin
013702536X
9780137025367
2012
46
GO! with Microsoft Publisher 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
Gaskin
0132791722
9780132791724
2012
46
GO! with Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Getting Started, 1/e
Gaskin
0132543028
9780132543026
2012
46
GO! with Microsoft Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e
Gaskin
0132375753
9780132375757
2012
47
GO! with Microsoft Windows Live and Windows Live
Essentials Getting Started, 1/e
GO! with Office 2010 Integrated Projects, 1/e
Gaskin
013254329X
9780132543293
2012
47
Gaskin
0132843307
9780132843300
2012
46
GO! with Office 2010 Volume 1, 2/e
Ferrett
0132840162
9780132840163
2013
46
GO! with Office 365 Getting Started, 1/e
Gaskin
0132955741
9780132955744
2013
47
Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e
Freeman
0132751267
9780132751261
2013
15
Guide to Managerial Communication, 9/e
Munter
0132719878
9780132719872
2012
125
Guide to PowerPoint Version 2010, 1/e
Munter
0132568888
9780132568883
2012
126
220
H
HACCP Food Safety Employee Manual, 1/e
Paster
0131391828
9780131391826
2012
Hands-On Database, 1/e
Conger
013610827X
9780136108276
2012
51
Health Economics, 5/e
Phelps
0132948532
9780132948531
2013
100
High Performance Operations: Leverage Compliance to
Lower Costs, Increase Profits, and Gain Competitive
Advantage, 1/e
Hospital Operations: Applying the Principles of
Operations Management to Improve Health Care
Systems, 1/e
Hospitality Management, 3/e
Glazer
0132779889
9780132779883
2012
67
Hopp
0132908662
9780132908665
2013
68
Van der Wagen
1442534796
9781442534797
2012
210
Human Relations for Career and Personal Success,
Canadian Edition, 4/e
Human Relations: Interpersonal Job-Oriented Skills,
11/e
Human Resource Management, 12/e
DuBrin
0138127875
9780138127879
2012
145
Dubrin
0132680033
9780132680035
2012
145
Mondy
0273752995
9780273752998
2012
157
Human Resource Management, 13/e
Dessler
0273766023
9780273766025
2013
143
Human Resource Management, 8/e
Torrington
0273756923
9780273756927
2011
168
I
Illustrated Guide to Food Preparation, 11/e
McWilliams
0132738759
9780132738750
2013
219
Impact: A Guide to Business Communication, Canadian
Edition, 8/e
Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into
Practice, 3/e
Inbound Logistics Management: Storage and Supply of
Materials for the Modern Supply Chain, 7/e
Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal
Appearance, 7/e
Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice, 4/e
Northey
013257439X
9780132574396
2012
122
Spector
0132970171
9780132970174
2013
167
Crocker
0273720481
9780273720485
2012
64
Marshall
0136136265
9780136136262
2012
231
Waldman
0132770989
9780132770989
2013
103
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
Information Systems in Organizations, 1/e
Wallace
0136115624
9780136115625
2013
60
Information Systems Today, 5/e
Valacich
0273756818
9780273756811
2011
60
Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational
Thinking, 1/e
Innovation Management and New Product Development,
5/e
Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communications, 5/e
Integrated Marketing Communications, 1/e
Kuratko
0136021484
9780136021483
2012
153
Trott
0273736566
9780273736561
2012
202
Clow
0273753282
9780273753285
2012
180
Clow
0733992900
9780733992902
2012
181
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 1, 1/e
Lo
0132612119
9780132612111
2012
22
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 2, 1/e
Lo
0132657953
9780132657952
2012
22
International Business, 14/e
Daniels
0273766953
9780273766957
2013
139
International Business, 6/e
Rugman
0273760971
9780273760979
2012
164
International Business, 6/e
Wild
027375257X
9780273752578
2012
172
International Business, 7/e
Griffin
0273765868
9780273765868
2013
149
International Business: The New Realities, 2/e
Cavusgil
0132453274
9780132453271
2012
136
International Business: The New Realities, Australasian
Edition, 1/e
International Cooking: A Culinary Journey, 2/e
Cavusgil
1442533560
9781442533561
2012
137
Heyman
0132126117
9780132126113
2012
217
International Corporate Governance, 1/e
Goergen
0273751255
9780273751250
2012
147
International Economics, 9/e
Husted
027376828X
9780273768289
2013
89
International Economics, 9/e
Krugman
0273754092
9780273754091
2012
90
International Finance: A Practical Perspective, 1/e
Buckley
0273731866
9780273731863
2012
108
International Financial Management, 2/e
Bekaert
013284298X
9780132842983
2012
106
International Financial Reporting: A Practical Guide, 3/e
Melville
0273758152
9780273758150
2011
24
International Management, 2/e
Deresky
1442539674
9781442539679
2012
142
International Marketing and Export Management, 7/e
Albaum
0273743880
9780273743880
2011
175
International Trade, 1/e
Grimwade
0273718886
9780273718888
2013
85
Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 6/e
Schoenebeck
0132746247
9780132746243
2013
30
Introducing Human Resource Management, 6/e
Foot
0273740989
9780273740988
2011
146
Introduction to Accounting Information Systems, 1/e
Boczko
0273739387
9780273739388
2012
7
Introduction to Banking, 2/e
Casu
0273718134
9780273718130
2013
109
Introduction to Corporate Finance, 5/e
Frino
1442542489
9781442542488
2012
111
Introduction to Electronic Commerce, 4/e
Turban
0132742918
9780132742917
2013
59
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e
Horngren
0273770179
9780273770176
2013
19
Introduction to Governmental and Not-for-Profit
Accounting, 7/e
Introduction to Hospitality Management, 4/e
Ives
0132776014
9780132776011
2013
21
Walker
0132959941
9780132959940
2013
212
Introduction to Hospitality, 6/e
Walker
0132993074
9780132993074
2013
212
Introduction to Management Accounting, 1/e
Bhimani
0273737554
9780273737551
2012
7
Introduction to Management Science, 11/e
Taylor
0273766406
9780273766407
2013
74
Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain
Management, 3/e
Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 10/e
Bozarth
027377008X
9780273770084
2012
63
Dorfman
0131394126
9780131394124
2013
110
IT Project Library Project #1, 1/e
Author
0132766884
9780132766883
2013
45
IT Project Library Project #2, 1/e
Author
0132766949
9780132766944
2013
45
IT Project Library Project #3, 1/e
Author
0132766930
9780132766937
2014
45
IT Project Library Project #4, 1/e
Author
0132766914
9780132766913
2013
45
IT Project Library Project #5, 1/e
Author
0132766892
9780132766890
2013
45
IT Project Library Project #6, 1/e
Author
0132766957
9780132766951
2013
45
IT Project Library Project #7, 1/e
Author
0132766906
9780132766906
2013
45
IT Project Management, 1/e
Vaidyanathan
0132807181
9780132807180
2013
59
IT Strategy: Issues and Practices, 2/e
McKeen
0132843013
9780132843010
2012
57
Andrews
013297570X
9780132975704
2013
38
Carter
0132598973
9780132598972
2012
125
Carrell
0132730014
9780132730013
2013
135
Suffield
0132626322
9780132626323
2012
167
I
J
Jump Right In: Essential Computer Skills Using
Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e
K
Keys to Business Communication, 1/e
L
Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and
Public Sectors, 10/e
Labour Relations, 3/e
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
Lakeside Company: Case Studies in Auditing, 12/e
Trussel
0132567253
9780132567251
2012
32
Law and Economics, 6/e
Cooter
0132846152
9780132846158
2012
79
Leadership in Organizations, 8/e
Yukl
0273765663
9780273765660
2013
173
Learning Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Student Edition,
1/e
Learning Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2010, Student
Edition, 1/e
Learning Microsoft Office Publisher 2010, Student
Edition, 1/e
Learning Microsoft Office Word 2010, Student Edition,
1/e
Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical Approach,
6/e
Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant 2011:
A Practical Approach and QuickBooks 2011 Software,
5/e
Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business
(Revised), 3/e
Level Three Leadership: Getting Below the Surface, 5/e
Bucki
0135112109
9780135112106
2012
44
Katsaropolous
0135112095
9780135112090
2012
44
Skintik
0135108993
9780135108994
2012
444
Weixel
0135112265
9780135112267
2012
44
Brunsdon
0132751674
9780132751674
2013
10
Brunsdon
0132743256
9780132743259
2012
10
Birt
1442552654
9781442552654
2011
130
Clawson
0132556413
9780132556415
2012
138
Logistics Management, 1/e
Grant
0273731351
9780273731351
2012
67
Macroeconomics, 1/e
Hubbard
0273762176
9780273762171
2012
89
Macroeconomics, 2/e
Hubbard
1442533714
9781442533714
2012
85
Macroeconomics, 4/e
Hubbard
0273771523
9780273771524
2012
87
Macroeconomics, 10/e
Parkin
0273753584
9780273753582
2012
97
Macroeconomics, 12/e
Gordon
0132727676
9780132727679
2012
82
Macroeconomics: A European Perspective, 1/e
Blanchard
0273763113
9780273763116
2011
77
Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice, 1/e
Mishkin
0273760505
9780273760504
2012
94
Macroeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
O'Sullivan
0132555492
9780132555494
2012
95
Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies, 10/e
Froyen
0273765981
9780273765981
2013
81
Making of the Economic Society, The, 13/e
Heilbroner
0132822385
9780132822381
2012
85
Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e
Atrill
0273762265
9780273762263
2012
4
Management Accounting, Canadian Edition, 6/e
Horngren
013257084X
9780132570848
2012
19
Management Accounting: Information for DecisionMaking and Strategy Execution, 6/e
Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e
Atkinson
0273769987
9780273769989
2011
3
Bhimani
0273762230
9780273762232
2012
6
Management Communication, 5/e
O'Rourke
0132980630
9780132980630
2013
126
Management Consulting: Delivering an Effective Project,
4/e
Management Control Systems: Performance
Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, 3/e
Management Information Systems, 12/e
Wickham
0273768743
9780273768746
2012
171
Merchant
0273737619
9780273737612
2012
25
Laudon
027375453X
9780273754534
2012
56
Management of Organizational Behavior, 10/e
Hersey
0132556405
9780132556408
2013
151
Management Skills for Everyday Life, 3/e
Caproni
0132479079
9780132479073
2012
133
Management, 1/e
Gomez-Mejia
0132604337
9780132604338
2012
148
Management, 11/e
Robbins
0273752774
9780273752776
2012
160
Management, 3/e
Hitt
0132378175
9780132378178
2012
151
Management, 6/e
Robbins
1442538600
9781442538603
2012
159
Management: A Faith-Based Perspective, 1/e
Cafferky
0136058345
9780136058342
2012
132
Management: A Focus on Leaders, 1/e
McKee
0132478803
9780132478809
2012
156
Management: The Essentials, 1/e
Robbins
1442533625
9781442533622
2012
161
Managerial Accounting, 3/e
Braun
0132954796
9780132954792
2013
8
Managerial Accounting: Decision Making and
Performance Improvement, 4/e
Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3/e
Proctor
0273764489
9780273764489
2012
27
Balakrishnan
0132969440
9780132969444
2013
62
Managing Across Cultures, 3/e
Schneider
0273746324
9780273746324
2013
167
Managing Behavior in Organizations, 6/e
Greenberg
0132729830
9780132729833
2013
149
Managing Business Process Flows, 3/e
Anupindi
0132811367
9780132811361
2012
61
Managing Change in Organizations, 6/e
Carnall
0273736418
9780273736417
2013
134
Managing Human Resources, 7/e
Gomez-Mejia
0132570149
9780132570145
2012
148
Managing Information Technology, 7/e
Brown
0132737531
9780132737531
2012
49
Managing People in Organisations, 1/e
Bozionelos
027372679X
9780273726791
2013
131
Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain, 5/e
Foster
0273768255
9780273768258
2013
67
Managing Strategy and Measuring Value: A Financial
Perspective, 1/e
Leask
0273736248
9780273736240
2013
153
L
M
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
M
Market-Based Management, 6/e
Best
0132848163
9780132848169
2012
177
Marketing Across Cultures, 6/e
Usunier
0273757733
9780273757733
2013
203
Marketing Management, 14/e
Kotler
0273753363
9780273753360
2012
192
Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/e
Kotler
9810687974
9789810687977
2012
192
Marketing Management: European Edition, 2/e
Kotler
0273743619
9780273743613
2012
193
Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action, 1/e
Sorger
0132544709
9780132544702
2012
201
Marketing Research: An Applied Approach, 4/e
Malhotra
0273725858
9780273725855
2012
196
Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
Wilson
0273718703
9780273718703
2012
204
Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning, 5/e
Hooley
0273740938
9780273740933
2012
187
Marketing: An Introduction, 11/e
Armstrong
0273767186
9780273767183
2013
176
Marketing: An Introduction, 2/e
Armstrong
0273762605
9780273762607
2012
176
Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied, 2/e
Levens
0132719894
9780132719896
2012
194
Marketing: Real People, Real Choices, 7/e
Solomon
0132494027
9780132494021
2012
200
Mastering Self Leadership: Empowering Yourself for
Personal Excellence, 6/e
Mathematics for Economics and Business, 7/e
Neck
013275441X
9780132754415
2013
158
Jacques
0273763563
9780273763567
2013
90
Meetings, Expositions, Events and Conventions: An
Introduction to the Industry, 3/e
Menu, The: Development, Strategy, and Application, 1/e
Fenich
0132719916
9780132719919
2012
206
Barrish
0135078660
9780135078662
2013
214
Merchandising Mathematics for Retailing, 5/e
Easterling
0132724162
9780132724166
2013
225
Microeconomics, 10/e
Parkin
0273753983
9780273753988
2012
97
Microeconomics, 2/e
Hubbard
1442531770
9781442531772
2012
86
Microeconomics, 4/e
Gravelle
0273710400
9780273710400
2013
82
Microeconomics, 4/e
Hubbard
0273771604
9780273771609
2012
87
Microeconomics, 6/e
Estrin
0273734873
9780273734871
2012
80
Microeconomics, 6/e
Perloff
0273754602
9780273754602
2012
99
Microeconomics, 8/e
Pindyck
0133041700
9780133041705
2013
100
Microeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e
O'Sullivan
0132555514
9780132555517
2012
95
Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, The, 5/e
Thompson
0132827662
9780132827669
2012
168
MIS Essentials, 2/e
Kroenke
013266500X
9780132665001
2012
53
Modern Database Management, 11/e
Hoffer
0132662256
9780132662253
2013
52
Modern Financial and Investment Planning, 2/e
Valentine
144254354X
9781442543546
2012
120
Modern Financial Markets and Institutions: A Practical
Perspective, 1/e
Modern Labor Economics: Theory and Public Policy, 11/e
Arnold
0273730355
9780273730354
2012
105
Ehrenberg
013272765X
9780132727655
2012
79
Modern Management: Concepts and Skills, 12/e
Certo
0273756761
9780273756767
2011
138
Money, Banking, and the Financial System, 1/e
Hubbard
0132722011
9780132722018
2012
88
Multinational Business Finance, 13/e
Eiteman
0273765531
9780273765530
2013
110
MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19: A Hands On
Approach, 5/e
Vallely
1442545860
9781442545861
2011
32
Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4/e
Perman
0321417534
9780321417534
2011
99
Negotiation and Dispute Resolution, 1/e
DeMarr
0131577530
9780131577534
2013
142
Next Series: Best Practices in using Office 2010, 1/e
Miller
0132540312
9780132540315
2013
43
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Personal
Apps, 1/e
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Productivity
Apps, 1/e
Next Series: Web 2.0, 2/e
Miller
0132552124
9780132552127
2012
43
Miller
0132725185
9780132725187
2012
43
Coyle
0132840154
9780132840156
2012
42
On Baking, 3/e
Labensky
0132374560
9780132374569
2013
217
Operations and Process Management: Principles and
Practice for Strategic Impact, 3/e
Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains,
10/e
Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives and DerivaGem
CD Package, 8/e
Organisation Design, 1/e
Slack
0273768808
9780273768807
2011
72
Krajewski
027376683X
9780273766834
2013
69
Hull
0273759078
9780273759072
2012
115
Worren
0273738836
9780273738831
2012
172
Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated
Approach, 5/e
Organizational Behavior, 15/e
Rollinson
0273756680
9780273756682
2013
164
Robbins
0273765299
9780273765295
2013
164
Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach, 9/e
Osland
0132374730
9780132374736
2013
159
Organizational Theory, Design, and Change, 7/e
Jones
0273765604
9780273765608
2013
152
N
O
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
Performance Management, 3/e
Aguinis
0132974355
9780132974356
2013
128
Personal Finance: Turning Money into Wealth, 6/e
Keown
0132941287
9780132941280
2013
116
Perspective and Sketching for Designers, 1/e
Newman
0132574942
9780132574945
2013
239
Portfolio for Fashion Designers, 1/e
Hagen
0135020476
9780135020470
2013
227
Practical Chef's Reference, The: A Compendium of
Charts, Formulas and Ratios, 1/e
Practical Computing, 3/e
Furdell
0135125774
9780135125779
2013
215
P
Hogan
0132839962
9780132839969
2013
41
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Comprehensive,
26/e
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Corporations,
Partnerships, Estates and Trusts, 26/e
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Individuals, 26/e
Pope
0132891646
9780132891646
2013
35
Anderson
0132891549
9780132891547
2013
35
Pope
0132891379
9780132891370
2013
36
Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to International
Standards on Auditing, 3/e
Principles of Economics, 10/e
Hayes
0273768174
9780273768173
2013
16
Case
027375372X
9780273753728
2012
78
Principles of Macroeconomics, 10/e
Case
0273754823
9780273754824
2012
78
Principles of Managerial Finance, 13/e
Gitman
0273754289
9780273754282
2012
113
Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief, 6/e
Gitman
0132701065
9780132701068
2012
113
Principles of Marketing, 14/e
Kotler
027375243X
9780273752431
2012
190
Principles of Marketing, 5/e
Armstrong
144253110X
9781442531109
2012
175
Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective, 3/e
Kotler
9810687532
9789810687533
2012
191
Principles of Microeconomics, 10/e
Case
0273754696
9780273754695
2012
78
Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction
to MIS, 1/e
Professional Kitchen Manager, The, 1/e
Kroenke
0132783479
9780132783477
2013
55
Hayes
0131391747
9780131391741
2012
216
Professional Server, The: A Training Manual, 2/e
Sanders
0131709925
9780131709928
2013
222
Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success, 3/e
Anderson
0132624664
9780132624664
2013
128
Project Management: Achieving Competive Advantage,
3/e
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques, 1/e
Pinto
0273767429
9780273767428
2013
71
Macnamara
1442543299
9781442543294
2012
195
Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, 8/e
Farrington
0273723685
9780273723684
2012
66
Quantitative Analysis for Management, 11/e
Render
0273752863
9780273752868
2012
72
Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies, 8/e
Morris
0273738720
9780273738725
2012
70
Quantitative Methods for Business and Management,
1/e
Quantitative Methods for Business, 5/e
Buglear
0273736280
9780273736288
2012
63
Waters
0273739476
9780273739470
2011
75
QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e
Horne
0132751755
9780132751759
2013
16
Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies
in Marketing, 4/e
Research Methods for Business Students, 6/e
Egan
0273737783
9780273737780
2011
183
Saunders
0273750755
9780273750758
2012
165
Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism, 4/e
Veal
0273717502
9780273717508
2011
211
Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global
Economy, 1/e
Retail Buying, 9/e
Fiorito
0135046602
9780135046609
2012
226
Diamond
0132179350
9780132179355
2013
225
Retail Category Management, 1/e
Fowler
0135152089
9780135152089
2012
227
Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12/e
Berman
0273768565
9780273768562
2013
177
Selling and Sales Management, 9/e
Jobber
0273762656
9780273762652
2012
188
Selling Financial Products, 1/e
Bexley
0132752131
9780132752138
2012
178
Selling Today, 12/e
Manning
013257019X
9780132570190
2012
196
Service Operations Management: Improving Service
Delivery, 4/e
Services Management: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
Johnston
0273740482
9780273740483
2012
69
Van Looy
027373203X
9780273732037
2013
74
Sewing for the Apparel Industry, 2/e
Shaeffer
0131884433
9780131884434
2013
232
Shapland & Turner Cases in Financial Accounting, 1/e
Shapland
0132752816
9780132752817
2013
31
SharePoint for Students, 1/e
Cole
0130000094
9780130000095
2012
50
Skills for Success with Concepts Getting Started, 1/e
Keator
0135088348
9780135088340
2012
47
Skills for Success with Internet Explorer 9 Getting
Started, 1/e
Skills for Success with Office 2010 Web Applications
Getting Started, 1/e
Townsend
0132934558
9780132934558
2012
47
Lawson
0132550040
9780132550048
2013
47
Q
R
S
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
47
S
Skills for Success with Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e
Townsend
0132840324
9780132840323
2013
Skills for Success with Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e
Townsend
0132375761
9780132375764
2012
47
Social Marketing, 1/e
Eagle
0273727222
9780273727224
2013
182
Social Media Marketing, 1/e
Tuten
0132551799
9780132551793
2013
203
Spa Management: An Introduction, 1/e
Wisnom
0135039444
9780135039441
2012
213
Sports Marketing, 1/e
Fetchko
0132135469
9780132135467
2013
184
Sports Marketing, 5/e
Shank
0132809486
9780132809481
2013
199
Statistics for Business and Economics, 8/e
Newbold
0273767062
9780273767060
2013
71
Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling, 5/e
Evans
0273768220
9780273768227
2012
65
Strategic Brand Management, 4/e
Keller
0132664259
9780132664257
2013
189
Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective,
2/e
Strategic Communication: Cases in Marketing, Public
Relations, Advertising and Media, 1/e
Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource
Management Approach, 7/e
Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward
Global Sustainability, 13/e
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, 4/e
Keller
0273737872
9780273737872
2012
189
Greenland
1442555491
9781442555495
2012
185
Martocchio
0132975203
9780132975209
2013
155
Wheelen
0132570203
9780132570206
2012
170
Barney
0132560453
9780132560450
2012
129
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage:
Concepts, 4/e
Strategic Management in Action, 6/e
Barney
0132560445
9780132560443
2012
129
Coulter
0132620677
9780132620673
2013
139
Strategic Management, 6/e
Lynch
0273750925
9780273750925
2012
153
Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage
Approach, Concepts and Cases, 14/e
Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage
Approach, Concepts, 14/e
Strategic Marketing Problems, 13/e
David
0273767488
9780273767480
2013
140
David
0273767607
9780273767602
2013
140
Kerin
0273768948
9780273768944
2013
190
Strategic Marketing, 1/e
Mooradian
0137136978
9780137136971
2012
197
Strategic Staffing, 2/e
Phillips
0132763591
9780132763592
2012
159
Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories and
Practice, 2/e
Strategies For E-Business: Concepts and Cases, 3/e
Cousins
0273761900
9780273761907
2013
64
Jelassi
0273757873
9780273757870
2013
52
Strategy: A View From The Top, 4/e
De Kluyver
0132145626
9780132145626
2012
141
Supervision and Leadership in a Changing World, 1/e
Dessler
0135058651
9780135058657
2012
144
Supervision Today!, 7/e
Robbins
0132784033
9780132784030
2013
162
Supply Chain Management, 5/e
Chopra
0273765221
9780273765226
2013
64
Survey of Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools,
5/e
Sustainable Marketing, 1/e
O'Sullivan
0132727684
9780132727686
2012
96
Emery
1408292777
9781408292778
2012
183
Sustainable Marketing, 1/e
Martin
0136117074
9780136117070
2012
197
Sustainable Venturing, 1/e
Dean
0136044891
9780136044895
2013
141
Taxation: Finance Act 2011, 17/e
Melville
0273758284
9780273758280
2012
24
Technology In Action Complete, 9/e
Evans
0132928388
9780132928380
2013
39
Technology In Action Introductory, 9/e
Evans
0132924528
9780132924528
2013
39
Technology Strategies for the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
Nyheim
0135038022
9780135038024
2012
209
Textiles: Basics, 1/e
Kadolph
0132620820
9780132620826
2013
230
The Business of Tourism, 9/e
Holloway
0273755145
9780273755142
2012
208
The Psychology of People in Organisations, 1/e
Ashleigh
0273755765
9780273755760
2012
129
The Strategy Process, 5/e
Mintzberg
027371628X
9780273716280
2013
156
Total Global Strategy, 3/e
Yip
0132374722
9780132374729
2012
173
Tourism: Principles and Practice, 5/e
Fletcher
0273758276
9780273758273
2013
207
Training in Australia, 4/e
Tovey
144253902X
9781442539020
2011
169
Training in Interpersonal Skills: TIPS for Managing
People at Work, 6/e
Robbins
0132778432
9780132778435
2012
162
Understanding and Managing Diversity, 5/e
Harvey
0132847701
9780132847704
2012
150
Understanding and Managing Organizational Behavior,
6/e
Understanding Cross-Cultural Management, 2/e
George
0273753797
9780273753797
2012
146
Browaeys
0273732951
9780273732952
2011
132
Understanding Financial Statements, 10/e
Ormiston
0132655063
9780132655064
2013
26
Using MIS, 5/e
Kroenke
0273766481
9780273766483
2013
53
T
U
Title
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
© YR
Page
V
Visualizing Technology, Complete, 1/e
Geoghan
0137056346
9780137056347
2012
41
Visualizing Technology, Introductory, 1/e
Geoghan
013137625X
9780131376250
2012
41
Park
0132675811
9780132675819
2013
231
Chesser
013274774X
9780132747745
2013
214
with Advanced Cases for
Kinser
0132675498
9780132675499
2013
48
with Business
Kinser
013267548X
9780132675482
2013
48
with Computing Concepts,
Kinser
0132625350
9780132625357
2013
48
W
Workbook for the Fashion Designer: The Complete
Guide to Fashion Illustration, 1/e
World of Culinary Management, The: Leadership and
Development of Human Resources, 5/e
Y
Your Office: Getting Started
Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e
Your Office: Getting Started
Communication, 1/e
Your Office: Getting Started
1/e
Your Office: Getting Started
Kinser
0132675463
9780132675468
2012
48
Your Office: Getting Started with Web 2.0, 1/e
with Outlook 2010, 1/e
Kinser
0132675455
9780132675451
2013
48
Your Office: Getting Started with Windows 7, 1/e
Kinser
0132675471
9780132675475
2012
48
Your Office: Microsoft Access 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
Kinser
0132560887
9780132560887
2012
48
Your Office: Microsoft Excel 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e
Kinser
0132610442
9780132610445
2012
48
Your Office: Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 1/e
Kinser
0132604299
9780132604291
2012
48
Document related concepts

History of accounting wikipedia, lookup

Microsoft Dynamics GP wikipedia, lookup

Sustainability accounting wikipedia, lookup